840d Listmd

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC/
SIMODRIVE 611digital
Lists 08.99 Edition
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Documentation
General Documentation User Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ 840D/810D/ Accessories 840D/810D/ 840D/810D 840D/810D/ 840D/810D/
FM-NC FM-NC/611 FM-NC FM-NC FM-NC
Brochure Catalog Ordering Catalog AutoTurn Operator’s Guide Diagnostics Operator’s Guide
Info NC 60.1 *) Accessories NC-Z – Short Guide – Unit Guide *) – Short Guide
Technical Info. – Programming (1) Operator Panel – Operator’s
NC 60.2 – Setup (2) – HPU Guide *)
User Documentation Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D/810D/ 840D/810D 840D/810D 840D/810D 840D/810D
FM-NC
Program. Guide Operator’s Guide Description of Description of Descr. of Functions Configuring

– Short Guide – ManualTurn Functions Functions – Computer Link (HW) *)
– Fundamentals *) – Short Guide ManualTurn – ManualTurn Synchronized – Tool Data – FM-NC
– Advanced *) – ShopMill – ShopMill Actions Information – 810D
– Cycles – Short Guide ShopMill Wood, Glass, System – 840D
– Measuring Cycles Ceramics
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ 611D 840D/810D/ 840D/810D/ 840D/810D/ 840D/810D 840D/810D/
FM-NC 840D/810D FM-NC FM-NC FM-NC FM-NC
Operator Com- Description of Description of Configuring Kit Screen Kit Description of Description of
ponents Functions Functions MMC100/101 MMC100/101 Functions Functions
(HW) *) Drive Functions *) – Basic Machine *) – Configuring SW Update and Tool Manage- Operator Interface
– Extended Functions Syntax Configuration ment OP 030
– Special Functions – Development Kit
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC
840D 840D/810D 840D 840D
FM-NC 611D 611D
611D
Description of Description of Installation & Lists *) Description of Description of EMC Guide-

Functions Functions Start-up Guide *) Functions Functions lines
SINUMERIK Digitizing – FM-NC Linear Motor Hydraulics
Safety Inte- – 810D Module
grated – 840D/611D
– MMC
Electronic Documentation Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
840D/810D/ SINUMERIK
FM-NC
611, 840D/810D
Motors
DOC ON CD *)
The SINUMERIK System
Description of Functions
ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK
*) These documents are a minimum requirement for the control
Overview of Functions 1
Lists of Machine and 2

Setting Data
SINUMERIK Variables 3
840D/810D/FM-NC/611D
Interface Signals 4
Lists
PLC Blocks 5
Appendix: References A
Index I
Valid for
Control Software version

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC/611D 5
SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) 5
SINUMERIK 810D 3
SINUMERIK 810DE (export version) 3
SINUMERIK FM-NC 3
SIMODRIVE 611D 4
08.99 Edition
SINUMERIK® Documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.
Status codes in the "Remarks" column.
A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on a page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition
coding in the header on that page.
Edition Order No. Remarks

09.95 6FC5 297-3AB70-0BP0 A
12.95 6FC5 297-3AB70-0BP1 C
03.96 6FC5 297-3AB70-0BP2 C
08.97 6FC5 297-4AB70-0BP0 C
12.97 6FC5 297-4AB70-0BP1 C
12.98 6FC5 297-5AB70-0BP0 C
08.99 6FC5 297-5AB70-0BP1 C
This manual is included in the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)

Edition Order No. Remarks
02.99 6FC5 298-5CA00-0BG0 C
Trade marks
SIMATIC , SIMATIC HMI , SIMATIC NET , SIROTEC , SINUMERIK and
SIMODRIVE are trademarks of Siemens. Other product names used in this
documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third parties, could infringe the
rights of their owners.
Further information is available on the Internet under: Other functions not described in this documentation might be
http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
This publication was produced with WinWord V 7.0 and Designer V 6.0 servicing.
using the documentation tool Aut2WinDoc.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might
is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be exist. The information contained in this document is, however,
liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the
registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
© Siemens AG 1999. All Rights Reserved.

Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No. 6FC5 297-5AB70-0BP1 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft.

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
08/99 Lists
Preface
Preface
Notes for the reader The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:

• General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Target group This document is intended for the manufacturers of machine tools
incorporating SINUMERIK 840D and SIMODRIVE 611D systems.
Objective The Lists provide the information required for installation and startup.
© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition v
Lists 08/99
Preface
Search aids To help the reader, this guide offers not only a list of contents, but also the
following appendices:
1. List of References
2. Index
Important
! This installation and startup guide is valid for software version 5.1.
Notes The following notes have a special significance and are used in the
documentation:
Note
This symbol appears in the documentation whenever background information
is provided.
Important
! This symbol appears in the documentation whenever attention has to be paid
to something of particular importance.
Warning notes The following warning notes with different level of severity are used in this
publication:
Danger
! This symbol appears whenever death, severe bodily injury or substantial
material damage will occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
Warning
! This symbol appears whenever death, severe bodily injury or substantial
material damage can occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
Caution
! This symbol appears whenever minor bodily injury or material damage can
occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

vi Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition
08/99 Lists
Preface
Technical notes
Trademarks IBM® is registered trademark of International Business Corporation.

MS-DOS® and WINDOWS™ is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.

Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition vii
Lists 08/99
Preface
Notes

viii Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition
08/99 Lists
Contents
Contents
Overview of Functions...............................................................................................................1-13
1.1 CNC controls...............................................................................................................1-14
1.2 Positioning modules and controls ...............................................................................1-49
Machine and Setting Data .........................................................................................................2-57
2.1 Explanatory notes on the machine and setting data ...................................................2-59

2.1.1 General information .................................................................................................2-59
2.1.2 Handling of machine data ........................................................................................2-63
2.2 Drive machine data .....................................................................................................2-66
2.3 Machine data for hydraulics module ...........................................................................2-104
2.4 Machine data for operator panel .................................................................................2-118

2.4.1 Generally available MDs for operator panel .............................................................2-118
2.4.2 Application-specific MDs for ManualTurn.................................................................2-131
2.4.3 Application-specific MDs for ShopMill ......................................................................2-136
2.5 General machine data.................................................................................................2-141

2.5.1 System settings........................................................................................................2-142
2.5.2 Override switch settings ...........................................................................................2-158
2.5.3 Central drive data.....................................................................................................2-161
2.5.4 System specific memory settings .............................................................................2-163
2.6 Channel-specific machine data ...................................................................................2-173

2.6.1 Basic channel machine data ....................................................................................2-174
2.6.2 Machine data for digitizing function ..........................................................................2-187
2.6.3 Machine data for grinding function ...........................................................................2-188
2.6.4 Channel auxiliary function settings ..........................................................................2-190
2.6.5 Transformation definitions in channel ......................................................................2-194
2.6.6 Punching and nibbling .............................................................................................2-202
2.6.7 Channel-specific memory settings ...........................................................................2-204
2.7 Axis-specific machine data .........................................................................................2-209

2.7.1 Configuration............................................................................................................2-210
2.7.2 Encoder matching ....................................................................................................2-213
2.7.3 Closed-loop control ..................................................................................................2-215
2.7.4 Reference point approach........................................................................................2-221
2.7.5 Spindles ...................................................................................................................2-223
2.7.6 Monitoring functions .................................................................................................2-226
2.7.7 Safety Integrated......................................................................................................2-228
2.7.8 Travel to fixed stop...................................................................................................2-235
2.7.9 Axis-specific memory settings ..................................................................................2-237
2.8 Setting data .................................................................................................................2-239

2.8.1 General setting data.................................................................................................2-239

Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition ix
Lists 08/99
Contents
2.8.2 Channel-specific setting data ...................................................................................2-243

2.8.3 Axis-specific setting data .........................................................................................2-246
2.9 Application-specific machine data ..............................................................................2-250

2.9.1 Application-specific default values for ManualTurn ..................................................2-250
2.9.2 Application-specific default values for ShopMill .......................................................2-253
2.9.3 Settings for ShopMill tool management ...................................................................2-255
2.9.4 MDs for the sequence of measuring cycles with ShopMill .......................................2-256
Variables .....................................................................................................................................3-257
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................3-260

3.1.2 Module types............................................................................................................3-262
3.1.3 Variable types ..........................................................................................................3-264
3.1.4 Data types ................................................................................................................3-266
3.2 System data ................................................................................................................3-268

3.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data ........................................................................3-268
3.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data ........................................................3-276
3.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones ..............................................................3-281
3.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones ..............................................3-288
3.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups ........................................................3-295
3.3 State data of system ...................................................................................................3-296

3.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data ...........................................................................3-296
3.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms: List organized according to time,
oldest alarm appears first ...............................................................................3-305
3.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority .........................3-307
3.3.4 Area N, Mod. SALAL: Alarms: Liste organized according to time,
most recent alarm appears first ......................................................................3-309
3.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .........................................................3-311
3.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) .......................3-313
3.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ...................................................................3-329
3.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle .................................................................3-332
3.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Global NCU active frames ...........................................................3-333
3.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: Global NCU base frames ..........................................................3-334
3.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: Global NCU settable frames .....................................................3-335
3.3.12 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data ...................................................3-337
3.4 State data of channel ..................................................................................................3-338

3.4.1 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data .........................................................3-338
3.4.2 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data ............................................3-353
3.4.3 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information .....................................................3-356
3.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation ............................3-359
3.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption ..........................................3-361
3.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointer for block search ......................................3-363
3.4.7 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions .........................................................3-365
3.4.8 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions ..............................3-368
3.4.9 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions ..................................................................3-369
3.4.10 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling..................................................................3-371
3.4.11 Area C, Mod. FB: Base frame ................................................................................3-373
3.5 Axis status data...........................................................................................................3-374

3.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .........................................................3-374
3.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) .......................3-376
3.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory ....................3-393
3.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory
(extension of SGA)..........................................................................................3-396
3.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ...................................................................3-400
3.5.6 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle .................................................................3-403

x Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition
08/99 Lists
Contents
3.5.7 Area C, Mod. FU: User frames.................................................................................3-404

3.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active user frames.......................................................................3-406
3.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: External frames ...........................................................................3-408
3.6 Drive status data .........................................................................................................3-409

3.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) .....................................................3-409
3.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ....................................................3-412
3.7 Tool and magazine data .............................................................................................3-414

3.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data .........................................................3-414
3.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data ...............................................................3-417
3.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data ..................................................3-420
3.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data .......................................................3-421
3.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data ............................................3-422
3.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data .................................................3-423
3.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data ...........................................3-425
3.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory ..........................................................3-427
3.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data ......................................................3-428
3.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data ....................................................3-430
3.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment of location data .............3-432
3.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types ..................................................3-433
3.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory ...................................................................3-434
3.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of _N_TMGETT,
_N_TSEARC...................................................................................................3-436
3.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data ...............................................3-440
3.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data .......................................3-441
3.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data ..............................................3-442
3.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data ..............................................................................3-443
3.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory .......................................................3-444
3.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters ..............................................................3-447
3.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets ......................3-450
3.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
transformed setup offsets ...............................................................................3-451
3.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets ..................3-452
3.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets,
transformed.....................................................................................................3-455
3.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data ........................................3-456
3.8 Machine and setting data ............................................................................................3-458

3.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data .....................................................................3-458
3.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data ............................................................3-460
3.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data ......................................................................3-461
3.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data ......................................................3-462
3.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data .............................................................3-463
3.9 Parameters .................................................................................................................3-464

3.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters .................................................................3-464
3.9.2 Area N, Mod. VSYN: NCK-specific user variables for synchronous actions ............3-465
3.9.3 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions ......3-466
3.10 Diagnostic data .........................................................................................................3-467

3.10.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data ........................................................3-467
3.10.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data .........................................3-470
3.10.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling ......................................................3-472
3.10.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events.......................................................................3-473
3.11 MMC-state.................................................................................................................3-476
3.11.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC ............................................................3-476

Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition xi
Lists 08/99
Contents
Interface Signals ........................................................................................................................4-477
4.1 Data modules ..............................................................................................................4-478
4.2 Interface signals ..........................................................................................................4-480

4.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version ...................................................4-480
4.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version ....................................................4-482
4.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ........................................................4-483
4.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU) .......................................................................4-484
4.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU) .................................................4-486
4.2.6 PLC messages (DB2) ..............................................................................................4-487
4.2.7 Signals from/to NC (DB 10) .....................................................................................4-490
4.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC .......................................................................................4-495
4.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB11) ........................................................................4-500
4.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) ................................................4-502
4.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) .................................................................4-505
4.2.12 PLC machine data .................................................................................................4-509
4.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21 - 30) ............................................................4-510
4.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC →NCK)..............................................................4-527
4.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine ..............................................................4-534
4.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position ................................................................4-535
4.2.17 Interface for circular magazine ...............................................................................4-537
4.2.18 Interface for buffer (tool management) ..................................................................4-538
4.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn ...................................................................................4-539
4.2.20 Signals to/from ShopMill ........................................................................................4-544
4.2.21 NC signals influenced by the ManualTurn application ...........................................4-546
4.2.22 NC signals influenced by the ShopMill application ................................................4-549
PLC Blocks .................................................................................................................................5-551
5.1 Overview of organization blocks .................................................................................5-552
5.2 Overview of function blocks ........................................................................................5-553

5.2.1 ManualTurn ..............................................................................................................5-554
5.2.2 ShopMill ...................................................................................................................5-554
5.3 Assignment of data blocks ..........................................................................................5-555

5.3.1 ManualTurn ..............................................................................................................5-556
5.3.2 ShopMill ...................................................................................................................5-556
5.4 Assigned timers ..........................................................................................................5-556
Appendix.....................................................................................................................................A-557
References........................................................................................................................A-557
Index ..........................................................................................................................................I-567

xii Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition
Overview of Functions 1
1.1 CNC controls...............................................................................................................1-14
1.2 Positioning modules and controls ...............................................................................1-49

Lists (LIS) -08.99 Edition 1-13
Lists 08/99
1 Overview of Functions
1.1 CNC controls

SINUMERIK 810D SINUMERIK 840DE SINUMERIK 840D
SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Control assembly/application
Assembly system
• SIMATIC S7–300 F * * * * * * * * * *
• SIMODRIVE 611 * F F F F F F F F F F
Drives See NC 60.1 Section 8
• SIMODRIVE 611 analog F * * * * * * * * * *
• SIMODRIVE 611 digital * F F F F F F F F F F
• SIMODRIVE 611 universal 1) F F F F F F F F F F F
Control of F * * * * * * * * * *
FM STEPDRIVE
stepper motor drives
Mode groups
• 1st mode group F F F F F F F F F F F
• Maximum configuration 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 10 1 2 10
Each additional mode group 6FC5 251 – 0AD00 – 0AA0 * * f * * * f f * f f
Machining channels F F F F F F F F F F F
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
• Maximum configuration 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 10 2 2 10
Each additional machining 6FC5 251 – 0AA07 – 0AA0 * * * * f f f f f f f
channel
Additional 6FC5 251 – 0AD08 – 0AA0 * * * f * * * * * * *
axis/spindle + channel
CNC user memory F F F F F F F F F F F
(buffered) for 128 256 1.5 256 256 256 2.5 2.5 256 2.5 2.5
programs and data KB KB MB KB KB KB MB MB KB MB MB
Expansion of the CNC 6FC5 251 – 0AD02 – 0AA0 * f * f f f * * f * *
user memory in units
of 256 KB
(maximum 1.5 MB)
Free user memory of hard F F F F F F F F F F F
disk of the MMC 103 for
programs and data
1.0 GB
Legend: F Standard f Option * not possible
1) Operated by means of analog or PROFIBUS interface.

1-14 Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition
08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Control assembly/application (continued)
Axes/spindles or positioning F F F F F F F F F F F
axes/auxiliary spindles 4 5 5 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
• Maximum configuration 5 2) 5 5 2 3) 6 10 12 31 10 12 31
Axes
• Maximum configuration 2 1+1 1+1 2 6 10 12 31 10 12 31
4) 4)
Spindles
• Maximum configuration 5 2) 5 5 2 6 10 12 31 10 12 31
Axes and spindles
• Configuration per channel
Axes, * 5 5 2 6 10 12 12 10 12 12
incl. spindles * 1 1 2 6 10 12 12 10 12 12
Each additional 6FC5 251 – 0AA03 – 0AA0 * * * * f f f f f f f
interpolating
axis/spindle 5)
Each additional 6FC5 251 – 0AA04 – 0AA0 * * * * f f f f f f f
positioning axis 5) 5) 5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
(axis–specific feed) or
auxiliary spindle
(spindle–specific speed)
Additionally, as package: 6FC5 251 – 0AD01 – 0AA0 * * * * * * * f * * f
4 machining channels
and 13 axes
FM 354 as NC axis See NC 60.1, Section 4 F * * * * * * * * * *
(5th axis)
FM 354 as See NC 60.1, Section 4 F F F F F F F F F F F
PLC positioning axis
FM 353 as See NC 60.1, Section 4 F F F F F F F F F F F
PLC positioning axis
2) Option using FM 354 at the local bus segment. 4) Second spindle not MSD motor.
3) Additional axis/spindle + channel available as option. 5) Option if number of axes + spindle > 5.

Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition 1-15
Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Compatible measuring systems

Number, max. 10 1) 10 1) 4 12 2) 20 2) 24 2) 62 2) 20 2) 24 2) 62 2)
4+1 2)
Incremental rotary F * * * * * * * * * *
measuring systems with
RS 422 (TTL)
LMS linear scale with
current signal
• using external EXE F * * * * * * * * * *
• using SIMODRIVE 611 digital * F F F F F F F F F F
– control plug–in module
LMS linear scale * F F * * * * * * * *
with voltage
signal sin/cos 1 V pp
• using SIMODRIVE 611 F * * * * * * * * * *
universal shaft–angle encoder
output
LMS scale with * F F * * * * * * * *
distance–coded
reference marks
Absolute encoder F * * * * * * * * * *
with SSl interface
Absolute encoder with * F F * * * * * * * *
EnDat, sin/cos 1 V pp
1FT6/1FK6 integrated encoder * F F * * * * * * * *
• using SIMODRIVE 611 F * * * * * * * * * *
universal – control plug–in
module
Incremental encoder with * F F * * * * * * * *
sin/cos 1 V pp

1) SINUMERIK 810D measuring channels and via 2) Two measuring systems per axis.
SIMODRIVE 611 digital control plug-in module.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC functionality: program functions

Dynamic block F F F F F F F F F F F
buffer (FIFO)
Look ahead 6FC5 250 – 0AA06 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
Program preprocessing 6FC5 251 – 0AC02 – 0AA0 * * f f f f f f f f f
Axis/spindle exchange * * F * F F F F F F F
3)
Geometry axes, * F F F F F F F F F F
switchable online
in the CNC program
FRAME concept F F F F F F F F F F F
Inclined surface machining F F F * F F F F F F F
with FRAMEs
CNC functionality: axis functions

Feedrate override F F F F F F F F F F F
0 % to 200 %
Feedrate override, F F F F F F F F F F F
axis–specific
0 % to 200 %
Traversing range F F F F F F F F F F F
“ 9 decades
Rotary axis turning endlessly F F F F F F F F F F F
Measuring system 1 and 2 * F F F F F F F F F F
switchable
Speed F F F F F F F F F F F
maximum 300 m/s
Acceleration with F F F F F F F F F F F
jerk limitation
Programmable 6FC5 250 – 0AB00 – 0AA0 f f f * f f f f f f f
3) 3)
acceleration
Feed interpolation 6FC5 251 – 0AC03 – 0AA0 * f f f f f f f f f f
3)
Separate path feed * F F F F F F F F F F

for roundings and chamfers
Travel to 6FC5 255 – 0AB02 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
fixed stop
3) Available soon.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC functionality: axis functions (continued)
Pair of synchronized axes 6FC5 255 – 0AB00 – 0AA0 * * f * f f f f f f f

1)
(gantry axes)
Coupled–motion axes F F F F F F F F F F F
1)
(TRAIL)
Master/slave 6FC5 251 – 0AC07 – 0AA0 * * * * * * * * f * f
for drives 2)
Tangential control 6FC5 251 – 0AB11 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f
1)
Position switching signals/ 6FC5 251 – 0AB07 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f

1)
cam controller
CNC functionality: spindle functions
Spindle speed
• analog F * * * * * * * * * *
• digital * F F F F F F F F F F
Spindle speed, F F F F F F F F F F F
max. programmable 3)
range:
REAL +/– 3.4028 ex 38
(Display:
+/– 999999999.9999)
Spindle override F F F F F F F F F F F
0 % to 200 %
5 gear stages F F F F F F F F F F F
Automatic F F F F F F F F F F F
gear stage selection
Oriented spindle stop F F F F F F F F F F F
Spindle speed limitation F F F F F F F F F F F
(min. and max.)
Constant cutting speed F F F F F F F F F F F
Spindle control using PLC F F F F F F F F F F F
(positioning, oscillation)
Switchover to F F F F F F F F F F F
axis operation
1) Available soon. 2) Prerequisite: technology PC card.

3) Range of values: 999 999 rev/min.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC functionality: spindle functions (continued)

On–the–fly axis F F F F F F F F F F F
synchronization
Thread run–in and run–out, * F F F F F F F F F F
programmable
Constant–lead thread F F F * F F F F F F F
cutting
Tapping with/without F F F F F F F F F F F
compensating chuck
Synchronous spindle/ 6FC5 255 – 0AB01 – 0AA0 * * f * f f f f f f f
multi–edged turning
CNC functionality: forms of interpolation

NURBS F F F * F F F F F F F
(non–uniform rational
B splines) universal interpolator
Continuous–path mode with F F F * F F F F F F F
programmable rounding
clearance
4 linear interpolating axes F F F * F F F F F F F
• Maximum 4 4 5 2 4 4 4 4 10 12 12
4)
Multi–axis interpolation 6FC5 251 – 0AA16 – 0AA0 * * f * * * * * f f f

(> 4 interpolating axes) 5)
Circle via center point F F F * F F F F F F F

and end point
Circle via F F F * F F F F F F F
intermediate point
Helical
interpolation
• 2D+2 F F F * F F F F F F F
• 2D+6 * * * * * * * * F F F
Spline interpolation 6FC5 251 – 0AA14 – 0AA0
• A, B and C splines f f f * f f f f f f f
• Compressor function * f f * f f f f f f f
6
)
4) Only threaded bores: axis + spindle. 6) Available soon.

5) For handling only.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC functionality: forms of interpolation (continued)

Polynomial interpolation 6FC5 251 – 0AA15 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f
Master value coupling and curve 6FC5 251 – 0AD06 – 0AA0 * * f * f f f f f f f
table interpolation 1) 1) 1) 1)
Electronic gear ELG 6FC5 251 – 0AE00 – 0AA0 * * * * * f f f f f f

(linear coupling of 1 slave 1) 1) 1)
axis to up to 5 master axes

using factor)
Axial coupling in machine 6FC5 251 – 0AD11 – 0AA0 * * * * * * * * f f f
coordinate system
(MCS coupling) 2)
CNC functionality: transformations

Transmit/peripheral surface 6FC5 251 – 0AB01 – 0AA0 f f f * f f f f f f f
transformation
Inclined axis 6FC5 251 – 0AB06 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f
3)
Linked transformations * F F * F F F F F F F
(TRAANG inclined axis
after TRAORI/universal milling
head/TRANSMIT/TRACYL)
Machining package 5 axes 4) 6FC5 251 – 0AA10 – 0AA0 * * * * * * * * f f f
Transformation package 6FC5 251 – 0AD07 – 0AA0 * * f * * * * * f f f
Handling 2) 2) 2)
CNC functionality: measurement
Measurement stage 1 F F F F F F F F F F F
2 probes (switching)
with/without delete
distance–to–go
Measurement stage 2 6FC5 250 – 0AD00 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
(logging of measurement
results, measurement functions 3)
from synchronized actions,

cyclical measurement)
1) With restricted functionality, see description of options. 3) Available soon.

2) Prerequisite: technology PC card. 4) Contains the option "Multi-axis-interpolation".

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC functionality: technologies

Punching and nibbling 6FC5 251 – 0AC00 – 0AA0 * * * * * f f f f f f
functions
Reciprocating functions 6FC5 251 – 0AB04 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
• asynchronous and modal
• non–modal
Constant workpiece * F F * F F F F F F F
speed for 5) 5)
centerless grinding
Several feedrates in one block 6FC5 251 – 0AB08 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
(e.g. for calipers)
Handwheel override F F F F F F F F F F F
Contour handwheel * F F F F F F F F F F
CNC functionality: motion–synchronized actions

High–speed CNC F f f F F F F F F F F
inputs/outputs
• Onboard inputs, digital 5 6) * * 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
outputs, digital * * * 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
• Expansion using f * * * * * * * * * *
SIMATC S7 I/Os 7)
16 inputs/16 outputs
• Expansion using see NC 60.1, Section 4 * f f f f f f f f f f
NCU terminal block
32 digital inputs
32 digital outputs
8 analog inputs
8 analog outputs
Synchronized actions (max. 16) F F F F F F F F F F F
and high–speed auxiliary
function output
Synchronized actions 6FC5 251 – 0AD05 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f
Step 2 (up to 256 8) 8) 8) 8) 8)
parallel actions per channel, 5)
technology cycles)
Positioning of axes * F F F F F F F F F F
and spindles using 5)
synchronized actions
(command axes)
5) Available soon. 7) Maximum of one SIMATIC analog module: SM 331,

SM 332 or SM 334.
6) Without stepper drives, 5 inputs are available. 8) With limited functionality, see description of options.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC functionality: motion–synchronized actions (continued)

Analog value control F F F F F F F F F F F
(prerequisite: analog
output) in IPO cycle
Path velocity–dependent 6FC5 251 – 0AC04 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f
analog value output 1)
(laser power control)

Clearance control
• 1D in IPO cycle using 6FC5 251 – 0AC08 – 0AA0 * f f f f f f f f f f
synchronized actions
• 1D/3D in position control cycle 6FC5 251 – 0AC05 – 0AA0 * * * * * * * * f f f
(incl. in IPO cycle) 2) 2) 2)
Evaluation of internal 6FC5 251 – 0AB17 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f

drive variables 3) 3) 3) 3) 3)
(prerequisite for adaptive control) 1) 1)
Continuous dressing 6FC5 251 – 0AB10 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f

(parallel dressing, online 3) 3) 3) 3) 3)
modification of tool offset) 1) 1)
Asynchronous subroutines F F F F F F F F F F F
(ASUPs) 4):
• Special interrupt routines with 6FC5 251 – 0AA00 – 0AA0 * f f f f f f f f f f
rapid lift from the contour 1)
Actions applying to more than 6FC5 251 – 0AD04 – 0AA0 * f f f f f f f f f f

one operating mode (ASUPs
and synchronized actions
in all modes)
CNC functionality: OEM

MMC 103 OEM package See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
(OEM contract required)
NCK OEM package See NC 60.1, Section 4 * * * * * * * * f f f
(OEM contract required)
Use of compile cycles in NCK See NC 60.1, Section 4 * * * * * * * * f f f
(run–time license)
1) Available soon. 3) With limited functionality, see description of options.

2) Prerequisite: technology PC card. 4) High-speed CNC inputs/outputs required.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC programming
Programming language F F F F F F F F F F F
(acc. to DIN 66 025 and
high–level language expansion)
Part program management F F F F F F F F F F F
(program names with
23 alphanumeric characters)
Main program call from main F F F F F F F F F F F
program and subroutine
Job list 5) * F F F F F F F F F F
for complete machining with all
workpiece–oriented data
(RPA, TOA, etc.)
7 subroutine levels and F F F F F F F F F F F
4 interrupt routines, maximum
Subroutine number F F F F F F F F F F F
of passes ≤ 9999
Skip blocks on 8 levels F F F F F F F F F F F
(/0 to /7)
Polar coordinates F F F * F F F F F F F
Dimensions, metric/inch, F F F F F F F F F F F
switchover by operator action
or program
Inverse–time feedrate * F F * F F F F F F F
6) 6)
Auxiliary function output * F F F F F F F F F F

• by means of M word
Maximum range of
values programmable:
INT 231 -1
• by means of H word
Maximum range of
values programmable:
REAL +/– 3.4028 ex 38
(Display:
+/– 999999999.9999)
INT 231 to 231 -1
5) With MMC 103. 6) Available soon.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
CNC programming (continued)

CNC high–level language with
• User variables, F F F F F F F F F F F
configurable
• Predefined user variables F F F F F F F F F F F
(arithmetic parameters),
configurable
• Read/write system F F F F F F F F F F F
variables
• Indirect programming F F F F F F F F F F F
• Program jumps F F F F F F F F F F F
and branching
• Program coordination with * * F * F F F F F F F
WAIT, START, INIT 1)
• Arithmetic and trigonometric F F F F F F F F F F F

functions
• Comparison functions F F F F F F F F F F F
and logic operations
• Macro functions F F F F F F F F F F F
• Check structures F F F F F F F F F F F
(IF–ELSE–ENDIF, WHILE,
FOR, REPEAT, LOOP)
• Commands to MMC F F F F F F F F F F F
• STRING functions F F F F F F F F F F F
AutoTurn with MMC 103 See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f * f f f f f f f
AutoTurn PLUS with MMC 103 See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f * f f f f f f f
ManualTurn See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f * * f f f f f f f
with MMC 100.2/MMC 103 2)
ShopMill See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f * f f f f f f f
with MMC 100.2/MMC 103 2) 3)
SpeedMill 810D/840D See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f * f f f f f f f

Digitization with MMC 103 See NC 60.1, Section 4 * * * * * * * f * * f
Offline ISO dialect f f f f f f f f f f f
CNC program converter 3)
Offline SINUMERIC 800/840D f f f f f f f f f f f
CNC program converter 3)
Online ISO dialect interpreter 3) * f f f f f f f f f f
1) Available soon. 3) On request.

2) With MMC 103 on request.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Communication
RS 232C (V.24) F F F F F F F F F F F
serial interface with MMC
module or OP 030
2nd RS 232C (V.24) F F F F F F F F F F F
serial interface with
MMC 100.2/MMC 103
Multi–point interface (MPI) f F F F F F F F F F F
to operating unit 4)
Execution from * F F F F F F F F F F
hard disk with MMC 103
(program chaining)
Execution of large
CNC programs
• from the hard disk F F F F F F F F F F F
with MMC 103
• via RS 232C (V.24) interface F F F F F F F F F F F
with MMC 100.2
Data exchange * * F F F F F F F F F
between machining channels
High–speed * F F * F F F F F F F
data exchange, NC–PLC 5) 5) 5)
NC program See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f

transfer
via network with
MMC 103 and SINDNC
MINI–DNC data transmission See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
program
Data storage F F F F F F F F F F F
on hard disk
MMC 103, floppy disk
Data storage on PC card F F F F F F F F F F F
(not with MMC 103)
Storage of data from F F F F F F F F F F F
hard disk MMC 103 on CD–
ROM
MMC 103 with exchangeable F F F F F F F F F F F
hard disk
Data exchange between See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
CNC with MMC 103 and
SINCOM control computer
4) Via SIMATIC S7-300 CPU. 5) Available soon.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Communication (continued)
Peripheral interface 6FC5 252 – 0AD00 – 0AA0 * * f f f f f f f f f
connection via PROFIBUS–DP 1)
(software option)
SINUCOPY–FFS for See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
SIMATIC S7 PG 740
Operation
Handheld programming unit See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
MPI type for handling
Mini handheld unit See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
Handheld unit See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
B–MPI type
Distribution box for handheld See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
terminal/programming unit
Electronic handwheels See NC 60.1, Section 3 2
2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3
connectable 2) 2) 3) 3) 3) 3) 3) 3) 3) 3)
OP 030 slimline operator panel See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f

with system software
See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
OP 031 slimline operator panel
9.5“ monochrome
10.4“ color
OP 032S slimline operator
panel 10.4“ color
OP 032 slimline operator panel See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
10.4“ color
Two NCUs on one CPU F * * * * * * * * * *
Four NCUs on F F F F F F F F F F F
one operator panel with 4) 4)
OP 031/OP 032/OP 032S

Two operator panels * F F F F F F F F F F
on up to four NCUs 5) 5)
Connection for operator F F F F F F F F F F F

panels OP7/OP17
Connection for operator F * * * * * * * * * *
panel OP27
1) See section 11 NC60.1 for literature on PROFIBUS-DP. 3) Third handwheel can be operated as contour handwheel.
2) Three handwheels are possible with ManualTurn. 4) Three CCUs on one operator panel.
5) Two operator panels on one CCU.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Operation (continued)
Connection for F F F F F F F F F F F
SIMATIC HMI
using PLC
MMC modules See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
for installation in
operator panel:
• MMC 100.2 with
system software,
operator interface
• MMC 103 with
system software,
operator interface
under Windows
• MMC 103 for
OEM functions 6)
PCI/ISA adapter See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
(2 PCI/ISA modules)
for MMC 103 7)
3.5“/1.44 MB See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
diskette drive for MMC 103
Machine control panel (MCP) See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
with LEDs
Machine control panel OP 032S See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
PP 031–MC See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
Push Button Panel
Full CNC keyboard See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
Full CNC keyboard See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
OP 032S
Standard PC keyboard See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
(MF–II)
Operator interface F F F F F F F F F F F
with 8 horizontal/
8 vertical softkeys on
OP 031/OP 032/OP 032S
Plaintext display F F F F F F F F F F F
of user variables
on MMC module
Cycle support F F F F F F F F F F F
on MMC module
6) OEM contract required. 7) OEM contract and OEM package required for custom OEM
applications.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
2D display of F F F F F F F F F F F
3D protection ranges/
working ranges
on MMC module
Operator interface for See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
MMC 103 with 1)
TRANSLINE 2000 HMI software

Languages (German, English) F F F F F F F F F F F
available
in system/online
by toggling
• MMC 100.2 : 2 / 2
• MMC 103 : w5 / 2
European language See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
expansion (English,
French, German, Italian and
Spanish) for retrofitting/
upgrading in MMC 100.2
Asian language See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
expansion 2)
(traditional and
simplified Chinese characters)
for retrofitting/upgrading
in MMC 100.2
European language See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
expansion for MMC 103
(English, French, German,
Italian and Spanish)
Asian language expansion 2) See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
for MMC 103
(traditional and
simplified Chinese characters)
Asian language See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
expansion 2) for MMC 103
(Korean)
Other language expansions on f f f f f f f f f f f
MMCs for CCUs/NCUs 2)
Workpiece–related actual value F F F F F F F F F F F
system (grinding)
CNC program messages F F F F F F F F F F F
1) Without diagnosis functionality. 2) On request.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Screen saver F F F F F F F F F F F
OP 031/OP 032/OP 032S
Access protection, F F F F F F F F F F F
8 levels
Machine and production See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
data acquisition
WinBDE for MMC 103
Tool management See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
functions SINDTI
for MMC 103
Quality data See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
assurance with
MMC 103
Tool identification See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
systems with
MMC 103
MMC EasyMask See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
with MMC 103
MMC EasyTrans See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
with MMC 103
PLC–tool management data See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
distributor with MMC 103
Add user’s own F F F F F F F F F F F
interfaces to operating areas
Contour programming F F F F F F F F F F F
with recompilation

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Operating modes
AUTOMATIC, MDA, F F F F F F F F F F F
JOG modes
Teach in F F F F F F F F F F F
Teach in with handheld See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
programming unit HPU
MPI type
Reference–point approach F F F F F F F F F F F
manual/by means of
CNC program
Follow–up mode F F F F F F F F F F F
Preset F F F F F F F F F F F
(set actual value)
Repos (repositioning
to contour)
• by means of operation/semi– F F F F F F F F F F F
automatic
• by means of program 6FC5 251 – 0AA01 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
Block search with/ F F F F F F F F F F F
without calculation
Tool offsets
Tool management 6FC5 251 – 0AB12 – 0AA0 * f f f f f f f f f f
Tool change by means of F F F F F F F F F F F
T number
Tool offsets * F F F F F F F F F F
• Offset selected using T and
D number
• Offset selected using
D number
(without T assignment)
Number of F F F F F F F F F F F
tool offsets, configurable
(up to 1500 cutting edges)
Tool types F F F F F F F F F F F
Turning, drilling/milling, 1)
grinding, groove sawing
1) Limited functionality.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Tool offsets (continued)

Tool radius compensation F F F * F F F F F F F
on the plane
• with approach and
exit strategies
• with transition circle/ellipse at
outside corners
Grinding–specific F F F * F F F F F F F
tool offset with
grinding wheel
surface speed
Number of intermediate F F F * F F F F F F F
blocks with active
tool radius compensation,
configurable
3D tool radius 6FC5 251 – 0AB13 – 0AA0 * * * * * f f f f f f
compensation
Toolholder * F F * F F F F F F F
can be orientated
Look Ahead function F F F * F F F F F F F
of contour violation
Zero offsets translational/rotary

Max. number F F F F F F F F F F F
of zero offsets 100 2)
Zero offsets, F F F F F F F F F F F
programmable
(FRAMEs)
Zero offsets, F F F F F F F F F F F
external (PLC)
Differential resolver F F F F F F F F F F F
function (DRF)/
handwheel override
Basic offsets F F F F F F F F F F F
in workpiece coordinate system
with MMC 103
(up to 16 per channel)
2) Max. 4 per axis.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Axis monitoring functions

Working area limitation F F F F F F F F F F F
Limit switch monitoring function F F F F F F F F F F F
Software and hardware
limit switches
2D/3D protection ranges F F F F F F F F F F F
1)
Contour monitoring function F F F F F F F F F F F

Contour monitoring function 6FC5 251 – 0AB16 – 0AA0 * * * * * f f f f f f
with tunnel function
Position monitoring function F F F F F F F F F F F
Zero F F F F F F F F F F F
speed control
Clamping monitoring function F F F F F F F F F F F
Compensation
Backlash compensation F F F F F F F F F F F
Leadscrew error F F F F F F F F F F F
compensation
Measuring system error F F F F F F F F F F F
compensation
Electronic weight 6FC5 255 – 0AC00 – 0AA0 * * * f f f f f f f f
compensation
Beam sag compensation, 6FC5 251 – 0AB15 – 0AA0 * f f * f f f f f f f
multi–dimensional 2) 3) 2) 3) 2) 2) 2)
Manual quadrant F F F * F F F F F F F
error
compensation
Automatic quadrant 6FC5 251 – 0AB14 – 0AA0 * * * * f f f f f f f
error compensation 3)
(neural network)
• Graphic check
with circularity test
with MMC 103
or external PC
Temperature compensation 6FC5 251 – 0AA13 – 0AA0 f f f f f f f f f f f
1) Limited functionality. 3) Available soon.

2) With limited functionality, see description of options.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Compensation (continued)
Automatic drift F * * * * * * * * * *
compensation for
analog speed setpoints
Feedforward control
• Speed– F F F F F F F F F F F
dependent
• Acceleration– 6FC5 250 – 0AA07 – 0AA0 * * * f f f f f f f f
dependent
Standard cycles
Process–oriented cycles See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
for drilling/milling and 4)
turning (English, French,

German, Italian and Spanish)
Access protection for cycles F F F F F F F F F F F
Measuring cycles for drilling/ See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
milling (English, French, 4)
German, Italian and Spanish)
PLC area
SIMATIC S7–300 CPU 314See Catalog ST 70 * F * * * * * * * * *
CPU 315 See Catalog ST 70 f * * * * * * * * * *
CPU 315–2 DP See Catalog ST 70 f * F F F F F F F F F
CPU 316/318 See Catalog ST 70 f * * * * * * * * * *
PLC user memory 5)
• 48 KB with CPU 315 to F * * * * * * * * * *
512 KB with CPU 318
• 64 KB * F F F F F F F F F F
•Maximum capacity in KB 48 128 288 288 288 288 288 288 288 288 288
Expansion of PLC 6FC5 252 – 0AA03 – 0AA0 * f f f f f f f f f f
user memory
in units of 32 KB
PLC programming See Catalog ST 70 f f f f f f f f f f f
with HiGraph
(STEP 7 expansion package)
4) Limited functionality. 5) Including PLC basic program.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
PLC area (continued)

Toolbox with PLC See NC 60.1, Section 4 f f f f f f f f f f f
basic program,
standard machine data and
CNC variable selector
Digital inputs 1) F F F F F F F F F F F
• maximum 992 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768
• with PROFIBUS–DP: 2048 * * f f f f f f f f f
Digital outputs 1) F F F F F F F F F F F
• maximum 992 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768
• with PROFIBUS–DP: 2048 * * f f f f f f f f f
Maximum number F F F F F F F F F F F
of I/O modules 31 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
(central configuration)
4096 (8192) flags 2) F F F F F F F F F F F
128 (512) timers 2) F F F F F F F F F F F
64 (512) counters 2) F F F F F F F F F F F
Processing time, typical F F F F F F F F F F F
0.3 ms/KA (0.1 ms/KA)
for bit commands 3)
FB, FC F F F F F F F F F F
F
128 128 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256
256
DB F F F F F F F F F F
F
127 127 399 399 399 399 399 399 399 399
399
Cyclic block F F F F F F F F F F F
Time–controlled blocks F F F F F F F F F F F
STEP 7 F F F F F F F F F F F
programming language
STL statement list F F F F F F F F F F F
STEP7 on MMC 103 On request f f f f f f f f f f f
Devices for PLC See Catalog ST 70 f f f f f f f f f f f
programming and
program test with PG 7 ../PC
PC card See Catalog ST 70 f * * * * * * * * * *
(flash EPROM)
1) The number is equal to the sum ofinputs and outputs. 3) 1KA = 1024 statements; corresponds to approx. 3 KB.
2) Values shown in brackets apply to CPU 318-2.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.

Distributed
I/O
via PROFIBUS–DP
• via CP342–5DP F F F F F F F F F F F
transmission rate
up to 1.5 MB/s
• via CPU 315–2 DP F * * * * * * * * * *
• via integrated * * f f f f f f f f f
interface
transmission rate
up to 12 MB/s
User machine data to * F F F F F F F F F F
configure the PLC
user program
Diagnostics functions
PLC status F F F F F F F F F F F
HiGraph diagnosis or See NC 60.1, Section 3 * f f f f f f f f f f
ProDiag (S7–GRAPH) for 4)
MMC module with

TRANSLINE 2000 HMI software
Remote diagnosis with See NC 60.1, Section 3 f f f f f f f f f f f
MMC 103
Logbook with F F F F F F F F F F F
MMC module
Alarms and messages

Alarms and messages F F F F F F F F F F F
can be selected in
part program
Alarms and messages F F F F F F F F F F F
from PLC
4) Limited functionality.

Lists 08/99

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Safety functions
Safety functions F F F F F F F F F F F
Axis limitation from F F F F F F F F F F F
the PLC
Spindle speed F F F F F F F F F F F
limitation
SINUMERIK safety–integrated
safety functions for protecting
against personal injury and
damage to machinery 1)
• Basic function for 6FC5 250 – 0AC10 – 0AA0 * * * f f f f f f f f
up to 4 axes/spindles
• Additional function for each 6FC5 250 – 0AC11 – 0AA0 * * * * f f f f f f f
axis/spindle from 5th
axis/spindle onwards
Generator operation, 6FC5 255 – 0AE00 – 0AA0 * * * f f f f f f f f
independent drive
Extended stop and retract ESR, 6FC5 250 – 0AE01 – 0AA0 * * * f f f f f f f f
independent drive
(incl. generator operation)
1) Prerequisites:
SIMODRIVE 611 digital with performance control and additional
DMS input (the input for voltage signals is recommended) or
Standard 2 control with additonal DMS input. NCU terminal
block with DMP compact modules.

08/99 Lists

SINUMERIK 810DE
SINUMERIK FM-NC
NCU 571.2
NCU 561.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 572.2
NCU 573.2
NCU 573.2
CCU 1
NCU 570
CCU 2
12 Axes
31 Axes
12 Axes
31 Axes
Order No.
Start–up
Series start–up via a F F F F F F F F F F F
serial interface
Series start–up by means F F F F F F F F F F F
of programming the
PC card offline or online
Start–up software
for SIMODRIVE 611;
digital converter system
incl. data management
and measuring functions
for control loops
• Integrated in MMC 103 * F F F F F F F F F F
• On external PC See NC 60.1, Section 4 * f f f f f f f f f f
MMC 103 standard operator
interface for PC/PG for start–up
or service purposes during
operation without operator panel
Start–up trace * F F F F F F F F F F
with MMC 103
drive optimization without an
additional oscilloscope

Lists 08/99
CNC function Description of option
Axes, spindles; The SINUMERIK 810D can control 5 axes

Four measuring circuits are integrated in the (or 4 axes and 1 spindle or 3 axes, 1 spindle with
additional
SINUMERIK FM–NC control as standard for 1PH motor and 1 spindle with servomotor digital)
axes and spindles. A maximum of 5 axes and without requiring controller plug–in
spindles can be implemented with the addition of modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 digital. The
an FM 354 module, where up to 2 spindles are basic version contains three (two) power
permitted (total of sections in the CCU box.The measurement
5 measuring circuits). encoder evaluation
The measurement encoder evaluation for (6 measuring channels) is located on the front
SINUMERIK 840D is located in the digital drive panel of the CCU (compact control unit).
modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 digital.
Axes
The maximum configuration permits a total of The axes are divided according to their
31 axes/spindles in 10 channels. functions into:
The following expansion levels are possible: ã Axes
• NCU 561.2: 1 mode group/ Interpolating path axes
2 channels/2 axes ã Positioning axes
• NCU 571.2: 1 mode group/ Non–interpolating feed and positioning axes
2 channels/6 axes with axis–specific feed; axis movements are
• NCU 572.2: 1 mode group/ also possible outside block limits.
2 channels/10 axes Spindles
• NCU 573.2: 2 mode groups/ Spindle drives can be12 either
axes speed or positionaxes
2 channels/12
• NCU 573.2: 10 mode groups/ controlled.
In the maximum configuration with NCU 573.2, Auxiliary spindles
the system software supports 10 channels per Auxiliary spindles are speed–controlled spindle
mode group, 12 axes including 12 spindles drives without actual position encoder (e.g. for
per channel. driven tools).
1D/3D distance control The most important application for this is laser
The distance control can be used to evaluate cutting, e.g. radial cutting of rods with non–
in position control cycle
sensor signals for example via the fast analog circular cross sections.
input of the NCK I/O device (A/D conversion:
Limited functionality of “1D/3D distance control
75 µs).
in position control cycle“ on SINUMERIK 840DE:
The “1D distance control in IPO cycle“ function
the value measured can only be assigned to one
can be used to calculate a position offset
axis at a time (1D).
$AA_OFF for an axis via synchronized action.
The “1D/3D distance control in position control
cycle“ (incl. in IPO cycle) function controls three
machine axes and one gantry axis and enables
the distance required for machining for technical
reasons to be held constant automatically.
Evaluation of internal The function is a prerequisite for the evaluation
With the “Evaluation of internal drive variables“ of real–time variables (drive variables):
drive variables
function, a measured process variable (e.g.
(requirement for adaptive $AA_LOAD drive load
spindle current) can be used to control a
control) second process variable (e.g. path– or axis– $AA_POWER drive active power
specific feedrate). This permits the cutting $AA_TORQUE drive torque setpoint
volume during grinding to be kept constant, $AA_CURR axis/spindle current actual
machines and tools are protected from over- value
loading and shorter machining times and an Limited functionality for SINUMERIK 810DE,
improved surface quality are also attained. 840DE: only one measured variable
(e.g. spindle current) can be evaluated at a time.
Axial coupling in The axes used can be reconfigured after they

This option is required in order to use axis have been reset.
machine coordinate system
coup–lings created in the basic coordinate
(MCS coupling)
system for transformations as well. A 1:1
coupling is carried out in the machine
coordinate system.

08/99 Lists
Path velocity–dependent analog on the NCU terminal block, for example. The
The “path velocity–dependent analog value
value output function is programmed with the synchronized
output“ can be used to output the current path
actions.One application is in laser power
velocity in the IPO cycle. This value can be
control.
made available by means of the analog output
Additional machining
A channel structure permits the use of parallel The channel structure permits the
channels
movements, for example the traversal of a simultaneous and asynchronous processing of
loading gantry simultaneously with machining, the part programs of each channel. The
and so reduces idle times. One machining “Channel switchover“ key on the operator
channel can be regarded as being its own panel selects the appropriate channel with the
CNC control with decoding, block preparation associated displays. Part programs can then
and interpolation. be selected and started for a specific channel.
5–axis ã 5–axis tool length offset for 5–axis machining

5–axis machining tasks, e.g. milling of
machining package When machining with a 4th/5th axis, the
sculptured surfaces, can be performed simply.
Considering the length of the selected tool is included
kinematics for: The “5–axis machining package“ provides the automatically in the axis movement and
• Standard applications following functions: corrected.
• Universal milling head/nutator ã 5–axis transformation with tool orientation ã Oriented–tool retraction
In addition to the X, Y, and Z geometry axes, For machining interruptions (e.g. for tool
5–axis machining uses further axes (e.g. breakage), the tool can be retracted by a
rotary axes to swivel the tool). The defined distance and with orientation via a
machining task can be fully defined using program command.
Cartesian space coordinates with Cartesian ã Tool–oriented RTCP
position and orientation. The path vector is The RTCP (remote tool center point)
converted to machine axes with position function permits the tool swivel axes to be
and orientation in the control using the traversed in manual mode while maintaining
5–axis transformation. the point
marked by the tool tip. The RTCP function
simplifies the recording of program inter–
polation points using manual traversing
with tool orientation.
Operating mode group Within the mode group, every axis can be
A mode group unites CNC channels with axes programmed in every
and spindles in a machining unit. A mode channel. A mode group can therefore be
group contains the channels which must regarded as an independent multi–channel
always operate simultaneously in the same NC. In the maximum configuration of the
operating mode in order for the machining SINUMERIK 840D, up to ten mode groups can
process to continue. be implemented using the NCU 573.2.
Actions applying to more than For example, the ASUP can be used to move
Asynchronous subroutines (ASUPs) can be a grinding wheel that is in danger of colliding to
one operating mode
used to respond to high–priority events not a safe position.
(ASUPs and synchronized
only during the program processing but also in
actions in all modes) all modes and program states (see “Interrupt
(Static) synchronized actions programmed
using IDS=… operate beyond the end of the
routines with rapid lift from the contour“).
program and in all operating modes.
An appropriate interrupt can also be used to
start an ASUP in the manual mode.
CNC user memory,
All programs and data, such as part programs, user data can be stored in the common CNC
expansion
subroutines, comments, tool offsets, zero user memory. The CNC user memory is
offsets/FRAMEs, and channel and program located on the NCU module and is provided
with a backup battery.

Lists 08/99
Continuous dressing changes as a result of the dressing,the CNC

This function can be used to dress the shape calculates this dressing amount online as the
(parallel dressing, online
of the grinding wheel parallel to the machining true radius offset.Limited functionality for
modification of tool offset)
operation. The offset resulting from the SIMUMERIK 810DE/ 840DE: only a single
dressing measured variable (e.g. axis actual value,
of the grinding wheel becomes immediately analog input) can be evaluated and then only
effective as the length offset. one subsequent offset can be performed (e.g.
If the tool radius offset has been programmed axis offset during the dressing of the grinding
to machine a contour and the tool radius wheel).
Beam sag compensation, • Freely–selectable compensation positions.

The effects of physical influences and
multi–dimensional Number can be configured (depending on
manufac–
the configuration of the CNC user memory)• Int
turing tolerances, such as beam sag or
• Weighting factor for the compensation of tool
leadscrew errors, can also be compensated in
weights
several dimensions. The compensation tables • Reference axis and compensation axis can
can be switched from the PLC. be selected
Leadscrew errors can be compensated if the Application example:
reference axis and the compensation axis are Compensation of physical influences and
identical. manufacturing tolerances.
The supply of weighting factors (PLC interface) Limited functionality for SINUMERIK 810DE/
permits the stored compensation curves to be 840DE: the correctable tolerance range is
adapted to various conditions (e.g. tools). limited to 1 mm/0.039 in (for SIMUMERIK
The main characteristics of interpolation and 810DE/ 840D: 10 mm/0.394 in).
compensation with tables are:
• Independent error curves can be defined.
Number = 2 x max. axis count
Electronic weight compensation compensates for this lowering of
For weight loaded axes without mechanical or the axis. .After the brake is released, the
compensation
hydraulic weight compensation, the vertical existing constant weight compensation torque
axis falls in an unwanted manner after release maintains the position of the vertical axis.
of the brake and the activation of servo enable.
The activation of the electronic weight
Electronic The relationships between the master axes
The “Electronic gear“ makes possible high– and the slave axis are defined for each master
gear ELG
precision kinematic linking of axes with axis by the coupling factor.Limited functionality
programmable speed ratios. A program or for SINUMERIK 840DE: the number of axes
operator panel can be used to design and moved simultaneously is limited to four.
select the link for any number of CNC axes.
The “Electronic gear“ function makes it
possible to control the movement of a slave
axis in relation to up to five master axes.
Extended stop and retract ESR,
Retraction from the machining plane is Independent drive reactions are defined axially.
independent drive
accomplished in a safe and secure manner These form part of the functionality of
(incl. generator operation)
without a collision between tool and workpiece. “Extended stop and retract ESR“.
Travel to fixed stop

This function can be used to traverse, for Travel to a fixed stop of several axes is
example, tailstocks or sleeves to a fixed stop possible simultaneously and in parallel to the
and so clamp workpieces. The applied movement of other axes.
pressure can be defined in the part program.
Generator operation,
The “Generator operation“ function can be movement of the axis is fed back into the
independent drive
used in the event of short–term power failures intermediate circuit in accordance with the
or to supply the power required for generator principle.
(independent drive) retraction. For this
purpose, the power stored in the rotation of the
spindle or the

08/99 Lists
CNC function Overview of functions
Pair of synchronized axes

Two mechanically coupled axes can be The actual values are compared continuously
(gantry axes)
traversed simultaneously without mechanical and the smallest differences corrected.
offset.
Interrupt routines i.e. the interrupt routine can still be started in

Interrupt routines are special subroutines that the 8th program level and can lead to the 12th
with rapid lift
can be started by events (external signal) from program level.
from the contour
the machining process. A part program being An interrupt (e.g. switching of a high–speed
processed will be interrupted. The interrupt CNC input) can initiate a movement from the
position of the axes is stored automatically. special subroutine that permits a rapid lifting of
Similarly, it is possible to buffer the states the tool from the workpiece contour currently
such as G–functions and the current offsets being machined. The retraction angle and the
(SAVE mechanism), and so ensure a path length can also be parameterized. An
subsequent continuation of the program at the interrupt routine can also be executed after the
point of interruption. Four additional program rapid lift.
levels are provided for interrupt routines,
Contour monitoring using The axes are stopped immediately if, during
The “Contour monitoring using tunnel function“ the machining, axis errors cause the path
tunnel function
function can be used to monitor the absolute deviation to become greater than the specified
movement of the tool tip in space in 5–axis tunnel diameter.The path deviation can also be
machining or machining of complex written to an analog output.
workpieces. It provides optimum protection of
valuable workpieces. A round tunnel (tube)
with a defined diameter is placed along the
programmed path.
Leading value coupling and Offsets (e.g. 12 degrees), scaling factors (e.g.
Continuous coupling and decoupling functions 1.00023) and mirroring using Frame
curve table interpolation
between master and slave axes are required commands are possible.
for the replacement of mechanical, cyclical
Electronic curve table interpolation replaces
transport tasks with electronic functions in
the cams previously required for the control of
automatic operation in special technologies
cyclic machines.
(presses, transfer lines, printing presses, etc.).
Complex movements can be easily defined
The “synchronous spindle“ functionality is
using known CNC language elements. The
extended here to include the “lead value
control value of the control forms the external
coupling“ function. This also permits linear
reference variable (e.g. line shaft). The leading
leading axes and following axes to be coupled
axis/following axis functional relationship can
using curve tables in the CNC program.
be divided into sections of the leading axis
Any functional relationships between axis (curve segments). Mathematic functions
positions can be approximated. Soft coupling (normally 3rd degree polynomials) describe the
avoids speed jumps when the leading axis is lead value – following value coupling in these
activated. curve segments.
Look ahead The “Look ahead“ function looks ahead over a

The machining of complex contours mainly parameterized number of traversal blocks to
results in program blocks with very small paths achieve an optimum machining speed. During
and often sharp–edged curves. A non– tangential block transitions, acceleration and
optimum machining result is produced if such deceleration is performed across block limits to
a contour is machined with a fixed– ensure that the speed is maintained. The
programmed path speed. Because of the short round–ing of the contour along a sharp–edged
paths, the drives do not reach the required end path is reduced to a programmable path
speed for traversal blocks with tangential dimension (“Continuous–path mode with
transitions. The contour is rounded at corners. programmable rounding distance“).

Lists 08/99
Master/slave for drives set to a tensioning torque that can be set via
The “Master/slave for drives“ function is the machine data.
required when two electrical drives are
Sample applications are:
mechanically linked to one axis. A torque
controller ensures that both drives produce • Improved performance and (temporary)
exactly the same torque in such a link, since mechanical linking of drives
the two motors would otherwise counteract • Drives with two motors that operate on one
each other. geared rod
To achieve a tensioning between the master • Reworking of wheel blocks for rail stock
and slave drives, the torque controller can be • Reversing of mutually tensioned drives
without play
Multi–axis interpolation as well as by the number of axes available in

The basic configuration of the controls permits the channel, e.g. to a maximum of 12 axes for
up to four axes of simultaneous interpolation NCU 573.2.The helical interpolation permits
With SINUMERIK 840D, the number of the following for FM–NC and SINUMERIK
interpolating axes can be expanded. It is 810D: 2D+2.
limited by the option and machine data,
Several feedrates in
The “Several feedrates in one block“ function retraction synchronized with the movement.
one block
can be used to activate 6 different feed values The retraction is initiated with a previously
of a CNC block depending on the external defined amount within an IPO cycle. The
digital and/or analog inputs, a dwell time and a distance–to–go that remains is deleted.
Measurement stage 2 continuous (cyclical) measurement are written

Whereas each measurement function for to a FIFO variable. Endless measurement can
motion blocks in the part program is restricted be
to one block, measurement functions from achieved by the cyclical reading of the FIFO
synchro– values.
nized actions can be switched on at any time
The measurement results can be optionally
independently of the part program. The
logged in a file of the control or output to a
measurement results in the CNC block can be
printer or PC using the RS 232 C (V.24) inter–
assigned to the axes. Up to 4 trigger results can
face. The user can specify the layout of the
be
standard report contained in the measurement
processed per position control cycle during
cycles.
simultaneous measurement. The measured
values are read as a function of the three Limited functionality for SINUMERIK 810DE/
parameters probe, axis and measurement 840DE: Measurement from synchronized
edge. The measurement results during actions and cyclical measurement are not
possible.

08/99 Lists
Reciprocating functions turning point:

In this function, an axis reciprocates with the
• Change of direction initiated
programmed feedrate between two turning
points. Used, for example, on grinding - Without reaching the exact stop limit
machines. (soft turning)- After reaching the
programmed position, or
Asynchronous reciprocating beyond block
- After reaching the programmed position
limits
and after the dwell time has expired.
Several reciprocating axes can be active. • The following intervention is possible:
Further axes can interpolate or infeed in any
- The reciprocating movement and infeed
way during the reciprocating movement. The
can be stopped by deletion of distance–to–
reciprocating axis can be the input axis for the
go.
dynamic transformation or the leading axis for
- Change the turning points using CNC
gantry and slave axes.
program, PLC, handwheel or direction
Block–defined reciprocation keys.
• Reciprocation with infeed in both turning - Changes to the feed speed of the
points or just the left or right turning point. reciprocat–ing axis via CNC program,
Infeed by a programmable distance is PLC or override.
possible before the turning point. - Control of the reciprocating movement
• Sparking out strokes are possible on using the PLC.
completion of the reciprocation movement. The spindle can also perform a reciprocating
Behavior of the reciprocating axis at the movement.
Interface via PLC 315–2 DP that is compatible with

PROFIBUS–DP provides the protocol profile SIMATIC S7–300. The distributed I/O devices
PROFIBUS–DP
for the distributed I/O devices. It permits a very (e.g. ET 200) are connected for
fast cyclic communication for small data communication. These I/O
volumes. The formation of an optimum subset devices are described in Catalog ST 70 and
of the PROFIBUS message–frame services Catalog ST PI. I/O devices can also be
and the increase of the transmission speed to operated using the SIMATIC S7–300 with the
maximum 12 Mbit/s means that the bus cycle IM 361 interface module and a CP 342–5 DP
times are so small that they can be ignored. communications processor without the
The integrated interface connection of the NCUs
advantages of the PROFIBUS remain: High (transmission rate up to
availability, data security and standard 1.5 Mbit/s).See Section 11 for literature on
message–frame structure. PROFIBUS–DP.
All NCUs of the SINUMERIK 840D and the
CCU 2 of the SINUMERIK 840D contain a
LC user
The PLC user memory in the SINUMERIK 32 KB, from the basic version of 64 KB to
memory expansion
810D/ 840D controls can be extended in units 128 KB (CCU1) and to 288 KB (CCU2 and
of NCUs).
Polynomial interpolation calculated externally and then programmed.

This function can be used for the interpolation Polynomial interpolation can be used to
of curves in which the CNC axes follow the produce an unlimited range of curves, such as
function: straight lines,
f(p) = a0 + a1p + a2p2 + a3p3 parabolic curves and exponential functions.
(polynomial of maximum 3rd degree) The a0 A tool radius offset can be used in the same
coefficient is the end point of the previous way as linear and circular interpolation.
block; a1 is calculated as the end point of the
current block; a2 and a3 must be
Positioning axes
Positioning axes operate at an axis–specific perform movements in parallel to the
feed– rate. They do not need to be involved machining without requiring an additional
with the actual machining, e. g. workpiece/tool channel. The execution of parallel movements
feeder, tool magazine. Positioning axes can permits large reductions in machining idle
times.

Lists 08/99
Programmable acceleration The maximum acceleration value stored in the

The “Programmable acceleration“ function is control is not exceeded. The limitation acts in
used to influence the axis acceleration in the AUTOMATIC mode and in all interpolation
program, for example to limit the mechanical modes. As part of intelligent movement
vibration in critical program sections. control, this function also ensures a more
The path axis or the positioning axis is then accurate workpiece surface.
accelerated with the programmed value.
Program preprocessing
The preprocessing of cycles permits a In particular, programs with high–level
significant reduction in the machining time of a programming language sections and
CNC program. The programs located in the computationally demanding programs (e.g.
directories for standard and user cycles with with control structures, synchronized
set machine data are processed on “power movement actions, cutting cycles) can achieve
on“. machining time reductions of up to 1/3.
Automatic quadrant error

Quadrant error compensation largely The circularity test integrated in the MMC 103
compensation
eliminates the contour errors at the quadrant can be used to check the result of the quadrant
transitions that result from the different friction error compensation.
characteristics on control paths.
Repos Program commands provide a number of

A repositioning to the contour can also be approach strategies:
(repositioning by program)
performed automatically. Repositioning can be
performed with new tool offsets. The • Approach the interrupt point
interrupted program is continued with the new • Approach the block start point
tool offsets. • Approach the block end point
• Approach a path point between block start
and interrupt
Inclined axes Optional traversing of 2 axes one after another
Fixed angle interpolation taking into account or interpolating, also in conventional operation.
an inclined infeed axis or grinding wheel by The grinding–specific tool offsets can also be
entering an angle. used.
The axes are programmed and displayed in
Cartesian coordinates.
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated The following can be implemented with each
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated provides axis and spindle:
integrated prototype–tested safety functions for
the effective protection of personnel and
ã Safe shut down
(transition from motion to rest)
machines.
All safety functions satisfy the requirements of ã Safe operational stop
Safety Category 3 in accordance with EN 954– (drives remain position controlled)
1 and Requirement Class 4 as per DIN VDE ã Safe stop
0801. This ensures that the essential (drives are pulse cleared)
requirements of the EC Machine Directive ã Safe reduced speed
89/392/EEC can be implemented easily and (set–up mode without enable key)
economically. ã Safe software limit switch
The functional scope includes safe speed and (variable traversing range limitation)
standstill monitoring, safe work area and ã Safe software cams
protection zone limitation and area detection. (area recognition)
Further integrated functions in the “Safety
ã Safety–oriented input/output signals
Integrated“ package enable the direct
(interface with process)
connection of dual–channel I/O signals, e.g.
from an emergency stop switch or light barrier.
ã Safe programmable logic (direct connection
The logical linking and the reactions are and internal interlinking of safety–relevant
implemented internally using safe technology. signals)
No additional sensors or analysis equipment Reliable functions, fast response and wide
are required. In addition to highly effective acceptance make this certified safety system
protection of personnel and machines, this a highly effective one.
cuts installation costs and reduces the size of The prototype test has been performed by the
the switchgear cabinet. German Institute for Occupational Safety. The
The safety functions are available in all modes test certificate has been issued.
and can communicate with the process using
safety–oriented input/output signals.

08/99 Lists
Spline interpolation program blocks. Tool radius compensation is

A very smooth curve can be produced with possible in spline interpolation, linear and
spline interpolation using only a few specified circular interpolation.Any polynomial can
interpolation points of a set contour. The represent a spline. It is
interpolation points are linked using merely the algorithm that determines the type
polynomials. of the spline.
The compressor converts linear blocks (e.g.
from the CAD) at block transitions into consis–
ã A–spline is only a continuous tangent.
tent–speed (cubic) splines (COMPON) or into
ã B–spline is a continuous tangent and a
contin–uous curvature, but does not pass
consistent–acceleration splines (COMPCURV).
through the interpolation points.
The resulting smooth transitions reduce wear
on the mechanical partso f the machine tool.
ã C–spline is a continuous tangent and a
contin–uous curvature and passes through
The close setting of the interpolation points
the
also permits fairly sharply–edged contours to
interpolation points.
be
produced. The spline interpolation function
also permits a large reduction in the number of
Punching and nibbling The signals synchronize the NCK and the
The punching and nibbling functions are punching unit.
functions
principally implemented with language ã Automatic path segmentation
commands (high–level language elements), “Automatic path segmentation“ divides a
stroke control and automatic path specified CNC block into equal–sized path
segmentation. sections, where the length of the individual
ã Language commands subsections in each block can be
The special punching and nibbling functions parameterized.
are activated and deactivated using The section is divided into equal distances
configurable language commands. for linear and circular interpolation.
ã Stroke control
Immediate stroke control in the range of a
few milliseconds is achieved using fast
signals.
Synchronized actions for example, initiation of axis programs in the
More than 16 synchronized axes can be active same IPO cycle by scanning digital inputs.
Stage 2
in a CNC block and a maximum of 256 parallel Limited functionality for SINUMERIK
actions can be programmed in every channel. 810DE/840DE: The number of axes traversed
Synchronized actions can be used to combine simultaneously is limited to 4 (path and
technology cycles as programs. This permits, positioning axes).
Synchronous spindle/ ã On–the–fly transfer

Angle–accurate synchronous operation of a
multi–edge turning • n1 = n2
lead– ing spindle with one or more following
• angle 1 = angle 2 or
spindles provides, particularly for turning
machines, the capability of on–the–fly
angle 2 = angle 1 + angle
The specification of an integer transmission
workpiece transfer from spindle 1 to spindle 2
ratio between the main spindle and a “tool
(reduction of idle times caused by reclamping).
spindle“ provides the conditions for multi–edge
In addition to the speed synchronization, the machining (polygon turning).
relative angular position of the spindles to each
other can be specified, e.g. on–the–fly,
ã Multi–edge turning:
position–oriented transfer of chamfered n2 = Ü ß n1
workpieces. Configuring and selection are performed using
either the CNC program or the operator panel.
Several synchronous spindle pairs can be
implemented.

Lists 08/99
Tangential control • Tangential feed of a wire during 5–axis

Tangential control permits a rotary axis to track welding
in the direction of the tangent of two path axes.
• Approach of the cutting wheel for glass or
The two leading axes and the tracked axis are
paper processing
in the same channel.
Tangential control is active in every
Applications are:
interpolation type.
• Tangential approach of a rotating tool during
Application example
nibbling
It is common that the punching tool and the
• Tracking of the workpiece alignment with a
associated dies on nibbling machines can be
band saw
rotated. A tool can then be used in different
• Approach of the dressing tool to a grinding ways and frequent tool changes become
wheel unnecessary. This permits contours to be
produced with a low degree of surface
roughness.
Temperature compensation • Position–independent factors (e.g.

The thermal expansion of the machine as it displacement of the ballbearing spindle
affects the measuring system can be resulting from the expansion of the machine
compensated for specific axes. The bed).
temperature values are recorded using the
The PLC user program can pass the axis–
PLC.
specific correction parameters to the CNC.
The following compensations are possible:
• Position–dependent temperature effects (e.g.
expansion of the ballbearing spindle)
Handling transformation
The transformation package “Handling“ motions of the handling device become
package
contains the so–called transformation standard considerably easier and more user–friendly.
block, which can be used to operate typical 2– Setup, that is to say the manual traversing of
5–axis handling mechanisms, such as gantry the handling
or Scara. This coordinate transformation device using the jog keys of the handheld
package converts the axis–specific actual programming unit, for example, can be carried
values of the axes (e.g. A1 to A4) into out in the Cartesian coordinate system as well
Cartesian values (e.g. X, Y, Z, A) and the as in the axis–specific coordinate system. The
programmed Cartesian setpoint values back machine data are used in each case to match
into axis–specific values for the handling the transformation to the kinematics.
equipment.
With this coordinate transformation, the
Transmit/peripheral • During travel through the pole, the rotary axis

The “Transmit“ function permits the milling of is automatically turned through 180? after
surface transformation
outside contours on turned parts, e.g. reaching the turning center and then the rest
rectangle (linear axis with rotary axis). of the block processed.
This simplifies programming and improves • The control automatically reduces the
machine efficiency due to complete machining: feedrate and acceleration during travel close
Turning and milling on one machine without to the pole.
reclamping.
• If the path contains a corner in the pole of the
3D interpolation with two linear axes and one rotary axis, the control automatically
rotary axis is possible. The two linear axes are compensates for the change of position in
perpendicular to each other and the rotary axis the rotary axis with automatic block insertion.
is parallel to one of the linear axes.
“Peripheral surface transformation“ is used
Transmit can be invoked simultaneously in for turning machines and milling machines. It
different channels. Selection and deselection permits peripheral surface machining, e.g. of
of the function is possible with a preparatory turned parts.
function (straight line, helix, polynomial and
Three orthogonal linear axes and one rotary
activation of tool radius offset) in the part
axis (parallel to one of the linear axes) permit
program or with MDA.
the creation of slots with parallel sides and flat
The area of the pole of the transformation is bottom.
reached with Transmit if the tool center can be
positioned at the turning center of the rotary
axis included the transformation.
Transmit through the pole is implemented in
various ways:

08/99 Lists
Feed interpolation An F–value programmed in the block can be

In accordance with DIN 66 025, the F address traversed linearly increasing or decreasing with
can specify a constant feed in the part program the FLIN address over the path distance from
block. To permit a more flexible specification of the current value at the block start to the block
the feed characteristic, programming to end. The FCUB address is used to connect the
DIN 66025 has been expanded to include F–values programmed in each block with a
linear and cubic characteristics above the path. spline with reference to the block end point.
The cubic characteristics can be programmed The spline starts and ends tangentially to the
directly or as an interpolating spline. previous or following feed value. The FPO
The default setting FNORM identifies the address is used to achieve a feed
constant feed over the entire path distance. characteristic using a polynomial from the
current value through to the end of the block in
which the F address was programmed.
Acceleration–dependent
The dynamic and acceleration–dependent accuracy even for high path speeds.
feedforward control
feedforward control can largely eliminate Feedforward control can be selected and
contour inaccuracies caused by following deselected for specific axes via the part
errors. This results in excellent machining program.
Position switching signals/ protection zones or the position–dependent
The path switching signals can be used to set initiation of movements, e.g. hydraulic
cam controller
position–dependent interface signals for the reciprocating axes in grinding. 16 position
PLC. The positioning values that are to be signal pairs are available. The position
used to set the signal output and a lead/delay switching signals are output in IPO cycles.
time can be programmed in the part program However, they can also be output as switching
and changed in the setting data. The function outputs using the “High–speed CNC
can be controlled with the PLC. inputs/outputs“ function in positioning control
Examples of applications are the activation of cycles.
3D tool
3D tool radius offset or tool offset in space The radius of a cylindrical cutter at the tool’s
radius offset
permits the machining of angular surfaces. The point of contact is taken into consideration.
3D tool radius offset function permits The drilling depth of a cylindrical cutter can be
peripheral milling and face milling with the programmed. In addition to the X, Y and Z
specification of a path. The angular clamping planes, the cutter can
position of a tool on the machine can be be turned around the advance angle, angle of
entered and corrected. The control inclination or lateral edge.
automatically calculates the result–ing
positions and movements.
Tool management • Axis motion during tool change with
The tool management function ensures that automatic synchronization at next D number
the correct tool is always present at the right
• Count and tool life monitoring with
location on the machine and that the data
prewarning limit
assigned to a tool are up to date. It is used
with machine tools that have a circular Up to 30 magazines with a maximum of 1500
magazine, chain magazine or box magazine. magazine slots and 1500 tools with up to 9
In addition, it permits fast insertion of a tool, cutters per tool (maximum 1500) can be
and avoids rejects by monitoring the tool managed.
usage time and machine stoppage time by With the MMC 103 as highest expansion level,
taking account of replacement tools. the full scope of functions of tool management
The following are the most important functions can be used. The major functions are also
for tool management: avail–able using OP 030 and MMC 100.2.
• Tool selection over all magazines and For the SINUMERIK 810D/840D, SINTDI also
revolvers for active tools and spare tools makes available other tool management
functions, such as tool records and online
• Determination of an empty location to match
coupling to the tool preset device, in addition to
the tool size and type
tool
• Tool–dependent location coding (fixed and management.
variable)
• Initiation of tool change using T or M
command

Lists 08/99
Major functions in OP 030 MMC 100.2 MMC 103

tool management
System displays in the standard software F F F
Configuration options for screen forms and - - F
softkeys
User–friendly start–up via system displays - - F
Editing of tool data F F F
Magazine and tool list F F F
Search for empty location and location F F F
positioning
Tool loading and unloading F F F
User–friendly search for empty location via - - F
softkeys
1) 1)
Several magazines possible F
Several loading/unloading points per magazine - - F
Tool cabinet and tool catalog - - F
Clear D–number structure - - F
Adapter data - - F
Location–dependent offsets - - F
Loading and unloading via code carrier system - - F
1)
Data backup via V.24 (RS 232 C) interface F F
Data backup on hard disk - - F
1) Available soon.

08/99 Lists
1.2 Positioning modules and controls

FM 353 FM 354 FM 357L/LX MCU 172A
positioning positioning positioning positioning
module module module control
Assembly/application
Assembly system
• SIMATIC S7–300 F F F *
• SIMODRIVE 611 digital * * * F
Axes per module 1 1 4 1
Channels per module 1 1 1 1
4 interpolating axes, maximum * * F *
1) 1)
Max. axes per SIMATIC PLC 34 1
Drives
• FM STEPDRIVE F * F *
• SIMODRIVE 611 analog/universal * F F *
• SIMODRIVE 611 digital * * * F
Control of stepper motor drives * *
F F
Compatible measuring systems
Indirect measuring systems

• Incremental rotary measuring * F F 2) *
systems via RS 422
• Incremental rotary measuring * * * F
systems with voltage signal sin/cos
• Absolute rotary measuring systems with SSI * F F 2) *
• Absolute rotary measuring systems * * * F
with voltage signal sin/cos, EnDat
Direct measuring systems
• Incremental rotary measuring systems via RS 422 * F F2) *
• Incremental rotary measuring * * * F
systems with voltage signal sin/cos
• Absolute rotary measuring systems with SSI * F F 2) *
• Absolute rotary measuring systems * * * F
with voltage signal sin/cos, EnDat
• Absolute linear scale with SSI * F F 2) *
• Absolute linear scale with voltage signal sin/cos, EnDat * * * *
1) Depending on the requirements and configuration of the 2) Also in conjunction with stepper drives.
modul rack.

Lists 08/99
FM 353 FM 354 FM 357L/LX MCU 172A

Functionality
Traversing range ±1000 m/3280 ft F F F F

Velocity [mm/min] * 0.01 to 0.001 to 0.01 to
500 000 10 000 000 500 000
Max. stepping frequency [kHz] 200 * 250 *
Acceleration [m/s 2] * 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100
Acceleration (kHz/s] for stepper drives 0.01 to * 0.001 to 100 *
10 000
Jerk time [s] * 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
Basic resolution
• [mm] 10-3 10-3 10-3 10-3
• [inch] 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4
• [degree] 10-2,10-4 10-2,10-4 10-2,10-4 10-2,10-4
Position–controlled operation * F F F
Controlled operation with stepper drives F * F *
Position control clock pulse [ms] * 2 5 2 to 10
IPO clock pulse [ms] 2 2 10 to 15 2 to 10
Rotary axis F F F F
Automatic block search/reverse block search F F F F
Programmable acceleration F F F F
High–speed process signals
• Inputs 4 4 4 4
• Outputs 4 4 3) 4
0
Possible assignment of high–speed inputs:
• External start F F F F
• Enable input (stop) F F F F
• External block change F F * F
• On the fly actual value setting F F * F
• On the fly measurement F F F 4) F
• Reference–point switch F F F F
• Reversing cam F F F F
5)
Possible assignment of high–speed outputs: F F F
• Position reached stop
• Forwards, reverse
• M function output M97/M98
• Start enable
• Direct output (for users)
3) Expandable using local bus segment. 5) Usable with I/O from local bus segments.
4) Not in case of FM 357.

08/99 Lists
FM 353 FM 354 FM 357L/LX MCU 172A

CNC programming
Programming language (acc. to DIN 66025) F F F F

Number of traversing programs 199 199 F 199
1) 1) 3) 2)
3)
Max. program length in blocks 100 100 255
Max. block capacity per module F F F F
1) 1) 3) 2)
Subroutine levels, maximum 1 1 7 1

Subroutine number of passes, maximum 250 250 v 9999 250
3)
Max. number of different subroutines 20 20 20
from one program
Dimensions [mm], [degree], [inch] F F F F
Skip block F F F F
Subroutines F F F F
Continuous loop with M18 F F F F
Actual–value–specific M function F F F F
M function, time/acknowledgment–controlled F F F F
Syntax check F F F F
Communication
User data storage on PG of

• Onboard FEPROM * * * F
• Hard disk, floppy disk FM Param FM Param FM Param PIT
• Memory card * * F *
I/O bus, S7–CPU ´ FM F F F Integrated
Software technology module for communication F F F F
between the CPU and positioning module
Multi–point interface MPI * * * F
• Via SIMATIC S7–CPU F F F *
Networking with PROFIBUS–DP via SIMATIC S7 CP 342–5 DP f f f f
SIMODRIVE drive interface * “10 V “10 V Integrated4)
FM STEPDRIVE drive interface F * F *
(stepping frequency, directional signal)
Data interchange via memory card * * F Firmware
update
1) Limited by program memory (16 KB). 3) Limited by program memory (125 KB).
2) Limited by program memory (32 KB). 4) SIMODRIVE 611 digital with standard control.

Lists 08/99
FM 353 FM 354 FM 357L/LX MCU 172A

Operation
Standard screen forms for OP7 F F F *

5) 5) 6)
Standard screen forms for OP17 F F F *

5) 5) 5) 6)
Standard screen forms for OP27 * * f *

6)
OP 031 slimline operator panel, * * * f

LC display, monochrome with MMC module
PP 031–MC Push Button Panel * * * f
System languages English, French, German, Italian and Spanish * * * f
for retrofitting/upgrading in MMC 100.2 6)
Operating modes and machine functions
Incremental dimension relative F F F F

Jog F F F F
Control F F F F
6)
MDI F F F F
Automatic F F F F
Reference–point approach F F F F
Follow–up mode * F F F
Parking axis F F F F
Simulation F F F F
Linear measurement F F F F
Reference–point retrigger F F F F
Disable enable input F F F F
Disable software limit switch F F F F
In–process measurement F F F
F 8)
7)
Disable automatic drift compensation * F F
Preset (set actual value) F F F F
Block search/reverse block search F F F F
6)
Teach–in F F F
Delete distance–to–go F F F F
Restart F F F F
5) Included in configuration package. 7) Not required.

6) On request. 8) Not with FM 357 L.

08/99 Lists
FM 353 FM 354 FM 357L/LX MCU 172A

Offsets and reference points
20 tool offsets F F F F
Tool offsets 1 length + 1 wear (add./abs.) F F F F
Zero offset F F F F
Reference point offset F F F F
1)
Automatic drift compensation for analog speed setpoints * F F
Backlash compensation F F F F
Axis monitoring functions
Software limit switch monitoring function F F F F

Position monitoring function * F F F
Zero speed monitoring function * F F F
Rotation monitoring function F * F *
Data transmission with verification F F F F
Limiting value F F F F
Following error * F F F
Cable break * F F F
Setpoint F F F F
Watchdog F F F F
PLC area
FM usable in SIMATIC S7–300 from CPU 312 from CPU 312 from CPU 314 *
2) 2)
Integrated SIMATIC S7–300 CPU 314 * * * F

3)
PLC programming with HiGraph * * f f

STEP 7 expansion package
S7 technology modules f f f f
Digital inputs/outputs, maximum 992 992 992 768
Maximum number of I/O modules 31 31 31 24
Flags 2048 2048 2048 2048
Timers/counters 128/64 128/64 128/64 128/64
1) Not required. 3) CPU 314 with 76 KBytes.

2) For parameters, see corresponding CPU 31.

Lists 08/99
FM 353 FM 354 FM 357L/LX MCU 172A

Processing time (1024 statements)

• Typical, bit commands 0.3 ms 0.3 ms 0.3 ms 0.5 ms
• 1/3 word and 2/3 bit commands 0.6 ms 0.6 ms 0.6 ms 1 ms
FB/FC/DB for each 128 128 128 128
Cyclic block F F F F
Time–controlled blocks F F F F
STEP 7 programming language F F F F
Programming STL, SCL, LAD/SFC F F F F
Devices for PLC programming and program test PG 7../PC PG 7../PC PG 7../PC PG 7../PC
Memory card (flash EPROM) CPU 314 CPU 314 CPU 314 F
CPU 315 CPU 315 CPU 315
CPU 316
CPU 318–2
Diagnostics functions
PLC status F F F F
Diagnostic buffer with indication of
• Time * * * F
• Error identifiers F 4) F 4)
F 4) F 5)
• Additional information * * * F
List of all pending errors * * * F
CPU system faults * * * F
User program events * * * F
Servo alarms F F F F
with text
Diagnostic alarms and messages F F F *
Parameterization/start–up
PG 720, PG 740, PG 760 programming devices f f f f

PC with MPI card f f f f
Windows–based start–up tool F F F f
Configuration via SIMATIC STEP 7 F F F F
Start–up functions
• Function generator * * * F
• DAC * * * F
• Measuring functions * * F F
4) The last 5 events. 5) The last 100 events.

08/99 Lists
Export notes
As a result of export restrictions that exist for the system The export versions (SINUMERIK 810DE/840DE/FM–NC and
software of numerical controls with respect to certain control also the FM 357L positioning module) are limited in their
functions in accordance with the European/German export list, functionality in accordance with the export list restrictions and
the SINUMERIK 810D, SINUMERIK 840D and the FM 357 so not subject to approval in accordance with EU and German
positioning module can be supplied in two versions. This applies law with regard to their “type“.
to the NCU system software for the SINUMERIK 840D, to the The approval status for the complete CNC system depends on
CCU components with integrated system software for the the control or control versions used.
SINUMERIK 810D and for the system firmware for the FM 357
positioning module. Note:
The standard versions (SINUMERIK 810D/840D, FM 357LX If a re–export approval requirement in accordance with US law
positioning module) provide the full function capability of the applies to certain components, this must also be taken into
control but are subject to approval for export to countries consideration (information in the delivery documents or on
outside the EU. request). Similarly, a resulting approval requirement may need
to be taken into consideration with regard to the final location
and purpose
Function restrictions for the export versions
Function Order No. SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK FM 357L

FM–NC 810DE 840DE positioning
module
In–process measurement F * * * *
Helical interpolation 2D+6 F * * * *
Distance control 1D/3D in position control cycle 6FC5 251 – 0AC05 – * * * *
0AA0
Evaluation of internal drive variables 6FC5 251 – 0AB17 – * f 1) f *
0AA0
Axial coupling in machine coordinate system 6FC5 251 – 0AD11 – * * * *
(MCS coupling) 0AA0
5–axis machining package 6FC5 251 – 0AA10 – * * * *
0AA0
Continuous dressing 6FC5 251 – 0AB10 – * f 1) f *
0AA0
Multi–dimensional beam sag compensation 6FC5 251 – 0AB15 – * f 1) f *
0AA0
Electronic drive ELG 6FC5 251 – 0AE00 – * * f *
0AA0
Master value coupling and 6FC5 251 – 0AD06 – * * f *
curve table interpolation 0AA0
Multi–axis interpolation 6FC5 251 – 0AA16 – * * * *
(> 4 interpolating axes) 0AA0
Measurement stage 2 6FC5 251 – 0AD00 – * f 1) f *
0AA0
OEM–NCK compile cycles 6FC5 251 – 0AA20 – * * * *
0AA0
Synchronized actions stage 2 6FC5 251 – 0AD05 – * f f *
0AA0
Handling transformation package 6FC5 251 – 0AD07 – * * * *
0AA0
1) Available soon.

Lists 08/99
Important export notes:
■ Because the export of the standard versions

If the control built into the machine tool is to be
(components/system) is subject to a time–intensive
exported, it is recommended that the delivery of those
official approval procedure that also applies to the
spare parts which require approval be included as a
delivery of the components requiring approval as part
precautionary measure in the approval application at
of service and spare parts supply. The export versions
the time of procurement by the machine manufacturer.
should be used whenever possible.
However, if the machine is exempt from approval, it is
■If standard versions are used, special care must be still recommended as a precautionary measure, that
taken in order to ensure that approval requirements an approval application be procured for the delivery of
also apply to export components requiring approval in spare parts requiring approval.
spare parts deliveries. This applies in particular to The delivery of spare parts requiring approval can be
controls that have been built into machine tools by the made quickly and free of complications by the
machine manufacturer which can then be exported, manufacturer, or by Siemens if the manufacturer
exempt from export license. The long official approval provides Siemens with the original approval document.
procedure that this entails can greatly restrict quality
service.

Machine and Setting Data 2
2.1 Explanatory notes on the machine and setting data ...................................................2-59
2.1.2 Handling of machine data ........................................................................................2-63
2.2 Drive machine data .....................................................................................................2-66
2.3 Machine data for hydraulics module ...........................................................................2-104
2.4 Machine data for operator panel .................................................................................2-118

2.4.1 Generally available MDs for operator panel .............................................................2-118
2.4.2 Application-specific MDs for ManualTurn.................................................................2-131
2.4.3 Application-specific MDs for ShopMill ......................................................................2-136
2.5 General machine data.................................................................................................2-141

2.5.1 System settings........................................................................................................2-142
2.5.2 Override switch settings ...........................................................................................2-158
2.5.3 Central drive data.....................................................................................................2-161
2.5.4 System specific memory settings .............................................................................2-163
2.6 Channel-specific machine data ...................................................................................2-173

2.6.1 Basic channel machine data ....................................................................................2-174
2.6.2 Machine data for digitizing function ..........................................................................2-187
2.6.3 Machine data for grinding function ...........................................................................2-188
2.6.4 Channel auxiliary function settings ..........................................................................2-190
2.6.5 Transformation definitions in channel ......................................................................2-194
2.6.6 Punching and nibbling .............................................................................................2-202
2.6.7 Channel-specific memory settings ...........................................................................2-204
2.7 Axis-specific machine data .........................................................................................2-209

2.7.1 Configuration............................................................................................................2-210
2.7.2 Encoder matching ....................................................................................................2-213
2.7.3 Closed-loop control ..................................................................................................2-215
2.7.4 Reference point approach........................................................................................2-221
2.7.5 Spindles ...................................................................................................................2-223
2.7.6 Monitoring functions .................................................................................................2-226
2.7.7 Safety Integrated......................................................................................................2-228
2.7.8 Travel to fixed stop...................................................................................................2-235
2.7.9 Axis-specific memory settings ..................................................................................2-237

Lists 08/99
2 Machine and Setting Data
2.8 Setting data .................................................................................................................2-239

2.8.1 General setting data.................................................................................................2-239
2.8.2 Channel-specific setting data ...................................................................................2-243
2.8.3 Axis-specific setting data .........................................................................................2-246
2.9 Application-specific machine data ..............................................................................2-250

2.9.1 Application-specific default values for ManualTurn ..................................................2-250
2.9.2 Application-specific default values for ShopMill .......................................................2-253
2.9.3 Settings for ShopMill tool management ...................................................................2-255
2.9.4 MDs for the sequence of measuring cycles with ShopMill .......................................2-256

08/99 Lists
2.1 Explanatory notes on the machine and setting data

2.1.1 General information
Data in the lists Apart from the Identifier and Name/Other information, the lists of machine and
setting data also include the following information:
Number The number of the data is displayed when it is listed on the MMC. This number
is output when the data is saved if MD 11230: MD_FILE_STYLE has been set
correspondingly.
Cross reference The data is described in detail in the specified description of functions or guide
(see section headed ”References”).
Active A change to the data becomes active after
• POWER ON (po) ”RESET” key on the front panel of the NCU module
• NEW_CONF (cf) - ”Activate MD” softkey on MMC

- ”RESET” key on the control unit
- Changes possible at block boundaries in
- program mode
• RESET at end of program M2/M30
• RESET (re) ”RESET” key on the control unit
• IMMEDIATELY (so) After input of the value
The activation levels are listed above in order of priority.
Protection levels Protection levels are indicated by numbers with the following meanings:
0 or 10: SIEMENS
1 or 11: OEM-HIGH
2 or 12: OEM-LOW
3 or 13: End user
4 or 14: Keyswitch position 3
7 or 17: Keyswitch position 0.
Complete protection:
The numbers within the range from 0 to 7 determine that assigned data in the
NC program and in the MDA mode cannot be overwritten or read.
Conditional protection:
The numbers within the range from 10 to 17 determine only for user data
(GUD) that assigned data in the NC program and in the MDA mode can be
overwritten or read.
The operation and display are always protected for both protection levels.
The interlock for protection levels 0 to 3 can be canceled by setting a
password, the interlocks 4 to 7 can be canceled via keyswitch position.

Lists 08/99
The user has only access to information which corresponds to the current
protection level and to lower protection levels. The machine data are assigned
varying protection levels as standard function.
The user can change the priority of the protection levels. In the machine data,
only low priority protection levels can be specified, but higher priority levels can
be specified in the setting data.
The following passwords are used for redefinition by the user:
APR (Access protection read) indicate read authorization
APW (Access protection write) indicate write authorization.
After the password, you will find the protection level to be set in each case as
number.
Example 1: Change rights for individual MDs
%_N_SGUD_DEF File for global variables
;$PATH=/_N_DEF_DIR
REDEF $MA_CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR APR 2 APW 2
REDEF $MA_ENC_SEGMENT_NR APR 2 APW 2
REDEF $SN_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD APR 2 APW 2

M30
Example 2: Set rights for a module from the user data (GUD)
(conditional protection)
%_N_GUD6_DEF
;$PATH=/_N_DEF_DIR
APR 15 APW 12 ;Protection levels for all following variables,
;the following variables are not protected
;if nothing is indicated here
DEF CHAN REAL CORRVAL
DEF NCK INT MYCOUNT
...
M30
The file becomes active when the next _N_INITIAL_INI is read in.
Various protection levels are specified for writing (changing) or reading (part
program or PLC). In the section lists of this document, the protection levels per
machine data are indicated in the form of i/j.
Example:
MD 10000 has protection level 2/7, i.e. protection level 2 (corresponding to
password) is required to write data and protection level 7 to read data.
In order to get into the machine data area, keyswitch position 3 is required at
least.
References: /PGA/, Programming Guide, Section 1.5
/FB/, A2, "Various Interface Signals"
/BA/, Operator’s Guide
Unit The unit refers to the default setting for the machine data
SCALING_FACTOR_USER_DEF_MASK,
SCALING_FACTOR_USER_DEF and
SCALING_SYSTEM IS METRIC = 1.
Depending on the MD SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC, the physical units
differ as follows:
MD 10240 = 1 MD 10240 = 0

08/99 Lists
mm inch
mm/min inch/min
m/s2 inch/s2
m/s3 inch/s3
mm/rev inch/rev
”-” is entered in the field if the MD is not based on any physical unit.
Default value This is the value to which the machine data is preset. ” / ” is entered in the list if
there are different default values for the channels.
Some machine data are provided with different default values depending on
the NCU used.
Note
When data is entered via the MMC, the input value is limited to 10 places
plus decimal point and sign.
Value range Specification of the input limits. If no value range is specified, the data type
(minimum and determines the input limits and ” ∗∗∗” is entered in the field.
maximum value)
Data type
BOOLEAN Machine data bit (1 or 0)
BYTE Integer values (from -128 to 127)
DOUBLE Real and integer values
(from ” 4.19*10-307 to ” 1.67*10308)
DWORD Integer values (from -2.147*10 9 to 2.147*10 9 )
STRING Character string (maximum 16 characters)
consisting of capital letters with digits and
underlining
UNSIGNED WORD Integer values (from 0 to 65536)
SIGNED WORD Integer values (from -32768 to 32767)
UNSIGNED DWORD Integer values (from 0 to 4294967300)
SIGNED DWORD Integer values (from -2147483650 to 2147483649)
WORD Hexadecimal values (from 0000 to FFFF)
DWORD Hexadecimal values (from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF)
FLOAT DWORD Real values (from ”8.43∗10-37 to ”3.37∗1038)
Overview of machine The machine and setting data are divided into the following areas:
and setting data Table 2-1 Overview of machine and setting data
Area Designation
From 1000 to 1799 Machine data for drives
From 9000 to 9999 Machine data for operator panel
From 10000 to 18999 General machine data
From 19000 to 19999 Reserved
From 20000 to 28999 Channel-specific machine data

Lists 08/99
Area Designation
From 30000 to 38999 Axis-specific machine data
From 41000 to 41999 General setting data
From 42000 to 42999 Channel-specific setting data
From 43000 to 43999 Axis-specific setting data
From 51000 to 61999 General machine data for compile cycles
From 62000 to 62999 Channel-specific machine data for compile cycles
From 63000 to 63999 Axis-specific machine data for compile cycles
Index for MD and SD The section headed INDEX contains a special index for the machine and
setting data listed in this section.
Data identifiers The designation of the machine data is displayed on the MMC. The internal
data identifier requires additional identifiers. These identifiers must be specified
if a machine data is changed through programming or read in via the serial
interface.
Data areas $MM_ Operator panel data

$MN_/$SN_ General machine data/setting data
$MC_/$SC_ Channel-specific machine data/setting data
$MA_/$SA_ Axis-specific machine data/setting data
$MD_ Drive machine data
Please note: $ System variable
M Machine data
S Setting data
M, N, C, A, D Subarea (second letter)
Axis data are addressed via the axis name. The internal axis designation (AX1,
AX2 ... AX8) or the name specified in MD 10000: AXCONF_NAME_TAB can
be used as the axis name.
E.g.: $MA_JOG_VELO[Y1]=2000
The JOG velocity of axis Y1 is 2000 mm/min.
The contents of a machine data must be preceded and followed by an
apostrophe (e.g. ‘X1’ or ‘H41’) if they are a STRING (e.g. X1) or a hexadecimal
value (e.g. H41).
E.g.: $MN_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE[0]=‘H14’
FDD module 9/18 A in slot 1 of drive bus.
In order to address various contents of a machine data, entries in square
brackets are required.
E.g.: $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[0,X1]=500.000
The 1st fixed-point position of axis X1 is 500

(0=1st, 1=2nd, 2=3rd etc.)

08/99 Lists
Examples $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC[2]=‘H41‘
Output instant of auxiliary functions of 3rd auxiliary function group.
$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0]=‘X1‘
Name of 1st machine axis is X1.
$MA_REF_SET_POS[0,X1]=100.00000
1st reference point value of axis X1 is 100 mm.
Assignment of channel-specific machine data:
CHANDATA(1) Assignment channel 1
$MC_CHAN_NAME=‘CHAN1‘ Channel name for channel 1
$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[1]=‘Y‘ Name of 2nd geometry axis
in channel 1 is Y
...
R10 = 33.75 R10 of channel 1
...
CHANDATA(2) Assignment channel 2
$MC_CHAN_NAME=‘CHAN2‘ Channel name for channel 2
...
R10 = 96.88 R10 of channel 2
...
2.1.2 Handling of machine data
Loading of scaling Scaling machine data also include information which determines how machine
machine data data are scaled in reference to a specific physical unit (e.g. velocities).
The following are scaling machine data:
MD 10220: SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK (activation of scaling factors)
MD 10230: SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF (scaling factors of physical
quantities)
MD 10240: SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC (basic system is metric)
MD 10250: SCALING_VALUE_INCH (conversion factor for switchover to INCH
system)
MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)
When machine data are loaded (via MMC, V24, program), they are scaled with
reference to the physical unit which is valid at the time of loading. If the data
block contains new scaling information (e.g. rotary axis declaration), those
machine data which are dependent on scaling are converted to the new scaling
factor at the next ”Power ON”. The machine data do not therefore contain the
expected values (e.g. F values too low for rotary axis traversal).
Example The open-loop control has been started up with default values. The 4th axis in
the MD file to be loaded is defined as a rotary axis and contains the following
machine data:
$MA_IS_ROT_AX[A1] = 1 (rotary axis)
$MA_MAX_AX_VELO [A1]= 1000 [rev/min] (maximum axis velocity)
When the MD block is loaded, the velocity is interpreted in relation to a linear

axis (default setting $MA_IS_ROT_AX[A1]=0) and scaled according to the
linear velocity. On the next Power ON, the open-loop control detects that this
axis is defined as a linear axis and scales the velocity in relation to rev/min.

Lists 08/99
The machine data then no longer contains the value ”1000”, but the value
”2.77777778” (1000/360). If the MD file is loaded again, then the axis is already
defined as a rotary axis and the velocity is interpreted and scaled as a rotary
axis value. The MD then contains the value ”1000” and is interpreted by the
control in rev/min.
Suggestion for • Change the appropriate machine data manually via the MMC (MD 10220,
step-by-step loading 10230, 10240, 10250, 30300) and initiate NCK booting. Then read in the
of machine data MD block via V24 or part program and initiate NCK booting.
• Set up an MD block with the scaling machine data (MD 10220, 10230,
10240, 10250, 30300). Load this block and initiate NCK booting. Then read
in the entire MD block and initiate NCK booting.
• As an alternative to the methods given above, an MD block can also be
loaded twice (via V24 or as a part program), with an NCK booting after
each loading operation.
Note
If a scaling MD is changed, the control outputs alarm "4070 Normalizing
machine data has been altered".
Saving only machine With regard to the saving of machine and setting data, it is possible to define
data with changed in MD 11210: UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY (save only changed machine
values data) whether all data or only those which deviate from the default settings are
output via the V24 interface.
UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY = 1
Only those data which deviate from the default are output.
UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY = 0
All data are output.
If a value has been changed in a data which is stored as an array, then the
entire MD array is always output
(e.g. MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB).
Note
It can be sensible to back-up only the altered machine data before upgrading
the software in those cases where changes have been made to the machine
data default values. This applies in particular to machine data classified as
SIEMENS protection level 0.
Loading of standard Standard machine data can be loaded in a number of different ways.
data
• Set switch S3 on NCU module to position 1 and initiate NCK reset (re-
initialization of the entire SRAM of the NCU module, all user data are lost)
• MD 11200: INIT_MD (load standard MD on ”next” booting)
Certain input values in MD: INIT_MD allow various data areas to be loaded
with default values on the next NCK booting. The machine data is displayed in
HEX format. After MD: INIT_MD has been set, power ON must be initiated
twice.
The MD is activated on the 1st power ON.

08/99 Lists
On the 2nd power ON, the function is executed and the MD reset to the
value ”0”.
Meaning of input Value ”0”

values The stored machine data MD will be loaded during the next booting operation.
Value ”1”
All MDs - with the exception of memory-configuring data - will be overwritten
with default values during the next booting operation.
Value ”2”
All memory-configuring MDs will be overwritten with default values during the
next booting operation.
Memory-configuring MDs are described in:
References: /IAD/, Installation and Start-Up Guide, Memory Configuration
- MD 10010: ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP
- All machine data starting with ”MM_”
MD 18000 - 18999 (general MDs)
MD 28000 - 28999 (channel-specific MDs)
MD 38000 - 38999 (axis-specific MDs)
Value ”4”
- All compile cycle MDs will be deleted during the next booting operation.
Note
The drive machine data described in the following section are significant for
SINUMERIK 840D and 810D. For control parameters of analog drives with
regard to SINUMERIK FM-NC, please refer to:
References: /IAA/, Simodrive 611A, Installation and Start-Up Guide

Lists 08/99
2.2 Drive machine data

The display of the machine data has been extended in SW Version 4 and
higher. Display filters and System have been newly introduced.
Display filters The quantity of machine data displayed on the operator panel can be limited to
the machine data of interest by means of the display filters. Machine data are
displayed on the operator panel if at least one of the filters indicated in the
respective machine data has been activated by the user or if the mode ”All
machine data” has been set. The short descriptions of the filters indicated are
used again in the operator interface for filter activation. They have the following
meaning:
• D01 Controller data
• D02 Monitoring / limitations
• D03 Message data
• D04 Status data
• D05 Motor / power section
• D06 Measuring system
• D07 Safety Integrated
• D08 Standard machine
• EXP Expert mode
System The following is indicated for system:

810D if machine data is relevant only for 810D systems
840D if machine data is relevant only for 840D systems
Nothing if machine data is valid for both systems
MD-Number Identifier Cross reference

Display filters Meaning Type Rot/Lin Protection System
Unit Default Minimum Maximum Data type Active

08/99 Lists
1000 CURRCTRL_CYCLE_TIME CR: / DS1/

Current controller cycle VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
31.25 us 5 2 8 UNS. WORD PowerOn
1000 CURRCTRL_CYCLE_TIME CR: / DS1 /

D01, D05, EXP Current controller cycle VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1001 SPEEDCTRL_CYCLE_TIME CR: / DD2/

Speed controller cycle VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1001 SPEEDCTRL_CYCLE_TIME CR: / DD2 /

D01, D05, EXP Speed controller cycle VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1002 MONITOR_CYCLE_TIME CR: / DB1/

Monitoring cycle VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1002 MONITOR_CYCLE_TIME CR: / DB1 /

D05, D02, EXP Monitoring cycle VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1003 STS_CONFIG CR: / DS1/

Configuration STS VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
HEX 330 0 ffff UNS. WORD PowerOn
1003 STS_CONFIG CR: / DS1 /

EXP Configuration STS VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D
HEX 330 0 7f0 UNS. WORD PowerOn
1004 CTRL_CONFIG CR: / DD2 /

EXP Configuration structure (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 1015 UNS. WORD PowerOn
1005 ENC_RESOL_MOTOR CR: / DG1, DM1/

Motor measuring system encoder increments VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
- 2048 1 8192 UNS. WORD PowerOn
1005 ENC_RESOL_MOTOR CR: / DG1, DM1 /

D06 Motor measuring system encoder increments VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1007 ENC_RESOL_DIRECT CR: / DG1/

Encoder increments of the direct measuring system VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1007 ENC_RESOL_DIRECT CR: / DG1 /

D06 Encoder increments of the direct measuring system VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
- 0 0 2147483647 UNS. DWORD PowerOn
1008 ENC_PHASE_ERROR_CORRECTION CR: / DG1 /

EXP, D06 Encoder phase error compensation IM VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
degrees 0.0000 -20.0000 20.0000 FLOAT immediately

Lists 08/99
1011 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG CR: / DG1/

Configuration of the actual value sensing IM VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1011 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG CR: / DG1 /

D06 Configuration of the actual value sensing IM VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 f1ff UNS. WORD PowerOn
1012 FUNC_SWITCH CR: / DB1/

Function switch VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
HEX 4 0 ffff UNS. WORD immediately
HSA: c
1012 FUNC_SWITCH CR: / DB1 /

D01, D02, D03 Function switch VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 b5 UNS. WORD immediately
1013 ENABLE_STAR_DELTA CR: /DE1 /

D05 Enable star/delta changeover (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1014 UF_MODE_ENABLE CR: / DE1 /

EXP, D04 Activate V/f operation (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1015 PEMSD_MODE_ENABLE CR: / DE1 /

- Activate PE-MSD (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1016 COMMUTATION_ANGLE_OFFSET CR: / DL1 /

- Commutating angle offset (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
degrees 0.0000 -360.0000 360.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1017 STARTUP_ASSISTANCE CR: / DL1 /

D04 Setting-up aid (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
- 0 0 1 UNS. WORD immediately
1019 CURRENT_ROTORPOS_IDENT CR: / DL1/

- Current rotor position identification (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
% 12.0000 0.0000 100.0000 FLOAT immediately
1019 CURRENT_ROTORPOS_IDENT CR: /DM1 /

- Current rotor position identification (not 810D) VSA ROT 2/4 840D
1020 MAX_TURN_ROTORPOS_IDENT CR: /DM1 /

- Maximum rotation of rotor position identification (not VSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
degrees 10.0000 0.0000 90.0000 FLOAT immediately
1020 MAX_MOVE_ROTORPOS_IDENT CR: / DL1/

- Maximum move of rotor position identification (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
mm 5.0000 0.0000 30.0000 FLOAT immediately
1021 ENC_ABS_TURNS_MOTOR CR: / DG1 /

D06 Multiturn resolution absolute value encoder motor VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4

08/99 Lists
1022 ENC_ABS_RESOL_MOTOR CR: / DG1/

Measuring steps of the motor absolute track VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1022 ENC_ABS_RESOL_MOTOR CR: / DG1 /

D06 Measuring steps of the motor absolute track VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1023 ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_MOTOR CR: / DG1/

Diagnosis measuring circuit motor absolute track VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1023 ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_MOTOR CR: / DG1 /

D06 Diagnosis measuring circuit motor absolute track VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1024 DIVISION_LIN_SCALE CR: / DL1/

- Grid spacing, motor measuring system (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
Nm 20000 0 2147483647 UNS. DWORD PowerOn
1025 SERIAL_NO_ENCODER CR: / DG1 /

D06, EXP Serial number motor measuring system (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D
1030 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG_DIRECT CR: / DG1/

Configuration actual-value sensing DM VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1030 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG_DIRECT CR: / DG1 /

D06 Configuration actual-value sensing DM VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 c018 UNS. WORD PowerOn
1031 ENC_ABS_TURNS_DIRECT CR: / DG1 /

D06 Multiturn resolution of the absolute encoder DM VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1032 ENC_ABS_RESOL_DIRECT CR: / DG1/

Measuring steps of the absolute track DM VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1032 ENC_ABS_RESOL_DIRECT CR: / DG1 /

D06 Measuring steps of the absolute track DM VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1033 ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_DIRECT CR: / DG1/

Diagnosis dir. measuring system absolute track VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1033 ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_DIRECT CR: / DG1 /

D06 Diagnosis dir. measuring system absolute track VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1034 DIVISION_LIN_SCALE_DM CR: / DL1/

- Grid spacing, direct measuring system (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
Nm 20000 0 2147483647 UNS. DWORD PowerOn
1038 SERIAL_NO_ENCODER_DM CR: / DG1 /

D06, EXP Serial number for direct measuring system (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D

Lists 08/99
1100 PWM_FREQUENCY CR: / DS1 /

D01, D05, EXP Pulse-width modulation frequency (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
Hz 4000.0000 2000.0000 8000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
HSA: 3200.0000
1101 CTRLOUT_DELAY CR: / DS1 /

D01, D05, EXP Computation deadtime of the current control loop (not VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
us 62 0 124 WORD PowerOn
1102 MOTOR_CODE CR: / DM1 /

D04, D05 Motor code number VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1103 MOTOR_NOMINAL_CURRENT CR: / DM1, DÜ1 /

D05 Motor rated current VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
A 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1104 MOTOR_MAX_CURRENT CR: / DM1, DÜ1/

Maximum motor current VSA 2/4 810D
A 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1104 MOTOR_MAX_CURRENT CR: / DM1, DÜ1 /

D05 Maximum motor current VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
A 0.0400 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1105 MOTOR_MAX_CURRENT_REDUCTION CR: / DÜ1 /

D05, D02 Reducing the maximum motor current VSA ROT/LIN 2/4
% 100 0 100 WORD immediately
1106 INVERTER_CODE CR: / DM1 /

D05, D04 Power section code number VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1107 INVERTER_MAX_CURRENT CR: / DM1 /

D05 Transistor limiting current VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
A 200.0000 1.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1108 INVERTER_MAX_THERMAL_CURR CR: / DM1 /

D05 Power module limiting current VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
A 200.0000 1.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1109 INVERTER_MAX_S6_CURRENT CR: /DM1 /

D05 Power module limiting current S6 HSA ROT 2/4
A 200.0000 1.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1111 INVERTER_RATED_CURRENT CR: / DM1 /

D05 Rated power module current VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
A 200.0000 1.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1112 NUM_POLE_PAIRS CR: / DM1/

Motor pole pair number VSA 2/4 810D
1112 NUM_POLE_PAIRS CR: / DM1 /

D05 Motor pole pair number VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1113 TORQUE_CURRENT_RATIO CR: / DM1/

Torque constant VSA 2/4 810D
Nm/A 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1113 FORCE_CURRENT_RATIO CR: / DL1/

D05 Force constant VSA LIN 2/4 840D
N/A 0.0000 0.0000 2000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1113 TORQUE_CURRENT_RATIO CR: /DM1 /

D05 Torque constant VSA ROT 2/4 840D
Nm/A 0.0000 0.0000 300.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1114 EMF_VOLTAGE CR: / DM1/

Voltage constant VSA 2/4 810D
V 0.0000 0.0000 300.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1114 EMF_VOLTAGE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Voltage constant VSA ROT 2/4 840D
V 0.0000 0.0000 5000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1114 EMF_VOLTAGE CR: / DL1/

D05 Voltage constant VSA LIN 2/4 840D
Vs/m 0.0000 0.0000 5000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1115 ARMATURE_RESISTANCE CR: / DM1/

Armature resistance VSA 2/4 810D
ohm 0.0000 0.0000 20.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1115 ARMATURE_RESISTANCE CR: / DM1 /

D05 Armature resistance VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ohm 0.0000 0.0000 1000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1116 ARMATURE_INDUCTANCE CR: / DM1/

Armature inductance VSA 2/4 810D
mH 0.0000 0.0000 100.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1116 ARMATURE_INDUCTANCE CR: / DM1 /

D05 Armature inductance VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
mH 0.0000 0.0000 300.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1117 MOTOR_INERTIA CR: / DM1/

Motor moment of inertia VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
kgm² 0.0000 0.0000 32.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
HSA: 0.0010
1117 MOTOR_MASS CR: / DL1/

D05 Motor mass VSA LIN 2/4 840D
kg 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT immediately
1117 MOTOR_INERTIA CR: /DM1 /

D05 Motor moment of inertia VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
kgm² 0.0000 0.0000 32.0000 FLOAT immediately
HSA: 0.0010
1118 MOTOR_STANDSTILL_CURRENT CR: / DM1 /

D05 Motor standstill current VSA ROT/LIN 2/4
A 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn

Lists 08/99
1119 SERIES_INDUCTANCE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Inductance of the series reactor HSA ROT 2/4
mH 0.0000 0.0000 65.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1120 CURRCTRL_GAIN CR: / DS1 /

D01, EXP Current controller proportional gain VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
V/A 10.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1121 CURRCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME CR: / DS1 /

D01, EXP Current controller integral action time VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
us 2000.0000 0.0000 8000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1124 CURRCTRL_REF_MODEL_DELAY CR: / DS1/

Balancing the reference model current VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
- 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000 FLOAT immediately
1124 CURRCTRL_REF_MODEL_DELAY CR: / DS1 /

D01, EXP Balancing the reference model current VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1125 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_1 CR: / DE1 /

D04, EXP Ramp-up time 1 in V/f operation (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
s 5.0000 0.0100 100.0000 FLOAT immediately
1126 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_2 CR: / DE1 /

D04, EXP Ramp-up time 2 in V/f operation (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1127 UF_VOLTAGE_AT_F0 CR: /DE1 /

D04, D05, EXP Voltage at f=0 in V/f operation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
V 2.0000 0.0000 20.0000 FLOAT immediately
1129 POWER_FACTOR_COS_PHI CR: /DM1 /

D05 Cos phi power factor (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
- 0.8000 0.0000 1.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1130 MOTOR_NOMINAL_POWER CR: /DM1 /

D05 Rated motor output HSA ROT 2/4
kW 0.0000 0.0000 1500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1132 MOTOR_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE CR: / DM1/

Rated motor voltage HSA 2/4 810D
V 0.0000 0.0000 5000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1132 MOTOR_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Rated motor voltage HSA ROT 2/4 840D
V 380.0000 0.0000 5000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1134 MOTOR_NOMINAL_FREQUENCY CR: / DM1/

Rated motor frequency HSA 2/4 810D
Hz 0.0000 0.0000 3000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1134 MOTOR_NOMINAL_FREQUENCY CR: /DM1 /

D05 Rated motor frequency HSA ROT 2/4 840D
Hz 50.0000 0.0000 3000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1135 MOTOR_NOLOAD_VOLTAGE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Motor no-load voltage HSA ROT 2/4

08/99 Lists
1136 MOTOR_NOLOAD_CURRENT CR: / DM1 /

D05 Motor no-load current VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
A 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT immediately
1137 STATOR_COLD_RESISTANCE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Cold stator resistance HSA ROT 2/4
ohm 0.0000 0.0000 120.0000 FLOAT immediately
1138 ROTOR_COLD_RESISTANCE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Cold rotor resistance HSA ROT 2/4
1139 STATOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Stator leakage reactance HSA ROT 2/4
1140 ROTOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Rotor leakage reactance HSA ROT 2/4
1141 MAGNETIZING_REACTANCE CR: /DM1 /

D05 Magnetizing reactance HSA ROT 2/4
1142 FIELD_WEAKENING_SPEED CR: / DM1, DD2/

Threshold speed for field weakening HSA 2/4 810D
1/min 0.0000 0.0000 50000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1142 FIELD_WEAKENING_SPEED CR: / DM1, DD2 /

D05 Threshold speed for field weakening VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1/min 0.0000 0.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1143 LH_CURVE_UPPER_SPEED CR: / DM1, DD2/

Upper speed for the L_h characteristic HSA 2/4 810D
1143 LH_CURVE_UPPER_SPEED CR: /DM1, DD2 /

- Upper speed for the L_h characteristic HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1144 LH_CURVE_GAIN CR: /DM1, DD2 /

- Gain factor of the L_h characteristic HSA ROT 2/4
% 100.0000 100.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1145 STALL_TORQUE_REDUCTION CR: / DM1, DÜ1 /

D05 Stall torque reduction factor VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1146 MOTOR_MAX_ALLOWED_SPEED CR: / DM1, DÜ1/

Maximum motor speed VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1146 MOTOR_MAX_ALLOWED_SPEED CR: /DM1, DÜ1 /

D05 Maximum motor speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
HSA: 1500.0000
1146 MOTOR_MAX_ALLOWED_SPEED CR: / DL1/

D05 Maximum motor speed VSA LIN 2/4 840D
m/min 0.0000 0.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn

Lists 08/99
1147 SPEED_LIMIT CR: / DÜ1/

Motor speed limit VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
HSA: 8000.0000
1147 SPEED_LIMIT CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, D05 Motor speed limit VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
HSA: 8000.0000
1147 SPEED_LIMIT CR: / DL1/

D02, D05 Maximum permissible motor speed VSA LIN 2/4 840D
m/min 120.0000 0.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1148 ACTUAL_STALL_POWER_SPEED CR: /DD1 /

D04 Threshold speed of pull-out power (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1/min 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1150 FIELDCTRL_GAIN CR: /DS1 /

D01, EXP Flux controller P-gain HSA ROT 2/4
A/(Vs) 400.0000 0.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1151 FIELDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME CR: /DS1 /

D01, EXP Flux controller integral-action time HSA ROT 2/4
ms 10.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT immediately
1160 FLUX_AQUISITION_SPEED CR: / DS1/

Threshold speed for flux sensing HSA 2/4 810D
1160 FLUX_ACQUISITION_SPEED CR: /DS1 /

D01, EXP Threshold speed for flux sensing HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1161 FIXED_LINK_VOLTAGE CR: / DS1 /

D02 Fixed DC link voltage VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
V 0 0 700 UNS. WORD immediately
1170 POLE_PAIR_PITCH CR: / DL1/

D05 Pole pair pitch (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
mm 72.0000 0.0000 1000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1180 CURRCTRL_ADAPT_CURRENT_1 CR: / FBU, DS1 /

Lower current limit adaptation (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1181 CURRCTRL_ADAPT_CURRENT_2 CR: / FBU, DS1 /

Upper current limit adaptation (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1182 REDUCE_ARMATURE_INDUCTANCE CR: / FBU, DS1 /

Current controller adaptation factor (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1183 CURRCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE CR: / DS1 /

- Current controller adaptation on (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1190 TORQUE_LIMIT_FROM_NC CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Evaluation of torque limit (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
Nm 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1191 TORQUE_LIMIT_ADAPT_SERVO CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Adapting servo torque limit (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1200 NUM_CURRENT_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Number of current setpoint filters VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1200 NUM_CURRENT_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01 Number of current setpoint filters VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1201 CURRENT_FILTER_CONFIG [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Type of current setpoint filter VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1201 CURRENT_FILTER_CONFIG [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01 Type of current setpoint filter VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 f UNS. WORD immediately
1202 CURRENT_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
Hz 0.0000 0.0000 3999.0000 FLOAT immediately
1202 CURRENT_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01 Natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1203 CURRENT_FILTER_1_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Damping for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1203 CURRENT_FILTER_1_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01 Damping for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D



D01 Damping for current setpoint filter 2 VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4



Lists 08/99




1210 CURRENT_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Blocking frequency for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1210 CURRENT_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01 Blocking frequency for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1211 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Bandwidth for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1211 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01 Bandwidth for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1212 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BW_NUM [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Bandwidth numerator for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1212 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BW_NUM [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01, EXP Bandwidth numerator for current setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D






08/99 Lists













1222 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BS_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2 /

D01, EXP BSF natural frequency current setpoint f. 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D


Lists 08/99


1230 TORQUE_LIMIT_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, EXP 1st torque limit VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1230 FORCE_LIMIT_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D02, EXP 1 st force threshold VSA LIN 2/4
1231 TORQUE_LIMIT_2 CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, EXP 2nd torque limit (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1231 FORCE_LIMIT_2 CR: / DL1/

D02, EXP 2nd force threshold (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1232 FORCE_LIMIT_SWITCH_SPEED CR: / DL1/

D02, EXP Changeover speed from MD 1230 to MD 1231 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1232 TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_SPEED CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Changeover speed from MD 1230 to MD 1231 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1233 LIMIT_GENERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D02, EXP Generator force limiting (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1233 TORQUE_LIMIT_GENERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Regenerative limiting (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1234 FORCE_LIMIT_SWITCH_HYST CR: / DL1/

D02, EXP Hysteresis MD 1232 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1234 TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_HYST CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Hysteresis MD 1232 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1235 POWER_LIMIT_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP 1st power limit VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1236 POWER_LIMIT_2 CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP 2nd power limit (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1237 POWER_LIMIT_GENERATOR CR: / DÜ1/

Maximum regenerative power VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
kW 100.0000 0.3000 500.0000 FLOAT immediately

08/99 Lists
1237 POWER_LIMIT_GENERATOR CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Maximum regenerative power VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
kW 100.0000 0.1000 500.0000 FLOAT immediately
1238 CURRENT_LIMIT CR: / DÜ1/

Motor current limit HSA 2/4 810D
1238 CURRENT_LIMIT CR: /DÜ1 /

D02 Motor current limit HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1239 TORQUE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP CR: /DÜ1 /

D02 Torque limit in setting-up operation VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1239 FORCE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP CR: / DL1/

D02 Force limit in setting-up operation VSA LIN 2/4
1245 CURRENT_SMOOTH_SPEED CR: / DL1/

EXP Threshold speed dependend F-setpoint smoothing (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1245 CURRENT_SMOOTH_SPEED CR: /DD2 /

EXP Threshold speed dep. on M setpoint smoothing (not VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
1246 CURRENT_SMOOTH_HYSTERESIS CR: / DL1/

EXP Hysteresis speed dependend F-setpoint smoothing (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1246 CURRENT_SMOOTH_HYSTERESIS CR: /DD2 /

EXP Hysteresis speed dep. M setpoint smoothing (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1247 MOTOR_SWITCH_SPEED CR: /DE1 /

EXP Speed threshold for motor changeover (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1250 ACTUAL_CURRENT_FILTER_FREQ CR: / DB1/

Transition frequency for actual current smoothing VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1250 ACTUAL_CURRENT_FILTER_FREQ CR: / DB1 /

D04 Transition frequency for actual current smoothing VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1251 LOAD_SMOOTH_TIME CR: / DD1 /

- Time constant for load smoothing (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1252 TORQUE_FILTER_FREQUENCY CR: / DB1/

Transition frequency of torque setpoint smoothing VSA/HSA 2/4 810D

Lists 08/99
1252 TORQUE_FILTER_FREQUENCY CR: /DB1 /

D04 Transition frequency of torque setpoint smoothing VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1252 FORCE_FILTER_FREQUENCY CR: / DL1/

D04 Transition freq. for the force setpoint smoothing VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1254 CURRENT_MONITOR_FILTER_TIME CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP Time constant for current monitoring VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1300 SAFETY_CYCLE_TIME CR: / FBSI /

D07 SI monitoring cycle (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1301 SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE CR: / FBSI /

D07 Enable safety functions (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 ffeb UNS. WORD PowerOn
1302 SAFE_IS_ROT_AX CR: / FBSI /

D07 Axis-specific bits of safety functions (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1305 SAFE_MODULO_RANGE CR: / FBSI /

D07 Actual value range for SN for rotary axes (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
mDegrees 0 0 737280000 UNS. DWORD PowerOn
1316 SAFE_ENC_CONFIG CR: / FBSI /

D07 Motor encoder configuration of safety functions (not VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1317 SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST CR: / FBSI /

D07 Grid spacing of linear scale (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
um, mDegrees 10.0000 0.0100 8000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1318 SAFE_ENC_RESOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Encoder lines per revolution (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1320 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_PITCH CR: / FBSI /

D07 Spindle pitch (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
mm/rev 10.0000 0.1000 8388.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1321 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_DENOM [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Denominator of gear unit encoder / load (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1322 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_NUMERA [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Numerator of gear unit encoder / load (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1330 SAFE_STANDSTILL_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Standstill tolerance (SBH) (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
um, mDegrees 1000 1 100000 DWORD PowerOn
1331 SAFE_VELO_LIMIT [n] 0 ...3 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Limit values for SG (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
mm/min, rev/min 2000.0000 0.0000 1000000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn

08/99 Lists
1332 SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR [n] 0 ...15 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Override factor for SG (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
% 100 1 100 UNS. WORD PowerOn
1334 SAFE_POS_LIMIT_PLUS [n] 0 ...1 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Upper limit value for SE (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
um, mDegrees 100000000 -2147000000 2147000000 DWORD PowerOn
1335 SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MINUS [n] 0 ...1 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Lower limit value for SE (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
um, mDegrees -100000000 -2147000000 2147000000 DWORD PowerOn
1336 SAFE_CAM_POS_PLUS [n] 0 ...3 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Plus cam position SN (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
um, mDegrees 10000 -2147000000 2147000000 DWORD PowerOn
1337 SAFE_CAM_POS_MINUS [n] 0 ...3 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Minus cam position SN (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
um, mDegrees -10000 -2147000000 2147000000 DWORD PowerOn
1340 SAFE_CAM_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Tolerance for safe cams (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1342 SAFE_POS_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Actual value tolerance for the cross-check (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1344 SAFE_REFP_POS_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Actual value tolerance safe axis position (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1346 SAFE_VELO_X CR: / FBSI /

D07 Speed limit nx (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1348 SAFE_STOP_VELO_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Actual speed tolerance for SBR (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1349 SAFE_SLIP_VELO_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Tolerance 2 encoder drift/slip (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1350 SAFE_MODE_SWITCH_TIME CR: / FBSI /

D07 Tolerance time for SGE changeover (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 500.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1351 SAFE_VELO_SWITCH_DELAY CR: / FBSI /

D07 Delay time for SG changeover (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1352 SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_C CR: / FBSI /

D07 Transition time from STOP C to SBH (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1353 SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_D CR: / FBSI /

D07 Transition time from STOP D to SBH (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn

Lists 08/99
1354 SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_E CR: / FBSI /

D07 Transition time from STOP E to SBH (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1356 SAFE_PULSE_DISABLE_DELAY CR: / FBSI /

D07 Delay time for pulse suppression (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1357 SAFE_PULSE_DIS_CHECK_TIME CR: / FBSI /

D07 Time for testing pulse suppression (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 100.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
1360 SAFE_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL CR: / FBSI /

D07 Creep speed pulse suppression (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1361 SAFE_VELO_STOP_MODE CR: / FBSI /

D07 Stop reaction with SG (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1362 SAFE_POS_STOP_MODE CR: / FBSI /

D07 Stop reaction with SE (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1363 SAFE_VELO_STOP_REACTION [n] 0 ...3 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / FBSI /

D07 Specific SG stop reaction (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1390 SAFE_FIRMWARE_VERSION CR: / FBSI /

D07 Firmware (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
- 0 0 4294967295 UNS. DWORD immediately
1391 SAFE_DIAG_NC_RESULTLIST1 CR: / FBSI /

D07 Diagnostics: NC result list 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1392 SAFE_DIAG_611D_RESULTLIST1 CR: / FBSI /

D07 Diagnostics: 611D result list 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1393 SAFE_DIAG_NC_RESULTLIST2 CR: / FBSI /

D07 Diagnostics: NC result list 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1394 SAFE_DIAG_611D_RESULTLIST2 CR: / FBSI /

D07 Diagnostics: 611D result list 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1395 SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS CR: / FBSI /

D07 Diagnostics for STOP F (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
- 32767 0 32767 WORD immediately
1396 SAFE_ACKN_WRITE CR: / FBSI /

D07 User agreement (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1397 SAFE_ACKN_READ CR: / FBSI /

D07 611D internal agreement (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1398 SAFE_ACT_CHECKSUM CR: / FBSI /

D07 Display of SI-MD check sum (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1399 SAFE_DES_CHECKSUM CR: / FBSI /

D07 SI-MD check sum (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1400 MOTOR_RATED_SPEED CR: / DM1/

Rated motor speed VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1400 MOTOR_RATED_SPEED CR: /DM1 /

D05 Rated motor speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
HSA: 1450.0000
1400 MOTOR_RATED_SPEED CR: / DL1/

D05 Rated motor speed VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1401 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD1/

Maximum usable motor speed VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1401 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD1 /

D02, D05 Maximum usable motor speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1401 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D02, D05 Maximum motor operating speed VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1403 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED CR: / DL1/

D02 Switch-off speed for cancelling of pulses VSA LIN 2/4
1403 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED CR: /DB1 /

D02 Shut down speed pulse suppression VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
HSA: 2.0000
1404 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_DELAY CR: / DB1 /

D02 Timer impulse suppression VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
HSA: 5000.0000
1405 MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DÜ1 /

D02, D05 Monitoring motor speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1405 MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D02, D05 Monitoring speed of motor VSA LIN 2/4
1406 SPEEDCTRL_TYPE CR: / DD2 /

EXP Speed controller type (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D

Lists 08/99
1407 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

P gain of speed controller VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
Nms/rad 0.3000 0.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1407 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, D08 P gain speed control VSA LIN 2/4 840D
Ns/m 2000.0000 0.0000 1000000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1407 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, D08 P gain of speed controller VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1408 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

P gain of upper adaptation speed VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1408 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP P gain upper adaption speed VSA LIN 2/4 840D
Ns/m 2000.0000 0.0000 1000000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1408 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP P gain of upper adaptation speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1409 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, D08 Integral action time of speed controller VSA LIN 2/4
1409 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, D08 Integral action time of speed controller VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1410 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Integral action time of upper adaptation speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1410 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Integral action time of upper adaption speed VSA LIN 2/4
1411 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1 CR: / DD2/

Lower adaptation speed VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1411 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1 CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Lower adaptation speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1411 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1 CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Lower adaption speed threshold VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1412 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2 CR: / DD2/

Upper adaptation speed VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1412 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2 CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Upper adaption speed threshold VSA LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1412 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2 CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Upper adaptation speed VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1413 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Select adaptation speed controller VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1413 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Select adaptation speed controller VSA LIN 2/4
1414 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Natural frequency for the reference model speed (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1414 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Natural frequency for the reference model speed (not VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
1415 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Damping of reference model speed (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1415 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Damping of reference model speed (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1416 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DELAY CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Balancing the reference model speed (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1416 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DELAY CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Balancing the reference model speed (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1417 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DB1/

Signal n_x for 'n_act < n_x' VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1417 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DB1 /

D03 Signal n_x for 'n_act < n_x' VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1417 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D03 v_x for "v_act < v_x" signal VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1418 SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DB1/

vmin for 'vact < vmin' signal VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1418 SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DB1 /

D03 vmin for 'vact < vmin' signal VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D

Lists 08/99
1418 SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D03 v_min for "v_act < v_min" signal VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1420 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_SETUP CR: / DÜ1/

Max. motor speed, setting-up operation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1420 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_SETUP CR: /DÜ1 /

D02 Max. motor speed, setting-up operation VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1420 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_SETUP CR: / DL1/

D02 Maximum speed in setting-up operation VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1421 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_FEEDBK [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD1 /

D01 Time constant integrator feedback VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1424 SPEED_FFW_FILTER_TIME CR: /DS1 /

D01, EXP Balancing the speed precontrol channel (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1424 SPEED_FFW_FILTER_TIME CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Balancing the speed precontrol channel (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1425 SPEED_FFW_DELAY CR: / DS1 /

D01, EXP Balancing computation deadtime I-controller (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1426 SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DB1/

Tolerance bandwidth for ’n_set = n_act’ signal VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1426 SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DB1 /

D03 Tolerance bandwidth for ’n_set = n_act’ signal VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1426 SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D03 Tolerance bandwidth for "v_set = v_act" signal VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1427 SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY CR: /DB1 /

D03 Delay time ’vset=vact’ sign. VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1427 SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY CR: / DL1/

D03 VSA LIN 2/4
1428 FORCE_THRESHOLD_X [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D03 Threshold force Fdx VSA LIN 2/4
1428 TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DB1 /

D03 Threshold force Mdx VSA/HSA ROT 2/4

08/99 Lists
1429 TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X_DELAY CR: /DB1 /

D03 Delay time 'Md < Mdx' signal VSA/HSA ROT 2/4
1429 TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X_DELAY CR: / DL1/

D03 Delay time 'Fd < Fdx' signal VSA LIN 2/4
1451 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1_AM [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DE1 /

D01 P gain of speed control loop IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1453 SPDCTRL_INTEGR_TIME_1_AM [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DE1 /

D01 Integral action time of speed control loop IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1458 DES_CURRENT_OPEN_LOOP_AM CR: /DE1 /

D01 Current setpoint controlled range IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1459 TORQUE_SMOOTH_TIME_AM CR: /DE1 /

D01 Torque smoothing time constant IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1465 SWITCH_SPEED_MSD_AM CR: /DE1 /

D01, D06 Changeover speed MSD/IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1466 SWITCH_SPD_OPEN_LOOP_AM CR: /DE1 /

D01 Changeover speed closed/open loop IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1500 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Number of speed setpoint filters VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1500 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01 Number of speed setpoint filters VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1500 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01 Number of speed setpoint filters VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1501 SPEED_FILTER_TYPE [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01 Speed setpoint filter type (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1501 SPEED_FILTER_TYPE [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01 Speed setpoint filter type (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1502 SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DD2/

Time constant for speed setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1502 SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01 Time constant for speed setpoint filter 1 VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D

Lists 08/99
1502 SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01 Time constant for speed setpoint filter 1 VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1503 SPEED_FILTER_2_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01 Time constant for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1503 SPEED_FILTER_2_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01 Time constant for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1506 SPEED_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1506 SPEED_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1507 SPEED_FILTER_1_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Damping for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1507 SPEED_FILTER_1_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Damping for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1508 SPEED_FILTER_2_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1508 SPEED_FILTER_2_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1509 SPEED_FILTER_2_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Damping for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1509 SPEED_FILTER_2_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Damping for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1514 SPEED_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Blocking frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1514 SPEED_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Blocking frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1515 SPEED_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Bandwidth for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1515 SPEED_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Bandwidth for speed setpoint filter 1 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1516 SPEED_FILTER_1_BW_NUMERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Bandwidth numerator for speed setpoint filter 1 (not VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
1516 SPEED_FILTER_1_BW_NUMERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Bandwidth numerator for speed setpoint filter 1 (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1517 SPEED_FILTER_2_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Blocking frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1517 SPEED_FILTER_2_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Blocking frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1518 SPEED_FILTER_2_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Bandwidth for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1518 SPEED_FILTER_2_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Bandwidth for speed setpoint filter 2 (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1519 SPEED_FILTER_2_BW_NUMERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP Bandwidth numerator for speed setpoint filter 2 (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1519 SPEED_FILTER_2_BW_NUMERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP Bandwidth numerator for speed setpoint filter 2 (not VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
1520 SPEED_FILTER_1_BS_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP BSF natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (not VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
1520 SPEED_FILTER_1_BS_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP BSF natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1521 SPEED_FILTER_2_BS_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: /DD2 /

D01, EXP BSF natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (not VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
1521 SPEED_FILTER_2_BS_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / DL1/

D01, EXP BSF natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (not VSA LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1522 ACT_SPEED_FILTER_TIME CR: / DD2 /

D01 Time const. Speed actual value filter (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

Lists 08/99
1600 ALARM_MASK_POWER_ON CR: / DB1/

Suppressible alarms (Power-On) VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1600 ALARM_MASK_POWER_ON CR: / DB1 /

D02, EXP Suppressible alarms (Power-On) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 83be UNS. WORD immediately
1601 ALARM_MASK_RESET CR: / DB1/

Suppressible alarms (reset) VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1601 ALARM_MASK_RESET CR: / DB1 /

D02, EXP Suppressible alarms (reset) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 73c0 UNS. WORD immediately
1602 MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, D05 Motor temperature alarm threshold VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
C 120 0 200 UNS. WORD immediately
1603 MOTOR_TEMP_ALARM_TIME CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, D05 Time for motor temperature alarm VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
s 240 0 600 UNS. WORD immediately
1604 LINK_VOLTAGE_WARN_LIMIT CR: / DÜ1/

DC-link undervoltage alarm threshold VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1604 LINK_VOLTAGE_WARN_LIMIT CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, EXP DC-link undervoltage alarm threshold VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1605 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_TIME CR: / DÜ1 /

D02 Time n-controller at limit stop VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1606 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_THRESHOLD CR: / DÜ1/

Threshold n-controller at limit stop VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
HSA: 30.0000
1606 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_THRESHOLD CR: /DÜ1 /

D02 Threshold n-controller at limit stop VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
HSA: 30.0000
1606 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_THRESHOLD CR: / DL1/

D02 Threshold speed controller limit VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1607 MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, D05 Motor temperature shutdown limit VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1608 MOTOR_FIXED_TEMPERATURE CR: / DÜ1 /

D02, D05 Fixed temperature VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4

08/99 Lists
1610 DIAGNOSIS_ACTIVATION_FLAGS CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Diagnostic functions (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HSA: 1
1611 DNDT_THRESHOLD CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Response threshold dn/dt VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
% 800 0 1600 UNS. WORD immediately
1612 ALARM_REACTION_POWER_ON CR: / DB1/

Configuring shutdown response to PO alarms VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
HEX db2 0 ffff UNS. WORD immediately
HSA: ffff
1612 ALARM_REACTION_POWER_ON CR: / DB1 /

D02 Configuring shutdown response to PO alarms VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX dbc 0 ffff UNS. WORD immediately
HSA: ffff
1613 ALARM_REACTION_RESET CR: / DB1 /

D02 Configuring shutdown response to RESET alarms VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
HSA: ffff
1615 SMOOTH_RUN_TOL CR: / DD1/

Smooth running monitoring tolerance VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1615 SMOOTH_RUN_TOL CR: /DD1 /

EXP Smooth running monitoring tolerance VSA/HSA ROT 0/0 840D
1615 SMOOTH_RUN_TOL CR: / DL1/

EXP Tolerance bandwidth for the smooth running monit. VSA LIN 0/0 840D
1620 PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS CR: / DD1 /

D03 Variable message function bits (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
HEX 0 0 7 UNS. WORD immediately
1621 PROG_SIGNAL_NR CR: / DD1 /

D03 Signal number, variable message function (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1622 PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS CR: / DD1 /

D03 Address, variable message function (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1623 PROG_SIGNAL_THRESHOLD CR: / DD1 /

D03 Threshold, variable message function (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1624 PROG_SIGNAL_HYSTERESIS CR: / DD1 /

D03 Hysteresis, variable message function (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1625 PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY CR: / DD1 /

D03 Pickup delay time, variable message function (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
ms 0 0 10000 UNS. WORD immediately

Lists 08/99
1626 PROG_SIGNAL_OFF_DELAY CR: / DD1 /

D03 Dropout delay, variable message function (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1630 LINK_VOLTAGE_MON_THRESHOLD CR: / DÜ1 /

EXP Response threshold, only DC link monitoring (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1631 LINK_VOLTAGE_GEN_ON CR: / DE1 /

EXP Response voltage of generator axis (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1632 LINK_VOLTAGE_GEN_HYST CR: / DE1 /

EXP Voltage range for generator control (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1633 LINK_VOLTAGE_GEN_OFF CR: / DE1 /

EXP Shutdown threshold of generator operation (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1634 LINK_VOLTAGE_RETRACT CR: / DE1 /

EXP Response threshold emergency retraction (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1635 GEN_AXIS_MIN_SPEED CR: /DE1 /

EXP Minimum speed of the generator axis (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1635 GEN_AXIS_MIN_SPEED CR: / DL1/

EXP Minimum speed generator axis (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1636 RETRACT_AND_GENERATOR_MODE CR: / DE1 /

EXP Operating mode emergency retraction/gen. operation (not VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
810D)
1637 GEN_STOP_DELAY CR: / DE1 /

EXP Delay time for regenerative braking (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1638 RETRACT_TIME CR: / DE1 /

EXP Emergency retraction time (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1639 RETRACT_SPEED CR: /DE1 /

EXP Emergency retraction speed (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
- 0 -4194304 4194304 DWORD immediately
1639 RETRACT_SPEED CR: / DL1/

EXP Emergency retraction speed (not 810D) VSA LIN 2/4 840D
- 0 -4194304 4194304 DWORD immediately
1650 DIAGNOSIS_CONTROL_FLAGS CR: / DD1, DE1 /

D04, EXP Diagnostic control (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1651 MINMAX_SIGNAL_NR CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Signal number min./max. memory (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1652 MINMAX_ADDRESS CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Memory cell, min./max. memory (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1653 MINMAX_MIN_VALUE CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Minimum value, min./max. memory (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1654 MINMAX_MAX_VALUE CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Maximum value, min./max. memory (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1655 MONITOR_SEGMENT CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Segment of memory cell for monitor VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1656 MONITOR_ADDRESS CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Address of memory cell for monitor VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1657 MONITOR_DISPLAY CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Display monitor value VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1658 MONITOR_INPUT_VALUE CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Entry of monitor value VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1659 MONITOR_INPUT_STROBE CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Transference of monitor value VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
1660 UF_MODE_FREQUENCY CR: / DE1 /

EXP Motor frequency V/f mode (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D
Hz 0.0000 -10000.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1661 UF_MODE_RATIO CR: / DE1 /

EXP V/f ratio in V/f mode (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D
Vs 2.4000 0.0000 100.0000 FLOAT immediately
1662 UF_MODE_DELTA_FREQUENCY CR: / DE1 /

EXP Changing the motor frequency of V/f operation (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D
Hz/s 5.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1665 IPO_SPEEDCTRL_DELAY_FACTOR CR: / IAD /

EXP Run-time factor IPO/SC cycles f. RFG (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 0/0 840D
1700 TERMINAL_STATE CR: / DD1/

Status of binary inputs VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
HEX 0 0 7fff UNS. WORD immediately
1700 TERMINAL_STATE CR: / DD1 /

D04 Status of binary inputs VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1701 LINK_VOLTAGE CR: / DD1/

DC link voltage VSA/HSA 2/4 810D

Lists 08/99
1701 LINK_VOLTAGE CR: / DD1 /

D04 DC link voltage VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1702 MOTOR_TEMPERATURE CR: / DD1 /

D04 Motor temperature VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4
C 0 0 32767 WORD immediately
1703 LEAD_TIME_MOTOR_ENC CR: / DD1/

Leadtime for motor measuring system converter VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
us 0 0 32767 UNS. WORD immediately
1703 LEAD_TIME_MOTOR_ENC CR: / DD1 /

EXP Leadtime for motor measuring system converter VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1704 LEAD_TIME_DIRECT_ENC CR: / DD1/

Leadtime for direct measuring system converter VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1704 LEAD_TIME_DIRECT_ENC CR: / DD1 /

EXP Leadtime for direct measuring system converter VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1705 DESIRED_VOLTAGE CR: / DD1 /

D04 Voltage setpoint (rms) (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
V 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1706 DESIRED_SPEED CR: / DD1/

Speed setpoint VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1706 DESIRED_SPEED CR: /DD1 /

D04 Speed setpoint VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1706 DESIRED_SPEED CR: / DL1/

D04 Speed setpoint VSA LIN 2/4 840D
m/min 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1707 ACTUAL_SPEED CR: / DD1/

Actual speed value VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1707 ACTUAL_SPEED CR: /DD1 /

D04 Actual speed value VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1707 ACTUAL_SPEED CR: / DL1/

D04 Speed actual value VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1708 ACTUAL_CURRENT CR: / DD1/

Smoothed actual current value VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1708 ACTUAL_CURRENT CR: / DD1 /

D04 Smoothed actual current value VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
% 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately

08/99 Lists
1709 VOLTAGE_LSB CR: / DD1/

Significance of voltage representation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1709 VOLTAGE_LSB CR: / DD1 /

EXP Significance of voltage representation VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
- 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1710 CURRENT_LSB CR: / DD1/

Significance of current representation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
uA 0.0000 0.0000 32767.0000 FLOAT immediately
1710 CURRENT_LSB CR: / DD1 /

EXP Significance of current representation VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
uA 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1711 SPEED_LSB CR: / DD1/

Significance of the speed representation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1711 SPEED_LSB CR: / DL1/

EXP Significance of the speed representation VSA LIN 2/4 840D
1711 SPEED_LSB CR: /DD1 /

EXP Significance of the speed representation VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
1712 ROTOR_FLUX_LSB CR: / DD1/

Significance of the rotor flux representation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
uVs 0.0000 0.0000 32767.0000 FLOAT immediately
1712 ROTOR_FLUX_LSB CR: / DD1 /

EXP Significance of the rotor flux representation VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
uVs 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1713 TORQUE_LSB CR: / DD1/

Significance of the torque representation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
uNm 0.0000 0.0000 32767.0000 FLOAT immediately
1713 TORQUE_LSB CR: /DD1 /

EXP Significance of the torque representation VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
uNm 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1713 FORCE_LSB CR: / DL1/

EXP Significance of the force representation VSA LIN 2/4 840D
uN 0.0000 -1000000.0000 1000000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1714 ROTOR_POS_LSB CR: / DD1/

Significance of rotor position representation VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
ø 0.0000 0.0000 32767.0000 FLOAT immediately
1714 ROTOR_POS_LSB CR: / DD1 /

EXP Significance of rotor position representation VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1719 ABS_ACTUAL_CURRENT CR: / DD1 /

D04 Absolute current setpoint value (rms) (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
A 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately

Lists 08/99
1720 CRC_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1/

CRC diagnostic parameter VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1720 CRC_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP CRC diagnostic parameter VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1721 ACCEL_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1/

Diagnostics, actual speed value VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1721 ACCEL_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Diagnostics, actual speed value VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1722 LOAD CR: / DD1/

Utilization VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1722 LOAD CR: / DD1 /

D04 Utilization VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1723 ACTUAL_RAMP_TIME CR: / DD1/

Diagnostics, ramp-up time VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1723 ACTUAL_RAMP_TIME CR: / DD1 /

EXP Diagnostics, ramp-up time VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1724 SMOOTH_RUN_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1/

Diagnostics, smooth running monitoring VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1724 SMOOTH_RUN_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1 /

EXP Diagnostics, smooth running monitoring VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1725 MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC CR: / DD1/

Standardising the torque setpoint average VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1725 MAX_FORCE_FROM_NC CR: / DL1/

EXP Rating force setpoint interface VSA LIN 2/4 840D
N 0.0000 -1000000.0000 1000000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1725 MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC CR: /DD1 /

EXP Standardising the torque setpoint average VSA/HSA ROT 2/4 840D
Nm 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
1730 OPERATING_MODE CR: / DD1/

Operating mode display VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1730 OPERATING_MODE CR: / DD1 /

D04 Operating mode display VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
1731 CL1_PO_IMAGE CR: / DB1/

Image ZK1_PO register VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1731 CL1_PO_IMAGE CR: / DB1 /

D04, EXP Image ZK1_PO register VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1732 CL1_RES_IMAGE CR: / DB1/

Image ZK1_RES register VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1732 CL1_RES_IMAGE CR: / DB1 /

D04, EXP Image ZK1_RES register VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1733 LPFC_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1/

NPFK diagnosis counter VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1733 LPFC_DIAGNOSIS CR: / DD1 /

EXP NPFK diagnosis counter VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1735 PROCESSOR_LOAD CR: / DD1 /

- Processor load (not 810D) VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
% 0 0 65535 UNS. WORD immediately
1736 TEST_ROTORPOS_IDENT CR: / DM1 /

D04 Rotor position identification (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1737 DIFF_ROTORPOS_IDENT CR: / DM1 /

- Rotor position identification difference (not 810D) VSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1790 ENC_TYPE_MOTOR CR: / DG1/

Measuring circuit type, indirect measuring system VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1790 ENC_TYPE_MOTOR CR: / DG1 /

D04, D06 Measuring circuit type, indirect measuring system VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
- 0 -1 32767 WORD immediately
1791 ENC_TYPE_DIRECT CR: / DG1/

Measuring circuit type, direct measuring system VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1791 ENC_TYPE_DIRECT CR: / DG1 /

D04, D06 Measuring circuit type, direct measuring system VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1797 PBL_VERSION CR: / DD1/

Data version VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1797 PBL_VERSION CR: / DD1 /

EXP Data version VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D

Lists 08/99
1798 FIRMWARE_DATE CR: / DD1/

Firmware date VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1798 FIRMWARE_DATE CR: / DD1 /

D04, EXP Firmware date VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
1799 FIRMWARE_VERSION CR: / DD1/

Firmware release VSA/HSA 2/4 810D
1799 FIRMWARE_VERSION CR: / DD1 /

D04 Firmware release VSA/HSA ROT/LIN 2/4 840D
The drive machine data, MSD, of the second motor are listed in the following.
The cross-references correspond to those of the MD for the first motor with the
corresponding identifier.
2005 ENC_RESOL_MOTOR_M2 CR: / /

D06 Motor measuring system encoder increments (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2100 PWM_FREQUENCY_M2 CR: / /

D01, D05, EXP Pulse-width modulation frequency (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
Hz 3200.0000 2000.0000 8000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2102 MOTOR_CODE_M2 CR: / /

D04, D05 Motor code number (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2103 MOTOR_NOMINAL_CURRENT_M2 CR: / /

D05 Motor rated current (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
A 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2117 MOTOR_INERTIA_M2 CR: / /

D05 Motor moment of inertia (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
kgm² 0.0010 0.0000 32.0000 FLOAT immediately
2119 SERIES_INDUCTANCE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Inductance of the series reactor (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
mH 0.0000 0.0000 65.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2120 CURRCTRL_GAIN_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Current controller P gain (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
V/A 10.0000 0.0000 10000.0000 FLOAT immediately
2121 CURRCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Current controller integral action time (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2125 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_1_M2 CR: / /

D04, EXP Ramp-up time 1 in V/f operation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2126 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_2_M2 CR: / /

D04, EXP Ramp-up time 2 in V/f operation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
2127 UF_VOLTAGE_AT_F0_M2 CR: / /

D04, D05, EXP Voltage at f=0 in V/f operation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2129 POWER_FACTOR_COS_PHI_M2 CR: / /

D05 Cos phi power factor (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
- 0.8000 0.0000 1.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2130 MOTOR_NOMINAL_POWER_M2 CR: / /

D05 Rated motor output (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
kW 0.0000 0.0000 1500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2132 MOTOR_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Rated motor voltage (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
V 380.0000 0.0000 5000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2134 MOTOR_NOMINAL_FREQUENCY_M2 CR: / /

D05 Rated motor frequency (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
Hz 50.0000 0.0000 3000.0000 FLOAT PowerOn
2135 MOTOR_NOLOAD_VOLTAGE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Motor no-load voltage (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2136 MOTOR_NOLOAD_CURRENT_M2 CR: / /

D05 Motor no-load current (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
A 0.0000 0.0000 500.0000 FLOAT immediately
2137 STATOR_COLD_RESISTANCE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Cold stator resistance (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2138 ROTOR_COLD_RESISTANCE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Cold rotor resistance (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2139 STATOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Stator leakage reactance (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2140 ROTOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Rotor leakage reactance (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2141 MAGNETIZING_REACTANCE_M2 CR: / /

D05 Magnetizing reactance (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2142 FIELD_WEAKENING_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D05 Threshold speed for field weakening (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2143 LH_CURVE_UPPER_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

- Upper speed for the L_h characteristic (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2144 LH_CURVE_GAIN_M2 CR: / /

- Gain factor of the L_h characteristic (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
% 100.0000 100.0000 500.0000 FLOAT PowerOn

Lists 08/99
2145 STALL_TORQUE_REDUCTION_M2 CR: / /

D05 Stall torque reduction factor (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2146 MOTOR_MAX_ALLOWED_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D05 Maximum motor speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2147 SPEED_LIMIT_M2 CR: / /

D02, D05 Motor speed limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2148 ACTUAL_STALL_POWER_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D04 Threshold speed of pull-out power (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2150 FIELDCTRL_GAIN_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Flux controller P-gain (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
A/(Vs) 400.0000 0.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
2151 FIELDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Flux controller integral-action time (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2160 FLUX_ACQUISITION_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Threshold speed for flux sensing (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2190 TORQUE_LIMIT_FROM_NC_M2 CR: / /

D02, EXP Evaluation of torque limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2230 TORQUE_LIMIT_1_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D02, EXP 1st torque limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2231 TORQUE_LIMIT_2_M2 CR: / /

D02, EXP 2nd torque limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2232 TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D02, EXP Changeover speed from MD 1230 to MD 1231 (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2233 TORQUE_LIMIT_GENERATOR_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D02, EXP Regenerative limiting (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2234 TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_HYST_M2 CR: / /

D02, EXP Hysteresis MD 1232 (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2235 POWER_LIMIT_1_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D02, EXP 1st power limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2236 POWER_LIMIT_2_M2 CR: / /

D02, EXP 2nd power limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D

08/99 Lists
2238 CURRENT_LIMIT_M2 CR: / /

D02 Motor current limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2239 TORQUE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP_M2 CR: / /

D02 Torque limit in setting-up operation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2245 CURRENT_SMOOTH_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

EXP Threshold speed dep. on M setpoint smoothing (not HSA ROT 2/4 840D
810D)
2246 CURRENT_SMOOTH_HYSTERESIS_M2 CR: / /

EXP Hysteresis speed dep. M setpoint smoothing (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2400 MOTOR_RATED_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D05 Rated motor speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2401 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D02, D05 Maximum usable motor speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2403 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED_M2 CR: / /

D02 Shut down speed pulse suppression (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2405 MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D02, D05 Monitoring motor speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2407 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D01, D08 P gain of speed controller (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2408 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D01, EXP P gain of upper adaptation speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2409 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D01, D08 Integral action time of speed controller (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2410 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D01, EXP Integral action time of upper adaptation speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2411 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Lower adaptation speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2412 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Upper adaptation speed (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D

Lists 08/99
2413 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE_M2 CR: / /

D01, EXP Select adaptation speed controller (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2417 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D03 Signal n_x for 'n_act < n_x' (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2418 SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D03 Signal n_min for 'n_act < n_min' (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2426 SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D03 Tolerance bandwidth for 'n_act = n_set' signal (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2451 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1_AM_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D01 P gain of speed control loop IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2453 SPDCTRL_INTEGR_TIME_1_AM_M2 [n] 0 ...7 Index des Param.-Satzes CR: / /

D01 Integral action time of speed control loop IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2458 DES_CURRENT_OPEN_LOOP_AM_M2 CR: / /

D01 Current setpoint controlled range IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2459 TORQUE_SMOOTH_TIME_AM_M2 CR: / /

D01 Torque smoothing time constant IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2465 SWITCH_SPEED_MSD_AM_M2 CR: / /

D01, D06 Changeover speed MSD/IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2466 SWITCH_SPD_OPEN_LOOP_AM_M2 CR: / /

D01 Changeover speed closed/open loop IM (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2602 MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT_M2 CR: / /

D02, D05 Motor temperature alarm threshold (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2607 MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT_M2 CR: / /

D02, D05 Motor temperature shutdown limit (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2608 MOTOR_FIXED_TEMPERATURE_M2 CR: / /

D02, D05 Fixed temperature (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2711 SPEED_LSB_M2 CR: / /

EXP Significance of the speed representation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2712 ROTOR_FLUX_LSB_M2 CR: / /

EXP Significance of the rotor flux representation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
uVs 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately

08/99 Lists
2713 TORQUE_LSB_M2 CR: / /

EXP Significance of the torque representation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
uNm 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately
2714 ROTOR_POS_LSB_M2 CR: / /

EXP Significance of rotor position representation (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
2725 MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC_M2 CR: / /

EXP Standardising the torque setpoint average (not 810D) HSA ROT 2/4 840D
Nm 0.0000 -100000.0000 100000.0000 FLOAT immediately

Lists 08/99
2.3 Machine data for hydraulics module

5001 SPEEDCTRL_CYCLE_TIME CR: /FBHY/
D01, EXP Velocity controller clockrate HLD 3/3 840D
31,25 us 4 2 16 UNS. WORD PowerOn
5002 MONITOR_CYCLE_TIME CR: /FBHY/

EXP Monitoring cycle HLD 3/3 840D
31,25 us 3200 128 3200 UNS. WORD PowerOn
5003 STS_CONFIG CR: /FBHY/

EXP STS configuration HLD 3/3 840D
HEX 330 0 7F0 UNS. WORD PowerOn
5004 CTRL_CONFIG CR: /FBHY/

D01 Configuration structure HLD 3/3 840D
5005 ENC_RESOL_MOTOR CR: /FBHY/

EXP Increments of rotary measuring system HLD 3/3 840D
5008 ENC_PHASE_ERROR_CORRECTION CR: /FBHY/

EXP, D06 Encoder phase error compensation HLD 3/3 840D
5011 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG CR: /FBHY/

D06 Configuration of actual value acquisition HLD 3/3 840D
5012 FUNC_SWITCH CR: /FBHY/

D01, D02, D03 Function switch HLD 3/3 840D
5021 ENC_ABS_TURN_MOTOR CR: /FBHY/

D06 Multiturn resol. motor absolute encoder HLD 3/3 840D
- 0 4096 FFFF UNS. WORD PowerOn
5022 ENC_ABS_RESOL_MOTOR CR: /FBHY/

D06 Measuring steps of motor absolute track HLD 3/3 840D
- 0 8192 7FFFFF UNS. DWORD PowerOn
5023 ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_MOTOR CR: /FBHY/

D06 Diagnosis of measuring circuit motor absolute track HLD 3/3 840D
HEX 0 0 BFFF UNS. WORD immediately
5024 DIVISION_LIN_SCALE CR: /FBHY/

D06 Linear scale graduations HLD 3/3 840D
nm 20000 1000 200000 UNS. DWORD PowerOn
5040 PISTON_ZERO CR: /FBHY/

D04 Piston zero in relation to machine zero HLD 3/3 840D
mm 0.0 -1000000.0 100000.0 FLOAT immediately

08/99 Lists
5041 MACHINE_ZERO_HIGH CR: /FBHY/

EXP Machine zero in relation to actual position zero HLD 3/3 840D
- 0 -2147483647 7FFFFFFF DWORD immediately
5042 MACHINE_ZERO_LOW CR: /FBHY/

EXP Machine zero in relation to actual position zero HLD 3/3 840D
- 0 0 FFFFFFFF UNS. DWORD immediately
5100 FLUID_ELASTIC_MODULUS CR: /FBHY/

D01 Modulus of elasticity for hydraulic oil HLD 3/3 840D
bar 11000 1000 21000 FLOAT immediately
5101 WORKING_PRESSURE CR: /FBHY/

D01 System pressure HLD 3/3 840D
bar 0.0 0.0 350.0 FLOAT PowerOn
5102 PILOT_OPERATION_PRESSURE CR: /FBHY/

D01 Pilot pressure HLD 3/3 840D
bar 0.0 0.0 250.0 FLOAT immediately
5106 VALVE_CODE CR: /FBHY/

D05, D04 Valve code number HLD 3/3 840D
5107 VALVE_NOMINAL_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve rated flow HLD 3/3 840D
l/min 0.0 0.0 1000 FLOAT immediately
5108 VALVE_NOMINAL_PRESSURE CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve rated pressure drop HLD 3/3 840D
5109 VALVE_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve rated voltage HLD 3/3 840D
5110 VALVE_DUAL_GAIN_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve flow knee point HLD 3/3 840D
5111 VALVE_DUAL_GAIN_VOLTAGE CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve voltage knee point HLD 3/3 840D
5112 VALVE_FLOW_FACTOR_A_B CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve flow ratio A/B HLD 3/3 840D
5113 VALVE_CONFIGURATION CR: /FBHY/

D05 Valve configuration HLD 3/3 840D
5114 VALVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY CR: /FBHY/

D01, D05 Valve natural frequency HLD 3/3 840D
5115 VALVE_DAMPING CR: /FBHY/

D01, D05 Valve damping HLD 3/3 840D

Lists 08/99
5131 CYLINDER_PISTON_DIAMETER CR: /FBHY/

D05 Cylinder piston diameter HLD 3/3 840D
mm 0.0 0.0 500.0 FLOAT PowerOn
5132 PISTON_ROD_A_DIAMETER CR: /FBHY/

D05 Cylinder piston rod diameter A HLD 3/3 840D
5133 PISTON_ROD_B_DIAMETER CR: /FBHY/

D05 Cylinder piston rod diameter B HLD 3/3 840D
5134 PISTON_STROKE CR: /FBHY/

D05 Piston stroke HLD 3/3 840D
5135 CYLINDER_DEAD_VOLUME_A CR: /FBHY/

D05 Cylinder dead volume at the drive end HLD 3/3 840D
ccm 0.0 0.0 200000.0 FLOAT immediately
5136 CYLINDER_DEAD_VOLUME_B CR: /FBHY/

D05 Cylinder dead volume at the non-drive end HLD 3/3 840D
ccm 0.0 0.0 200000.0 FLOAT immediately
5140 VALVE_CYLINDER_CONNECTION CR: /FBHY/

D05 Connection configuration of valve cylinder HLD 3/3 840D
5141 PIPE_LENGTH_A CR: /FBHY/

D05 Pipe length at the drive end HLD 3/3 840D
5142 PIPE_LENGTH_B CR: /FBHY/

D05 Pipe length at the non-drive end HLD 3/3 840D
5143 PIPE_INNER_DIAMETER_A_B CR: /FBHY/

D05 Pipe inside diameters A and B HLD 3/3 840D
5150 DRIVE_MASS CR: /FBHY/

D05 Mass moved by drive HLD 3/3 840D
kg 0.0 0.0 20000.0 FLOAT immediately
5151 CYLINDER_A_ORIENTATION CR: /FBHY/

D05 Mounting position at the drive end of the cylinder HLD 3/3 840D
5152 CYLINDER_FASTENING CR: /FBHY/

D05 Fastening the cylinder HLD 3/3 840D
5160 PISTON_POS_MIN_NAT_FREQ CR: /FBHY/

D05 Piston position min. natural frequency HLD 3/3 840D
5161 DRIVE_DAMPING CR: /FBHY/

D01, D05 Damping the drive HLD 3/3 840D

08/99 Lists
5162 DRIVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY_A CR: /FBHY/

D01, D05 Natural frequency of drive A HLD 3/3 840D
5163 DRIVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY CR: /FBHY/

D01, D05 Natural frequency of the drive HLD 3/3 840D
5164 DRIVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY_B CR: /FBHY/

D01, D05 Natural frequency of drive B HLD 3/3 840D
5180 CLOSED_LOOP_SYSTEM_DAMPING CR: /FBHY/

D01 Desired damping closed-loop system HLD 3/3 840D
5200 NUM_OUTPUT_VCTRL_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Number of manipulated variable filters HLD 3/3 840D
5201 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FILTER_CONFIG [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Type of manipulated variable filter HLD 3/3 840D
5202 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 natural frequency of manipulated variable filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5203 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_DAMP [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 damping of manipulated variable filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5204 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 natural frequency of manipulated variable filter 2 HLD 3/3 840D
5205 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_DAMP [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 damping of manipulated variable filter 2 HLD 3/3 840D
5210 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_SUP_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Blocking frequency for manipulated variable filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5211 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_BW [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Bandwidth of manipulated variable filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5212 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_BW_NUM [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Numerator bandwidth of manipulated variable filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5213 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_SUP_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Blocking frequency of manipulated variable filter 2 HLD 3/3 840D
5214 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_BW [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Bandwidth of manipulated variable filter 2 HLD 3/3 840D

Lists 08/99
5215 OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_BW_NUM [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Numerator bandwidth of manipulated variable filter 2 HLD 3/3 840D
5230 FORCE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D02 Power limitation threshold for weight HLD 3/3 840D
N 10000.0 0.0 100000000.0 FLOAT immediately
5231 FORCE_LIMIT_WEIGHT [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D02 Power limitation weight HLD 3/3 840D
5232 STICTION_SPEED_THRESHOLD CR: /FBHY/

D02 Velocity threshold static friction HLD 3/3 840D
mm/min 10.0 0.0 500.0 FLOAT immediately
5233 STICTION_COMP_THRESHOLD CR: /FBHY/

D01 Interrupting lead static friction HLD 3/3 840D
5234 STICTION_FORCE_POS CR: /FBHY/

D02 Friction force velocity >0 HLD 3/3 840D
5235 STICTION_FORCE_NEG CR: /FBHY/

D02 Friction force velocity <0 HLD 3/3 840D
N -100.0 -100000000.0 100000000.0 FLOAT immediately
5240 FORCECONTROLLED_SYSTEM_GAIN CR: /FBHY/

D01 Controlled system gain power controller HLD 3/3 840D
N/V 0.0 0.0 1000000000.0 FLOAT immediately
5241 FORCECTRL_CONFIG [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D02 Configuration of power controller HLD 3/3 840D
5242 FORCECTRL_GAIN [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 P gain of power controller HLD 3/3 840D
5243 FORCECTRL_GAIN_RED CR: /FBHY/

D01 Attenuation of power controller P component HLD 3/3 840D
5244 FORCECTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Power controller reset time HLD 3/3 840D
5245 FORCECTRL_PT1_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Power controller smoothing time constant HLD 3/3 840D
5246 FORCECTRL_DIFF_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Power controller lead time HLD 3/3 840D
ms 0.0 -10000.0 10000.0 FLOAT immediately
5247 FORCE_FFW_WEIGHT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Power controller precontrol factor HLD 3/3 840D

08/99 Lists
5260 NUM_FFW_FCTRL_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 No. of feedforward contr. filters force contr. HLD 3/3 840D
5261 FFW_FCTRL_FILTER_TYPE [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Feedforward control filter force contr. HLD 3/3 840D
5264 FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 nat. freq. feedf. contr. f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5265 FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_DAMP [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 damping feedf. contr f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5268 FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_SUP_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Blocking frequency feedf. contr. f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5269 FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_BW [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Bandwidth feedf. contr. f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5270 FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_BW_NUM [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Counter bandwidth feedf. contr. f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5280 NUM_OUTPUT_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Number of setting filters HLD 3/3 840D
5281 OUTPUT_FILTER_TYPE [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Setting filter type HLD 3/3 840D
5284 OUTPUT_FIL_1_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Natural freq. setting f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5285 OUTPUT_FIL_1_DAMP [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Damping setting filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5288 OUTPUT_FIL_1_SUP_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Block. freq. setting f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5289 OUTPUT_FIL_1_BW [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Bandwidth setting f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5290 OUTPUT_FIL_1_BW_NUM [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Counter bandw. setting f. 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5401 DRIVE_MAX_SPEED CR: /FBHY/

D02, D05 Maximum useful velocity HLD 3/3 840D
mm/min 0.0 0.0 120000.0 FLOAT PowerOn

Lists 08/99
5402 SPEED_CRTL_DISABLE_STOPTIME CR: /FBHY/

D02 Deceleration time with servo disable HLD 3/3 840D
5404 POWER_DISABLE_DELAY CR: /FBHY/

D02 Power disable timer HLD 3/3 840D
ms 100 0 100000 FLOAT immediately
5406 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_A [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01, D08 P gain of velocity controller A HLD 3/3 840D
5407 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01, D08 P gain of velocity controller HLD 3/3 840D
5408 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_B [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01, D08 P gain of velocity controller B HLD 3/3 840D
5409 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01, D08 Velocity controller reset time HLD 3/3 840D
5413 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE CR: /FBHY/

D01 Selection of velocity controller adaptation HLD 3/3 840D
5414 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01, EXP Natural frequency of the reference model HLD 3/3 840D
5415 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01, EXP Damping of the reference model HLD 3/3 840D
5420 DRIVE_MAX_SPEED_SETUP CR: /FBHY/

D02 Maximum setup mode velocity HLD 3/3 840D
5421 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_FEEDBK [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Time constant for integrator feedback HLD 3/3 840D
5422 FEEDBK_SPEED_THRESHOLD CR: /FBHY/

D01 Speed treshold integrator feed back HLD 3/3 840D
5430 SPEEDCTRL_PT1_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Smoothing time constant for velocity controller HLD 3/3 840D
5431 SPEEDCTRL_DIFF_TIME_A [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Lead time for velocity controller A HLD 3/3 840D
5432 SPEEDCTRL_DIFF_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Lead time for velocity controller HLD 3/3 840D

08/99 Lists
5433 SPEEDCTRL_DIFF_TIME_B [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Lead time for velocity controller B HLD 3/3 840D
5435 CONTROLLED_SYSTEM_GAIN CR: /FBHY/

D01 Controlled system gain HLD 3/3 840D
mm/Vmin 0.0 0.0 20000.0 FLOAT immediately
5440 POS_DRIVE_SPEED_LIMIT CR: /FBHY/

D02 Positive velocity setpoint limit HLD 3/3 840D
5441 NEG_DRIVE_SPEED_LIMIT CR: /FBHY/

D02 Negative velocity setpoint limit HLD 3/3 840D
5460 FRICTION_COMP_GRADIENT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Increase in friction compensation HLD 3/3 840D
5461 FRICTION_COMP_OUTPUT_RANGE CR: /FBHY/

D01 Range of action of friction compensation HLD 3/3 840D
5462 AREA_FACTOR_POS_OUTPUT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Positive area adaptation factor HLD 3/3 840D
5463 AREA_FACTOR_NEG_OUTPUT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Negative area adaptation factor HLD 3/3 840D
5464 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D01 Knee-point compensation of flow HLD 3/3 840D
5465 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_VOLTAGE CR: /FBHY/

D01 Knee-point compensation of voltage HLD 3/3 840D
5466 DUAL_GAIN_COMP_SMOOTH_RANGE CR: /FBHY/

D01 Knee-point compensation of rounding area HLD 3/3 840D
5467 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. neg. volume flowrate HLD 3/3 840D
5468 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_VOLTAGE CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint compensation neg. voltage HLD 3/3 840D
5470 OFFSET_COMPENSATION CR: /FBHY/

D01 Offset compensation HLD 3/3 840D
5475 OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_LIMIT CR: /FBHY/

D02 Actuating voltage limitation HLD 3/3 840D

Lists 08/99
5476 OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_INVERSION CR: /FBHY/

D01 Manipulated variable inversion HLD 3/3 840D
5480 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint pos. volume flowrate zero r. HLD 3/3 840D
5481 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_VOLT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. pos. volt. zero range HLD 3/3 840D
5482 DUAL_GAIN_COMP_SMOOTH_Z_R CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. rounding zero range HLD 3/3 840D
5483 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. neg. volume flowr. zero range HLD 3/3 840D
5484 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_VOLT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. neg. voltage zero range HLD 3/3 840D
5485 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. pos. vol.flowrate sat. HLD 3/3 840D
5486 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_VOLT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. pos. volt. saturation HLD 3/3 840D
5487 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_FLOW CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. neg. volume flowrate sat. HLD 3/3 840D
5488 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_VOLT CR: /FBHY/

D01 Kneepoint comp. neg. voltage sat. HLD 3/3 840D
5500 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Number of velocity filters HLD 3/3 840D
5501 SPEED_FILTER_TYPE [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Type of velocity filter HLD 3/3 840D
5502 SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT1 time constant of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5506 SPEED_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT 2 natural frequency of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5507 SPEED_FILTER_1_DAMPING [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 PT2 damping of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D

08/99 Lists
5514 SPEED_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 BSF blocking frequency of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5515 SPEED_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 BSF bandwidth of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5516 SPEED_FILTER_1_BW_NUMERATOR [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 Numerator bandwidth of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5520 SPEED_FILTER_1_BS_FREQ [n] 0 ...7 Index of Param.-Set CR: /FBHY/

D01 BSF natural frequency of velocity filter 1 HLD 3/3 840D
5522 ACT_SPEED_FILTER_TIME CR: /FBHY/

D01 Time const. speed actual value filter HLD 3/3 840D
5530 CYLINDER_SAFETY_CONFIG CR: /FBHY/

D05, D02 Safety circuit HLD 3/3 840D
5531 OUTPUT_ENABLE_DELAY CR: /FBHY/

D02 Manipulated variable blocking time HLD 3/3 840D
5532 POWER_ENABLE_DELAY CR: /FBHY/

D02 Power enable blocking time HLD 3/3 840D
5550 PRESSURE_SENS_A_REF CR: /FBHY/

D06 Reference value of pressure sensor A at 10 V HLD 3/3 840D
5551 PRESSURE_SENS_A_OFFS CR: /FBHY/

D06 Offset compensation for pressure sensor A HLD 3/3 840D
5552 PRESSURE_SENS_B_REF CR: /FBHY/

D06 Reference value of pressure sensor B at 10V HLD 3/3 840D
5553 PRESSURE_SENS_B_OFFS CR: /FBHY/

D06 Offset compensation for pressure sensor B HLD 3/3 840D
5600 ALARM_MASK_POWER_ON CR: /FBHY/

D02, EXP Concealable alarms (Power On) HLD 3/3 840D
HEX 0 0 FFFF UNS. WORD immediately
5601 ALARM_MASK_RESET CR: /FBHY/

D02, EXP Concealable alarms (Reset) HLD 3/3 840D
5605 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_TIME CR: /FBHY/

D02 Time limit of velocity controller HLD 3/3 840D

Lists 08/99
5606 SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_THRESHOLD CR: /FBHY/

D02 Threshold limit of velocity controller HLD 3/3 840D
5609 ENC_SPEED_LIMIT CR: /FBHY/

D06, d02 Maximum measuring velocity of linear scale HLD 3/3 840D
5610 DIAGNOSIS_ACTIVATION_FLAGS CR: /FBHY/

EXP Diagnostic functions HLD 3/3 840D
5612 ALARM_REACTION_POWER_ON CR: /FBHY/

D02 Configurable shutdown reaction with PO alarms HLD 3/3 840D
5613 ALARM_REACTION_RESET CR: /FBHY/

D02 Configurable shutdown reaction with RESET alarms HLD 3/3 840D
5614 VALVE_ERROR_TIME CR: /FBHY/

D02 Valve spool monitoring timer HLD 3/3 840D
5620 PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS CR: /FBHY/

D03 Bits of variable signaling functions HLD 3/3 840D
5621 PROG_SIGNAL_NR CR: /FBHY/

D03 Signal number of variable signaling function HLD 3/3 840D
5622 PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS CR: /FBHY/

D03 Address of variable signaling functions HLD 3/3 840D
HEX 0 0 FFFFFF UNS. DWORD immediately
5623 PROG_SIGNAL_THRESHOLD CR: /FBHY/

D03 Threshold of variable signaling functions HLD 3/3 840D
5624 PROG_SIGNAL_HYSTERESIS CR: /FBHY/

D03 Hysteresis of variable signaling functions HLD 3/3 840D
5625 PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY CR: /FBHY/

D03 Pickup delay of variable signaling function HLD 3/3 840D
5626 PROG_SIGNAL_OFF_DELAY CR: /FBHY/

D03 Dropout delay of variable signaling function HLD 3/3 840D
5650 DIAGNOSIS_CONTROL_FLAGS CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Diagnostic control HLD 3/3 840D
5651 MINMAX_SIGNAL_NR CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Signal number of min./max. storage HLD 3/3 840D
- 0 0 FFFF UNS. WORD immediately

08/99 Lists
5652 MINMAX_ADDRESS CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Storage location of min./max. storage HLD 3/3 840D
5653 MINMAX_MIN_VALUE CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Minimum value of min./max. storage HLD 3/3 840D
5654 MINMAX_MAX_VALUE CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Maximum value of min./max. storage HLD 3/3 840D
5655 MONITOR_SEGMENT CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Monitor storage location segment HLD 3/3 840D
5656 MONITOR_ADDRESS CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Monitor storage location address HLD 3/3 840D
5657 MONITOR_DISPLAY CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Monitor value display HLD 3/3 840D
5658 MONITOR_INPUT_VALUE CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Monitor value input HLD 3/3 840D
5659 MONITOR_INPUT_STROBE CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Monitor value accept HLD 3/3 840D
5700 TERMINAL_STATE CR: /FBHY/

D04 Status of binary inputs HLD 3/3 840D
5704 ACTUAL_PRESSURE_A CR: /FBHY/

D04 Actual pressure value A HLD 3/3 840D
bar 0.0 -10000.0 10000.0 FLOAT immediately
5705 ACTUAL_PRESSURE_B CR: /FBHY/

D04 Actual pressure value B HLD 3/3 840D
5706 DESIRED_SPEED CR: /FBHY/

D04 Velocity setpoint HLD 3/3 840D
mm/min 0.0 -240000.0 240000.0 FLOAT immediately
5707 ACTUAL_SPEED CR: /FBHY/

D04 Actual velocity value HLD 3/3 840D
5708 ACTUAL_CYL_FORCE CR: /FBHY/

D04 Actual cylinder force value HLD 3/3 840D
5709 VOLTAGE_LSB CR: /FBHY/

EXP Significance of voltage display HLD 3/3 840D

Lists 08/99
5710 PRESSURE_LSB CR: /FBHY/

EXP Significance of pressure display HLD 3/3 840D
5711 SPEED_LSB CR: /FBHY/

EXP Significance of velocity display HLD 3/3 840D
5713 FORCE_LSB CR: /FBHY/

EXP Significance of power display HLD 3/3 840D
uN 0.0 -10000000.0 10000000.0 FLOAT immediately
5714 POSITION_LSB CR: /FBHY/

EXP Significance of position display HLD 3/3 840D
nm 0.0 -1000000.0 1000000.0 FLOAT immediately
5715 DESIRED_VALVE_SPOOL_POS CR: /FBHY/

D04 Valve spool position setpoint voltage HLD 3/3 840D
5716 ACTUAL_VALVE_SPOOL_POS CR: /FBHY/

D04 Voltage for actual valve spool position value HLD 3/3 840D
5717 DESIRED_CYL_FORCE CR: /FBHY/

D04 Desired cylinder power HLD 3/3 840D
5720 CRC_DIAGNOSIS CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP CRC diagnostic parameters HLD 3/3 840D
5725 MAX_FORCE_FROM_NC CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Standardization of the power setpoint interface HLD 3/3 840D
N 0.0 0.0 10000000.0 FLOAT immediately
5730 OPERATING_MODE CR: /FBHY/

D04 Display of the operating mode HLD 3/3 840D
5731 CL1_PO_IMAGE CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Map of the ZK1_PO register HLD 3/3 840D
5732 CL1_RES_IMAGE CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Map of the ZK1_RES register HLD 3/3 840D
5735 PROCESSOR_UTILIZATION CR: /FBHY/

D04, EXP Processor load HLD 3/3 840D
% 0 0 FFFF UNS. WORD immediately
5740 ACTUAL_POSITION CR: /FBHY/

D04 Actual position value in relation to machine zero HLD 3/3 840D
5741 ACTUAL_PISTON_POSITION CR: /FBHY/

D04 Piston position in relation to piston zero HLD 3/3 840D

08/99 Lists
5790 ENC_TYPE CR: /FBHY/

D04, D06 Measuring circuit type of measuring system HLD 3/3 840D
5797 PBL_VERSION CR: /FBHY/

D04 Data version HLD 3/3 840D
5798 FIRMWARE_DATE CR: /FBHY/

D04 Firmware date HLD 3/3 840D
5799 FIRMWARE_VERSION CR: /FBHY/

D04 Firmware version HLD 3/3 840D
- 0 0 FFFFFF UNS. DWORD immediately

Lists 08/99
2.4 Machine data for operator panel
2.4.1 Generally available MDs for operator panel
Number MD identifier Cross ref.

Name, other information Active Protection level
Unit Default value Minimum value Maximum value Data type Valid from
9000 LCD_CONTRAST A2
Contrast POWER ON 3/4
- 7 0 15 BYTE -
9002 DISPLAY_MODE (for MMC 100) A2
External monitor (1: Monochrome, 2: Color) POWER ON 3/4
- 0 0 2 BYTE -
9003 FIRST_LANGUAGE (for MMC 100) A2
Foreground language POWER ON 3/4
- 1 1 2 BYTE -
9004 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION A2
Display resolution POWER ON 3/4
- 3 0 5 BYTE -
9005 PRG_DEFAULT_DIR (for MMC100) A2
Program default directory IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 1 1 5 BYTE -
9006 DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME (for MMC100) A2
Time over which display is black POWER ON 3/4
min 0 0 60 BYTE SW2
9007 TABULATOR_SIZE (for MMC 100) A2
Length of tabulator IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 4 0 30 BYTE SW2
9008 KEYBOARD_TYPE (for MMC 100) A2
Keyboard type: (0: BT, 1: MFII/QWERTY) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
min 0 0 1 BYTE SW3.6
9009 KEYBOARD_STATE (for MMC 100) A2
Shift behavior of keyboard during startup IMMEDIATELY 3/4
(0: Single, 1: Perm., 2: CAPSLOCK)
- 0 0 2 BYTE SW3.6
9010 SPIND_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION A2
Display resolution for spindle values IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 3 0 5 BYTE SW 4

08/99 Lists
9011 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH A2
Display resolution for INCH system of units IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 3 0 5 BYTE SW 5.1
9015 DARKTIME_TO_PLC (for OP 30) -
Transfer signal :Screen is dark- to PLC IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 5
9016 SWITCH_TO_AREA (for OP 30) -
Default power-up menu selectable IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 10 10 79 BYTE SW 5
9020 TECHNOLOGY A2
Basic configuration for simulation: IMMEDIATELY 1/ 1
0: No specific assignment
1: Turning machine configuration
2: Milling machine configuration
- 1 0 2 BYTE SW4.3 MMC100
SW5.1 MMC103
9030 EXPONENT_LIMIT (nur MMC 100) -
Number of places displayed without exponent Power On 3/4
- 6 0 20 BYTE SW 5.1
9031 EXPONENT_SCIENCE (nur MMC 100) -
Technical exponent representation in steps of three Power On 3/ 4
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW 5.1
9200 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA A2
Protection level, read tool offset (general) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9201 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO A2
Protection level, write tool geometry IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9202 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR A2
Protection level, write tool wear data IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9203 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE A2
Protection level, write fine IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9204 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC (for MMC102/103) -
Protection level, change tool sum offsets IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW 5
9205 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC (for MMC102/103) -
Protection level, change tool setup offsets IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW 5

Lists 08/99
9206 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS (for MMC102/103) -

Protection level, change tool monitoring limit values IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW 5
9207 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO (for MMC102/103) -
Change D No. assigned to tool edge IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW 5
9208 USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP (for MMC102/103) -
Change wear group magazine location/mag. IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 3 0 5 BYTE SW 5
9209 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT A2
Protection level, write tool adapter data IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW5
9210 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA A2
Protection level, write settable zero offset IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9211 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD A2
Protection level, read user variables IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9212 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD A2
Protection level, write user variables IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9213 USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH A2
Protection level, extended overstore IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9214 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT A2
Protection level, influence program IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9215 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA A2
Protection level, write setting data IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9216 USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM (for MMC 100) A2
Protection level, read part program IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9217 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PROGRAM (for MMC 100) A2
Protection level, enter part program IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9218 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM A2
Protection level, select program IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -

08/99 Lists
9219 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN A2
Protection level TEACH IN IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9220 USER_CLASS_PRESET A2
Protection level PRESET IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9221 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA A2
Protection level, delete R parameter IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9222 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA A2
Protection level, write R parameter IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9223 USER_CLASS_SET_V24 (nur MMC100) A2
Protection level for RS 232 C (V24) interface parameterization IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9224 USER_CLASS_READ_IN (nur MMC100) A2
Protection level for reading in data IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE -
9225 USER_CLASS_READ_CST (for MMC 100) A2
Protection level standard cycles IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 7 BYTE SW2
9226 USER_CLASS_READ_CUS (for MMC 100) -
Protection level user cycles IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW2
9227 USER_CLASS_SHOW_SBL2 (MMC100) A2
Skip single block2 (SBL2) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW3.5
9228 USER_CLASS_READ_SYF (for MMC 100) A2
Access stage for selection of directory SYF SW-UPD 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.2
9229 USER_CLASS_READ_DEF (for MMC 100) A2
Access stage for selection of directory DEF SW-UPD 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.2
9230 USER_CLASS_READ_BD (for MMC 100) A2
Access stage for selection of directory BD SW-UPD 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.2

Lists 08/99
Note
With Software Version 5, protection level ranges are introduced in the

R parameter display. They provide separate defined protection levels for
defined areas with R parameters. The ranges and protection levels can be
defined with the following machine data.
The previous functions of the display machine data
USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA and USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA are retained.
Where ranges overlap , the higher of the two protection levels applies.
9231 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_1 (for MMC102/103) A2

Write protection for the first RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW5.1
9232 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_1 (for MMC102/103) A2
Beginning of the first RPA range - 3/4
- 0 0 - BYTE SW5.1
9233 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_1 (for MMC102/103) A2
End of the first RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 - BYTE SW5.1
Write protection for the second RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW5.1
Beginning of the second RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 - BYTE SW5.1
End of the second RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 - BYTE SW5.1
Write protection for the third RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW5.1
Beginning of the third RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 - BYTE SW5.1
End of the third RPA range IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 - BYTE SW5.1
9240 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_NAME
IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 7 BYTE 5

08/99 Lists
9241 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_TYPE
IMMEDIATELY 3/ 4
- 0 0 7 BYTE 5
9251 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLIST (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management: shows tool list IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9252 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management: permits loading of tools IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9253 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management: permits unloading of tools IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9254 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLMOVE (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits moving of tools in magazine IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9256 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR2 (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits selection of 2_MagList representation IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9257 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR3 (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits selection of 3_MagList representation IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9258 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOLE (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits creating of new cutting edges in NC IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9259 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits deleting of tools in NC IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9260 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGBUFFER (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits/enables display of buffer store IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9261 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGFIND (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits/enables SK search and posit. IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9262 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLISTPOS (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits/enables positioning IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9263 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGNEXT (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits/enables SK next magazine IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1

Lists 08/99
9264 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLNEWTOOL (for MMC 100) FBW

User class tool-management permits creating tools in NC IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9265 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR1 (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits selection of 1_TOOILIST IMMEDIATELY 3/4
representation
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
representation
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
representation
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9269 USER_CLASS_TM_SKFINDPLACE (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management permits/enables find place, load toollist IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9270 USER_CLASS_TM_SKACTPLACE (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management enables SK actual place IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9271 USER_CLASS_TM_SKLDTOOLDAT (for MMC 100) FBW
User class tool management enables SK ToolData in state loading tools IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE SW4.1
9300 V24_USER_XON (for MMC 100) K4
User: Xon character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 11 00 FF BYTE -
9301 V24_USER_XOFF (for MMC 100) K4
User: Xoff character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 13 00 FF BYTE -
9302 V24_USER_EOF (for MMC 100) K4
User: Transmission end character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 1A 00 FF BYTE -
9303 V24_USER_CONTROLS (for MMC 100) K4
User: Special bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Bitfield 01001100 00000000 11111111 BYTE -
9304 V24_USER_RTS (for MMC 100) K4
User: Cable-controlled IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 (RTS/CTS) 0 1 BYTE -
9305 V24_USER_BAUD (for MMC 100) K4
User: Baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 5 (9600 Baud) 0 6 BYTE -

08/99 Lists
9306 V24_USER_DATABITS (for MMC 100) K4

User: Data bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 1 (8 Datenbits) 0 1 BYTE -
9307 V24_USER_PARITY (for MMC 100) K4
User: Parity bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 (keine) 0 2 BYTE -
9308 V24_USER_STOPBIT (for MMC 100) K4
User: Stop bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 (1 Stoppbit) 0 1 BYTE -
9309 V24_USER_LINE (for MMC 100) K4
RS 232 C (V24) interface (COM1/COM2) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 1 1 2 BYTE SW5
9310 V24_PRINTER_XON (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Xon character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 11 00 FF BYTE -
9311 V24_PRINTER_XOFF (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Xoff character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 13 00 FF BYTE -
9312 V24_PRINTER_EOF (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Transmission end character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 0C 00 FF BYTE -
9313 V24_PRINTER_CONTROLS (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Special bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Bit field 01001100 00000000 11111111 BYTE -
9314 V24_PRINTER_RTS (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Cable-controlled IMMEDIATELY 3/4
9315 V24_PRINTER_BAUD (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 5 (9600 Baud) 0 6 BYTE -
9316 V24_PRINTER_DATABITS (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Data bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
9317 V24_PRINTER_PARITY (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Parity bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
9318 V24_PRINTER_STOPBIT (for MMC 100) K4
Printer: Stop bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 (1 Stoppbit) 0 1 BYTE -
9319 V24_PRINTER_LINE (for MMC 100) K4
- 1 1 2 BYTE -

Lists 08/99
9320 V24_PG_PC_XON (for MMC 100) K4

PG: Xon character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 11 00 FF BYTE -
9321 V24_PG_PC_XOFF (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Xoff character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 13 00 FF BYTE -
9322 V24_PG_PC_EOF (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Transmission end character IMMEDIATELY 3/4
HEX 1A 00 FF BYTE -
9323 V24_PG_PC_CONTROLS (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Special bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Bit field 10010000 00000000 11111111 BYTE -
9324 V24_PG_PC_RTS (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Cable-controlled IMMEDIATELY 3/4
9325 V24_PG_PC_BAUD (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600) IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 5 (9600 Baud) 0 5 BYTE -
9326 V24_PG_PC_DATABITS (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Data bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
9327 V24_PG_PC_PARITY (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Parity bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
9328 V24_PG_PC_STOPBIT (for MMC 100) K4
PG: Stop bits IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 (1 Stopbit) 0 1 BYTE -
9329 V24_PG_PC_LINE (for MMC 100) K4
- 1 1 2 BYTE -
9400 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS1 (for MMC 100) BA
Tool length compensation reference, GEO axis 1 IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0.0 *** *** DOUBLE -
- 0.0 *** *** DOUBLE -
- 0.0 *** *** DOUBLE -
9410 TM_LOAD_PLACE (for MMC 100, OP 030) BA
Number of load location POWER ON 3/7
- 0 *** *** UNS. WORD -

08/99 Lists
9411 TM_NUM_MAG (for MMC 100, OP 030) BA

Number of work magazine POWER ON 3/7
- 0 *** *** UNS. WORD -
9412 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSIZE (for MMC 100) FBW
Default setting for loading: tool size left POWER ON 3/7
- 1111 1111 7777 UNS. WORD SW4.1
9414 TM_KIND_OF_TOOLMANAGAMENT FBW
IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW5
9415 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLPLACESPEC (for MMC 100) FBW
Default setting for location type IMMEDIATELY 3/7
- 1 1 *** (z.B. 99 ) BYTE SW4.2
9416 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLTYPE (for MMC 100) FBW
Default setting for loading, tool type POWER ON 3/7
- 120 100 900 UNS. WORD SW4.1
9417 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSTATE (for MMC 100) FBW
Default setting for loading, tool state POWER ON 3/7
- 0 0 256 UNS. WORD SW4.1
9419 TM_DEFAULT_DELETE_TOOL (for MMC 100) FBW
Default setting, Delete tool on unload POWER ON 3/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW4.1
9420 MA_ONLY_MKS_DIST_TO_GO (for MMC 100) FBW
Distance-to-go display in WCS window POWER ON 3/4
0: WCS value
1: MCS value
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW4.1
9421 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST -
Show Geo axes of the channel first IMMEDIATELY 4/4
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9422 MA_PRESET_MODE -
PRESET: IMMEDIATELY 3/4
0 No PRESET
1 PRESET
2 Set actual value
- 1 0 2 BYTE SW5
9423 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL (for MMC 102/103) -
In the operator panel window program excerpt, subroutines and programs IMMEDIATELY 3/4
are only displayed up to the level defined in the MD.
- 1 1 8 BYTE SW5

Lists 08/99
9424 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM K2
Coordinate system for actual value display IMMEDIATELY 3/4
0: WCS
1: SZS (settable zero point system)
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW5
9430 TM_UNLOAD_AND_DELETE (for OP 30) -
Delete tool when unloaded IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW5
9431 TM_TOOL_NEW (for OP 30) -
Tool automatically in load when created IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW5
9440 ACTIVATE _SEL_USER_DATA -
Active data (Frames) automatically activated as soon as they are changed IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW5
9449 WRITE_TOA_LIMIT_MASK
IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- 7 0 7 BYTE 5.2
9450 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT A2
Limit value for fine tear IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Length 0 *** *** DOUBLE SW4.2
9451 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT -
Limit value for fine offset IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Length 0 *** *** DOUBLE SW4.2
9460 PROGRAM_SETTINGS (for MMC 100) -
Data storage in area PROGRAM. IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Settings remain unchanged during RESET.
- 5 0 FFFF LONG SW5.1
9461 MM_ CONTOUR_END_TEXT (for MMC 100) -
String to be appended at the end of the contour IMMEDIATELY 3/4
when input is completet
- keine 0 Zeichen 80 Zeichen STRING SW5.1
9500 NC_PROPERTIES (for MMC 100) -
NC properties: IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Bit 0: Digital drives
Bit 1: Software start-up switch
Bit 2...4: Reserved
Bit field 1111 1111 0000 0000 1111 1111 BYTE SW2
9600 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X (for MMC 100) K1
Simulation default value X IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2

08/99 Lists
9601 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Z (for MMC 100) K1

Simulation default value Z IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9602 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA (for MMC 100) K1
Simulation default value display range IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 100 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9603 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X (for MMC 102/103) K1
Simulation maximum display X IMMEDIATELY 1
- 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9604 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Z (for MMC 102/103) K1
Simulation maximum display Z IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9605 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA (for MMC 102/103) K1
Simulation maximum display range IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 1000 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9606 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS (for MMC 100) K1
Simulation updating rate actual value IMMEDIATELY 1
ms 100 0 4000 WORD SW2
9610 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM K1
Position of coordinate system for technology turning (MD 9020 = 1) IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 2 0 7 BYTE SW4.3
9611 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON (for MMC 100) K1
Diameter display for transverse axes active IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2 to 4.3
9619 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON (for MMC 100) K1
Incremental feed IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW2 to 4.3
9632 CTM_ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS (for MMC 100) K1
Angle reference axis IMMEDIATELY 3/4
1: 1st axis
2: 2nd axis
- 1 1 2 WORD SW5
9650 CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM K1
Position of coordinate system, technologie not turning (MD 9020 <> 1) IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 0 0 23 BYTE SW4.3
9676 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 FBSP
Path for drive names in directory management IMMEDIATELY 3/4
- C:\NC_Files - - STRING (80) SW4.4 840D,
SW2.4 810D with
ShopMill

Lists 08/99

- - - - STRING (80) SW4.4 840D,
SW2.4 810D with
ShopMill
- - - - STRING (80) SW4.4 840D,
SW2.4 810D with
ShopMill
- - - - STRING (80) SW4.4 840D,
SW2.4 810D with
ShopMill
9900 MD_TEXT_SWITCH (for MMC 102) -

Plaintexts instead of MD identifier IMMEDIATELY 3/4
Bit field 0 0 1 BYTE SW2
9999 TRACE (for MMC 100) -
Test flags for internal diagnostics POWER ON 1/1
HEX 0 0 FFFF WORD
Note
The specific settings for the operator panel MDs for the ManualTurn and
ShopMill applications are located in the two last subsections.

08/99 Lists
2.4.2 Application-specific MDs for ManualTurn

Note
The MMC 100.2 operator control component or more powerful operator
control components are required for the ManualTurn and ShopMill functions.
Number MD identifier Cross ref.

Name, other information Active Protection level
Unit Default value Minimum value Maximum value Data type Valid from
9600 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X -
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9601 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Z -
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9602 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA -
Simulation default value display area IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 100 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9603 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X -
0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9604 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Z -
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9605 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA -
Simulation maximum display area IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 1000 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9606 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS -
Simulation actual value updating rate IMMEDIATELY 1
ms 100 0 4000 WORD SW2
9607 CTM_ENABLE_RAPID_FEED -
Enable the rapid traverse selection as feedrate IMMEDIATELY 1
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9608 CTM_ENABLE_FEED_P_MIN -
Enable the feedrate selection in mm/min IMMEDIATELY 1
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2

Lists 08/99
9609 CTM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES -
Number of decimal places in the speed input field IMMEDIATELY 1
- 0 0 4 BYTE SW2
9610 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM -
Position of the coordinate system IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 2 0 7 BYTE SW2
9611 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON -
Diameter display for active transverse axes IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9612 CTM_TEACH_STORE_MANUAL_ABS -
Store setup movements as absolute IMMEDIATELY 1
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9613 CTM_TEACH_STORE_START_ABS -
Store start position as absolute IMMEDIATELY 1
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9614 CTM_TEACH_STORE_MANUAL_AUTO -
Store setup movements automatically IMMEDIATELY 1
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9615 CTM_TEACH_HANDW_FEED -
Handwheel feedrate type IMMEDIATELY 1
- 0 0 2 BYTE SW2
9616 CTM_TEACH_HANDW_FEED_P_MIN -
Path feed IMMEDIATELY 1
mm/min 10 1.000 max. feed DOUBLE SW2
9617 CTM_TEACH_HANDW_FEED_P_REV -
Rotational feed IMMEDIATELY 1
mm/rev. 1 0.10 100.0 DOUBLE SW2
9618 CTM_ENABLE_C_AXSIS -
Enable C axis for surface IMMEDIATELY 1
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9619 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON -
Incremental infeed IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW2
9620 CTM_CYCLE_SAFETY_CLEARANCE -
ManualTurn cycles safety distance IMMEDIATELY 6/7
mm 1.0 0.0 10.0 DOUBLE SW2
9621 CTM_CYCLE_DWELL_TIME -
Relief cutting time for cycles IMMEDIATELY 4/7
Neg. value: s -1 -32768 +32767 WORD SW2
Pos. value: U

08/99 Lists
9622 CTM_ENABLE_REFPOINT -
Enable reference point approach for ManualTurn IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9623 CTM_START_WITHOUT_REFPOINT
Enable NC start without referenced axes POWER ON 4/7
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9624 CTM_MODE_SELECT_BY_SOFTKEY -
Operating mode switchover using vertical softkeys POWER ON 4/7
- 0 - - BYTE SW2
9625 CTM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE -
Customer start picture POWER ON 4/7
- 0 - - BYTE SW2
9626 CTM_TRACE -
Test flags for internal ManualTurn diagnosis IMMEDIATELY 1/1
- - - - BYTE SW2
9627 CTM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS -
Number of gear steps IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 1 0 5 BYTE SW2
9628 CTM_TOOL_INPUT_DIAM_ON -
Display the X tool data as diameter IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW2
9629 CTM_WEAR_INPUT_DIAM_ON -
Display the X tool wear data as diameter IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW2
9630 CTM_FIN_SPEED_PERCENT -
Finishing feedrate as percentage IMMEDIATELY 4/7
% 100 1 100 WORD SW2
9631 CTM_CYCLE_DWELL_TIME_SEC -
Dwell time for cycles in seconds IMMEDIATELY 4/7
s 1 0 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9632 CTM_ ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS -
Angle reference axis IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9633 CTM_ INC_DEC_FEED_PER_MIN -
Increments for feedrate in mm/min (increment/decrement) IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm/min 1 0.001 1000 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D

Lists 08/99
9634 CTM_ INC_DEC_FEED_PER_ROT -

Increments for feedrate in mm/rev (increment/decrement) IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm/Umdr. 0.1 0.001 1 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9635 CTM_ DISPL_RES_MORE_INCH -
Number of places after decimal point greater than for inch IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 1 0 3 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9636 CTM_ ENABLE_S_TOOL_TABLE -
Enable constant cutting speed from tool table IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9637 CTM_ MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN -
Upper input limit for feedrate in mm/min IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm/min 2000 0 50000 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9638 CTM_ MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT -
Upper input limit for feedrate in mm/rev IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm/Umdr. 1 0 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9639 CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR -
Upper input limit tool wear IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm 1 0 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9640 CTM_ENABLE_CALC_THREAD_PITCH -
Calculation of thread depth if pitch has been entered IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9641 CTM_ ENABLE_G_CODE_INPUT -
Enable G code input IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9642 CTM_ENABLE_CIRCLE_HOLE_CYCLE -
Enable drilling of circle of holes IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9643 CTM_ ENABLE_DRIVEN_TOOL -
Enable support of rotating tools IMMEDIATELY 4/7
- 0 0 2 BYTE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D

08/99 Lists
9644 CTM_CIRC_TAP_DWELL_TIME_1 -
Dwell time, below, tapping on circle of holes IMMEDIATELY 4/7
s 0 0 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9645 CTM_ CIRC_TAP_DWELL_TIME_2 -
Dwell time, above, tapping on circle of holes IMMEDIATELY 4/7
s 0 0 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9648 CTM_ ROUGH_O_RELEASE_DIST -
Retraction distance, stock removal on outside machining -1 = as before IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm 1 -1 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9649 CTM_ROUGH_I_RELEASE_DIST -
Retraction distance, stock removal on inside machining - 1 = as before IMMEDIATELY 4/7
mm 0,5 -1 10 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D

Lists 08/99
2.4.3 Application-specific MDs for ShopMill
9600 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X -
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9601 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Z -
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9602 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA -
Simulation default value display range IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 100 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9603 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X -
- 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9604 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Z -
mm 0 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9605 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA -
Simulation maximum display range IMMEDIATELY 1
mm 1000 -10000 10000 LONG SW2
9650 CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM -
Position of the coordinate system IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 0 0 47 BYTE SW2
9653 CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS -
Enable 4th axis for the user interface IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 0 0 3 BYTE SW2
9654 CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES -
Number of decimal places in the speed input field IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 0 0 4 BYTE SW2
9655 CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST -
Relief distance during deep-hole drilling IMMEDIATELY 7/6
mm 1.0 0.0 10.0 DOUBLE SW2
9656 CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST -
Relief distance during release IMMEDIATELY 7/6
mm 0.1 0.0 1.0 DOUBLE SW2
9657 CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD -
Specification of the deviation of the smallest possible cutter radius IMMEDIATELY 7/6
% 5 0 50 DOUBLE SW2
9658 CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD -
Specification of the deviation of the largest possible cutter radius IMMEDIATELY 6/7
mm 0.01 0.0 10.0 DOUBLE SW2

08/99 Lists
9659 CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE -
Relief angle during release IMMEDIATELY 7/6
Grad 0 0 360 DOUBLE SW2
9660 CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE -
Switchover to machining level (G17, G18, G19) IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 1 -1 1 BYTE SW2
9662 CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS -
Number of gear steps IMMEDIATELY 6/7
- 1 0 5 BYTE SW2
9664 CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN -
Feedrate in mm/min IMMEDIATELY 7/6
mm/min 10000.0 0.0 30000.0 DOUBLE SW2
9665 CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT -
Feedrate in mm/revolution IMMEDIATELY 7/6
mm/rev. 1.0 0.0 10.0 DOUBLE SW2
9666 CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH -
Feedrate in mm/tooth IMMEDIATELY 7/6
mm/tooth 1.0 0.0 5.0 DOUBLE SW2
9667 FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIV -
Tool preselection active IMMEDIATELY -
- 1 0 1 BYTE SW2
9668 CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II -
M code coolant I and II (-1 = no M code) IMMEDIATELY -
- -1 -1 32767 WORD SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9669 CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM -
Effective milling diameter for face milling IMMEDIATELY -
% 85.0 50.0 100.0 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9670 CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKET -
Radius approach circle for finishing contour pockets plus half finishing IMMEDIATELY -
allowance (-1=safety clearance)
% -1 -1 100.0 DOUBLE SW 2.4 810D,
4.4 840D
9675 CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE
Customer start-up screen. 0: Siemens, 1: Customer screen IMMEDIATELY
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9676 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1
Path for drive names in directory management IMMEDIATELY
- C:\NC_Files - - STRING (80) SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1

Lists 08/99
- - - - STRING (80) SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
- - - STRING (80) SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
- - - - STRING (80) SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9680 CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I
M-Code coolant I IMMEDIATELY
- 8 0 32767 WORD SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9681 CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II
M-Code coolant II IMMEDIATELY
- 7 0 32767 WORD SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9720 CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS
Enable B_Axis IMMEDIATELY
- 0 3 BYTE SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9721 CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL
Enable cylinder surface transformation IMMEDIATELY
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9722 CMM_ENABLE_MAN_TOOL
Enable Manual tools IMMEDIATELY
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1
9723 CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD
Enable Swivel heads IMMEDIATELY
- 0 0 1 BYTE SW 4.4 840 D
SW 2.4 810 D with
ShopMill 5.1

08/99 Lists
9750 CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT -
Measuring input for workpiece probe IMMEDIATELY -
- 0 0 1 BOOL SW2
9751 CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT -
Measuring input for tool probe IMMEDIATELY -
- 1 0 1 BOOL SW2
9752 CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE -
Maximum measuring distance (before and after the measuring point) for IMMEDIATELY -
automatic measuring in the program
mm 5 1 1000 DOUBLE SW2
9753 CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN -
Maximum measuring distance for manual measuring (before and after the IMMEDIATELY -
measuring point)
mm 10 1 1000 DOUBLE SW2
9754 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH -
Maximum measuring distance for tool length (before and after the IMMEDIATELY -
measuring point)
mm 2 0.1 1000 DOUBLE SW2
9755 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS -
Maximum measuring distance for tool radius (before and after the IMMEDIATELY -
measuring point)
mm 1 0.1 1000 DOUBLE SW2
9756 CMM_MEASURING_FEED -
Measuring feedrate IMMEDIATELY -
mm/min 300 10 5000 DOUBLE SW2
9757 CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL -
Plane feedrate with collision monitoring IMMEDIATELY -
9758 CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL -
Infeed rate with collision monitoring IMMEDIATELY -
9759 CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP -
Maximum circumferential speed during tool measuringwith rotating spindle IMMEDIATELY -
m/min 100 1 200 DOUBLE SW2
9760 CMM_MAX_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP -
Maximum speed during tool measuring with rotating spindle IMMEDIATELY -
rpm 1000 100 25000 DOUBLE SW2

Lists 08/99
9761 CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP -
Minimum feedrate during tool measuring with rotating spindle IMMEDIATELY -
9762 CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP -
Measurement accuracy during tool measurement with rotating spindle IMMEDIATELY -
mm 0.01 0.001 0.1 DOUBLE SW2
9763 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE -
Tool probe type IMMEDIATELY -
- 0 0 999 WORD SW2
9764 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOW_AXIS -
Allowed axis directions for tool probe (ZYX) IMMEDIATELY -
- 133 0 999 WORD SW2
9765 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEAS -
Tool probe diameter for length measurement IMMEDIATELY -
mm 0 0 + DOUBLE SW2
9766 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS -
Tool probe diameter for radius measurement IMMEDIATELY -
mm 0 0 + DOUBLE SW2
9767 CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS -
Infeed distance of tool probe upper edge for radius measurement IMMEDIATELY -
mm 0 0 + DOUBLE SW2
9768 CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR -
Plane approach direction, tool to the tool probe IMMEDIATELY -
- -1 -2 2 BYTE SW2

08/99 Lists
2.5 General machine data

higher. The options Display filters and Attributes have been newly
introduced.
meaning:
• N01 Configuration / scaling
• N02 Memory configuration
• N03 PLC machine data
• N04 Drive control
• N05 Status data / diagnosis
• N06 Monitoring / limitations
• N07 Auxiliary functions
• N08 Overrides / compensations
• N09 Technological functions
• N10 I/O configuration
• N11 Standard machine
• N12 NC-Sprache ISO-Dialekt
Attributes In some machine data, you will find short identifiers with the following meaning
under attributes:
• NBUP No back-up: the data is not entered in data back-up
• ODLD Only download: the data can only be loaded from the file
• READ Read only: the data can only be read
• NDLD No download: the data cannot be loaded from the file
• SFCO Configuration safety integrated
• SCAL Scaling Alarm
• LINK Link description
• CTEQ Must be equal for all containers
• CTDE Container description

Lists 08/99
2.5.1 System settings
Introduction The display filters and attributes are displayed in the machine data table
element, as shown in the following header.
Number MD identifier [n]: i ... Runtime limit index 1 Cross

reference
Unit Name, other information SW version
Display filters Attributes Active
HW / Function Standard value Minimum value Maximum value D type Protect.
Level
Note
The entry ”810D_2” in field HW / Function corresponds to CCU2.
10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[n]: 0 ... max. No. axes in sys. - 1 K2

- Machine axis name SW1
Display Filter: N01, N11 POWER ON

always X1, Y1, Z1, A1, B1,C1, - - STRING 2/7
U1, V1, , , ...
10002 AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB [n]: 0 ... max. No. axes in sys. - 1 B3
- Logical NCK machine axis image SW5
Display Filter: N01 POWER ON

Axis container AX1, AX2, AX3, AX4, - - STRING 2/3
AX5,AX6, ...
10002 AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB [n]: 0 ... max. No. axes in sys. - 1 B3
- Logical NCK machine axis image SW5

NCU-link AX1, AX2, AX3, AX4, - - STRING 2/3
AX5,AX6, ...
10010 ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP [n]: 0 ... max. No. chann. in sys. -1 K1
- Channel valid in mode group
Display Filter: N01, N02, N11 POWER ON

always 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 1 DWORD 2/7
0, ...
NCU572 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 1 DWORD 2/7
0, ...
10010 ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP [n]: 0 ... 1 K1
- Channel valid in mode group

NCU572 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 1 DWORD 2/7
0, ...

08/99 Lists
10050 SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME G3
s Basic system cycle SW1
Display Filter: N01, N05, N11 Attribute: SFCO POWER ON

always DOUBLE 2/7
NCU571 0.006 0.002 0.031 DOUBLE 2/7
NCU572 0.004 0.000125 0.031 DOUBLE 2/7
NCU573 0.004 0.000125 0.031 DOUBLE 2/7
NCU 573, 0.004 0.000125 0.031 DOUBLE 2/7
channels > 1
NCU 573, 0.008 0.000125 0.031 DOUBLE 2/7
channels > 2
810D 0.0025 0.000625 0.04 DOUBLE 2/7
810D_2 0.0025 0.000625 0.04 DOUBLE 2/7
10060 POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO G3
Factor*M Factor for position control cycle SW1
D 10050
Display Filter: N01, N05 Attribute: SFCO POWER ON
always 1 1 31 DWORD 2/7
0.0 - - DOUBLE 2/0
10061 POSCTRL_CYCLE_TIME
- Position control cycle SW5
Display Filter: N01, N05 Attribute: READ POWER ON

always 0.0 - - DOUBLE 0/7
10062 POSCTRL_CYCLE_DELAY
- Position control cycle offset SW5

always 0.0 0.000 0.008 DOUBLE 0/0
10070 IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO G3
Factor*M Factor for interpolation cycle SW1
D 10050
always 1 100 DWORD 2/7
NCU572, 573 3 1 100 DWORD 2/7
NCU571 3 1 100 DWORD 2/7
810D 4 1 100 DWORD 2/7
10071 IPO_CYCLE_TIME
- Interpolator cycle SW5
Display Filter: N01, N05, N11 Attribute: READ POWER ON

10072 COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO -
- Division ratio between interpolation and communications task SW3

Communic. task 1 1 100 DWORD 0/0
10080 SYSCLOCK_SAMPL_TIME_RATIO G3
- Division factor of position control cycle for actual value acquisition SW1
Display Filter: N01, EXP POWER ON

always DWORD 0/0
NCU572 4 1 31 DWORD 2/7
NCU573 4 1 31 DWORD 2/7
NCU 572, NCU 4 1 31 DWORD 2/7
573, channels > 1
NCU572, NCU573, 5 1 31 DWORD 2/7
channels > 2
NCU571 6 1 31 DWORD 2/7
NCU 571, NCU 4 1 31 DWORD 2/7
572
810D 2 1 31 DWORD 2/7

Lists 08/99
10082 CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME K3
% Shift of setpoint transfer time SW2

always 0.0 0.0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
10083 CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME_MAX K3
% Max. settable offset of setpoint transfer time SW4.2
Display Filter: N01, EXP NEW CONF

always 100.0 0.0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
10087 SERVO_FIFO_SIZE B3
- Size of setpoint buffers between interpolator and position controller SW5

10090 SAFETY_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO FBSI
- Factor for monitoring cycle SW3.4
Display Filter: N01, N06 Attribute: SFCO POWER ON

Fct.: Safety 3 1 50 DWORD 1/7
Integrated
10091 INFO_SAFETY_CYCLE_TIME FBSI
s Display of monitoring cycle time SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0.0 - - DOUBLE 0/7
Integrated
10092 INFO_CROSSCHECK_CYCLE_TIME FBSI
s Display of cross-check cycle time for safety data SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0.0 - - DOUBLE 0/7
Integrated
10093 INFO_NUM_SAFE_FILE_ACCESS FBSI
- number of SPL-file-accesses SW5.2
Display Filter: N05, N06, EXP Attribute: READ POWER ON

Fct.: Safety 0 - - DWORD 0/0
Integrated,
synchronized
actions
10094 SAFE_ALARM_SUPPRESS_LEVEL FBSI
- alarm suppress level SW5.2
Display Filter: N05, N06, EXP POWER ON

Fct.: Safety 1 0 1 BYTE 2/7
Integrated SW 2
10100 PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT P3
s Maximum PLC cycle time SW1

HW PLC 0.1 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
10110 PLC_CYCLE_TIME_AVERAGE B1
s Maximum PLC acknowledgement time SW1

always 0.2 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
10120 PLC_RUNNINGUP_TIMEOUT H2
s Monitoring time for PLC power up SW1

HW PLC 50.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7

08/99 Lists
10130 TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_COM_TASK OEM

s Runtime of communication to MMC SW1

always .001 0.100 DOUBLE 1/7
NCU572, 573 0.005 .001 0.100 DOUBLE 2/7
NCU571 0.012 .001 0.100 DOUBLE 2/7
810D 0.005 .001 0.100 DOUBLE 2/7
10131 SUPPRESS_SCREEN_REFRESH A2
- Screen refresh handling in overload situations SW5
Display Filter: EXP POWER ON

always 0 0 2 BYTE 2/7
10132 MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT PA, M4
s Monitoring time for MMC command in the part program SW3.2

Fct.: Execute from 3.0 0.0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
HD
10134 MM_NUM_MMC_UNITS B3
- Number of MMC communication stations possible simultaneously SW3.2

NCU572, 573 6 1 10 DWORD 2/7
NCU571 3 1 10 DWORD 2/7
810D 3 1 10 DWORD 2/7
10140 TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_DRIVE_TASK ECO
s Runtime limit of drive communications sub-task SW1

Fct.: Drive start-up 0.02 .001 .5 DOUBLE 1/7
analog
10140 TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_DRIVE_TASK ECO
s Runtime limit of drive communications sub-task SW1

611D 0.02 .001 .5 DOUBLE 1/7
10150 PREP_DRIVE_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO ECO
- Factor for communication with drive SW1

Fct.: Drive start-up 30 1 50 DWORD 1/7
analog
Start-up analog 2 1 50 DWORD 2/7
drives, 611D
10150 PREP_DRIVE_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO ECO
- Factor for communication with drive SW1

611D 30 1 50 DWORD 1/7
611D 2 1 50 DWORD 2/7
10160 PREP_COM_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO ECO
- Factor for communication with MMC SW1

10190 TOOL_CHANGE_TIME BA
- Tool changing time for Simulation SW4.3

Fct.: Simulation 0. - - DOUBLE 2/7

Lists 08/99
10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM G2
- Computational resolution for linear positions SW1

always 1000 1 1000000000 DOUBLE 2/7
10210 INT_INCR_PER_DEG G2
- Calculation resolution for angular positions SW1

always 1000 1 1000000000 DOUBLE 2/7
10220 SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK G2
HEX Activation of scaling factors SW1
Display Filter: N01, EXP Attribute: SCAL POWER ON

always 0x200 0 0x1FFF DWORD 2/7
10230 SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF [n]: 0 ... 12 G2
- Scaling factors of physical variables SW1
Display Filter: N01, EXP Attribute: SCAL POWER ON

always 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
1.0, 1.0, ...
10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC G2
- Basic system metric SW1
Display Filter: N01 Attribute: SCAL POWER ON

always 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
10250 SCALING_VALUE_INCH G2
- Conversion factor for conversion to INCH system SW1
Display Filter: EXP Attribute: SCAL POWER ON

10260 CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM A3, G2
- Enable basic system conversion SW5

10270 POS_TAB_SCALING_SYSTEM
- scaling system of position tables SW5.2
Display Filter: N01, N09, RESET

10290 CC_TDA_PARAM_UNIT [n]: 0 ... 9 G2
- Physical units of tool data for CC SW5

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 0 16 DWORD 2/2
10292 CC_TOA_PARAM_UNIT [n]: 0 ... 9 G2
- Units of cutt. edge data for CC SW5

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 0 16 DWORD 2/2
10300 FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS A4
- Number of active analog NCK inputs SW2

High-speed 0 0 8 BYTE 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10310 FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS A4
- Number of active analog NCK outputs SW2

dig./anal. I/O

08/99 Lists
10320 FASTIO_ANA_INPUT_WEIGHT [n]: 0 ... 7 A4

- Weighting factor for analog NCK inputs SW2

High-speed 10000, 10000, 10000, 1 10000000 DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O 10000, 10000, ...
10330 FASTIO_ANA_OUTPUT_WEIGHT [n]: 0 ... 7 A4
- Weighting factor for analog NCK outputs SW2

High-speed 10000, 10000, 10000, 1 10000000 DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O 10000, 10000, ...
10350 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS A4
- Number of active digital NCK input bytes SW2

dig./anal. I/O
10360 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS A4
- Number of active digital NCK output bytes SW2

dig./anal. I/O
10361 FASTIO_DIG_SHORT_CIRCUIT [n]: 0 ... 10 A2
- Short circuit dig. inputs and outputs SW4.2

High-speed 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10362 HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN [n]: 0 ... 7 A4
HEX Hardware assignment of external analog NCK inputs SW2
1st byte: (low byte) No. of the I/O byte on DP compact modjle (1 to 2)
2nd byte: Submodule slot on terminal block (1 to 8)
3rd byte: Logical drive No. (MD 13010) of terminal block (1...1I)
4th byte: Segment No. (always 1 for 840D)

High-speed 0x01000000, 0x01000000, 0x01000000 0x011F0801 DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O 0x01000000, ...
10364 HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT [n]: 0 ... 7 A4
HEX Hardware assignment of external analog NCK outputs SW2

dig./anal. I/O 0x01000000, ...
10366 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN [n]: 0 ... 9 A4
HEX Hardware assignment of external digital NCK inputs SW2

dig./anal. I/O 0x01000000, ...
10368 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT [n]: 0 ... 3 A4
HEX Hardware assignment of external digital NCK outputs SW2

dig./anal. I/O 0x01000000, ...

Lists 08/99
10380 HW_UPDATE_RATE_FASTIO [n]: 0 ... max. No. terminal blocks - 1 A4

- Updating rate of clocked external NCK I/O devices SW2
Value = 1: hardware cycle, value = 2: pos. control cycle, value = 3: interpolation cycle

High-speed 2, 2, 2, 2, 3 2 3 BYTE 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10382 HW_LEAD_TIME_FASTIO [n]: 0 ... max. No. terminal blocks - 1 A4
us Lead time of synchronous external NCK I/Os SW2

High-speed 100, 100, 100, 100, 100 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10384 HW_CLOCKED_MODULE_MASK [n]: 0 ... max. No. terminal blocks - 1 A4
HEX Synchronous processing of external PLC I/Os SW2
Bit = 0/1: I/O module operated asynchronously/synchronously

High-speed 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 - - BYTE 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10390 SAFE_IN_HW_ASSIGN [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
- Input assignment ext. interface SPL SW4.3

Fct.: Safety 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated,
synchronized
actions
10392 SAFE_OUT_HW_ASSIGN [n]: 0 ... 7 FBSI
- Output assignment ext. interface SPL SW4.3

Fct.: Safety 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated,
synchronized
actions
10394 PLCIO_NUM_BYTES_IN A2
- Number of PLC input bytes to be read directly by the NC SW5

Syst. with direct 0 0 MD_MAXNUM_PLCI BYTE 2/7
PLC-IO O_BYTES_IN
10395 PLCIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_IN A2
- Start address of PLC input bytes to be read directly by the NC SW5

Syst. with direct 0 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
PLC-IO
10396 PLCIO_NUM_BYTES_OUT A2
- Number of PLC output bytes to be written directly by the NC SW5

Syst. with direct 0 0 MD_MAXNUM_PLCI BYTE 2/7
PLC-IO O_BYTES_OUT
10397 PLCIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_OUT A2
- Start address of PLC output bytes to be written directly by the NC SW5

Syst. with direct 0 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
PLC-IO

08/99 Lists
10400 CC_VDI_IN_DATA OEM

Byte Number of interface bytes for compile cycles SW1

Compile cycles 0 0 1024 DWORD 1/7
NC570 compile 0 0 1024 DWORD 0/0
cycles
10410 CC_VDI_OUT_DATA OEM
Byte Number of interface bytes for compile cycles SW1

Compile cycles 0 0 1024 DWORD 1/7
NC570 compile 0 0 1024 DWORD 0/0
cycles
10420 CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK OEM
HEX Reservation of external outputs for CC applications SW2
Bits 0-15/16-31: reserved digital output bytes / analog outputs

Compile cycles 0 - - DWORD 2/7
10430 CC_HW_DEBUG_MASK OEM
HEX Hardware debug mask for compile cycles SW2
Display Filter: EXP Attribute: NBUP POWER ON

always 0 - - DWORD 1/7
10450 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB [n]: 0 ... max. No. SW cams - 1 N3
- Assignment software cams to machine axes SW2
(software cams): 0...15

Fct.: SW cams 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 31 BYTE 2/7
0,0, 0, ...
10460 SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME [n]: 0 ... max. No. SW cams - 1 N3
s Lead or delay time at minus cams 1-16 SW2
Positive value: lead time, negative value: delay time

Fct.: SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 2/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
10461 SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME [n]: 0 ... max. No. SW cams - 1 N3
s Lead or delay time at plus cams 1-16 SW2
Bit 0-7: no. of 1st HW byte Bit 8-15: no. of 2nd HW byte
Bit 16-23: inverting screen form 1st byte Bit 24-31: inverting screen form 2nd byte

0.0, 0.0, ...
10470 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 N3
HEX Hardware assignment for output of cams 1-8 to NCK I/Os SW2
Bit 0-7: no. of 1st HW byte Bit 8-15: no. of 2nd HW byte
Bit 16-23: inverting screen form 1st byte Bit 24-31: inverting screen form 2nd byte

Fct.: SW cams 0 - - DWORD 2/7
HEX Hardware assignment for the output of cams 9-16 to NCK I/Os SW2

- Configuration cams 17 - 24 on I/O devices SW4.1

840D, SW cams 0 - - DWORD 2/7

Lists 08/99

NCU 571, SW 0 - - DWORD 2/7
cams

810D_2, SW cams 0 - - DWORD 2/7

840D, SW cams 0 - - DWORD 2/7

NCU 571, SW 0 - - DWORD 2/7
cams

810D_2, SW cams 0 - - DWORD 2/7
10480 SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK N3
HEX Mask for output of cam signals via timer interr. to NCU SW2

10530 COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1 [n]: 0 ... 7 A4
- Hardware assignment of analog inputs for comparator byte 1 SW2

High-speed 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 - - BYTE 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10531 COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2 [n]: 0 ... 7 A4
- Hardware assignment of analog inputs for comparator byte 2 SW2

High-speed 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 - - BYTE 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10540 COMPAR_TYPE_1 A4
HEX Parameterization for comparator byte 1 SW2
Bit 0-7: Mask of comparison type
Bit = 0/1: Comp. bit = 1 if analog value</>= SD threshold value
Bit 16-23: No. of HW byte for output of the comparator outputs
Bit 24-31: inverting screen form for the output of comparator states

High-speed 0 - - DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O
10541 COMPAR_TYPE_2 A4
HEX Parameterization of comparator byte 2 SW2

High-speed 0 - - DWORD 2/7
dig./anal. I/O

08/99 Lists
10600 FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE K2
- Input type for rotation with FRAME(1: RPY notation, 2: Eulerian angle) SW1

10602 FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE K2
- Frames by changing GEO-axes SW5.2

10610 MIRROR_REF_AX K2
- Reference axis for FRAME elements SW1

10612 MIRROR_TOGGLE K2
- Toggle of mirror SW5

10613 NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK K2
- Active NCU global base frames after reset SW5
Display Filter: EXP RESET

always 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
10615 NCBFRAME_POWERON_MASK K2
- reset global base frames after power on SW5.2
Display Filter: EXP, N12 POWER ON

always 0 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
10620 EULER_ANGLE_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Name of Eulerian angle SW1

Fct.: 5-axis A2, B2, C2 - - STRING 2/7
transformation
10630 NORMAL_VECTOR_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 5 -
- Name of normal vectors SW1

Fct.: 5-axis A4, B4, C4, A5, B5, C5 - - STRING 2/7
transformation
10640 DIR_VECTOR_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Name of direction vectors SW1

Fct.: 5-axis A3, B3, C3 - - STRING 2/7
transformation
10650 IPO_PARAM_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 2 K2
- Name of interpolation parameters SW1

always I, J, K - - STRING 2/7
10652 CONTOUR_DEF_ANGLE_NAME FBFA
- Name of angle for contour definitions SW5
Display Filter: N01, EXP, N12 POWER ON

always ANG - - STRING 2/7
10654 RADIUS_NAME FBFA
- Name of radius for contour definitions SW5

always RND - - STRING 2/7

Lists 08/99
10656 CHAMFER_NAME FBFA

- Name of chamfer for contour definitions SW5

always CHR - - STRING 2/7
10660 INTERMEDIATE_POINT_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 2 K2
- Name of intermediate point coordinates for G2/G3 SW1

always I1, J1, K1 - - STRING 2/7
10670 STAT_NAME F2
- Name of state information SW5.2

Fct.: STAT - - STRING 2/7
Transformations
10672 TU_NAME F2
- Name of state information of axes SW5.2

Fct.: TU - - STRING 2/7
Transformations
10674 PO_WITHOUT_POLY
- Polynomprogramming whithout G-Function POLY programable SW5.2

Fct.: Polynomial 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
10700 PREPROCESSING_LEVEL V2
- Program preprocessing level SW1

10702 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK K1
- Prevents stopping at specific blocks in single block mode SW4.2

always 0 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
10704 DRYRUN_MASK V1
- Dry run feedrate activation SW4.3

10706 SLASH_MASK PG
- Activation of Blockmasking SW5.2

10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB [n]: 0 ... 29 K1
- Setting data to be updated SW1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0,0, 0, ...
10712 NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 199 PA
- List of reconfigured NC codes SW3.2

always CROT, , CSCALE, , - - STRING 2/2
CMIRROR, , G603, ...
NCU572, 573 - - - STRING 2/7
810D_2 - - - STRING 2/7

08/99 Lists
10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE [n]: 0 ... 0 FBFA

- M-Number for starting toolchange-cycle SW5.2

always -1 - - DWORD 2/7
10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME [n]: 0 ... 0 FBFA
- Name of toolchange-cycle (M-Function) SW5.2

always - - STRING 2/7
10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME FBFA
- Name of toolchange-cycle (T-Function) SW5.2

always - - STRING 2/7
10720 OPERATING_MODE_DEFAULT [n]: 0 ... max. No. mode groups -1 H2
- Initial setting of mode after Power On SW1
0: AUTOMATIC mode 4: MDA mode, submode TEACH IN
1: AUTO mode 5: MDA mode, submode REF PT-T
2: MDA mode 6: JOG mode
3: MDA mode 7: JOG mode, submode REF PT-T

always 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7 0 12 BYTE 2/7
10731 JOG_MODE_KEYS_EDGETRIGGRD IAF
- Functioning of the Jog keys SW4.1

10760 G53_TOOLCORR FBFA
- Specification of G53, G153 and SUPA SW5.2

10780 UNLOCK_EDIT_MODESWITCH
- Unlock of startsuspension for part program editing SW5.2

10880 MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM FBFA
- Definition of the CNC system to be adapted SW5

Non-Siemens NC 1 1 2 DWORD 2/7
progr. lang.
10882 NC_USER_EXTERN_GCODES_TAB [n]: 0 ... 59 FBFA
- List of user-specific G commands for an external NC language SW5

Non-Siemens NC - - - STRING 2/2
progr. lang.
10884 EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG FBFA
- Calculation of command values without decemalpoint SW5.2

Non-Siemens NC 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
progr. lang.
10886 EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM FBFA
- incrementsystem in external language mode SW5.2

progr. lang.

Lists 08/99
10888 EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO FBFA

- digits for T-Number in external language mode SW5.2

Non-Siemens NC 2 0 8 BYTE 2/7
progr. lang.
10890 EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE FBFA
- Toolprog Mode for extern language SW5.2

Non-Siemens NC 0 - - BYTE 2/7
progr. lang.
10892 EXTERN_G00_MODE FBFA
- G00 interpolationmode SW5.2

progr. lang.
10900 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 T1
- Number of positions for indexing axis table 1 SW1
Display Filter: N09 RESET

Fct.: Positioning 0 0 60 DWORD 2/7
axes
10910 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... max. No. indexing pos. - 1 T1
mm/inch, Indexing position table 1 SW1
degrees
Fct.: Positioning 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., - - DOUBLE 2/7
axes 0., ...
10920 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 T1
- Number of positions for indexing axis table 2 SW1

Fct.: Positioning 0 0 60 DWORD 2/7
axes
10930 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 [n]: 0 ... max. No. indexing pos. - 1 T1
mm/inch, Indexing position table 2 SW1
degrees
Fct.: Positioning 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., - - DOUBLE 2/7
axes 0., ...
11100 AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN H2
- Number of auxiliary functions distr. amongst aux. fct. groups SW1

11110 AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC [n]: 0 ... 14 H2
HEX Auxiliary function group specification SW1
Bit 0 = 1: Output duration 1 OB1 pass
Bit 1 = 1: Output duration 1 PLC basic cycle
Bit 2: -
Bit 3 = 1: No output at the interface
Bit 4: - Default setting:
Bit 5 = 1: Output before movement Group 1 = 81 H
Bit 6 = 1: Output during movement Group 2 = 21 H
Bit 7 = 1: Output at end of block Group 3 - 15 = 41 H

always 0x81, 0x21, 0x41, 0x41, - - BYTE 2/7
0x41, 0x41, ...

08/99 Lists
11120 LUD_EXTENDED_SCOPE PG
- Activate function "program global user data (PUD)" SW5

Fct.: NC memory 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
LUD
11200 INIT_MD IAF, IAD, IA
HEX Standard machine data loaded at next Power On SW1

always 0 - - BYTE 2/7
11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY IAD
- MD backup of changed MD only SW1
Display Filter: N01, N05 IMMEDIATELY

always 0xFF - - BYTE 3/7
11220 INI_FILE_MODE IAD
- Error response on INI file errors SW3
0: Read-in aborted
1 und 2: No abort, alarms output
Display Filter: N01, N05 RESET

11230 MD_FILE_STYLE IAD
HEX Structure of MD files on "upload" SW3
0 : Output text only 1 : Text and line checksum
2 : MD number and text 3 : MD number with text and checksum
Display Filter: N01, N05 IMMEDIATELY

11280 WPD_INI_MODE IAD
- Handling of INI-files in workpiece-directory SW5

11300 JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD H1
- INC and REF in Jog mode SW1

11310 HANDWH_REVERSE H1
- Threshold for direction change handwheel SW3.2

always 2 0.0 plus BYTE 2/7
11320 HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH [n]: 0 ... max. No. handwheels - 1 H1
- Handwheel pulses per detent position SW1

always 1., 1., 1. - - DOUBLE 2/7
11330 JOG_INCR_SIZE_TAB [n]: 0 ... 4 H1
- Increment size for INC/handwheel SW1

always 1., 10., 100., 1000., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
10000.
11340 ENC_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT_NR FBMA
- 3. handwheel: type of drive SW4.1


Lists 08/99
11342 ENC_HANDWHEEL_MODULE_NR FBMA

- 3. handwheel: drive no./meas. circuit no. SW4.1

11344 ENC_HANDWHEEL_INPUT_NR FBMA
- 3. handwheel: Input to module/meas.circ.board SW4.1

11346 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE FBMA
- Handwheel: SW4.1

11380 MONITOR_ADDRESS STZ
- Test MD for setting NCK code or data for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated SW3.2
Address of memory to be read/written
Display Filter: N06, EXP Attribute: NBUP IMMEDIATELY

11382 MONITOR_DISPLAY_INT STZ
- INTEGER display of the addressed cell SW3.2

11384 MONITOR_DISPLAY_REAL STZ
- REAL display of the addressed cell SW3.2

11386 MONITOR_INPUT_INT STZ
- INTEGER input for the addressed cell SW3.2

11388 MONITOR_INPUT_REAL STZ
- REAL input for addressed cell SW3.2

11390 MONITOR_INPUT_STROBE STZ
- Overwrite the addressed cell MONITOR_INT/REAL SW3.2

11398 AXIS_VAR_SERVER_SENSITIVE B3
- Axis-Var-Server response in error situations SW5

11400 TRACE_SELECT -
- Activation of internal trace functions SW1


08/99 Lists
11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK D1
HEX Mask for support of special alarm outputs SW2
Bit 0 = 1 alarm 15110 is not displayed
Bit1: Alarm 10763: "Channel %1 block %2 the path component of the block in the
offset level is zero"

11411 ENABLE_ALARM_MASK D1, S1
- Activation of Warnings. SW4.2
Display Filter: EXP RESET

11412 ALARM_REACTION_CHAN_NOREADY D1
- Alarm reaction CHAN_NOREADY valid SW4.1

11413 ALARM_PAR_DISPLAY_TEXT D1
- Alarm parameter as text output SW4.2

11420 LEN_PROTOCOL_FILE PGA
- Size of protocol-files (kB) SW4.3

Fct.: Execute from 1 1 1000000 DWORD 2/7
HD
11430 DIG_ASSIGN_DIGITIZE_TO_CHAN FBD
- Channel definition for digitalization SW2

Fct.: Digitize 0 0 10 DWORD 2/7
11432 DIG_ASSIGN_NUM_OF_AXES FBD
- Selection of 3-axes or 3+2-axes digitizing SW4.2

Fct.: Digitize, 3+2 0 0 1 BYTE 2/7
axes
11450 SEARCH_RUN_MODE K1
- Parameterization for search run SW4.3

11460 OSCILL_MODE_MASK P5
HEX Mode mask for asynchronous oscillation SW2

always 0x0 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
11500 PREVENT_SYNACT_LOCK [n]: 0 ... 1 S5, FBSY
- Protected synchronized actions SW4.1

Fct.: Synchr. 0, 0 0 255 DWORD 2/7
actions
11600 BAG_MASK K1
- Defines mode group response to ASUP SW4.1

always 0 0 0x3 DWORD 2/7

Lists 08/99
11602 ASUP_START_MASK K1
- Ignore stop conditions for ASUP SW4.1

always 0 0 0x7 DWORD 2/7
11604 ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL K1
- Priorities for 'ASUP_START_MASK effective' SW4.1

11610 ASUP_EDITABLE K1
- Activation of a user defined ASUP Program SW4.2

11612 ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL K1
- Protection level of the user specific ASUP program SW4.2

11640 ENABLE_CHAN_AX_GAP K2
- Enable Gaps in MD $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED SW5.2

always 0x0 0 0x1 DWORD 2/2
11660 NUM_EG M3
- No. of possible "Electronic Gear Boxes" SW5

el. gear 0 0.0 plus BYTE 1/1
11700 PERMISSIVE_FLASH_TAB [n]: 0 ... 5 IAD
- Codes for NC-Card SW5

Files on PCMCIA 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 1/1
card ManufactorCode, ...
2.5.2 Override switch settings
12000 OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE V1
- Axis feedrate override switch Gray-coded SW1

12010 OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED [n]: 0 ... 30 V1
Factor Evaluation of axis feedrate override switch SW1

always 0.00, 0.01, 0.02, 0.04, 0.00 2.00 DOUBLE 2/7
0.06, 0.08, ...
12020 OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE V1
- Path feedrate override switch Gray-coded SW1


08/99 Lists
12030 OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE [n]: 0 ... 30 V1

Factor Evaluation of path feedrate override switch SW1

always 0.00, 0.01, 0.02, 0.04, 0.00 2.00 DOUBLE 2/7
0.06, 0.08, ...
12040 OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE V1
- Rapid traverse override switch Gray-coded SW1

12050 OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA [n]: 0 ... 30 V1
Factor Evaluation of rapid traverse override switch SW1

always 0.00, 0.01, 0.02, 0.04, 0.00 1.00 DOUBLE 2/7
0.06, 0.08, ...
12060 OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE V1
- Spindle override switch Gray-coded SW1

12070 OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED [n]: 0 ... 30 V1
Factor Evaluation of spindle override switch SW1

always 0.5, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.00 2.00 DOUBLE 2/7
0.70, 0.75, ...
12080 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED V1
- Override reference speed SW2
Bit = 0/1: Sp. override affects limited speed/progr. speed

12082 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_MIN_FEED V1
- Specification of the reference of the path override SW4.1

12100 OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN V1
- Limitation for binary-coded override switch SW1

always 1.2 0.0 2.0 DOUBLE 2/7
12200 RUN_OVERRIDE_0 FBMA, V1
- Traversing response with override 0 SW4.1

12202 PERMANENT_FEED [n]: 0 ... 3 FBMA, V1
mm/min Fixed feedrates for linear axes SW4.1

always 0., 0., 0., 0. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
12204 PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED [n]: 0 ... 3 FBMA
rev/min Fixed feedrates for rotary axes SW4.1


Lists 08/99
12205 PERMANENT_SPINDLE_FEED [n]: 0 ... 3 FBMA

rev/min Fixed feedrates for spindles SW4.3

12510 NCU_LINKNO B3
- NCU Number in an NCU Cluster SW5

NCU-link 1 1 16 DWORD 2/7
12520 LINK_TERMINATION [n]: 0 ... 1 B3
- NCU number for which bus termination resistances are activated SW5
Display Filter: N01 Attribute: LINK POWER ON

NCU-link 0, 1 0 15 BYTE 2/3
12540 LINK_BAUDRATE_SWITCH B3
- Link bus baud rate SW5

12550 LINK_RETRY_CTR B3
- Max. no. message frame transmission retries SW5

12701 AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB1 [n]: 0 ... 31 B3
- List of axes in axis container 1 SW5
Display Filter: N01 Attribute: CTDE POWER ON

Axis container , , , , ,, , , , ,, , , , , ... - - STRING 2/3
- Internal interpolation axis name SW5

- Internal interpolations axis name SW5






08/99 Lists



12710 AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB10[n]: 0 ... 31 B3







12750 AXCT_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 15 B3
- Step width for rotation of an axis container SW5

Axis container CT1, CT2, CT3, CT4, - - STRING 1/1
CT5, CT6, ...
2.5.3 Central drive data
13000 DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE [n]: 0 ... 30 G2

- Drive activation (611D) SW1

611D 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7

Lists 08/99
13010 DRIVE_LOGIC_NR [n]: 0 ... 30 G2

- Logical drive number SW1

611D 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 0, 0, 0, 0 31 BYTE 2/7
0,0, 0, ...
611D, not 810D 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 31 BYTE 2/7
0,0, 0, ...
13020 DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE [n]: 0 ... 30 G2
HEX Power section code of drive module SW1

611D 0xE, 0x13, 0x13, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0, 0, 0, ...
611D, not 810D 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0,0, 0, ...
13030 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE [n]: 0 ... 30 G2
- Module recognition SW2
(1: 1-axis module, 2: 2-axis module, 9: Terminal block for digital I/Os, 10: Bit bus
interface)

611D 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 10 BYTE 2/7
1, ...
611D, not 810D 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 10 BYTE 2/7
1,1, 1, ...
13040 DRIVE_TYPE [n]: 0 ... 30 G2, FBHY
- Code for drive type (1: FDD, 2: MSD, 3: LIN) SW1

611D 2, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, BYTE 2/7
1, ...
611D, not 810D 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, BYTE 2/7
1,1, 1, ...
611D, standard 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0 2 BYTE 2/7
FDD, MSD 1,1, 1, ...
13100 DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS [n]: 0 ... 8 IAD, Kap. 3
- Diagnosis drive link SW1

611D 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [n]: 0 ... 1 M5
- Polarity reversal of sensor SW1

14010 IPUCR_DELAY_TIME -
- Computing time of position controller SW2

NCU570 0.002 0.000 0.010 DOUBLE 0/0
FM-NC 0.002 0.000 0.010 DOUBLE 2/7
14020 INTCY_DELAY_TIME -
- SSI transfer time SW2

NCU570 0.0002 0.0 0.0008 DOUBLE 0/0
FM-NC 0.0002 0.0 0.0008 DOUBLE 2/7
14504 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT P3
- Number of User data (INT) SW4.1


08/99 Lists
14506 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_HEX A2, P3

- Number of User data (HEX) SW4.1

14508 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT A2, P3
- Number of User data (FLOAT) SW4.1

14510 USER_DATA_INT [n]: 0 ... 31 A2, P3
- User data (INT) SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, -32768 32767 DWORD 2/7
0, ...
14512 USER_DATA_HEX [n]: 0 ... 31 A2, P3
- User data (HEX) SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 0x0FF DWORD 2/7
0, ...
14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT [n]: 0 ... 31 A2, P3
- User data (FLOAT) SW4.1

always 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, -3.40e38 3.40e38 DOUBLE 2/7
0.0, ...
14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM [n]: 0 ... 31 A2, P3
- User data (HEX) SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - BYTE 0/0
0, ...
17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS FBW
- Maximal number of replacement tools. SW5

Fct.: Tool 0 0 32 DWORD 2/7
management
2.5.4 System specific memory settings
18000 VDI_UPDATE_IN_ONE_IPO_CYCLE P3
- PLC interface update SW1

always - - BOOLEAN 0/0
NCU572, 573 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
NCU571 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
810D 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
18040 VERSION_INFO [n]: 0 ... 2 IAD
- Version and possibly data of the PCMCIA card, not FM-NC SW3.2
Display Filter: N05 Attribute: READ POWER ON

NCU571 - - - STRING 2/7

Lists 08/99


NCU572 - - - STRING 2/7

NCU573 - - - STRING 2/7

810D - - - STRING 2/7

810D_2 - - - STRING 2/7
18050 INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC S7
Byte Display data of free dynamic memory SW1

18060 INFO_FREE_MEM_STATIC S7
Byte Display data of free static memory SW1

18070 INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR S7
Byte Display data of free memory in DUAL PORT RAM SW1
Display Filter: N01, N05, EXP Attribute: READ POWER ON

not 810D 0 - - DWORD 2/7
18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK FBW
HEX Step-by step memory reservation for tool management (SRAM) SW2
Bit 0 = 1: Tool management data being loaded
Bit 1 = 1: Monitoring data being loaded
Bit 2 = 1: OEM and CC data being loaded
Bit 3 = 1: Memory for consider adjacent location

18082 MM_NUM_TOOL FBW, S7
- Number of tools the NCK can manage (SRAM) SW2

18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW
- Number of magazines the NCK can manage (SRAM) SW2

management
18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION FBW
- Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: Tool 30 0 MD_SLMAXNOOFM DWORD 2/7
management AGLOCATIONS

08/99 Lists
18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER W1
- Maximal number of tool carriers to be defined. SW4.1

always 0 0 99999999 DWORD 2/7
18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM FBW
- Number of magazine data generated and evaluated by the CC (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: Tool 0 0 MD_SLNOOFMAGA DWORD 2/2
management ZINE_PARAM_CC
18091 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9 -
- type of OEM magazine data (SRAM) SW5.2

Fct.: Tool 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3 1 MD_SLMAXNOOFTY DWORD 2/2
management PE_PARAM_CC
18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM FBW
- Number of magazine location data generated and evaluated by the CC (SRAM) SW2

management ZINELOC_PARAM_C
C
18093 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9 -
- type of OEM magazine loc. data (SRAM) SW5.2

18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM FBW
- Number of tool-specific data per tool for OEM and compile cycle (SRAM) SW2

18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9 -
- type of OEM tool data (SRAM) SW5.2

always 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4 1 MD_SLMAXNOOFTY DWORD 2/2
PE_PARAM_CC
18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM FBW
- Number of data per tool edge for OEM and compile cycle (SRAM) SW2

18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9 -
- type of OEM data per cutt. edge (SRAM) SW5.2

PE_PARAM_CC
18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM FBW
- Number of monitoring data per tool edge for OEM and compile cycle (SRAM) SW2

management

Lists 08/99
18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9

- type of OEM monitor data (SRAM) SW5.2

18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA S7
- Tool offsets per TOA block (SRAM) SW1

18102 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE W1
- Type of D-No. programming (SRAM) SW4.1

18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER FBW
- Tool adapters in TO-area (SRAM) SW5

Fct.: Tool -1 -1 MD_SLMAXNOOFM DWORD 2/7
management AGLOCATIONS
18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO W1
- Max. Value of D-No. SW5

18106 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PERTOOL W1
- Max. Number of D-Nos. per Tool SW5

18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR W1
- Sum corrections in TO-area (SRAM) SW5

always -1 -1 9000 DWORD 2/7
18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE S7
- Number of TOA blocks (SRAM) SW1

18112 MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR W1
- Properties of sum corrections in TO-area (SRAM) SW5

always 0 0 0x1F DWORD 0/0
18118 MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES S7
- Number of GUD files in active file system (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: NC memory 7 1 9 DWORD 2/7
GUD
18120 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK S7
- Number of global user variables (SRAM) SW1

GUD

08/99 Lists
18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN S7
- Number of channel-specific user variables (SRAM) SW1

GUD
18140 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_AXIS -
- Number of axis-specific user variables (SRAM) SW1

GUD
18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM S7
kB Memory location for user variables (SRAM) SW1

Fct.: NC memory 12 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
GUD
18160 MM_NUM_USER_MACROS S7
- Number of macros (SRAM) SW1

macros
18170 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES S7
- Number of miscellaneous functions (cycles, DRAM) SW1

LUD
18180 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM S7
- Number of additional parameters for cycles ac. to MD 18170 (DRAM) SW1

LUD
18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK S7
- Number of files for machine-related protection zones (SRAM) SW2
Display Filter: N02, N06, N09, N12 POWER ON

Fct.: 3D protection 0 0 10 DWORD 2/7
zones
18200 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
- Number of Siemens OEM magazine data (SRAM) SW5.2

management ZINE_PARAM_CC
18201 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9
- type of Siemens OEM magazine data (SRAM) SW5.2

18202 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
- No. of Siemens OEM magazine loc. data (SRAM) SW5.2

management ZINELOC_PARAM_C
C

Lists 08/99
18203 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9

- type of Siemens OEM magazine loc. data (SRAM) SW5.2

18204 MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM
- Number of Siemens OEM tool data (SRAM) SW5.2

18205 MM_TYPE_CCS_TDA_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9
- type of Siemens OEM tool data (SRAM) SW5.2

PE_PARAM_CC
18206 MM_NUM_CCS_TOA_PARAM
- No. of Siemens OEM data per cutt. edge (SRAM) SW5.2

18207 MM_TYPE_CCS_TOA_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9
- type of Siemens OEM data per cutt. edge (SRAM) SW5.2

PE_PARAM_CC
18208 MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM
- No. of Siemens OEM monitor data (SRAM) SW5.2

management
18209 MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM [n]: 0 ... 9
- type of Siemens OEM monitor data (SRAM) SW5.2

18210 MM_USER_MEM_DYNAMIC S7
kB Dynamic user memory in the DRAM SW1

always - - DWORD 2/7
NCU572 3370 - - DWORD 2/7
NCU 572, NCU 3800 - - DWORD 2/7
573, channels > 1
NCU572, NCU573, 21500 - - DWORD 2/7
channels > 2
NCU 571, 1750 - - DWORD 2/7
channels > 1
NCU 571, 5000 - - DWORD 2/7
channels > 1
NCU571 1750 - - DWORD 0/0
NCU 571, NCU 3370 - - DWORD 2/7
572
810D 2300 - - DWORD 2/7
810D_2 3500 - - DWORD 2/7

08/99 Lists
18220 MM_USER_MEM_DPR -
kB User memory in DUAL PORT RAM (DPR) SW2

18220 MM_USER_MEM_DPR -
kB User memory in DUAL PORT RAM (DPR) SW2

810D 0 - - DWORD 0/0
810D 0 - - DWORD 0/0
18230 MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED S7
kB User memory in SRAM SW1

18240 MM_LUD_HASH_TABLE_SIZE S7
Prime Hash table size for user variables (DRAM) SW1
number
LUD
18242 MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE S7
Byte Maximum field size for LUD variables SW2

GUD
Fct.: GUD, NCU 660 240 8192 DWORD 2/7
573
18242 MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE S7
Byte Maximum field size for LUD variables SW2

LUD
Fct.: LUD, NCU 660 240 8192 DWORD 2/7
573
18250 MM_CHAN_HASH_TABLE_SIZE S7
Prime Hash table size for channel-specific data (DRAM) SW1
number
18260 MM_NCK_HASH_TABLE_SIZE S7
Prime Hash table size for global data (DRAM) SW1
number
always 2503 537 4001 DWORD 0/0
18270 MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR S7
- Number of subdirectories (SRAM) SW1

18280 MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR S7
- Number of files per directory (SRAM) SW1

18290 MM_FILE_HASH_TABLE_SIZE S7
Prime Hash table size for files of a directory (SRAM) SW1
number

Lists 08/99
18300 MM_DIR_HASH_TABLE_SIZE S7
Prime Hash table size for subdirectories (SRAM) SW1
number
18310 MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM S7
- Number of directories in passive file system (SRAM) SW1

18320 MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM S7
- Number of files in passive file system (SRAM) SW1

18331 MM_FLASHFILESYS_MEM [n]: 0 ... 7 -
- Reserved for FFS SW5

Files on PCMCIA 0,0, 3 - - BYTE 3/3
card CHUNK_SIZE01 (64)0, ...
18342 MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS [n]: 0 ... double max. No. axes in sys. - 1 K3
- Maximum number of interpolation points for sag comp. (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: CEC 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 2000 DWORD 2/7
0,0, 0, ...
18350 MM_USER_FILE_MEM_MINIMUM S7
kB Minimum part program memory (SRAM) SW1

18360 MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE A2
- FIFO-Buffer size for processing from external source SW4.2

Fct.: Execute from 30 30 1000000 DWORD 2/7
HD
18362 MM_EXT_PROG_NUM A2
- Number of program levels which can be simultaneously processed from an external SW4.2
source

Fct.: Execute from 1 0 13 BYTE 2/7
HD
18400 MM_NUM_CURVE_TABS M3
- No. of curve tables (SRAM) SW4.1

always 0 0.0 plus DWORD 1/1
18402 MM_NUM_CURVE_SEGMENTS M3
- No. of curve segments (SRAM) SW4.1

18404 MM_NUM_CURVE_POLYNOMS M3
- No. of curve table polynomials (SRAM) SW4.1


08/99 Lists
18500 MM_EXTCOM_TASK_STACK_SIZE S7
kB Stack size for external communications task (DRAM) SW1

18502 MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE -
- Stack size in kb for communication SW3

Communic. task 12 4 20 DWORD 0/0
18510 MM_SERVO_TASK_STACK_SIZE S7
kB Stack size of servo task (DRAM) SW1

18520 MM_DRIVE_TASK_STACK_SIZE S7, ECO
kB Stack size of drive task (DRAM) SW1

Fct.: Drive start-up 8 4 20 DWORD 0/0
analog
18520 MM_DRIVE_TASK_STACK_SIZE S7, ECO
kB Stack size of drive task (DRAM) SW1

611D 8 4 20 DWORD 0/0
18600 MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS K2
- Fine offset with FRAME SW4.3

18601 MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES K2
- Number of global predefined user frames. SW5

18602 MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES K2
- Number of a global base frames. SW5

18700 MM_SIZEOF_LINKVAR_DATA B3
- Size of NCU-link-variable memory SW5

with NCU-link 0 0 4096 DWORD 2/7
variables
18780 MM_NCU_LINK_MASK B3
- Activation of NCU-link communication SW5

18782 MM_LINK_NUM_OF_MODULES B3
- Number of NCU-link modules SW5

18790 MM_MAX_TRACE_LINK_POINTS B3
- Length of the trace data buffer for NCU-link

NCU-link trace 8 0 500 DWORD 2/2

Lists 08/99
18792 MM_TRACE_LINK_DATA_FUNCTION B3
- Specifies the contents of the NCU-link files

NCU-link trace 0 0 0x7FFFFFFF DWORD 2/2
18800 MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE FBFA
- Activation of external NC languages SW5

Non-Siemens NC 0x0001 0x0000 0x0001 DWORD 2/7
progr. lang.
Non-Siemens NC 0x0000 0x0000 0x0001 DWORD 2/7
progr. lang.
18900 FPU_ERROR_MODE -
- System response to FPU calculation error SW1

not 810D 0x1 - - DWORD 0/0
18910 FPU_CTRLWORD_INIT -
- Basic initialization of FPU control word SW1

not 810D - - DWORD 0/0
not 810D, 0x37F - - DWORD 2/7
NCU571.2, 572
not 810D, NCU 0x3F001000 - - DWORD 2/7
571
18920 FPU_EXEPTION_MASK -
- Exception screen form for FPU calculation errors SW1

not 810D - - DWORD 0/0
not 810D, 0xD - - DWORD 2/7
NCU571.2, 572
not 810D, NCU 0x0D000000 - - DWORD 2/7
571

08/99 Lists
2.6 Channel-specific machine data

introduced.
meaning:
• C01 Configuration
• C02 Memory configuration
• C03 Basic settings
• C04 Auxiliary functions
• C05 Velocities
• C06 Monitoring / limitations
• C07 Transformations
• C08 Overrides / compensations
• C09 Technological functions
• C10 Standard machine
• C11 NC-Language ISO-Dialect
• EXP Expert mode
under attributes:
The fields of the machine data table elements are completed as follows:

Lists 08/99
Note
The entry 810D_2 in the field HW/function corresponds to CCU2.

reference
HW / Function Standard value Minimum value Maximum value D type Protect
. level
2.6.1 Basic channel machine data
20000 CHAN_NAME K1
- Channel name SW1
Display Filter: C01, C10 POWER ON

always CHAN1 , CHAN2 , - - STRING 2/7
CHAN3 , CHAN4, ...
20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB [n]: 0 ... 2 K2
- Assignment geometry axis to channel axis SW1

always { 1, 2, 3 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 2/7
...
20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB [n]: 0 ... 2 K2
- Geometry axis name in channel SW1
Display Filter: C01, C10, C11 POWER ON

always { X, Y, Z },{ X, Y, Z },{ X, - - STRING 2/7
Y, Z }, ...
20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [n]: 0 ... max. No. axes per chann. - 1 K2
- Machine axis number valid in channel SW1

always { 1, 2, 3, 4, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 31 BYTE 2/7
0, ...
20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[n]: 0 ... max. No. axes per chann. - 1 K2
- Channel axis name in channel SW1

always { X, Y, Z, A, B, C, - - STRING 2/7
U, ...
20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND S1
- Initial setting of master spindle in channel SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 15 BYTE 2/7
1, 1, ...
20092 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE S1
- Enable/disable the changer for spindle numbers. SW4.3
Display Filter: C01, C10, C03 RESET

Fct.: Ch.-specific 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 1 BYTE 7/7
spindle No. 0, 0, ...

08/99 Lists
20094 SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR FBFA

- M-Function for rigid tapping. SW5.2
Display Filter: C01, C10, C03, C11 POWER ON

always 70, 70, 70, 70, 70, 70, 6 0x7FFF DWORD 2/7
70, 70, ...
20098 DISPLAY_AXIS [n]: 0 ... max. No. axes per chann. - 1 IAD
- Show axis in MMC Forms SW5
Display Filter: C01, EXP IMMEDIATELY

always {0xFFFFFFFF, - - DWORD 2/7
0xFFFFFFFF,
0xFFFFFFFF, ...
20100 DIAMETER_AX_DEF P1
<= 16 Geometry axis with transverse axis function SW1
Character
s
always - - - STRING 2/7
20110 RESET_MODE_MASK K2
HEX Definition of basic control settings after powering up and Reset SW2
Each bit = 0: The current value is maintained.
Bit 0 Reset mode
Bit 1 auxiliary function output for tool selection
Bit 4 Current plane Bit 5 Settable ZO
Bit 6 Tool length compensation Bit 7 Transformation
Bit 8 Coupled motion Bit 9 Tangential follow-up
Bit 10 Synchronous spindle Bit 11 Revolutional feedrate
Bit 12 Geo-axis replacement Bit 13 Master value coupling
Display Filter: C03, C11 RESET

always 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0x7FFF DWORD 2/7
0x0, 0x0, ...
20112 START_MODE_MASK K2
HEX Definition of basic control settings after part program start SW3
Each bit = 0: The current value is maintained.
Bit 0 Reset mode
Bit 1 Auxiliary function output for tool selection
Bit 4 Current plane Bit 5 Settable ZO
Bit 6 Tool length compensation Bit 7 Transformation
Bit 8 Coupled motion Bit 9 Tangential follow-up
Bit 10 Synchronous spindle Bit 11 res.
Bit 12 Geo-axis replacement Bit 13 Master value coupling
Display Filter: C03 RESET

always 0x400, 0x400, 0x400, 0 0x7FFF DWORD 2/7
0x400, 0x400, ...
20114 MODESWITCH_MASK K1
- Interruption MDA by mode change SW3.2

always 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
0x0, 0x0, ...
20116 IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP K1
- An interrupt program can be executed despite a read in disable SW4.2
Display Filter: C01 NEW CONF

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...

Lists 08/99
20117 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP K1
- An interrupt program can be executed despite single block active SW4.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
20118 GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET K5
- Enable automatic geometry axis change SW4.3

20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE K2
- Tool whose length compens. is selected during power (Reset/end of pp). SW2
Depends on MD 20110 and 20112.

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 MD_SLMAXTOOLNU DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ... MBER
20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE FBW
- Preselected tool on RESET SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 MD_SLMAXTOOLNU DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ... MBER
20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME FBW
- Definition of the tool with which length correction is selected on start-up/reset SW3.2

Fct.: Tool , , ,,, , ,,,, , ,,, , - - STRING 2/7
management
20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER FBW
- Tool holder number SW3.2
Display Filter: C03 POWER ON

Fct.: Tool 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 5 DWORD 2/7
management 0, 0, ...
20126 TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE W1
- Active tool holder on RESET SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
20128 COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE FBW
- Tool change picked up in search run SW4.3
Display Filter: C04 IMMEDIATELY

Fct.: Tool 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 1/1
management
20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE K2
- Tool edge whose length compens. is selected during power up (Reset/end of pp). SW2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 32000 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
20132 SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE W1
- Active sum correction on RESET SW5

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 6 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...

08/99 Lists
20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE K2
- Transformation data block selected during power up (Reset/pp end) SW2

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 8 BYTE 2/7
Transformations 0, 0, ...
20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES K1, G2
- Initial setting of G groups SW1
Selection of some G groups
[0] 1 = G0, 2 = G01 (Std)
[5] 1 = G17 (Std), 2 = G18, 3 = G19
[7] 1 = G500 (Std), 2 = G54, 3 = G 55, 4 = G56, 5 = G57
[9] 1 = G60 (Std), 2 = G 64, 3 = G641
[11] 1 = G601 (Std), 2 = G602, 3 = G603
[12] 1 = G70, 2 = G71 (Std)
[13] 1 = G90 (Std), 2 = G91
[14] 1 = G93, 2 = G94 (Std), 3 = G95
[20] 1 = BRISK (Std), 2 = SOFT
[22] 1 = CDOF (Std), 2 = CDON
[23] 1 = FFWOF (Std), 2 = FFWON
[28] 1 = DIAMOF (Std), 2 = DIAMON
For more detailed information see Programming Guide
G code definition depends on MD 20110 and MD 20112.

always 2, 0, ... - - BYTE 2/7
20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE [n]: 0 ... Max. No. G codes - 1 K2
- Reset mode of G groups SW4.4

always { CHAN 10, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 1 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
20154 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES [n]: 0 ... 30 FBFA
- Initial setting of G groups for external NC languages SW5

Non-Siemens NC {1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 3, 0.0 plus BYTE 2/2
progr. lang. 4, ...
20160 CUBIC_SPLINE_BLOCKS K1
- Number of blocks for C spline SW1
Display Filter: C09, EXP POWER ON

Fct.: Polynomial 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 4 9 BYTE 2/7
8, ...
20170 COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT K1
mm Maximum traversing distance of an NC block with compression SW1

Fct.: Polynomial 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
1.0, ...
20172 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL V1
mm/min Max. permissible deviation of the path feedrate during compression SW3.2

Fct.: Polynomial 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
1000.0, ...
20180 TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR [n]: 0 ... 1
- Increment of rot. axies with tool carrier SW5.3

always {0.0, 0.0},{0.0, 0.0},{0.0, - - DOUBLE 3/7
0.0}, ...

Lists 08/99
20182 TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET [n]: 0 ... 1

- Offset of rotational axes with tool carrier SW5.3

always {0.0, 0.0},{0.0, 0.0},{0.0, - - DOUBLE 3/7
0.0}, ...
20184 TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER
- Base frame number for part offset. SW5.3

always -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, - -1 MD_MAXINDEX_CH DWORD 3/7
1,-1, ... BFRAMES
20200 CHFRND_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS K1
- Empty blocks with chamfer/radii SW1
Display Filter: C02, C06, C09, EXP POWER ON

always 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,3, 3, 0 15 BYTE 2/7
3, 3, ...
20201 CHFRND_MODE_MASK V1
- behaviour of chamfer/rounding SW5

0x0, 0x0, ...
20202 WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS W1
- Max. no. of blocks w/o trav. movement with SAD SW4.3

always 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5,5, 5, 0 10 BYTE 2/7
5, 5, ...
20204 WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE W1
mm Change of direction with smooth appr. / retract. SW5

always 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.01, 0.01, ...
20210 CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT W1
degrees Maximum angle for compensation blocks with TRC SW1

always 100., 100., 100., 100., 0.0 150. DOUBLE 2/7
100., 100., ...
20220 CUTCOM_MAX_DISC W1
Factor Maximum value for DISC SW1

always 50.0, 50.0, 50.0, 50.0, 0.0 75.0 DOUBLE 2/7
50.0, 50.0, ...
20230 CUTCOM_CURVE_INSERT_LIMIT W1
- Maximum angle for calculation of intersection with TRC SW1

always 10., 10., 10., 10., 10., 10., 0.0 150. DOUBLE 2/7
10., ...
20240 CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS W1
- Blocks for look-ahead contour calculation with TRC SW1

always 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4,4, 4, 2 10 BYTE 2/7
4, 4, ...

08/99 Lists
20250 CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS W1
- Number of blocks without traversing motion with TRC SW1

always 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,3, 3, 0 5 BYTE 2/7
3, 3, ...
20252 CUTCOM_MAXNUM_SUPPR_BLOCKS W1
- Max block count with suppressed cutter comp. SW4.1
Display Filter: C01, C08, EXP RESET

always 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5,5, 5, 0 10 BYTE 2/7
5, 5, ...
20254 ONLINE_CUTCOM_ENABLE W4
- Real time tool radius compensation enabled SW4.1
Display Filter: C01, C08, EXP POWER ON

Fct.: Synchr. 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
actions
20256 CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE W1
- Intersection for polynomials is possible SW4.1

Fct.: Polynomial 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
20260 PATH_IPO_IS_ON_TCP -
- Velocity control with spline SW1

20262 SPLINE_FEED_PRECISION -
Factor Permissible rel. error of path velocity for spline SW3

always 0.001, 0.001, 0.001, 0.000001 1.0 DOUBLE 0/0
0.001, 0.001, ...
20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT W1
- Initial position of tool cutting edge without programming SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, -2 32000 DWORD 2/7
1, 1, ...
20272 SUMCORR_DEFAULT W1
- Initial position sum correction without program SW5

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, -1 6 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK FBW
HEX Activation of different types of tool management SW2

always 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0xFFFFF DWORD 2/7
0x0, 0x0, ...
20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK FBW
HEX Activation of tool time monitoring for tool in spindle 1...5 SW2

Fct.: Tool 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, - - DWORD 2/7
management 0x0, 0x0, ...

Lists 08/99
20350 TOOL_GRIND_AUTO_TMON W4
- Activation of tool monitoring 0/1: Monitoring off/on SW2

Fct.: Const. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 1 BYTE 2/7
GWPS 0, 0, ...
20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK W1
- Definition of tool parameters SW4.1

0x0, 0x0, ...
20380 TOOL_CORR_MODE_G43G44 FBFA
- Tool compensation mode with G43 / G44 SW5.2

Non-Siemens NC 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 2 BYTE 2/7
progr. lang. 0, 0, ...
20382 TOOL_CORR_MOVE_MODE FBFA
- activation of tool compensation SW5.2

20384 TOOL_CORR_MULTIPLE_AXES FBFA
- Tool length compensation simultaneously in more than one axis SW5.2

progr. lang.
20400 LOOKAH_USE_VELO_NEXT_BLOCK B1
- Lookahead to programmed following block velocity SW1

20430 LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS B1
- Number of override switch points with Look Ahead SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 0 2 DWORD 2/7
1, 1, ...
20440 LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS [n]: 0 ... 1 B1
Factor Override switch points with Look Ahead SW1

always { 1.0, 0.2 },{ 1.0, 0.2 },{ 0.2 2.0 DOUBLE 2/7
1.0, ...
20450 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE B1
Factor Relief factor for block cycle time SW2

always 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.0, ...
20470 CPREC_WITH_FFW K6, B1
- Progr. contour accuracy SW3.2

20500 CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME B2
s Minimum time with constant velocity SW1

always 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 0.1 DOUBLE 2/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

08/99 Lists
20600 MAX_PATH_JERK B2
mm/s³ Path-related maximum jerk SW1

always 100.0, 100.0, 100.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
100.0, 100.0, ...
20602 CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL B1
- Effect of path curvature on path dynamic SW5
Display Filter: C05, EXP NEW CONF

always 0., 0., 0., 0.,0., 0., 0., 0.,0., 0. 0.95 DOUBLE 2/7
...
20603 CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK B1
- Effect of path curvature on path jerk SW5
Display Filter: C05, EXP NEW CONF

always 0., 0., 0., 0.,0., 0., 0., 0.,0., 0. 0.95 DOUBLE 2/7
...
20610 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE K1, B1, B2
- Acceleration margin for overlaid movements SW1

always .2, .2, .2, .2, .2, .2, .2, 0. 0.9 DOUBLE 2/7
.2,.2, ...
20620 HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_SIZE H1
mm Limitation handwheel increment for geo axes SW3.2

0.0, ...
20621 HANDWH_ORIAX_MAX_INCR_SIZE F2
degrees Limit. of handwheel incr. for ori-axes SW5.3

0.0, ...
20622 HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE H1
mm/min Path velocity override SW3.2

500.0,500.0, ...
20623 HANDWH_ORIAX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE F2
rev/min Orientation velocity overlay SW5.3

always 6.0, 6.0, 6.0, 6.0,6.0, 6.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
6.0, ...

Lists 08/99
20624 HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND H1
- Definition of the response of the handwheel to channel-specific VDI ISs SW3.2
Bit meanings:
Bit 0: Mode group stop
Bit 1: Mode group stop axes plus spindle
Bit 2: NC stop
Bit 3: NC stop axes plus spindle
Bit 4: Feedrate disable
Bit 5: Feedrate override
Bit 6: Rapid traverse override
Bit 7: Feedrate stop geometry axis
Bit = 0: Interruption / accumulation

Bit = 1: Abort travel / no accumulation
For geometry axes:
Bit 8: 0 With feed in MD JOG_AX_VELO handwheel travel
Bit 8: 1 max. with feed in MD MAX_AX_VELO traverse
Bit 9: 0 The override is active with handwheel travel
Bit 9: 1 Override 100%, independent of switch,
switch 0% nevertheless active
DRF settings for all axes of the channel
Bit10: 0 MD $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE not active
Bit10: 1 MD $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE active
contour handwheel settings
Bit11: 0 Progr. exec. continue on deselecting contour handwheel
Bit11: 1 NCSTOP on deselecting contour handwheel

always 0x13FF, 0x13FF, 0x13FF, 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
0x13FF, ...
20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK R1
- NC-Start disable without reference point SW1

20750 ALLOW_G0_IN_G96 V1
- G0 logic with G96 SW1

20800 SPF_END_TO_VDI H2
- End of subroutine to PLC SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, - - BYTE 2/7
1, 1, ...
21000 CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST K1
mm Circle end point monitoring constant SW1

always 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.01, 0.01, ...
21010 CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR K1
Factor Circle end point monitoring factor SW1

0.001, 0.001, ...
21020 WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS A3
- Consideration of tool radius for working area limitation SW1


08/99 Lists
21050 CONTOUR_TUNNEL_TOL F2
mm Response threshold for contour tunnel monitoring SW2

Fct.: CTC 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.0, ...
21060 CONTOUR_TUNNEL_REACTION F2
- Reaction when contour tunnel monitoring responds SW2

Fct.: CTC 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0 2 BYTE 2/7
1, 1, ...
21070 CONTOUR_ASSIGN_FASTOUT F2
- Assignment of an analog output for the output of the contour error SW2
0: no output, 1: output at output 1 etc.

Fct.: CTC 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 8 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
21080 CUTCOM_PARALLEL_ORI_LIMIT W5
degrees Limit angle (path tangent/tool orientation) for 3D tool radius compensation SW2

TRC 3D 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3. 1.0 89. DOUBLE 2/7
,3., ...
21082 CUTCOM_PLANE_ORI_LIMIT W5
degrees Minimum angle between surface normal and tool orientation when lateral angle not SW3.2
equal 0 (3D)

TRC 3D 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 1.0 89. DOUBLE 2/7
3.,3., ...
21084 CUTCOM_PLANE_PATH_LIMIT W5
degrees Minimum angle between surface normal vector and path tangent vector (3D face SW3.2
milling)

TRC 3D 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 3., 1.0 89. DOUBLE 2/7
3.,3., ...
21090 MAX_LEAD_ANGLE -
degrees Maximum value of permitted lead angle for orientation progr. SW1
Display Filter: C08, C09 NEW CONF

always 80., 80., 80., 80., 80., 80., 0. 80. DOUBLE 7/7
80., ...
NCU570 80., 80., 80., 80., 80., 80., 0. 80. DOUBLE 0/7
80., ...
21092 MAX_TILT_ANGLE -
degrees Maximum value of permitted side angle for orientation progr. SW1

always 180., 180., 180., 180., -180. 180. DOUBLE 7/7
180., 180., ...
NCU570 180., 180., 180., 180., -180. 180. DOUBLE 0/7
180., 180., ...
21100 ORIENTATION_IS_EULER F2
- Angle definition for orientation programming SW1

Fct.: 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 7/7
Transformations
Fct.: 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 0/0
Transformations,
FM-NC

Lists 08/99
21102 ORI_DEF_WITH_G_CODE F2
- Def. of ORI-axes with G-code SW5

Fct.: 5-axis 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
transformation
Fct.: 5-axis trans., 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 0/0
FM-NC
21104 ORI_IPO_WITH_G_CODE F2
- G-code for interpolation of orientation SW5

transformation
Fct.: 5-axis trans., 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 0/0
FM-NC
21108 POLE_ORI_MODE F2
- Great circle interpolation mode in pole position SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 22 DWORD 7/7
transformation 0, 0, ...
Fct.: 5-axis trans., 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 22 DWORD 0/0
FM-NC 0, 0, ...
21110 X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE M1
- Coordinate system for automatic frame definition SW1
Display Filter: C01, c09, EXP POWER ON

21120 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Definition of reference axes for ORI-axes SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 1, 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
transformation ...
Fct.: 5-axis trans., { 1, 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 0 3 BYTE 0/0
FM-NC ...
21130 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Definition of Reference axes for ORI-axes SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 1, 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
transformation ...
FM-NC ...
21150 JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
rev/min JOG rapid traverse for ORI-axes SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 10.0, 10.0, 10.0 }, { 10.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
transformation 10.0, ...
Fct.: 5-axis trans., { 10.0, 10.0, 10.0 }, { 10.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 0/0
FM-NC 10.0, ...
21155 JOG_VELO_ORI [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
rev/min JOG axis feedrate for ORI-axis velocity SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 2.0, 2.0, 2.0 }, { 2.0, 2.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
transformation ...
Fct.: 5-axis trans., { 2.0, 2.0, 2.0 }, { 2.0, 2.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 0/0
FM-NC ...

08/99 Lists
21160 JOG_VELO_RAPID_GEO [n]: 0 ... 2 F2

mm/min JOG rapid traverse for GEO-axes SW5

always { 10000., 10000.0, 10000. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
}, ...
NCU570 { 10000., 10000.0, 10000. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 0/0
}, ...
21165 JOG_VELO_GEO [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm/min JOG GEO-axis velocity SW5

always { 1000., 1000., 1000. }, { 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
1000., ...
NCU570 { 1000., 1000., 1000. }, { 0.0 plus DOUBLE 0/0
1000., ...
21170 ACCEL_ORI [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
rev/s² Acceleration for ORI-axes SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 2.0, 2.0, 2.0 }, { 2.0, 2.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
transformation ...
Fct.: 5-axis trans., { 2.0, 2.0, 2.0 }, { 2.0, 2.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 0/0
FM-NC ...
21200 LIFTFAST_DIST K1
mm Traversing distance on rapid lift from contour SW1

ASUP via high- 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
speed I/O 0.1, ...
21200 LIFTFAST_DIST K1
mm Traversing distance on rapid lift from contour SW1

Fct.: Extended NC 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
addr. 0.1, ...
21202 LIFTFAST_WITH_MIRROR K1
- Rapid retract with mirror image SW5

ASUP via high- 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
speed I/O
21202 LIFTFAST_WITH_MIRROR K1
- Rapid retract with mirror image SW5

Fct.: Extended NC 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
addr.
21210 SETINT_ASSIGN_FASTIN K1
HEX HW assignment of ext. NCK input byte for NC progr. interrupts SW2
Bit 0-7: No. of HW byte
Bit 16-23: Screen form of signals that channel is not to evaluate
Bit 24-31: Screen form of signals that are to be evaluated inverted

ASUP via high- 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, - - DWORD 2/7
speed I/O 1, 1, ...

Lists 08/99
21220 MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN V1
HEX Assignment input bytes of NCK I/O devices for "multiple feedrates in one block" SW2
Bit 0-7: No. of 1st byte Bit 8-15: No. of 2nd byte
Bit 16-23: Inverting screen form 1st byte Bit 24-31: Inverting screen form 2nd byte

Fct.: Synchr. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
actions 0, 0, ...
21230 MULTFEED_STORE_MASK V1
HEX Store input signal of function "Multiple feedrates in one block" SW2
Bit 0-1: no meaning, Bit 2-7: storage behaviour, Bit 8-31: reserv.

Fct.: Synchr. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - BYTE 2/7
actions 0, 0, ...
21300 COUPLE_AXIS_1 [n]: 0 ... 1 S3
- Synchronous spindle pair definition, mach. axis no.: following spindle[0], leading spindle SW2
[1]

Fct.: Coupled axes {0, 0}, {0, 0}, {0, 0}, {0, 0 31 BYTE 2/7
0},{0, ...
21310 COUPLING_MODE_1 S3
- Type of coupling in synchronous spindle operation SW2
0: actual value coupling 1: setpoint coupling 2: velocity coupling

Fct.: Coupled axes 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 0 2 BYTE 2/7
1, 1, ...
21320 COUPLE_BLOCK_CHANGE_CTRL_1 S3
- Block change behaviour in synchronous spindle operation SW2
0: IMMEDIATELY, 1/2: synchronization fine/coarse, 3: IPO-STOP

Fct.: Coupled axes 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,3, 3, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
3, 3, ...
21330 COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1 S3
- Coupling abort behavior SW2
Bit 0 = 0 Coupling remains active on program restart
1 Coupling is cancelled on program restart
Bit 1 = 0 Coupling remains active beyond end of program and RESET
1 Coupling is cancelled at end of program or RESET
Bit 5 = 1 Configured data are activated on program start
Bit 6 = 1 Configured data are activated at end of program or RESET
Bit 9 = 1 Coupling is activated on program start

Fct.: Coupled axes 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 0 0x3FF DWORD 2/7
1, 1, ...
21340 COUPLE_IS_WRITE_PROT_1 S3
- Coupling parameters cannot be altered SW2

Fct.: Coupled axes 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7

08/99 Lists
2.6.2 Machine data for digitizing function
21400 DIG_PROT_VERSION [n]: 0 ... 0 FBD

- Version number of digitizing package (SCAN link protocol) SW2

Fct.: Digitize - - BYTE 1/1
Fct.: Digitize 3 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, - - BYTE 2/7
axes 2, 2, ...
Fct.: Digitize, 3+2 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, - - BYTE 2/7
axes 4, 4, ...
21420 DIG_L_ORDER FBD
- Axis assignment of probe for digitizing SW2
0: XYZ, 1: ZXY, 2: YZX, 3: ZYX, 4: XZY, 5: YXZ

Fct.: Digitize 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0 5 BYTE 2/7
0, ...
21422 DIG_L_OFF_Z FBD
mm Initial stress in Z direction for probe calibration SW2

Fct.: Digitize 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, - - DOUBLE 2/7
1.0, ...
21424 DIG_L_INKR [n]: 0 ... 2 FBD
- Resolution of probe in digitizing SW2
(axis no..): 0...2

Fct.: Digitize { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 }, { 1.0, 1.0, - - DOUBLE 2/7
...
21430 DIG_L_MIN FBD
mm Minimum deflection for digitizing SW2

Fct.: Digitize 0.15, 0.15, 0.15, 0.15, - - DOUBLE 2/7
0.15, 0.15, ...
21432 DIG_L_NORMAL FBD
mm Typical deflection value for digitizing SW2

Fct.: Digitize 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., - - DOUBLE 2/7
1.,1., ...
21434 DIG_L_NOTAUS FBD
mm Deflection of probe for which emergency stop has been triggered SW2

2.0, ...
21436 DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT FBD
mm Deflection of probe w. extend. deflect. range for which emergency stop has been SW2
triggered

3.5, ...
21440 DIG_DELTAPOS FBD
mm In position window for digitizing SW2

Fct.: Digitize 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.01, 0.01, ...

Lists 08/99
21450 DIG_V_EILGANG FBD

mm/min Typical rapid traverse velocity when digitizing SW2

Fct.: Digitize 10000., 10000., 10000., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
10000., ...
21460 DIG_A_MAX FBD
mm/s² Maximum path acceleration when digitizing SW2

Fct.: Digitize 100., 100., 100., 100., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
100., 100., ...
21462 DIG_A_MAX_MOVE FBD
mm/s² Maximum path acceleration when positioning in digitizing mode SW2

Fct.: Digitize 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0, 0, ...
21464 DIG_A_MAX_SCAN FBD
mm/s² Maximum path acceleration with digitizing function SW2

Fct.: Digitize 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0, 0, ...
21470 DIG_P_HAND FBD
1000/min Proportional factor for JOG mode SW2

Fct.: Digitize 1 - - DOUBLE 2/7
21472 DIG_P_SCAN FBD
1000/min Proportional factor for probe control SW2

21474 DIG_T_SCAN FBD
s Time constant for probe control SW2

Fct.: Digitize 0.15, 0.15, 0.15, 0.15, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.15, 0.15, ...
21476 DIG_SENSOR_OFFSET [n]: 0 ... 2 FBD
mm Vector from toolholder to feeler holder SW4.2

Fct.: Digitize, 3+2 { 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 }, { 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 2/7
axes ...
2.6.3 Machine data for grinding function

21500 TRACLG_GRINDSPI_VERT_OFFSET S8
mm Vertical position offset of grinding axis in centerless grinding SW2

Fct.: Centerless 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., - - DOUBLE 2/7
grinding 0.,0., ...
21501 TRACLG_GRINDSPI_HOR_OFFSET S8
mm Horizontal position offset of grinding axis in centerless grinding SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...

08/99 Lists
21502 TRACLG_CTRLSPI_VERT_OFFSET S8
mm Vertical position offset of regulating axis in centerless grinding SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...
21504 TRACLG_SUPPORT_VERT_OFFSET S8
mm Vertical offset of work blade in centerless grinding SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...
21506 TRACLG_SUPPORT_HOR_OFFSET S8
mm Horizontal offset of work blade in centerless grinding SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...
21508 TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1 S8
- Vertical component of work blade direction vector for Q1 SW2

grinding 1.,1., ...
21510 TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1 S8
- Horizontal component of work blade direction vector for Q1 SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...
21512 TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_2 S8
- Vertical component of work blade direction vector for Q2 SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...
21514 TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_2 S8
- Horizontal component of work blade direction vector for Q2 SW2

grinding 1.,1., ...
21516 TRACLG_SUPPORT_LEAD_ANGLE S8
degrees Angle of lead of work blade in centerless grinding SW2

Fct.: Centerless 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., -90. 90. DOUBLE 2/7
grinding 0.,0., ...
21518 TRACLG_CONTACT_UPPER_LIMIT S8
mm Upper contact limit of work blade with work in centerless grinding SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...
21520 TRACLG_CONTACT_LOWER_LIMIT S8
mm Lower contact limit of work blade with work in centerless grinding SW2

grinding 0.,0., ...

Lists 08/99
21522 TRACLG_GRINDSPI_NR S8
- Definition of grinding spindle for centerless grinding SW2

Fct.: Centerless 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,2, 2, 1 15 BYTE 2/7
grinding 2, 2, ...
21524 TRACLG_CTRLSPI_NR S8
- Definition of regulating spindle for centerless grinding SW2

Fct.: Centerless 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 1 15 BYTE 2/7
grinding 1, 1, ...
21526 TRACLG_G0_IS_SPECIAL S8
- Special logic for G0 in centerless grinding SW2

Fct.: Centerless 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
grinding
2.6.4 Channel auxiliary function settings
22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP [n]: 0 ... 49 H2

- Auxiliary function group SW1

always { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 15 BYTE 2/7
1,1, ...
22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n]: 0 ... 49 H2
- Auxiliary function type SW1

always { , , , , , , , , , ,, , , , , , , ... - - STRING 2/7
22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION [n]: 0 ... 49 H2
- Auxiliary function extension SW1

always { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 99 BYTE 2/7
0,0, ...
22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE [n]: 0 ... 49 H2
- Auxiliary function value SW1

always { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0,0, ...
22100 AUXFU_QUICK_BLOCKCHANGE H2
- Block change delay with quick auxiliary functions. SW5

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 1 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
22110 AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT H2
- H-auxiliary functions have integer values. SW5

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 1 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...

08/99 Lists
22200 AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time of M functions SW1
0: Output before movement 2: Output at end of block
1: Output during movement 3: No output to the PLC

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22210 AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time of S functions (see MD22200 for values) SW1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22220 AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time for T functions (see MD22200 for values) SW1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22230 AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time for H functions (see MD22200 for values) SW1

Fct.: NC memory 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
aux. fct. 0, 0, ...
22240 AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time for F functions (see MD22200 for values) SW1

Fct.: NC memory 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,3, 3, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
aux. fct. 3, 3, ...
22250 AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time for D functions (see MD22200 for values) SW1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22252 AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE H2
- Output time of DL functions SW5.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 3 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22400 S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET S1
- S function effective after RESET SW1

22410 F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET V1
- F function effective after RESET SW1

22420 FGROUP_DEFAULT_AXES [n]: 0 ... 7 FBFA
- default value for FGROUP-instruction SW5.2

always { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 },{ 0, - - BYTE 7/7
0, ...

Lists 08/99
22510 GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC [n]: 0 ... 7 K1

- G codes output at NCK-PLC interface on block change/RESET SW3

always {0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},{0, 0, - - BYTE 2/7
0, ...
22512 EXTERN_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC [n]: 0 ... 7 FBFA
- Send G commands of an external NC language to PLC SW5

Non-Siemens NC {0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},{0, 0, - - BYTE 2/7
progr. lang. 0, ...
22530 TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE W1
- M-code at change of tool carrier SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, -99999999 99999999 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
22532 GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE K2
- M-code at change of geo axes SW4.1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 99999999 DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
22534 TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE M1
- M-code at change of transformation SW4.1

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 99999999 DWORD 2/7
22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE W1
- New tool compensation for M function SW1

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 1 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1
- M function for tool change SW1

always 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6,6, 6, 0 99999999 DWORD 2/7
6, 6, ...
22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE W1
- Reaction to tool change errors

always 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0x1F DWORD 2/7
0x0, 0x0, ...
22700 TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT BA, S5, FBSY
- Diagnostic data recording starts with the event TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT SW4.1
Display Filter: C06,, EXP RESET

Fct.: with trace - - - STRING 2/2
files
22702 TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP [n]: 0 ... 1 BA, S5, FBSY
- Further condition for starting the trace recording (e.g. block number) SW4.1

Fct.: with trace {,},{, },{, },{, },{, },{, },{, },{, - - STRING 2/2
files ...

08/99 Lists
22704 TRACE_STOPTRACE_EVENT BA, S5, FBSY

- Diagnostic data recording stops with the event TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT SW4.1

Fct.: with trace CLEARCANCELALARM_ - - STRING 2/2
files M, ...
22706 TRACE_STOPTRACE_STEP [n]: 0 ... 1 BA, S5, FBSY
- CommandSequenzStep with which the recording ends SW4.1

Fct.: with trace {, },{, },{, },{, },{, },{, },{, }, ... - - STRING 2/2
files
22708 TRACE_SCOPE_MASK BA, S5, FBSY
- Selects the contents of the tracefile SW4.1

Fct.: with trace - - - STRING 2/2
files
22710 TRACE_VARIABLE_NAME [n]: 0 ... 8 BA, S5, FBSY
- Trace extent of the diagnosis SW4.1
Display Filter: - RESET

Fct.: with trace {BL_NR, TR_POINT, - - STRING 2/2
files EV_TYPE, EV_SRC, ...
22712 TRACE_VARIABLE_INDEX [n]: 0 ... 8 BA, S5, FBSY
- Index for trace recording SW4.1

Fct.: with trace { 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/2
files 0x0, 0x0, ...
22714 MM_TRACE_DATA_FUNCTION BA, S5, FBSY
- Activating diagnostics SW4.1

Fct.: with trace 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/2
files 0x0, 0x0, ...
22800 TRACE_COMPRESSOR_OUTPUT D1
- Activation of trace output for compressor SW5

with trace files, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - BYTE 0/0
polynomial 0, ...
22900 STROKE_CHECK_INSIDE FBFA
- Strokecheck direction (inside/outside) SW5.2
Display Filter: C01, EXP, C11 POWER ON

progr. lang.
22910 WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE FBFA
- input sensitivity for Scalingfactor SW5.2

progr. lang.
22914 AXES_SCALE_ENABLE FBFA
- activade axial Scalingfactor ( G51 ) SW5.2

progr. lang.

Lists 08/99
24000 FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS K2
- Additional frame-components for G58 and G59 SW5
Display Filter: - POWER ON

24002 CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK K2
- Active channel base frames after reset SW5

always 0xFFFF, 0xFFFF, 0 0xFFFF DWORD 2/7
0xFFFF, 0xFFFF, ...
24004 CHBFRAME_POWERON_MASK FBFA
- reset channel base frames after power on SW5.2
Display Filter: EXP, C11 POWER ON

0x0, 0x0, ...
2.6.5 Transformation definitions in channel
24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 F2
- Definition of transformation 1 in channel SW1

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7
24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 [n]: 0 ... max. No. axes per chann. - 1 F2
- Axis assignment for transformation SW1

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations 0,0, ...
24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Assignment GEO axis to channel axis for transformation 1 SW2
(GEO axis no.): 0...2

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7
Transformations 0, ...
- Axis assignment for transformation 2 SW1

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...

08/99 Lists

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...
24430 TRAFO_TYPE_5 F2, M1
- Transformation 5 in the channel SW4.1

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7
24432 TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 [n]: 0 ... max. No. axes per chann. - 1 F2, M1
- Axis assignment for transformation 5 SW4.1

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
24434 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2, M1
- GEO/chann. axis assignment transform. 5 SW4.1

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7

Lists 08/99

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...

Fct.: 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7

Fct.: { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7

Fct.: { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 7/7
Transformations ...
24500 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Offset vector of 5-axis transformation 1 SW1

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
transformation 0.0}, ...
24510 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 [n]: 0 ... 1 F2
degrees Position offset of rotary axes 1/2 for 5-axis transformation 1 SW1
(axis no.): 0...1

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0},{0.0, 0.0},{0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7

08/99 Lists
24520 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 [n]: 0 ... 1 F2

- Sign of rotary axis 1/2 for 5-axis transformation 1 SW1
(axis no.): 0...1

Fct.: 5-axis {1, 1},{1, 1},{1, 1},{1, 1},{1, - - BOOLEAN 7/7
transformation 1}, ...
24530 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 F2
degrees Definition of pole range for 5-axis transformation 1 SW1

Fct.: 5-axis 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
24540 TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 F2
degrees End angle tolerance with interpolation through pole for 5-axis transformation SW1

Fct.: 5-axis 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
24550 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Vector of base tool for activation of 5-axis transformation 1 SW1
(axis no.): 0...2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24560 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Vector of kinematic offset of 5-axis transformation 1 SW1
(axis no.): 0...2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24562 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Offset of swivel point of 1st rotary axis for 5-axis transformation with swivelled linear SW3
axis, 1st trafo
Offset of rotary axis to machine zero

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24564 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1 F2
degrees Angle of inclination of 2nd rotary axis of 1st nutating head transformation SW3

Fct.: 5-axis 45.0, 45.0, 45.0, 45.0, -89. 89. DOUBLE 7/7
transformation 45.0, 45.0, ...
24566 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_1 -
- Virtual orientation-axes SW5.2

transformation
24570 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Direction of 1st rotary axis SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
Fct.: 5-axis trans., {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 0/0
FM-NC 0.0}, ...

Lists 08/99
24572 TRAFO5_AXIS2_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2

- Direction of 2nd rotary axis SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
FM-NC 0.0}, ...
24574 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Tool base orientation SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
FM-NC 0.0}, ...
24580 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_1 F2
- Direction of orientation vector SW5

Fct.: 5-axis 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,2, 2, 2, 0 2 BYTE 2/7
transformation 2, ...
Fct.: 5-axis trans., 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,2, 2, 2, 0 2 BYTE 0/0
FM-NC 2, ...
24585 TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- ORI/chann. axis assignment transform. 1 SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 2/7
transformation ...
FM-NC ...
24600 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Offset vector of 5-axis transformation 2 SW1

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24610 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 [n]: 0 ... 1 F2
degrees Position offset of rotary axes 1/2 for 5-axis transformation 2 SW1
(axis no.): 0...1

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0},{0.0, 0.0},{0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
24620 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 [n]: 0 ... 1 F2
- Sign of rotary axis 1/2 for 5-axis transformation 2 SW1

Fct.: 5-axis {1, 1},{1, 1},{1, 1},{1, 1},{1, - - BOOLEAN 7/7
transformation 1}, ...
24630 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2 F2
degrees Definition of pole range for 5-axis transformation 2 SW1

Fct.: 5-axis 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
24640 TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2 F2
degrees End angle tolerance with interpolation through pole for 5-axis transformation SW1

Fct.: 5-axis 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, 2.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7

08/99 Lists
24650 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2

mm Vector of base tool for activation of 5-axis transformation 2 SW1
(axis no.): 0...2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24660 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Vector of kinematic offset of 5-axis transformation 2 SW1

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24662 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
mm Offset of swivel point of 2nd 5-axis transformation with swivelled linear axis SW3
Offset of rotary axis to machine zero

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
24664 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2 F2
degrees Angle of inclination for 2nd rotary axis of 2nd nutating head transformation SW3

Fct.: 5-axis 45.0, 45.0, 45.0, 45.0, -89. 89. DOUBLE 7/7
transformation 45.0, 45.0, ...
24666 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_2 -
- Virtual orientation-axes SW5.2

transformation
24670 TRAFO5_AXIS1_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Direction of 1st rotary axis SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
FM-NC 0.0}, ...
24672 TRAFO5_AXIS2_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Direction of 2nd rotary axis SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
FM-NC 0.0}, ...
24674 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2
- Tool base orientation SW5.2

Fct.: 5-axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
FM-NC 0.0}, ...
24680 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_2 F2
- Direction of orientation vector SW5

Fct.: 5-axis 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,2, 2, 2, 0 2 BYTE 2/7
Fct.: 5-axis trans., 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,2, 2, 2, 0 2 BYTE 0/0
FM-NC 2, ...

Lists 08/99
24685 TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 F2

- ORI/chann. axis assignment transform. 1 SW5

Fct.: 5-axis { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0 18 BYTE 2/7
transformation ...
FM-NC ...
24700 TRAANG_ANGLE_1 M1
degrees Angle between cartesian axis and real (inclined) axis SW2

Fct.: Inclined axis 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, ...
24710 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 M1
mm Vector of base tool for 1st TRAANG transformation SW2

Fct.: Inclined axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0}, ...
24720 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 M1
Factor Velocity reserves of parallel axis for the 1st TRAANG transf. SW2

Fct.: Inclined axis 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 1.0 DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, ...
24721 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1 M1
Factor Acceleration reserve of parallel axis for the 1st TRAANG transf. SW2

0.0, ...
24750 TRAANG_ANGLE_2 M1
degrees Angle between cartesian axis and real (inclined) axis SW2

Fct.: Inclined axis 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, ...
24760 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 M1
mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRAANG transformation SW2

Fct.: Inclined axis {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0}, ...
24770 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2 M1
Factor Velocity reserve of parallel axis for the 2nd TRAANG transformation SW2

0.0, ...
24771 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 M1
Factor Acceleration reserve of parallel axis for the 2nd TRAANG transformation SW2

0.0, ...
24800 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 M1
degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation SW2

Fct.: Periph. 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
surfaces transf. 0.0, ...

08/99 Lists
24810 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 M1
- Sign of rotary axis for 1st TRACYL transformation SW2

Fct.: Periph. 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 7/7
surfaces transf.
24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 M1
mm Vector of base tool for 1st TRACYL transformation SW2

Fct.: Periph. {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
surfaces transf. 0.0}, ...
24850 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 M1
degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation SW2

Fct.: Periph. 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
surfaces transf. 0.0, ...
24860 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 M1
- Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation SW2

Fct.: Periph. 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 7/7
surfaces transf.
24870 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 M1
mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation SW2

Fct.: Periph. {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
surfaces transf. 0.0}, ...
24900 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 M1
degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation SW2

Fct.: Transmit 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
transf. 0.0, ...
24910 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 M1
- Sign of rotary axis for 1st TRANSMIT transformation SW2

Fct.: Transmit 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 7/7
transf.
24911 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 M1
- Restriction of working range in front of / behind the pole, 1. TRANSMIT SW4.1

Fct.: Transmit 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0 2 BYTE 7/7
transf. 0, ...
24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 [n]: 0 ... 2 M1
mm Vector of base tool for 1st TRANSMIT transformation SW2

Fct.: Transmit {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
transf. 0.0}, ...
24950 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 M1
degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRANSMIT transformation SW2

Fct.: Transmit 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
transf. 0.0, ...

Lists 08/99
24960 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 M1
- Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRANSMIT transformation SW2

Fct.: Transmit 1 *** *** BOOLEAN 7/7
transf.
24961 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2 M1
- Restriction of working range in front of / behind the pole, 2. TRANSMIT SW4.1

Fct.: Transmit 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0 2 BYTE 7/7
transf. 0, ...
24970 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 [n]: 0 ... 2 M1
mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRANSMIT transformation SW2

Fct.: Transmit {0.0, 0.0 , 0.0},{0.0, 0.0 , - - DOUBLE 7/7
transf. 0.0}, ...
24995 TRACON_CHAIN_1 [n]: 0 ... 3 M1
- Concatenation of transformations SW5

Chained { 0, 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0, 0 }, { 0 8 DWORD 7/7
24996 TRACON_CHAIN_2 [n]: 0 ... 3 M1
- Concatenation of transformations SW5

Chained { 0, 0, 0 ,0 }, { 0, 0, 0, 0 }, { 0 8 DWORD 7/7
2.6.6 Punching and nibbling
26000 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN N4
HEX Hardware assignment for input byte for stroke control SW3

Fct.: Nibbling 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0, ...
26002 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT N4
HEX Hardware assignment for output byte for stroke control SW3

0, ...
26004 NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK [n]: 0 ... 7 N4
HEX Screen form for fast output bits SW3

Fct.: Nibbling {1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},{0, - - BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
26006 NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK [n]: 0 ... 7 N4
HEX Screen form for fast input bits SW3

Fct.: Nibbling {1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},{0, - - BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...

08/99 Lists
26008 NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE [n]: 0 ... 7 N4

HEX Definition of M functions SW3

Fct.: Nibbling {0,23,22, 25, 26, 0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0},{0, 0, 0, ...
26010 PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK N4
HEX Definition of punching and nibbling axes SW3

0, ...
26012 PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION N4
HEX Activation of punching and nibbling functions SW3

0, ...
26014 PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING N4
HEX Activation of automatic path segmentation SW3

0, ...
26016 PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE N4
HEX Behaviour of individual axes with automatic path segmentation SW3

0, ...
26018 NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME N4
s Delay time for nibbling/punching with G603 SW3.2

Fct.: Nibbling 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., - - DOUBLE 2/7
0.,0., ...
26020 NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK N4
- Alarm on chattering punching signal SW3.2

0, ...
27800 TECHNOLOGY_MODE A2
- Mode of technology in channel SW4.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0.0 plus BYTE 2/7
0, ...
27860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE K1
- Activation of program runtime measure SW5.2

always 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0 0x03F BYTE 2/7
0x00, 0x00, ...
27880 PART_COUNTER K1
- Activation of part counter SW5.2

always 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0x0FFFF DWORD 2/7
0x0, 0x0, ...

Lists 08/99
27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE [n]: 0 ... 2 K1

- Part counting with M code defined by user SW5.2

always { 2, 2, 2 }, { 2, 2, 2 }, { 2, 2, 0 99 BYTE 2/7
...
27900 REORG_LOG_LIMIT S7
- Percentage of IPO buffer for enabling of log file SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 1, - - BYTE 0/0
1, ...
2.6.7 Channel-specific memory settings
28000 MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM S7
kB Memory space for REORG (DRAM) SW1

always 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 1 500 DWORD 2/7
10,10, ...
28010 MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES S7
- Number of blocks for local user variables in REORG (DRAM) SW1

Fct.: NC memory 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4,4, 4, 0 100 DWORD 2/7
LUD 4, 4, ...
28020 MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL S7
- Number of local user variables (DRAM) SW1

Fct.: NC memory 200, 200, 200, 200, 200, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
LUD 200, 200, ...
28040 MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM S7
kB Memory space for local user variables (DRAM) SW2

Fct.: NC memory 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
LUD 12,12, ...
Fct.: LUD, NCU 25, 25, 25, 25, 25, 25, 25, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
573 25,25, ...
28050 MM_NUM_R_PARAM S7
- Number of channel-specific R parameters (SRAM) SW1

always 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 0 10000 DWORD 2/7
100, 100, ...
28060 MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE S7
- Number of NC blocks in IPO buffer (DRAM) SW1

always DWORD 2/7
NCU572, 573 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2 300 DWORD 2/7
10,10, ...
NCU571 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2 300 DWORD 2/7
10
810D 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2 180 DWORD 2/7
10
810D_2 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2 300 DWORD 2/7
10

08/99 Lists
28070 MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP S7
- Number of blocks for block preparation (DRAM) SW2

always *** DWORD 2/7
NCU572, 573 38, 38, 38, 38, 38, 38, 38, 20 *** DWORD 2/7
38,38, ...
NCU571 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 20 *** DWORD 2/7
30
810D 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 20 *** DWORD 2/7
30
810D_2 38, 38, 38, 38, 38, 38, 38, 20 *** DWORD 2/7
38
28080 MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES S7
- Number of settable frames (SRAM) SW1

always 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5,5, 5, 5, 5 100 DWORD 2/7
5, ...
28081 MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES K2
- Number of base frames (SRAM) SW5

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 1, 0 8 DWORD 2/7
1, ...
28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT FBW, S7
- Assignment of a TO unit to a channel (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: > 1 channel 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 1 10 DWORD 2/7
8,9,10,11,12, ...
28090 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS S7
- Number of block elements for compile cycles (DRAM) SW1

Compile cycles 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 20 DWORD 1/7
0, 0, ...
NC570 compile 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 20 DWORD 0/0
cycles 0, 0, ...
28100 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM S7
kB Size of block memory for compile cycles (DRAM), in KB SW1

Compile cycles 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 0 256 DWORD 1/7
NCU572, 573 256, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0 256 DWORD 2/7
compile cycles 0, 0, ...
NC570 compile 256, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0 256 DWORD 0/0
cycles 0, 0, ...
28105 MM_NUM_CC_HEAP_MEM S7
- Heap memory in kbytes for Compile-Cycle applications (DRAM) SW5

Compile cycles 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
28150 MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS P3
- Number of elements for writing PLC variables SW4.1

Fct.: Read/write 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
PLC var. 0, 0, ...

Lists 08/99
28160 MM_NUM_LINKVAR_ELEMENTS B3
- Number of elements for writing NCU-link-variables SW5

with NCU-link 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
variables 0, 0, ...
28180 MM_MAX_TRACE_DATAPOINTS BA, S5, FBSY
- Length of the trace data buffer SW4.1

Fct.: with trace 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 0 500 DWORD 2/2
files 100, 100, ...
28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN S7
- Number of files for channel-specific protection zones (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: 3D protection 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0 10 DWORD 2/7
zones 0, ...
28210 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE S7
- Number of simultaneously active protection zones in one channel SW2

Fct.: 3D protection 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0 10 DWORD 2/7
zones 0, ...
28250 MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS S5, FBSY
- Number of elements for expressing the synchronized actions SW4.1

Fct.: Synchr. DWORD 2/7
actions
Fct.: Synchr. act., 159, 159, 129, 129, 129, 0 2000 DWORD 2/7
840D 129, 129, ...
Fct.: Synchr. act., 117, 99, 99, 99, 99, 99, 0 200 DWORD 2/7
NCU571 99, 99
Fct.: Synchr. act., 117, 99, 99, 99, 99, 99, 0 200 DWORD 2/7
810D 99, 99
Fct.: Synchr. act., 159, 159, 129, 129, 129, 0 2000 DWORD 2/7
810D, 810D_2 129, 129, ...
28252 MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS S5, FBSY
- Number of FCTDEF elements SW4.1

Fct.: Synchr. DWORD 2/7
actions
Fct.: Synchr. act., 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,3, 3, 0 100 DWORD 2/7
840D 3, 3, ...
Fct.: Synchr. act., 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3 0 3 DWORD 2/7
NCU571
810D
810D, 810D_2
28254 MM_NUM_AC_PARAM S5, FBSY
- Number of paramenters $AC_PARAM SW4.1

Fct.: Synchr. 50, 50, 50, 50, 50, 50, 50, 0 10000 DWORD 2/7
actions 50,50, ...
28256 MM_NUM_AC_MARKER S5, FBSY
- Number of flags $AC_MARKER SW4.1

Fct.: Synchr. 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8,8, 8, 0 10000 DWORD 2/7
actions 8, 8, ...

08/99 Lists
28258 MM_NUM_AC_TIMER S5, FBSY

- Number of time variables $AC_TIMER SW4.1

Fct.: Synchr. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 10000 DWORD 2/7
actions 0, 0, ...
28260 NUM_AC_FIFO S5, FBSY
- Number of variables $AC_FIFO1 ... SW4.1

Fct.: FIFO var. f. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 10 DWORD 2/7
sync. actions 0, 0, ...
28262 START_AC_FIFO S5, FBSY
- FIFO variables store from P parameter SW4.1

28264 LEN_AC_FIFO S5, M5, FBSY
- Length of the FIFO variables $AC_FIFO ... SW4.1

28266 MODE_AC_FIFO S5, FBSY
- Mode of FIFO processing SW4.1

Fct.: FIFO var. f. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 *** BYTE 2/7
28500 MM_PREP_TASK_STACK_SIZE S7
kB Stack size of preparation task (DRAM) SW1

NCU572, 573 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 4 40 DWORD 2/7
20,20, ...
NCU571 32, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 4 40 DWORD 2/7
20
810D 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 4 40 DWORD 2/7
20,20, ...
28510 MM_IPO_TASK_STACK_SIZE S7
kB Stack size of IPO task (DRAM) SW1

NCU572, 573 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 4 40 DWORD 2/7
12,12, ...
NCU571 8, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 4 40 DWORD 2/7
12
810D 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 4 40 DWORD 2/7
12,12, ...
28520 MM_MAX_AXISPOLY_PER_BLOCK S7
- Maximal number of axial polynomials per block SW4.3

always DWORD 0/0
NCU572, 573 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,3, 3, 3, 1 5 DWORD 2/7
3, ...
NCU571 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 1 5 DWORD 2/7
NCU570 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 1 5 DWORD 2/7
810D 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 1 5 DWORD 2/7

Lists 08/99
28530 MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS K1
- Number of memory units for limitation the path velocity along a block. SW5.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...
28540 MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS K1
- Number of memory units for the representation of arclength function along a block. SW5.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 2/7
0, 0, ...

08/99 Lists
2.7 Axis-specific machine data

introduced.
meaning:
• A01 Configuration (including memory)

• A02 Measuring system
• A03 Machine geometry
• A04 Velocities / accelerations
• A05 Monitoring / limitations
• A06 Spindle
• A07 Controller data
• A08 Status data
• A09 Overrides / compensations
• A10 Technological functions
• A11 Standard machine
• A12 NC-Language ISO-Dialect
• EXP Expert mode
under attributes:
The fields of the machine data table elements are completed as follows:

Lists 08/99
Note
The entry 810D_2 in the field HW/function corresponds to CCU2.

reference
HW / Function Standard value Minimum value Maximum value D type Protect
. level
2.7.1 Configuration
30100 CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR [n]: 0 ... 0 G2

- Setpoint assignment: Drive type SW1
Display Filter: A01, EXP POWER ON

always BYTE 2/7
NCU572, 573 1 0 1 BYTE 0/0
NCU571 1 0 1 BYTE 0/0
NCU570 0 0 2 BYTE 2/7
810D 1 0 1 BYTE 0/0
30110 CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR [n]: 0 ... 0 G2
- Setpoint assignment: Drive number/module no. SW1
Display Filter: A01, A11, FM-NC: EXP POWER ON

30120 CTRLOUT_NR [n]: 0 ... 0 G2
- Setpoint assignment: Setpoint output on drive submodule/module SW1
(setpoint branch): 0

30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE [n]: 0 ... 0 G2, S6
- Output type of setpoint SW1
Display Filter: A01, A11 POWER ON

30132 IS_VIRTUAL_AX [n]: 0 ... 0 M4
- Axis is a virtual axis SW4
Display Filter: A01 Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON

30200 NUM_ENCS G2
- Number of encoders SW1

always 1 0 2 (FM-NC: 1) BYTE 2/7
30210 ENC_SEGMENT_NR [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Actual value assignment: Drive type SW1
Display Filter: A01, A02, EXP POWER ON

always BYTE 2/7
NCU572, 573 1, 1 0 1 BYTE 0/0
NCU571 1, 1 0 1 BYTE 0/0
NCU570 0, 0 0 2 BYTE 2/7
810D 1, 1 0 1 BYTE 0/0

08/99 Lists
30220 ENC_MODULE_NR [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2

- Actual value assignment: Drive number/measuring circuit number SW1
(encoder no.): 0, 1
Display Filter: A01, A02, A11 POWER ON

always 1, 1 1 31 BYTE 2/7
30230 ENC_INPUT_NR [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Actual value assignment: Input to drive submodule/measuring circuit board SW1
(encoder no.): 0,1

810D 1, 1 1 2 BYTE 2/7
30240 ENC_TYPE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2, R1
- Type of actual value acquisition (actual position value) SW1
0: Simulation
1: Raw signal generator, high resolution
2: Square-wave encoder, standard encoder (pulse multiplication)
3: Encoder for stepper motor
4: Absolute encoder with EnDat interface
5: Absolute encoder with SSI interface (FM-NC)

30242 ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Encoder is independent SW4.1
Display Filter: A02, A11 NEW CONF

30250 ACT_POS_ABS [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
- Absolute encoder position at power OFF time SW4.1
Display Filter: A02, A08, EXP Attribute: ODLD POWER ON

always 0.0, 0.0 - - DOUBLE 2/7
30260 ABS_INC_RATIO [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
- absolute encoder: ratio between absolute precision and incremental precision SW5.2

always 4, 4 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
30300 IS_ROT_AX R2
- Rotary axis / spindle SW1

30310 ROT_IS_MODULO R2
- Modulo conversion for rotary axis / spindle SW1
Display Filter: A01, A06, A11 Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON

30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO R2
- Modulo 360 degrees display for rotary axes and spindle SW1

30330 MODULO_RANGE R2
degrees Size of modulo range. SW4.1
Display Filter: A01, EXP Attribute: CTEQ RESET

always 360.0 1.0 360000000.0 DOUBLE 2/7

Lists 08/99
30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT G2
- Output of axis signals with simulation axes SW1
Display Filter: A01, A06 Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON

30450 IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX P2
- Concurrent positioning axis SW1

30500 INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB T1
- Axis is indexing axis SW1
Display Filter: A01, A10 RESET

Fct.: Positioning 0 0 3 BYTE 2/7
axes
30501 INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR T1
mm, Indexing axis equidistant positions nominator SW4.3
degrees
Fct.: Positioning 0.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
axes
30502 INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR T1
- Indexing axis equidistant positions denominator SW4.3

Fct.: Positioning 1 1 *** DWORD 2/7
axes
30503 INDEX_AX_OFFSET T1
mm, Indexing axis with equidistant positions first index position SW4.3
degrees
Fct.: Positioning 0.0 - - DOUBLE 2/7
axes
30505 HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE T1
- Axis is indexing axis with Hirth tooth system SW4.3
Display Filter: A01, A10 Attribute: CTEQ RESET

Fct.: Positioning 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
axes
30550 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN K5
- Initial setting of channel for change of axis SW2

30552 AUTO_GET_TYPE S1, K5
- Automatic GET for get axis SW3.2

30560 IS_LOCAL_LINK_AXIS B3
- Axis is a local link axis SW5

NCU-link 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
30600 FIX_POINT_POS [n]: 0 ... max. No. fixed points per axis - 1 K1
mm, Fixed-value positions of axis with G75 SW1
degrees

08/99 Lists
30800 WORKAREA_CHECK_TYPE A2
- Type of workarea check SW5.2
Display Filter: - Attribute: CTEQ NEW CONF

2.7.2 Encoder matching
31000 ENC_IS_LINEAR [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2

- Direct measuring system (linear scale) SW1

31010 ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
mm Division period for linear scales SW1

always 0.01, 0.01 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
31020 ENC_RESOL [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Encoder lines per revolution SW1

31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH G2
mm Pitch of leadscrew SW1

31040 ENC_IS_DIRECT [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Encoder mounted directly on the machine SW1

31050 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM [n]: 0 ... 5 G2
- Denominator load gearbox SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 1 2147000000 DWORD 2/7
31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA [n]: 0 ... 5 G2
- Numerator load gearbox SW1

always 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 -2147000000 2147000000 DWORD 2/7
31070 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Denominator measuring gearbox SW1

always 1, 1 1 2147000000 DWORD 2/7
31080 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Numerator measuring gearbox SW1

always 1, 1 1 2147000000 DWORD 2/7
31090 JOG_INCR_WEIGHT [n]: 0 ... 1 H1, G2
mm, Evaluation of an increment with INC/handwheel SW1
degrees
always 0.001, 0.00254 - - DOUBLE 2/7

Lists 08/99
31100 BERO_CYCLE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 S6

- Steps for monitoring rotation SW1
Display Filter: A02 POWER ON

Stepper motor 2000, 2000 10 10000000 DWORD 2/7
31110 BERO_EDGE_TOL [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 S6
- Step tolerance for monitoring rotation SW1

Stepper motor 50, 50 10 10000000 DWORD 2/7
31120 BERO_EDGE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 S6
- BERO evaluation edge SW1

Stepper motor 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 0/0
31122 BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 S1
s BERO delay time plus SW4.1

31123 BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 S1
s BERO delay time minus SW4.1

31200 SCALING_FACTOR_G70_G71 G2
- Factor for converting values while G70/G71 is active SW1
Display Filter: A01, EXP Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON

31350 FREQ_STEP_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... 0 S6
Hz Stepping rate at maximum velocity SW3

Stepper motor 250000.0 100.0 4000000.0 DOUBLE 2/7
31400 STEP_RESOL [n]: 0 ... 0 S6
- Number of steps per revolution of a stepping motor SW4.1

Stepper motor 1000 0.0 plus DWORD 2/7
31500 AXIS_NUMBER_FOR_MONITORING [n]: 0 ... 0 S6
- Output setpoint of this axis for service purposes SW4.1

31510 OFFSETVALUE_FOR_MONITORING [n]: 0 ... 0 S6
V Offset voltage for service setpoint SW4.1
Display Filter: A01 NEW CONF

always 0.0 -10.0 10.0 DOUBLE 2/7
31520 GAIN_FOR_MONITORING [n]: 0 ... 0 S6
- Gain for service setpoint SW4.1

always 1.0 -100.0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7

08/99 Lists
2.7.3 Closed-loop control
32000 MAX_AX_VELO G2
mm/min, Maximum axis velocity SW1
rev/min
Display Filter: A04, A11 Attribute: CTEQ NEW CONF
always 10000. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
32010 JOG_VELO_RAPID H1
mm/min, Rapid traverse in jog mode SW1
rev/min
32020 JOG_VELO H1
mm/min, Jog axis velocity SW1
rev/min
32040 JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID H1
mm/rev Revolutional feedrate in JOG with rapid traverse override SW1

32050 JOG_REV_VELO H1
mm/rev Revolutional feedrate in JOG SW1

32060 POS_AX_VELO P2
mm/min, Initial setting for positioning axis speed SW1
rev/min
Fct.: Positioning 10000. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
axes
32070 CORR_VELO H1, K2, W4
% Axis velocity for handwheel override, ext. ZO, cont. dressing, distance control SW3.2
Display Filter: A04 Attribute: CTEQ RESET

32074 FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED H1, K2, W4
- Fixed feedrate for rotary axes SW4.1

always 0 0 0x3FF DWORD 2/7
32080 HANDWH_MAX_INCR_SIZE H1
mm, Limitation of selected increment SW3.2
degrees
32082 HANDWH_MAX_INCR_VELO_SIZE H1
mm/min, Limitation of selected increment for velocity overlay SW3.2
rev/min
Display Filter: A04, A05, A10 Attribute: CTEQ RESET
32084 HANDWH_STOP_COND H1
- Control of VDI signals with respect to handwheel SW3.2
Meaning of bits:
Bit==0: Interruption or collection of the distances preset via the
handwheel
Bit==1: Abort of the traversing movement or no collection

always 0xFF 0 0x3FF DWORD 2/7

Lists 08/99
32090 HANDWH_VELO_OVERLAY_FACTOR H1
- Ratio of JOG speed to handwheel speed (DRF) SW1

32100 AX_MOTION_DIR G2
- Traversing direction (not control direction) SW1

always 1 -1 1 DWORD 2/7
32110 ENC_FEEDBACK_POL [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2
- Sign actual value (control direction) SW1

always 1, 1 -1 1 DWORD 2/7
32200 POSCTRL_GAIN [n]: 0 ... 5 G2
1000/min Servo gain factor SW1

always 1 0 2 DOUBLE 2/7
32250 RATED_OUTVAL [n]: 0 ... 0 G2
% Rated output voltage SW1

NCU572, 573 80.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 1/1
32260 RATED_VELO [n]: 0 ... 0 G2
rev/min Rated motor speed SW1

always 300 0.0 plus DOUBLE 0/0
NCU572, 573 100 0.0 plus DOUBLE 1/1
32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL B2
mm/s², Axis acceleration SW1
rev/s²
always 1 0 *** DOUBLE 2/7
32310 MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR B1
Factor Overload factor for axial velocity steps SW1
Display Filter: A04 Attribute: CTEQ NEW CONF

32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE B2
- Axial jerk limitation SW1

32402 AX_JERK_MODE B2
- Axial jerk limitation filter type SW5

32410 AX_JERK_TIME B2
s Time constant for axial jerk filter SW1

32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE B2
- Default setting of axis jerk limitation SW1


08/99 Lists
32430 JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK B2
mm/s³, Axial jerk SW1
degrees/s
³
not 802S 1.e9 0.0 plus DOUBLE 3/3
32431 MAX_AX_JERK B1
mm/s³, Maximum axial jerk for path movement SW5
degrees/s
³
always 1.e9 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
not 802S 1.e9 0.0 plus DOUBLE 3/3
32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM B1
mm/s³, Max. axial jerk of a Geo axis at block limit SW3.2
degrees/s
³
always 1.e9 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
32433 SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR B1
- Scaling Factor for maximum axial acceleration with SOFT and path movement SW5.2

32434 G00_ACCEL_FACTOR B1
- Scaling Factor for maximum axial acceleration with G00 and path movement SW5.2

32435 G00_JERK_FACTOR B1
- Scaling Factor for maximum axial jerk with G00 and path movement SW5.2

32450 BACKLASH [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 K3
mm, Backlash SW1
degrees
32452 BACKLASH_FACTOR [n]: 0 ... 5 K3
- Backlash evaluation factor SW5

always 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 0.01 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
32460 TORQUE_OFFSET [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
% Additional torque for electronic weight compensation SW1

always 0.0 -100.0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
NCU570 0.0 -100.0 100.0 DOUBLE 0/0
810D 0.0 -100.0 100.0 DOUBLE 0/0
32490 FRICT_COMP_MODE [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
- Type of friction compensation SW2
0: No comp, 1: Compens. with const. injection value
2: Comp. with characteristic learned via neural network (option)

810D 1 0 1 BYTE 2/7

Lists 08/99
32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE K3
- Friction compensation active SW1

32510 FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
- Adaptation friction compensation active SW1
Display Filter: A09, EXP NEW CONF

32520 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
mm/min, Maximum friction compensation value SW1
rev/min
32530 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
mm/min, Minimum friction compensation value SW1
rev/min
32540 FRICT_COMP_TIME [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
s Friction compensation time constant SW1

32550 FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
mm/s², Adaptation acceleration value 1 SW1
rev/s²
rev/s²
rev/s²
32580 FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
% Weighting factor of friction compensation value with short traversing movements SW2

always 0.0 0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT [n]: 0 ... 5 K3
Factor Feedforward factor for speed feedforward control SW1

always 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
32620 FFW_MODE K3
- Feedforward control type SW1
0: No feedforward control 1: Speed feedforward control
2: Speed and torque feedforward control

810D 3 0 3 BYTE 2/7
32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE K3
- Activate feedforward control from program SW1


08/99 Lists
32640 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE [n]: 0 ... 0 K3

- Dynamic Stiffness Control SW4.1

611D, not 810D 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
32650 AX_INERTIA K3
kgm² Moment of inertia for torque feedforward control SW1
Display Filter: A07, A09, EXP NEW CONF

32652 AX_MASS K3
kg Axis mass for torque feedforward control SW4.1

611D, not 810D 0.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 K3
- Interpolatory compensation SW1

32710 CEC_ENABLE K3
- Enable of sag compensation SW2

Fct.: CEC 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
32711 CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC K3
- Scaling system of sag compensation SW5

32720 CEC_MAX_SUM K3
mm, Maximum compensation value for sag compensation SW2
degrees
Fct.: CEC 1.0 0 10.0 DOUBLE 2/7
32730 CEC_MAX_VELO K3
% Maximum change value with sag compensation with ref. to MD32000 SW2

Fct.: CEC 10.0 0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
32750 TEMP_COMP_TYPE K3
HEX Temperature compensation type SW1
0: No compensation
Bit 0 = 1: Position-independent compensation active
Bit 1 = 1: Position-dependent compensation active

32760 COMP_ADD_VELO_FACTOR K3
Factor Excessive velocity due to compensation SW1
Display Filter: A04, A09, EXP Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON

always 0.01 0. 0.10 DOUBLE 2/7
32800 EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME [n]: 0 ... 5 K3
s Equivalent time constant current control loop for feedforward control SW1
(control parameter set no.): 0...5

0.0005, ...

Lists 08/99
32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME [n]: 0 ... 5 K3

s Equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control SW1

always 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
NCU570_2 0.006, 0.006, 0.006, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.006, 0.006, ...
NCU571 0.006, 0.006, 0.006, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.006, 0.006, ...
NCU572 0.004, 0.004, 0.004, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.004, 0.004, ...
NCU573 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.008, 0.008, ...
810D 0.0025, 0.0025, 0.0025, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.0025, ...
810D_2 0.0025, 0.0025, 0.0025, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
0.0025, ...
32900 DYN_MATCH_ENABLE G2
- Dynamic response adaptation SW1

32910 DYN_MATCH_TIME [n]: 0 ... 5 G2
s Time constant of dynamic response adaptation SW1

always 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
32920 AC_FILTER_TIME S5, FBSY
s Smoothing factor time constant for adaptive control SW2

32930 POSCTRL_OUT_FILTER_ENABLE
- Enable of position control output filter SW5.2

32940 POSCTRL_OUT_FILTER_TIME
s Time constant of position control output filter SW5.2

32950 POSCTRL_DAMPING -
Factor Damping of position control loop SW1

32960 POSCTRL_ZERO_ZONE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1
mm, zero zone of position control SW5.2
degrees
33000 FIPO_TYPE G2
- Fine interpolator type (1: differential FIPO, 2: cubic FIPO) SW1
Display Filter: A07, EXP Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON


08/99 Lists
33050 LUBRICATION_DIST A2
mm, Traversing distance for lubrication from PLC SW1
degrees
33100 COMPRESS_POS_TOL K1
mm, Maximum deviation during compression SW1
degrees
Fct.: Polynomial 0.1 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
Fct.: NCU570 0.1 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
polynomial
2.7.4 Reference point approach
34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE R1
- Axis with reference point cam SW1

34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS R1
- Approach reference point in minus direction SW1

34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM R1
mm/min, Reference point approach velocity SW1
rev/min
Display Filter: A03, A04, A11 RESET
34030 REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST R1
mm, Maximum distance to reference cam SW1
degrees
34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
mm/min, Creep speed SW1
rev/min
34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
- Direction reversal to reference cams SW1

34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
mm, Maximum distance to reference mark. Max. distance to 2 reference marks SW1
degrees for distance-coded measuring systems

34070 REFP_VELO_POS R1
mm/min, Reference point positioning velocity SW1
rev/min
34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
mm, Reference point distance/target point for distance-coded system SW1
degrees
always -2.0, -2.0 - - DOUBLE 2/7

Lists 08/99
34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1

mm, Reference point offset/absolute offset distance-coded SW1
degrees (encoder no.): 0,1
Display Filter: A02, A03, A08, A11 RESET

34092 REFP_CAM_SHIFT [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
mm, Electr. cam offset of incremental measuring systems with equidistant zero marks SW3.2
degrees
34100 REFP_SET_POS [n]: 0 ... 3 R1
mm, Reference point value/irrelevant for distance-coded system SW1
degrees
always 0., 0., 0., 0. - - DOUBLE 2/7
34102 REFP_SYNC_ENCS R1
- Calibration of measuring system SW3

34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR R1
- Sequence of axes in channel-specific referencing SW1
-1: No obligatory reference point for NC Start
0: No channel-specific reference-point approach
1-15: Sequence in channel-specific reference point approach
Display Filter: A03 RESET

34120 REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE M5
- BERO polarity change SW5.2

611D 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
34200 ENC_REFP_MODE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
- Referencing mode SW1
0: No ref. point appr.; if absolute encoder exists: REFP_SET_POS accepted
1: Zero pulse (on encoder track)
2: BERO
3: Distance-coded reference marks
4: Bero with two edges
5. BERO cam
6. Measuring system calibration to referenced encoder
7: BERO with conf. approach speed with spindles

34210 ENC_REFP_STATE [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
- Status absolute encoder SW1
0: Encoder not adjusted
1: Encoder adjustment enabled
2; Encoder is adjusted
Display Filter: A02, A03, A07 IMMEDIATELY

34220 ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R2
- Absolute value encoder range for rotary encoders SW1

always 4096, 4096 1 4096 DWORD 2/7

08/99 Lists
34300 ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1

mm, Reference mark distance for distance-coded scales SW1
degrees
34310 ENC_MARKER_INC [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
mm, Differential distance between reference marks for distance-coded scales SW1
degrees (encoder no.): 0,1

34320 ENC_INVERS [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 G2, R1
- Linear measurement system in opposite sense SW1

34330 REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 R1
- Distance coded linear measurement system without target point SW1
Display Filter: A03 RESET

2.7.5 Spindles
35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX S1
- Assignment of spindle to machine axis SW1

35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE S1
- Gear change possible. Spindle has several gear stages SW1

35012 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION S1
mm, Gear step change position SW5.2
degrees
35020 SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE S1
- Initial spindle setting SW2
0/1: speed mode without/with pos. control., 2: pos. mode, 3: axis mode

35030 SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK S1
HEX Time at which initial spindle setting is effective SW2
0: Power on, 1: Progr. start. 2: Reset (M2/M30)

always 0x00 0 0x03 BYTE 2/7
35032 SPIND_FUNC_RESET_MODE W4
- Reset-mode of single spindle features SW4.1

always 0x00 0 0x01 DWORD 2/7
35040 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET S1
- Own spindle RESET SW1


Lists 08/99
35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT S1
rev/min Maximum spindle speed SW1

35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [n]: 0 ... max. No. gear para. blocks - 1 S1
rev/min Maximum speed for gear change SW1
Display Filter: A04, A06, A11 Attribute: CTEQ NEW CONF

35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO [n]: 0 ... max. No. gear para. blocks - 1 S1
rev/min Minimum speed for gear change SW1

35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... max. No. gear para. blocks - 1 S1
rev/min Maximum speed of gear stage SW1

35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... max. No. gear para. blocks - 1 S1
rev/min Minimum speed of gear stage SW1

35150 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL S1
Factor Spindle speed tolerance SW1
Display Filter: A03, A04, A05, A05 RESET

35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT S1
rev/min Spindle speed limitation from PLC SW1

35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL [n]: 0 ... max. No. gear para. blocks - 1 S1
rev/s² Acceleration in speed control mode SW1

35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL [n]: 0 ... max. No. gear para. blocks - 1 S1
rev/s² Acceleration in position control mode SW1

35220 ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT S1, S6, B2
Factor Speed for reduced acceleration SW1

35230 ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR S1, S6, B2
Factor Reduced acceleration SW1

35240 ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE S6
- Type of acceleration SW3.2

Fct.: Stepper 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
motor

08/99 Lists
35242 ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE S6
- Type of acceleration reduction SW3.2

Fct.: Stepper 1 0 2 BYTE 2/7
motor
35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO S1
rev/min Position control switch-on speed SW1

35350 SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR S1
- Direction of rotation when positioning SW1

35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO S1
rev/min Oscillation speed SW1

35410 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL S1
rev/s² Acceleration during oscillation SW1

35430 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR S1
- Starting direction during oscillation SW1
0-2: As last direction of rotation (zero-speed M3)
3: M3 direction
4: M4 direction

35440 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW S1
s Oscillation time for M3 direction SW1

35450 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW S1
s Oscillation time for M4 direction SW1

35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START S1
- Feedrate enable for spindle in the set range SW1

35510 SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START S1
- Feedrate enable for spindle stopped SW1

35590 PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE A2
- Parameter set can be changed SW4.2
Display Filter: A05, Exp Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON


Lists 08/99
2.7.6 Monitoring functions
36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE B1
mm, Exact positioning coarse SW1
degrees
36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE B1
mm, Exact positioning fine SW1
degrees
36012 STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR [n]: 0 ... 5 B1
- Factor for exact stop coarse/fine and standstill SW5

always 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 0.001 1000.0 DOUBLE 2/7
36020 POSITIONING_TIME B1, A3
s Delay time exact positioning fine SW1

36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL A3
mm, Standstill tolerance SW1
degrees
36040 STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME A3
s Delay zero-speed control SW1

36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL A3
mm, Clamping tolerance SW1
degrees
36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL A2
mm/min, Maximum velocity/speed "axis/spindle stopped" SW1
rev/min
36100 POS_LIMIT_MINUS A3
mm, 1st software limit switch minus SW1
degrees
always -100000000 - - DOUBLE 2/7
36110 POS_LIMIT_PLUS A3
mm, 1st software limit switch plus SW1
degrees
always 100000000 - - DOUBLE 2/7
36120 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 A3
mm, 2nd software limit switch minus SW1
degrees
always -100000000 - - DOUBLE 2/7
36130 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 A3
mm, 2nd software limit switch plus SW1
degrees
always 100000000 - - DOUBLE 2/7

08/99 Lists
36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... 5 A3

mm/min, Threshold value for velocity monitoring SW1
rev/min (control parameter set no.): 0...5

always 11500., 11500., 11500., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
11500., ...
36210 CTRLOUT_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... 0 G2
% Maximum speed setpoint SW1
Display Filter: A05, Exp Attribute: CTEQ NEW CONF

always 110.0 0 200 DOUBLE 2/7
36220 CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME [n]: 0 ... 0 A3
s Delay time for speed setpoint monitoring SW1
Display Filter: A05, Exp NEW CONF

36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 A3
Hz Encoder limit frequency SW1
Display Filter: A02, A05, A06, EXP POWER ON

36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 A3, R1
% Encoder limit frequency at which encoder is switched on again. (Hysteresis) SW3
Display Filter: A02, A05, A06, EXP NEW CONF

always 99.9, 99.9 0 100 DOUBLE 2/7
36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 A3, R1
- Zero mark monitoring SW1
0: Zero mark monitoring off, encoder HW monitoring on
1-99, >100: Number of recognized zero mark errors during monitoring
100: Zero mark monitoring off, encoder HW monitoring off

36400 CONTOUR_TOL A3
mm, Tolerance band for contour monitoring SW1
degrees
36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL G2
mm, Maximum tolerance for position actual value switchover SW1
degrees
36510 ENC_DIFF_TOL G2
mm, Tolerance measuring system synchronization SW4.2
degrees
36520 DES_VELO_LIMIT DA
% Threshold for setpoint velocity monitoring SW4.3
Threshold for alarm 1016 with error code 550010

36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE A3
- Deceleration response on hardware limit switch SW1
0: Deceleration ramp
Display Filter: A05, Exp Attribute: CTEQ POWER ON


Lists 08/99
36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME A3
s Duration of the deceleration ramp for error states SW1

NCU570 0.05 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME A2
s Cutout delay servo enable SW1

NCU570 0.1 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
36690 AXIS_DIAGNOSIS -
- Internal data for test purposes SW3.2

36700 DRIFT_ENABLE K3
- Automatic drift compensation SW1

NCU572, 573 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 1/1
NCU571 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 0/0
810D 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 0/0
36710 DRIFT_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
% Drift limit value for automatic drift compensation SW1

NCU572, 573 1.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 1/1
36720 DRIFT_VALUE [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
% Drift basic value SW1

always 0.0 DOUBLE 0/0
NCU572, 573 0.0 -5.0 5.0 DOUBLE 1/1
36730 DRIVE_SIGNAL_TRACKING S5
- Acquisition of additional drive actual values SW2

36750 AA_OFF_MODE S5
- Effect of value assignment for axial overlay in synchronous actions SW3.2

2.7.7 Safety Integrated
36901 SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE FBSI

HEX Enable safety functions SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0 DWORD 2/7
Integrated
Fkt.: Safety 0 0 0xFF03 DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 1
Fkt.: Safety 0 0 0xFFEB DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2

08/99 Lists
36902 SAFE_IS_ROT_AX FBSI

- Rotary axis SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
Integrated
36905 SAFE_MODULO_RANGE FBSI
degrees Range of SI actual value (rev.) SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0.0 0.0 737280.0 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36910 SAFE_ENC_SEGMENT_NR FBSI
- Actual value assignment: type of drive SW3.4
Display Filter: A01, A02, A05, EXP POWER ON

Integrated
36911 SAFE_ENC_MODULE_NR FBSI
- Actual value assignment: drive number/measurement circuit number SW3.4

Integrated
36912 SAFE_ENC_INPUT_NR FBSI
- Actual value assignment: Input number on drive module/measurement circuit board SW3.4

Integrated
36915 SAFE_ENC_TYPE FBSI
- Encoder type SW3.4

Integrated
36916 SAFE_ENC_IS_LINEAR FBSI
- Linear scale SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
Integrated
36917 SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST FBSI
mm Division period for linear scale SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0.01 0.00001 8 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36918 SAFE_ENC_RESOL FBSI
- Encoder markings per revolution SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 2048 1 100000 DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36920 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_PITCH FBSI
mm Lead screw pitch SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 10.0 0.1 10000. DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated

Lists 08/99
36921 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_DENOM [n]: 0 ... 7 FBSI

- Denominator of gearbox encoder/load SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 1 2147000000 DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36922 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_NUMERA [n]: 0 ... 7 FBSI
- Numerator of gearbox encoder/load SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 1 2147000000 DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36925 SAFE_ENC_POLARITY FBSI
- Direction reversal of actual value SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 1 -1 1 DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36930 SAFE_STANDSTILL_TOL FBSI
mm, Standstill tolerance SW3.4
degrees
Fct.: Safety 1. 0. 100. DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36931 SAFE_VELO_LIMIT [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
mm/min, Limit value for safe velocity SW3.4
rev/min
Fct.: Safety 2000., 2000., 2000., 2000. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36932 SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR [n]: 0 ... 15 FBSI
% Safe velocity override SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 1 100 DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2 100, 100, ...
36933 SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT FBSI
% SG setpoint speed limiting SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0 0 100 DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36934 SAFE_POS_LIMIT_PLUS [n]: 0 ... 1 FBSI
mm, Upper limit of safe end position SW3.4
degrees
Fct.: Safety 100000., 100000. -2147000 2147000 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36935 SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MINUS [n]: 0 ... 1 FBSI
mm, Lower limit of safe end position SW3.4
degrees
Fct.: Safety -100000., -100000. -2147000 2147000 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36936 SAFE_CAM_POS_PLUS [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
mm, Plus cam position for safe cams SW3.4
degrees
Fct.: Safety 10., 10., 10., 10. -2147000 2147000 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated

08/99 Lists
36937 SAFE_CAM_POS_MINUS [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI

mm, Minus cam position for safe cams SW3.4
degrees
Fct.: Safety -10., -10., -10., -10. -2147000 2147000 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36940 SAFE_CAM_TOL FBSI
mm, Tolerance for safe cams SW3.4
degrees
Integrated
36942 SAFE_POS_TOL FBSI
mm, Tolerance actual value cross-check SW3.4
degrees
Integrated
36944 SAFE_REFP_POS_TOL FBSI
mm, Tolerance actual value check (referencing) SW3.4
degrees
Fct.: Safety 0.01 0 36 DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36946 SAFE_VELO_X FBSI
mm/min, Safe speed limit n_x SW4.2
rev/min
Fkt.: Safety 20. 0. 1000. DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36948 SAFE_STOP_VELO_TOL FBSI
mm/min, Velocity tolerance for safe braking ramp SW4.2
rev/min
Integrated SW 2
36949 SAFE_SLIP_VELO_TOL FBSI
mm/min, Slip velocity tolerance SW5.2
rev/min
Integrated SW 2
36950 SAFE_MODE_SWITCH_TIME FBSI
s Tolerance time for SGE switchover SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0.5 0 10. DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36951 SAFE_VELO_SWITCH_DELAY FBSI
s Delay time for velocity changeover SW3.4

Integrated
36952 SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_C FBSI
s Transition time STOP C to safe standstill SW3.4

Integrated

Lists 08/99
36953 SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_D FBSI

s Transition time STOP D to safe standstill SW3.4

Integrated
36954 SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_E FBSI
s Transition time STOP E to safe standstill (in preparation) SW3.4

Integrated
36956 SAFE_PULSE_DISABLE_DELAY FBSI
s Delay time for pulse suppression SW3.4

Integrated
36957 SAFE_PULSE_DIS_CHECK_TIME FBSI
s Time for checking pulse suppression SW3.4

Integrated
36960 SAFE_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL FBSI
mm/min, Creep speed for pulse suppression SW3.4
rev/min
Fct.: Safety 0.0 0.0 1000. DOUBLE 2/7
Integrated
36961 SAFE_VELO_STOP_MODE FBSI
- Stop reaction for safe velocity SW3.4

Fct.: Safety BYTE 2/7
Integrated
Fkt.: Safety 2 2 3 BYTE 2/7
Integrated SW 1
Fkt.: Safety 5 0 5 BYTE 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36962 SAFE_POS_STOP_MODE FBSI
- Stop reaction for safe end position SW3.4

Integrated
36963 SAFE_VELO_STOP_REACTION [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
- Stop reaction for safe velocity SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 2, 2, 2, 2 0 3 BYTE 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36964 SAFE_IPO_STOP_GROUP FBSI
- safety-integrated IPO-reaction grouping SW5.2

Integrated
36965 SAFE_PARK_ALARM_SUPPRESS FBSI
- alarm suppress on parking axis SW5.2

Fkt.: Safety 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
Integrated SW 2

08/99 Lists
36970 SAFE_SVSS_DISABLE_INPUT FBSI

HEX Input assignment SBH/SG disable SW3.4

Integrated
36971 SAFE_SS_DISABLE_INPUT FBSI
HEX Input assignment SBH disable SW3.4

Integrated
36972 SAFE_VELO_SELECT_INPUT [n]: 0 ... 1 FBSI
HEX Input assignment SG selection SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36973 SAFE_POS_SELECT_INPUT FBSI
HEX Input assignment SE selection SW3.4

Integrated
36974 SAFE_GEAR_SELECT_INPUT [n]: 0 ... 2 FBSI
HEX Input assignment speed ratio selection SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36975 SAFE_STOP_REQUEST_INPUT FBSI
HEX Input assignment test stop request SW3.4

Integrated
36976 SAFE_PULSE_STATUS_INPUT FBSI
HEX Input assignment status pulses suppressed SW3.4

Integrated
36977 SAFE_EXT_STOP_INPUT [n]: 0 ... 2 FBSI
- Input assignment for external stop request SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36978 SAFE_OVR_INPUT [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
- Input assignment for SG-Override SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36980 SAFE_SVSS_STATUS_OUTPUT FBSI
HEX Output assignment SBH/SG active SW3.4

Integrated

Lists 08/99
36981 SAFE_SS_STATUS_OUTPUT FBSI

- Output assignment SBH active SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36982 SAFE_VELO_STATUS_OUTPUT [n]: 0 ... 1 FBSI
- Output assignment for active SG selection SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36985 SAFE_VELO_X_STATUS_OUTPUT FBSI
- Output assignment n<n_x SW4.2

Fkt.: Safety 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36986 SAFE_PULSE_ENABLE_OUTPUT FBSI
HEX Output assignment pulse suppression SW3.4

Integrated
36987 SAFE_REFP_STATUS_OUTPUT FBSI
HEX Output assignment axis safely referenced SW3.4

Integrated
36988 SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
HEX Output assignment SN1 + to SN4 + SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36989 SAFE_CAM_MINUS_OUTPUT [n]: 0 ... 3 FBSI
HEX Output assignment SN1 - to SN4 - SW3.4

Fct.: Safety 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated
36990 SAFE_ACT_STOP_OUTPUT [n]: 0 ... 4 FBSI
- Output assignment current stop SW3.4

Fkt.: Safety 0, 0, 0, 0 - - DWORD 2/7
Integrated SW 2
36993 SAFE_CONFIG_CHANGE_DATE [n]: 0 ... 4 FBSI
- Date/time last change of SI-NCK-data SW5.2
Display Filter: A05, A07, EXP Attribute: READ POWER ON

Fct.: Safety - - - STRING 0/7
Integrated
36994 SAFE_PREV_CONFIG [n]: 0 ... 4 FBSI
- data of previous safety-configuration SW5.2

Fct.: Safety 0, 0, 0 ,0 ,0 - - DWORD 0/0
Integrated

08/99 Lists
36995 SAFE_STANDSTILL_POS FBSI

- Standstill position SW3.4

Integrated
36997 SAFE_ACKN FBSI
HEX User acknowledge SW3.4

Integrated
36998 SAFE_ACT_CHECKSUM FBSI
HEX Actual checksum SW3.4

Integrated
36999 SAFE_DES_CHECKSUM FBSI
HEX Desired (expected) checksum SW3.4

Integrated
2.7.8 Travel to fixed stop

37000 FIXED_STOP_MODE F1
- Mode travel to fixed stop SW2

Fct.: Traverse to 0 0 1 BYTE 2/7
stop
37002 FIXED_STOP_CONTROL F1
- Enhanced function control of fixed stop SW5.2

stop
37010 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF F1
% Default fixed stop clamping torque SW2

Fct.: Traverse to 5.0 0.0 100.0 DOUBLE 2/7
stop
37020 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF F1
mm, Default fixed-stop monitoring window SW2
degrees
Fct.: Traverse to 1.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
stop
37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD F1
mm, Threshold for fixed stop detection SW2
degrees
stop
37040 FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR F1
- Fixed stop detection by sensor SW2

stop

Lists 08/99
37050 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK F1
- Enable of the fixed stop alarms SW2

stop
37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK F1
- PLC acknowledgements observed for travel to fixed stop SW2
0. Do not wait, 1: Wait, 3: Analog drives

stop
37070 FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE F1
% Torque limit for startup of the fixed stop for analog drives SW2

stop
37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE G1
- Gantry axes definition SW2

Fct.: Gantry axes 0 0 33 BYTE 2/7
37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING G1
mm, Gantry warning limit SW2
degrees
Fct.: Gantry axes 0.0 DOUBLE 2/7
37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR G1
mm, Gantry trip limit SW2
degrees
37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF G1
mm, Gantry trip limit during referencing SW2
degrees
37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP G1
- Invalidate gantry axis grouping SW2
Display Filter: A01, A10, EXP Attribute: CTEQ RESET

Fct.: Gantry axes 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 2/7
37200 COUPLE_POS_TOL_COARSE S3
mm, Threshold value for "synchronization coarse" SW2
degrees
Axis coupling or 1.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
electronic gear
37210 COUPLE_POS_TOL_FINE S3
mm, Threshold value for "synchronization fine" SW2
degrees
Axis coupling or 0.5 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
electronic gear
37220 COUPLE_VELO_TOL_COARSE S3
mm/min, Velocity tolerance "coarse" between leading and following spindles SW3
rev/min
Fct.: Coupled axes 1.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7

08/99 Lists
37230 COUPLE_VELO_TOL_FINE S3
mm/min, Velocity tolerance "coarse" between leading and following spindles SW3
rev/min
Fct.: Coupled axes 0.5 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
37300 DIG_P_MIN FBD
mm Lower working area limit (software limit) when digitizing SW2

Fct.: Digitize -100000000 - - DOUBLE 2/7
37310 DIG_P_MAX FBD
mm Upper working area limit (software limit) when digitizing SW2

37320 DIG_V_MAX FBD
mm/min Maximum axis velocity during digitization SW2

Fct.: Digitize 10000. 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
37400 EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP T3
mm, Angle of tangent for corner recognition SW3.2
degrees
Fct.: Tangential 5.0 - - DOUBLE 2/7
follow-up
37402 TANG_OFFSET T3
mm, Default angle for tangential correction SW3.2
degrees
Fct.: Tangential 0.0 - - DOUBLE 2/7
follow-up
37500 ESR_REACTION M3
- Axis-Mode of "Extended Stopping and Retract" SW5

611D, not 810D 0 0 22 BYTE 2/7
37550 EG_VEL_WARNING M3
% Threshold for "Velocity warning threshold", "Acceleration warning threshold" SW5

el. gear 90.0 0 100 DOUBLE 2/7
37560 EG_ACC_TOL M3
% Threshold for "Axis In Acceleration" SW5

el. gear 25.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 2/7
2.7.9 Axis-specific memory settings
38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS [n]: 0 ... max. No. encoders -1 K3

- Number of intermediate points for interpolatory compensation (SRAM) SW1

always 0, 0 0 5000 DWORD 2/7
38010 MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS [n]: 0 ... 0 K3
- Number of values for quadrant error compensation with neural network (SRAM) SW2

Fct.: QEC 0 0 1040 DWORD 2/7

Lists 08/99

08/99 Lists
2.8 Setting data

2.8.1 General setting data
41010 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE H1
- Size of the variable increment for JOG SW1
Display filters: - IMMEDIATELY

always 0. - - DOUBLE 7/7
41050 JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD H1
- JOG continuous: (1) jog mode/ (0) continuous operation SW1

41100 JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE H1
- JOG mode: (1) revolutional feedrate / (0) feedrate SW1

41110 JOG_SET_VELO H1
mm/min Axis velocity for JOG SW1

41120 JOG_REV_SET_VELO H1
mm/rev Revolutional feedrate of axes for JOG mode SW1

41130 JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO H1
rev/min Axis velocity for rotary axes for JOG mode SW2

41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO H1
rev/min Speed for spindle JOG mode SW1

41300 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE [n]: 0 ... double max. No. axes in sys. - 1 K3
- Preassignment for compensation table SW2

41310 CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT [n]: 0 ... double max. No. axes in sys. - 1 K3
Factor Factor preassignment for compensation tables SW2

Fct.: CEC 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
1.0, 1.0, ...
41500 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 7 N3
mm/inch, Switching points with falling edge of cams 1-8 SW2
degrees
0.0, 0.0, ...
41501 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 7 N3
mm/inch, Switching point with rising edge of cams 1-8 SW2
degrees
0.0, 0.0, ...

Lists 08/99

mm/inch, Switching points with falling edge of cams 9-16 SW2
degrees
0.0, 0.0, ...
mm/inch, Switching points with rising edge of cams 9-16 SW2
degrees
0.0, 0.0, ...
mm/inch, Switching points of falling cams 17-24 SW4.1
degrees
840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
mm/inch, Switching points of rising cams 17-24 SW4.1
degrees
840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...

08/99 Lists

degrees
810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...
degrees
810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
41520 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 7 N3
s Lead times for the "-" switching points of cams 1-8 SW2

0.0, 0.0, ...
41521 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1 [n]: 0 ... 7 N3
s Lead times for the "+" switching points of cams 1-8 SW2

0.0, 0.0, ...
s Lead times for the "-" switching points of cams 9-16 SW2

0.0, 0.0, ...
s Lead times for the "+" switching points of cams 9-16 SW2

0.0, 0.0, ...
s SD lead times for the "minus" switching points of cams 17 - 24 SW4.1

840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...

Lists 08/99


810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...
s SD lead times for the "plus" switching points of cams 17 - 24 SW4.1

840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...

810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...

810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

840D, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

NCU 571, SW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
cams 0.0, 0.0, ...

810D_2, SW cams 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, 0.0, ...

08/99 Lists
41600 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1 [n]: 0 ... 7 A4

mV Threshold value of the 1st comparator SW2

High-speed 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
dig./anal. I/O 0.0, ...
41601 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2 [n]: 0 ... 7 A4
mV Threshold value of the 2nd comparator SW2

High-speed 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 7/7
dig./anal. I/O 0.0, ...
41700 AXCT_SWWIDTH [n]: 0 ... 15 B3
- Default rotation of axis container SW5
Display filters: N11 Attributes: CTDE IMMEDIATELY

Axis container 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, MD_MAXNUM_CONTAI MD_MAXNUM_CON DWORD 7/7
0, ... NER_SLOTS_L_M TAINER_SLOTS
2.8.2 Channel-specific setting data
42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE K1
degrees Starting angle for thread SW1

always 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
0.,0., ...
42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP [n]: 0 ... 1 S1
mm Accel. behavior of axis when thread cutting SW5

always {-1., -1.}, {-1., -1.}, {-1., - -1. 999999. DOUBLE 7/7
1.}, ...
42100 DRY_RUN_FEED V1
mm/min Dryrun feedrate SW1

5000.0, ...
42110 DEFAULT_FEED V1, FBFA
mm/min feed default value SW5.2

always 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
0.,0., ...
42140 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P FBFA
- default Scalingfactor for P SW5.2
Display filters: C01, EXP, C11 IMMEDIATELY

Non-Siemens NC 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, 1, - - DWORD 7/7
progr. lang. 1, ...
42300 COUPLE_RATIO_1 [n]: 0 ... 1 S3
- Speed ratio for synchronous spindle mode, numerator(0), denominator(1) SW2

Fct.: Coupled axes {1.0, 1.0}, {1.0, 1.0}, {1.0, -100000000 100000000 DOUBLE 7/7
1.0}, ...

Lists 08/99
42400 PUNCH_DWELLTIME N4
s Dwell time for punching and nibbling SW3

Fct.: Nibbling 1.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, ...
42402 NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME N4
s Delay time (punch/nibble) with G603 SW4.1

Fct.: Nibbling .02, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
0.0, ...
42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG K2
- Withdrawal from zero offset with incr. programming SW4.3
Display filters: C11 IMMEDIATELY

42442 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG W1
- Withdrawal from zero offset with incr. programming SW4.3
Display filters: -, C11 IMMEDIATELY

42444 TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG BA
- Set down mode after search with calculation SW4.3

42450 CONTPREC B1, K6
mm Contour precision SW3.2

always 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.000001 999999. DOUBLE 7/7
0.1, ...
42460 MINFEED B1, K6
mm/min Minimum path feedrate for CPRECON SW3.2

always 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 0.000001 999999. DOUBLE 7/7
1.,1., ...
42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE W1
degrees Critical angle of spline and polynomial interpolation and compressor SW4.1

Fct.: Polynomial 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, - - DOUBLE 0/0
0.0, ...
42480 STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE W1
- Alarm response with tool radius compensation and prep. stop SW4.1

42490 CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE W1
- Retraction behaviour of TRC with prep. stop SW4.3

42494 CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL W1
- Approach and retract behavior for tool radius offsets SW5.2

always 2222, 2222, 2222, 2222, - - DWORD 7/7
2222, 2222, ...

08/99 Lists
42500 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL B2
mm/s² Max. path acceleration SW3.2

always 10000., 10000., 10000., 1.0e-3 *** DOUBLE 7/7
10000., ...
42502 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL B2
- Evaluate SD SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL SW3.2

42510 SD_MAX_PATH_JERK B2
mm/s³ Max. path-related jerk as SD SW3.2

always 100000., 100000., 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
100000., 100000., ...
42512 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK B2
- Evaluate SD SD_MAX_PATH_JERK SW3.2

42600 JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE V1
- Control revolutional feedrate in JOG SW3.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, -1 31 DWORD 7/7
0, 0, ...
42700 EXT_PROG_PATH A2
- Program path for external subprogram call EXTCALL SW4.2

Fct.: Execute from , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , - - STRING 7/7
HD
42800 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB [n]: 0 ... 5 S1
- Changer for spindle numbers SW4.3

Fct.: Ch.-specific { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 - BYTE 7/7
spindle No. 10, ...
42890 M19_SPOS FBFA
degrees Spindle position in [ DEGREES ] for spindle positioning with M19. SW5.2
Display filters: -, C11 IMMEDIATELY

Non-Siemens NC 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0 359.999 DOUBLE 7/7
progr. lang. 0.0, ...
42900 MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH W1
- Sign change of tool length with mirroring SW5

42910 MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR W1
- Sign change of tool wear with mirroring SW5

42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS W1
- Sign of tool wear depending on cut position SW5


Lists 08/99
42930 WEAR_SIGN W1
- Sign of tool wear SW5

42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST W1
- change of tool length components with change of active plane SW5
Display filters: C08, C11 IMMEDIATELY

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7
0, 0, ...
42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE W1
- Assignment of tool length components independent of tool type SW5.2

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, - - DWORD 7/7
0, 0, ...
2.8.3 Axis-specific setting data
43100 LEAD_TYPE M3
- Defines what is used as master value SW4.1
Display filters: - Attributes: CTEQ IMMEDIATELY

Fct.: Master value 1 0 2 DWORD 7/7
coupling
43102 LEAD_OFFSET_IN_POS M3
- Offset of master value if coupled to this axis SW4.1

Fct.: Master value 0.0 DOUBLE 7/7
coupling
43104 LEAD_SCALE_IN_POS M3
- Scaling of lead value if coupled to this axis SW4.1

coupling
43106 LEAD_OFFSET_OUT_POS M3
mm, Offset of the curve table value SW4.1
degrees
coupling
43108 LEAD_SCALE_OUT_POS M3
- Scaling of curve table value SW4.1

coupling
43120 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS FBFA
- axial default Scalingfactor with activ G51 SW5.2
Display filters: C01, EXP, A12 IMMEDIATELY

Non-Siemens NC 1 - - DWORD 7/7
progr. lang.
43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 S1
rev/min Progr. spindle speed limitation G25 SW1


08/99 Lists
43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 S1
rev/min Progr. spindle speed limitation G26 SW1

43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS S1
rev/min Spindle speed limitation with G96 SW1

43300 ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE V1, P2, S1
- Revolutional feedrate for positioning axes/spindles SW3.2

43350 AA_OFF_LIMIT S5, FBSY
mm, Upper limit of offset value $AA_OFF with clearance control SW4.1
degrees
Fct.: Synchr. 100000000.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
actions
43400 WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE A3
- Working area limitation in positive direction active SW1

43410 WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE A3
- Working area limitation in the negative direction active SW1

43420 WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS A3
mm, Working area limitation plus SW1
degrees
always 100000000 - - DOUBLE 7/7
43430 WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS A3
mm, Working area limitation minus SW1
degrees
always -100000000 - - DOUBLE 7/7
43500 FIXED_STOP_SWITCH F1
- Selection of travel to fixed stop SW2

stop
43510 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE F1
% Fixed stop clamping torque SW2

stop
43520 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW F1
mm, Fixed stop monitoring window SW2
degrees
stop

Lists 08/99
43700 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 P5
mm, Reciprocation reversal point 1 SW2
degrees
axes
43710 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 P5
mm, Reciprocation reversal point 2 SW2
degrees
axes
43720 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 P5
s Hold time at reciprocation reversal point 1 SW2

axes
43730 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 P5
s Hold time at reciprocation reversal point 2 SW2

axes
43740 OSCILL_VELO P5
mm/min, Feedrate of reciprocating axis SW2
rev/min
Fct.: Positioning 0.0 0.0 plus DOUBLE 7/7
axes
43750 OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES P5
- Number of sparking out strokes SW2

Fct.: Positioning 0 0.0 plus DWORD 7/7
axes
43760 OSCILL_END_POS P5
mm, End position of the reciprocating axis SW2
degrees
axes
43770 OSCILL_CTRL_MASK P5
- Reciprocation run control mask SW2

Fct.: Positioning 0 - - DWORD 7/7
axes
43780 OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE P5
- Switch on reciprocation movement SW2

Fct.: Positioning 0 *** *** BOOLEAN 7/7
axes
43900 TEMP_COMP_ABS_VALUE K3
mm, Position-independent temperature compensation value SW1
degrees

08/99 Lists
43910 TEMP_COMP_SLOPE K3
- Lead angle for position-dependent temperature compensation SW1

43920 TEMP_COMP_REF_POSITION K3
mm, Reference position for position-dependent temperature compensation SW1
degrees

Lists 08/99
2.9 Application-specific machine data
2.9.1 Application-specific default values for ManualTurn
NC machines with NCK MDs

exact value
assignment
NC MD Name Value
number
10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0] X1
10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[1] Z1
10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[2] C1
11346 $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE 0
11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK 3
11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE 1
11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK H7
11604 $MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL H64
11610 $MN_ASUP_EDITABLE 2
18242 $MN_MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE 496
Channel MDs
20050 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[0] 1
20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0] 1
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0] X
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1] Z
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2] C
20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF X
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H4065
20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK H400
20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE 0
20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE 1
20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[7] 9
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[7] 1
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[14] 1
20240 $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS 4
20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 1
20624 $MC_HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND HBFF
20750 $MC_ALLOW_GO_IN_G96 0
20800 $MC_SPF_END_TO_VDI 3
22510 $MC_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC[7] 2
22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0

08/99 Lists
Axis MDs
30300 $MA_IS_ROT_AX[AX3] 1
30310 $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO[AX3] 1
30320 $MA_DISPLAY_IS_MODULO[AX3] 1
32084 $MA_HANDWH_STOP_COND[AX1] HFF
32084 $MA_HANDWH_STOP_COND[AX2] HFF
35000 $MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX3] 1
Setting data
42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0
42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0
42480 $SC_STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE 0
NC machine data with NCK MDs

minimum value
assignment NC MD Name Value
number
10350 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS 3
10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS 2
10702 $MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK H1
18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL 100
18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA 100
18118 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES 7
18120 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK 10
18130 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN 40
18150 $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM 25
18160 $MN_MM_NUM_USER_MACROS 10
18170 $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES 120
18180 $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM 700
18230 $MN_MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED 700
18280 $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR 300
18320 $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM 300
1) does not apply to SINUMERIK 840D

Channel MDs
20116 $MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP H70

20117 $MC_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP H70
28000 $MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM 150
28010 $MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES 10
28080 $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES 9

Lists 08/99
NC machine data with NCK MDs

variable value
assignment NC MD Name Value
number
11220 $MN_INI_FILE_MODE 2
12202 $MN_PERMANENT_FEED[0] 2000
12204 $MN_PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED[0] 20
12205 $MN_PERMANENT_SPINDLE_FEED[0...3] 100...400
Channel MD
20700 $MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK 0
Axis MD
35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET[AX3] 1

08/99 Lists
2.9.2 Application-specific default values for ShopMill
ShopMill MD block Machine data block cmm.8x0 is available for ShopMill. This machine data block
is included in the ShopMill tool box and comprises the following:
• NC machine data with exact value assignment

• NC machine data with minimum value assignment
• NC machine data with variable value assignment
• Setting data
NC MDs with exact NC machine data with exact value assignment are machine data which must
value assignment (G) not be changed.
NC MDs with minimum NC machine data with minimum value assignment are machine data the
value assignment (M) default value of which can be set to a higher value.
NC MDs with variable NC machine data with variable value assignment are machine data the default
value assignment (V) of which can be set to a higher or lower value.
Table 2-1
NC MD Name Value Can be
number changed
10350 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS 3 M
10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS 3 M
11220 $MN_INI_FILE_MODE 2 V
11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK H7 G
11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE 1 G
11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK H7 G
11604 $MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL H64 G
18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK HB M
18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL 30 V
18084 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE 4 M
18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION 36 V
18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA 60 V
18118 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES 7 M
18120 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK 20 M
18130 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN 120 M
18150 $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM 35 M

Lists 08/99
NC MD Name Value Can be

number changed
18160 $MN_MM_NUM_USER_MACROS 30 M
18170 $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES 140 M
18180 $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM 1000 M
18230 $MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED 750 M
18242 $MN_MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE 496 G
18280 $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR 400 M
18320 $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM 400 M
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H4041 G
20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK H400 G
20116 $MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP H10 M
20117 $MC_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP H10 M
20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE 0 G
20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE 0 G
20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE 1 G
20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 3 G
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5] 1 G
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[7] 1 G
20202 $MC_WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS 10 M
20240 $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS 4 G
20250 $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS 5 G
20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK H400B M
20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK 1 G
20700 $MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK 0 V
20800 $MC_SPF_END_TO_VDI 3 G
22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 G
22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 206 V
28000 $MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM 75 M
28010 $MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES 10 M
28020 $MC_MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL 300 M
35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET 1 G
Note:
This MD is not included in machine data block
cmm.8x0 since it depends on an axis.
Table 2-2
Setting Name Value Can be
data changed
number
42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0 G
42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0 G
42480 $SC_STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE 0 G

08/99 Lists
2.9.3 Settings for ShopMill tool management
Memory settings
18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK FBW

HEX Step-by-step memory reservation for tool management (SRAM) SW2
Bit 0 = 1: Tool management data are provided
Bit 1 = 1: Monitoring data are provided
Bit 2 = 1: OEM and CC data are provided
Bit 3 = 1: Memory for adjacent location consideration
Display filters: N01, N09 POWER ON

18082 MM_NUM_TOOL FBW, S7
- Number of tools which can be managed by the NCK (SRAM) SW2

18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW
- Number of magazines which can be managed by the NCK (SRAM) SW2

management
18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION FBW
- Number of magazine locations which can be managed by the NCK (SRAM) SW2

management
18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA S7
- Tool offsets per TOA module (SRAM) SW1

Channel data settings
20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK FBW

HEX Activate different tool management versions SW2
Display filters: C09 POWER ON

always 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0 0xFFFFF DWORD 2/7
0x0, 0x0, ...
20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK FBW
HEX Activate tool time monitoring for the tool in spindle 1...5 SW2
Display filters: C06, C09 POWER ON

Fct.: Tool 1/2 1 4 DWORD 2/7
management

Lists 08/99
22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE W1
- New tool offset for M function SW1
Display filters: C01, C04, C09 POWER ON

always 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,0, 0, 0 1 BYTE 2/7
0, 0, ...
22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1
- M function for tool change SW1
Display filters: C01, C04, C09 POWER ON

always 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6,6, 6, 0 99999999 DWORD 2/7
6, 6, ...
2.9.4 MDs for the sequence of measuring cycles with ShopMill
Machine data for

the adaptation of the
probe
13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [0]

MD number Switching behavior of the probe at measuring input 1
Default setting: 0 Minimum input limit: 0 Maximum input limit: 1
Change effective after POWER ON Protection level: Unit: -

Data type: BOOLEAN Valid as from software version: SW2
Meaning: Value 0: (default setting)
Non-deflected state 0V
Deflected state 24 V
Value 1: Non-deflected state 24 V
Deflected state 0V
13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [1]

MD number Switching behavior of the probe at measuring input 2
Default setting: 0 Minimum input limit: 0 Maximum input limit: 1
Change effective after POWER ON Protection level: Unit: -

Data type: BOOLEAN Valid as from software version: SW2
Meaning: Value 0: (default setting)
Non-deflected state 0V
Deflected state 24 V
Value 1: Non-deflected state 24 V
Deflected state 0V

Variables 3
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................3-260
3.1.2 Module types............................................................................................................3-262
3.1.3 Variable types ..........................................................................................................3-264
3.1.4 Data types ................................................................................................................3-266
3.2 System data ................................................................................................................3-268

3.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data ........................................................................3-268
3.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data ........................................................3-276
3.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones ..............................................................3-281
3.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones ..............................................3-288
3.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups ........................................................3-295
3.3 State data of system ...................................................................................................3-296

3.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data ...........................................................................3-296
oldest alarm appears first ...............................................................................3-305
3.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority .........................3-307
most recent alarm appears first ......................................................................3-309
3.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .........................................................3-311
3.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) .......................3-313
3.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ...................................................................3-329
3.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle .................................................................3-332
3.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Global NCU active frames ...........................................................3-333
3.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: Global NCU base frames ..........................................................3-334
3.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: Global NCU settable frames .....................................................3-335
3.3.12 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data ...................................................3-337
3.4 State data of channel ..................................................................................................3-338

3.4.1 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data .........................................................3-338
3.4.2 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data ............................................3-353
3.4.3 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information .....................................................3-356
3.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation ............................3-359
3.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption ..........................................3-361
3.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointer for block search ......................................3-363
3.4.7 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions .........................................................3-365
3.4.8 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions ..............................3-368
3.4.9 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions ..................................................................3-369
3.4.10 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling..................................................................3-371
3.4.11 Area C, Mod. FB: Base frame ................................................................................3-373
3.5 Axis status data...........................................................................................................3-374

3.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .........................................................3-374
3.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) .......................3-376
3.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory ....................3-393

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory
(extension of SGA)..........................................................................................3-396
3.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ...................................................................3-400
3.5.6 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle .................................................................3-403
3.5.7 Area C, Mod. FU: User frames.................................................................................3-404
3.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active user frames.......................................................................3-406
3.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: External frames ...........................................................................3-408
3.6 Drive status data .........................................................................................................3-409

3.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) .....................................................3-409
3.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ....................................................3-412
3.7 Tool and magazine data .............................................................................................3-414

3.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data .........................................................3-414
3.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data ...............................................................3-417
3.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data ..................................................3-420
3.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data .......................................................3-421
3.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data ............................................3-422
3.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data .................................................3-423
3.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data ...........................................3-425
3.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory ..........................................................3-427
3.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data ......................................................3-428
3.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data ....................................................3-430
3.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment of location data .............3-432
3.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types ..................................................3-433
3.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory ...................................................................3-434
3.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of _N_TMGETT,
_N_TSEARC...................................................................................................3-436
3.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data ...............................................3-440
3.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data .......................................3-441
3.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data ..............................................3-442
3.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data ..............................................................................3-443
3.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory .......................................................3-444
3.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters ..............................................................3-447
3.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets ......................3-450
transformed setup offsets ...............................................................................3-451
3.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets ..................3-452
3.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets,
transformed.....................................................................................................3-455
3.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data ........................................3-456
3.8 Machine and setting data ............................................................................................3-458

3.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data .....................................................................3-458
3.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data ............................................................3-460
3.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data ......................................................................3-461
3.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data ......................................................3-462
3.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data .............................................................3-463

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.9 Parameters .................................................................................................................3-464

3.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters .................................................................3-464
3.9.2 Area N, Mod. VSYN: NCK-specific user variables for synchronous actions ............3-465
3.9.3 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions ......3-466
3.10 Diagnostic data .........................................................................................................3-467

3.10.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data ........................................................3-467
3.10.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data .........................................3-470
3.10.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling ......................................................3-472
3.10.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events.......................................................................3-473
3.11 MMC-state.................................................................................................................3-476
3.11.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC ............................................................3-476

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.1 Introduction
This section describes the NCK variables that an MMC or the PLC can access
via the operator panel interface. (Access is read and for some variables write
also). The access methods of the various components are described in the
following user documentation:
References: /FBO/, Configuring the OP030 Operator Interface
/PK/, Configuring kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel
Description of PLC access method in:
References: /FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program"
Description of the OEM-MMC access method in "OEM-MMC Description of
Functions".
OEM-MMC
OPI
MPI
NCK
OP 030 NCU 57x
NC data
module
PLC
The components shown on the left-hand side of the diagram each have their
own development environment which defines the syntax to be used. A variable
is always addressed according to a defined pattern. All the information required
for addressing the variables irrespective of the programming language chosen
is summed up in the following lists.

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.1.1 General information

The NCK variables are stored in data modules that are assigned to the
individual areas of the NCK as the figure below shows:
Mode group 1
Channel n
Channel 2
Channel 1
Axis n
Axis 2
Axis 1
Variable areas of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
A distinction is made between the following areas:

• NCK (N)
• Mode group (B)
• Channel (C)
• Tool (T)
• Axis (A)
• Feed/main drive (V/H)
NCK Contains all the variables such as system data (Y), protection zones (PA), G
groups (YNCFL) etc. that apply to the entire NCK.

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
Mode group Contains variables such as the status data (S) that apply to the mode group.
Channel Contains variables such as the system data (Y), protection zones (PA), global
status data (S) etc. that apply to each channel.
Tool Contains variables such as the tool offset data (TO), general tool data (TD),
tool monitoring data (TS) etc. that apply to the tools on the machine. Each tool
area T is assigned to a channel.
Axis Contains the setting data and machine data that apply to each axis or spindle.
For a description see Section "Axis-specific machine data".
Feed / main drive Contains machine data and machine data as the service values that apply to
each drive. For a description see Section "Drive machine data".
3.1.2 Module types

The following table provides an overview of the modules for the variables of the
NCK and how they are assigned to the individual areas.
Only the data modules whose variables can be read or written with direct
access are contained in the list. Data modules whose variables can be defined
by the programmer (e.g. global user data) are read by the MMC or PLC using
other mechanisms. The documentation listed below describes the modules to
which these mechanisms are applied:
References: /FBO/, Configuring the OP030 Operator Interface,

/FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program" and
"OEM-MMC Description of Functions"
Module Area
A B C H N T V
ETP 1
ETPD 1
DIAGN 1
FA 1 1
FB 1 1
FE 1
FU 1 1
M 1 1
NIB 1
PA 1 1
RP 1
S 1 1 1 1 1
SALA 1
SALAL 1
SALAP 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
Module Area
Continued A B C H N T V
SE 1 1 1
SEGA 1
SEMA 1 1
SGA 1
SINF 1
SMA 1 1
SNCF 1
SPARP 1
SPARPF 1
SPARPI 1
SPARPP 1
SSP 1 1
SSP2 1 1
SSYNAC 1
SYNACT 1
TD 1
TF 1
TG 1
TM 1
TMC 1
TMV 1
TO 1
TP 1
TPM 1
TS 1
TT 1
TU 1
TUE 1
TUM 1
TUP 1
TUS 1
TV 1
AD 1
AEV 1
TC 1
TOE 1
TOET 1
TOS 1
TOST 1
TOT 1
VSYN 1 1
Y 1 1
YNCFL 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.1.3 Variable types

Within each area the variables are generally stored in the form of structures or
in arrays of structures (tables). The following information must therefore be
contained in an address when accessing a variable:
• Area + area number
• Module
• Variable name (or column number)
• Line number
It is generally possible to distinguish between three different variable types:

1. Variables that consist of 1 line
2. Variables that consist of several lines
3. Variables that consist of several columns and lines
Single-line variables Each of these variables consists of a single value. The following information is
required when accessing a variable of this type:
1. Area (and possibly area number)
2. Module
3. Variable name
numMachAxes
Number of existing machine axes
- Word r
Multiple-line: no
Example for reading the number of machine axes in channel 1:
MMC102:
/Channel/Configuration/numMachAxes[u1]
MMC100/OP030:
P_C_Y_numMachAxes
PLC with NC-Var-Selector:

Area: C[.]
Module: Y
Variable: numMachAxes
Area No. = 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
Multi-line variables These variables are defined as a one-dimensional field. When accessing a
variable of this type the following information must be specified:
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Line number
actFeedRate $AA_VACTB[x] S5
Axial feedrate actual value (only if axis is a positioning axis "spec" = 1)
% Double r
Multiple-line:yes Axis index numMachAxes
Example for reading the current velocity of axis 3 in channel 1:
MMC102:
/Channel/MachineAxis/actFeedRate[u1, 3]
MMC100/OP030:
P_C_SEMA_actFeedRate

Area: C[.]
Module: SEMA
Variable: actFeedRate[.]
Area No. = 1
Line = 3
Multi-line and multi- These variables are defined as a two-dimensional field. In order to access a
column variables variable of this type, the following information must be specified:
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Column number
5. Line number
In this case the entire data module only consists of this two-dimensional
variable.
cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPx[y,z]
Offset value parameters for a cutting edge
mm, inch or userdef 0 Double wr
Multiple-line:yes (CuttEdgeNo 1) * numCuttEdgeParams * numCuttEdges
numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
Example for reading the current cutting edge data of cutting edge 3/parameter
1 of tool 3 in T area 1: (in this example it is assumed that each tool cutting
edge has been defined with (numCuttEdgeParams =) 25 parameters).
MMC102:
/Tool/Compensation/cuttEdgeParam[u1,c3, 51]
MMC100/OP030:
P_T_TO_cuttEdgeParam

Area: T[.]
Module: TO
Variable: cuttEdgeParam[.]
Area No. = 1
Column = 3
Line = 51
3.1.4 Data types

The following data types are used in this description:
Data type Description

Bool 1 bit
Character 8 bits without sign
Byte 8 bits with sign
Word 16 bits without sign
Short Integer 16 bits with sign
Doubleword 32 bits without sign
Long Integer 32 bits with sign
Float 32 bits floating point
Double 64 bits floating point
String String ending in zero
In the tables below the individual fields have the following meaning:
Variable name Reference to assigned MD Ref.

Variable brief description/
variable description
« Description of value range »
Physical unit Default value Lower limit Upper limit Format / w/r
field length
Multiple-line:yes / no Description of line index Maximum line index
Ref. Cross-reference to references

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
w/r w Variable can be overwritten

r Variable can be read

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.2 System data
3.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Configuration/...
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the
machine data. Configuration can only be performed with certain access rights.
The configuration of the NC can be read in the system data regardless of
current access rights.
accessLevel
Level of the access rights currently set.
Can be changed by entering the password or turning the keyswitch.
0 = access level SIEMENS
1 = access level machine tool builder
2 = access level system start-up engineer (machine tool builder)
3 = access level end user with password
4 = access level key switch 3
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
axisType
Axis types for all machine axes (necessary
for start-up): If a machine axis is addressed via the M module, the units and values are returned with reference to the
axis type accessible via this variable. (The absolute machine axis index 1-N_Y_maxnumGlobMachAxes is specified
via the line index)
0 = Linear axis
1 = Rotary axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Absolute machine axis number maxnumGlobMachAxes
basicLengthUnit
Global basic unit
0 = mm
1 = inch
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
chanAssignment MD 10010: ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[x] x=ChannelNo K1

Assignment of each channel to mode group
0 = channel does not exist
n = channel assigned to mode group n (n is maximum numBAGs (BAG = mode group))
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Channel number maxnumChannels

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
externCncSystem $MN_EXTERN_LANGUAGE und $MN_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM

CNC system whose part programs must be processed on the
SINUMERIK control.
0: No external language defined
1: System ISO Dialect0 Milling
2: System ISO Dialect0 Turning
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
extraCuttEdgeParams
Bit string that specifies which TO edge parameters are available
in addition to the 25 standard parameters.
Bit 0: Edge parameter no. 26 valid (ISO Dialect Milling H No.)
Bit 1: Edge parameter no. 27 valid
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
kindOfSumcorr $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
Characteristics of total offsets in NCK:
Bit No. Value Meaning
0 0 Total offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Total offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 0 Setup offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Setup offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
2 0 If the "Tool management" function is in use: The existing total/setup offsets are not affected when
tool status "active" is set.
1 When tool status "active" is set, the existing total offsets are set to zero. The setup offsets are
not affected.
3 0 If the "Tool management" function plus "Adapter" is in use: Transformation of total offsets
1 No transformation of total offsets
4 0 No setup offset data sets
1 Setup offset data sets are created additionally, in which case the total offset equals the product
of total offset + "fine total offset".
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
maskToolManagement $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of tool management memory with "0" means: The set tool management data do not occupy any memory
space.
Bit 0=1: Memory for TM-specific data is made available
Bit 1=1: Memory for monitoring data is made available
Bit 2=1: Memory for user data (CC data) is made available
Bit 3=1: Memory for "Consider adjacent location" is made available
SW 5.1 and later:
Bit 5=0: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are not available.
Bit 5=1: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are available and, if bit 1 = 1, the wear monitoring
function is also available.
Bit 6=0: The wear group function is not available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 cannot be
programmed, $TC_MPP5 is not defined for magazine locations of type 1.
Bit 6=1: The wear group function is available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 can be programmed and
wear groups defined. $TC_MPP5 contains the wear group number for location type 1.
Wear group number:
Bit 7=1: Tool adapter data sets are available.
Bit 8=1: Total offsets are available.
Bit 9=1: Tools in a turret are handled in OPI variable modules such that they are not "displayed" in tool half-
locations, but always displayed in a turret location. Please note, therefore, that tools in a turret remain (in display
terms) in their turret location in the event of a tool change.
Bit 9=0: Default response; Tools in a turret are "displayed" in the OPI in their actual (according to data) location.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxCuttingEdgeNo $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Maximum value of D number
1 to 32000
- 9 1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxNumAdapter $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Maximum number of tool adapter data sets available in NCK
>0: Maximum number of adapter data sets.
0: Adapter data cannot be defined. Edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22, $TC_DP23 are available,
i.e. active tool management function with adapters is not in use.
-1: An adapter is automatically assigned to each magazine location, i.e. the number of adapters provided
internally corresponds to the number of magazine locations set in machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.
- 0 -1 600 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumAlarms
Size of NCK alarm buffer (maximum number of pending alarms)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumChannels
Maximum number of available channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumContainer
Maximum number of available axis containers
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
maxnumContainerSlots
Maximum number of available slots per axis container
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Max. number of edges per tool
1 to 12
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumDrives
Maximum number of available drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumEdgeSC $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE
Max. number of total offsets per edge
0 to 6
- 0 ??? NCK UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumEventTypes
Maximum number of event types for the trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumGlobMachAxes
Maximum number of available machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxNumSumcorr $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Total number of total offsets in NCK
A setting of -1 means that the number of total offsets equals the
number of edges * number of total offsets per edge.
A setting of > 0 and < number of edges * number of total offsets per edge
means that a maximum number of total offsets equalling "number of total
offsets per edge" can be defined per edge, but need not be, i.e. it is thus
possible to use the buffer memory more economically.
In other words, only the edges have a total offset data set for which
data can be defined explicitly.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumTraceProtData
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumTraceProtDataList
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
modeSpindleToolRevolver MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 9

Representation of tool currently in use in modules
magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data, location data) and
tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data and T / TV, tool data, directory)
0: Previous method: During operation, the tool is removed (in data terms) from its circular magazine location and
loaded to the spindle location in the buffer magazine.
1: During operation, the tool remains in its circular magazine locations in the OPI modules. This applies to OPI
modules magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data and location data) and tool data (T / TD, tool data, general
data and T / TV, tool data, directory and T / AEV, working offsets, directory).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
nckLogbookSeekPos
NCK logbook
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1
nckType
NCK type
0 = 840D
1000 = FM-NC
2000 for 810D
3000 for 802S (from SW 4.1)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
nckVersion
NCK version
Only the digits before the comma of the floating point number are evaluated, the digits after the comma may contain
identifiers for development-internal intermediate releases.
The digits before the comma includes the official NCK identifier for the software release: For software release 3.4 the
value of the variable is 34,....
- Double r
Multi-line: no
numAnalogInp MD 10300: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW analog inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numAnalogOutp MD 10310: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW analog outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBAGs
Number of available mode groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBasisFrames $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent basic frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numChannels
Number of active channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
numContainer
Number of currently available axis containers
- 0 maxnumContain UWord r
er
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numContainerSlots
Number of currently available slots per axis container
- maxnumContain UWord r
erSlots
Multi-line: yes Index of axis container numContainer
numCuttEdgeParams
Number of P elements of a cutting edge
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_ts
Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TS (tool monitoring data)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tu MD 18096: MM_CC_TOA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TUE (cutting edge data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tus $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Number of parameters in the user monitoring data of a cutting edge in the module TUS
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numDigitInp MD 10350: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW digital inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numDigitOutp MD 10360: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW digital outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numDrives
Number of active drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numGCodeGroups
Number of NC instruction groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numGCodeGroupsFanuc
Number of NC instruction groups in ISO Dialect mode
(the number for the turning and milling versions is not the same)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
numGlobMachAxes
Number of active machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numHandWheels
Maximum number of handwheels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMagLocParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine place in the module TUP
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine in the module TUM
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagPlaceParams $TC_MPPx; x=1,...7

Number of parameters of a magazine location
8 in SW 5.1 and later
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numMagPlacesMax MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION FBW

Maximum number of magazine locations
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMagsMax MD 18084: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW

Maximum number of magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numParams_Adapt
Number of parameters per adapter
- 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numParams_SC $TC_SCPx; x=13,...21,....71

Number of total offset parameters per total offset set
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numPlaceMulti FBW
Number of possible multiple assignments of a location to magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numPlaceMultiParams FBW
Number of parameters of a multiple assignment
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
numToBaust MD 18110: MM_NUM_TOA_MODULES

Number of T areas
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numToolParams_tu MD 18094: MM_CC_TDA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a tool in module
TU (tool data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numUserFrames MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent user frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolChangeMfunc MD 22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1

Number of M function for tool change
0 = change on T selection (standard for turning)
1 = change on selection M1..
99999 = change on selection M99999
(standard for milling M06)
- Double r
Multi-line: no
typeOfCuttingEdge
Type of D-number programming see MD: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
0 no 'flat D-number management' active
1 D-numbers are programmed directly and absolutely
2 D-numbers are programmed indirectly and relatively
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
userScale
User unit table with 13 elements
(see Start-up Guide 2.4 and machine data)
0 = table not active
1 = table active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Configuration/...
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the
machine data. Configuration can only be performed with certain access rights.
The configuration of the NC can be read in the system data regardless of
current access rights.
channelName MD 20000: CHAN_NAME K1

Channel name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
maskToolManagement MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of TM memory by "0" means: The set tool management data do not use any memory space.
Value=0: TM deactivated
Bit 0=1: TM active: The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active: Functions required to monitor tools (tool life and number of workpieces) are
enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active: The memory for user data can be utilized.
Bit 3=1: Consideration of adjacent location active
Bits 0 to 3 must be set identically to machine data MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (18080).
Bit 4=1: The PLC has the possibility of issuing another request for tool change preparation with modified
parameters.
-------------------------For test purposes only :------------------------------------------------
Part program is halted in response to T selection or M06 until it has been
acknowledged by the PLC program.
Bit 5=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 6=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 7=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is not executed until
the PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete.
Bit 8=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is not executed
until the PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete..
-------------------------End For test purposes only :-------------------------------------------
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation acknowledgement has been output by the PLC. The change signal
(e.g. M06 ) is not output until the tool selection ( DBX [ n+0 ].2 ) has been acknowledged. The part program is halted
in response to M06 until the T selection has been acknowledged.
Bit 11=1: The preparation command is output even if a preparation command has already been output for the same
tool. This setting is useful, for example, if the chain is to be positioned when "Tx" is first called and if the second call
is to initiate a check as to whether the tool is in the correct location for a tool change (e.g. in front of tool-change
station).
Bit 12=1: The preparation command is executed even if the tool is already loaded in the spindle, i.e. the T selection
signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has already been set for the same tool. (Tx...Tx)
Bit 13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory space (NCU572, NCU573): Recording of tool sequences in a
diagnostics buffer. The commands are fetched from the diagnostics buffer in response to Reset and stored in a file in
the passive file system, NCATR xx.MPF under part program. The trace file is useful for the Hotline in the event of
errors and is not described in detail here.
Bit 14=1: Automatic tool change in response to Reset and Start according to machine data MD20120
TOOL_RESET_NAME MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If
machine data RESET_MODE_MASK is in use, then this bit must be set as well. If RESET_MODE_MASK is set such
that the tool stored in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded in response to RESET, then the select and change
command is output to the user interface (DB 72) in response to RESET or Start. If machine data
RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the active tool must remain active after M30 or RESET and if the active tool is
disabled in the spindle (by user), then a change command for a replacement tool is output to the user interface in
response to RESET. If no replacement tool is available, then an error message is output.
Bit 15=1: No return transport of tool when several preparation commands are output. (Tx->Tx)
Bit 16=1: T location number is active
Bit 17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
mmcCmd
Command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement mode:
"N" no acknowledgement
"S" synchronous acknowledgement
"A" asynchronous acknowledgement
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII that is generated by the NCK
7. - 207th character: Command string which ends with "\0"
- String[206] r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
mmcCmdPrep
Command from the NCK-preparation task to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[206] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
mmcCmdQuit
Acknowledgement from MMC for command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement code:
"P" programmed
"B" busy
"F" failed
"E" executed
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", generated by NCK
7. - 201th character: additional communication-specific information for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", ends
with "\0"
- String[200] w
Multi-line: no
mmcCmdQuitPrep
Acknowledgemnt by MMC for an NCK-preparation command to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[200] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numActAxes
Number of active tools in channel.
Channel axis gaps are not included in count
which means that value might be lower than numMachAxes.
The following applies:
numMachAxes >= numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
numActAxes = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
- 0 0 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAuxAxes
Number of auxiliary axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBasisFrames $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES
Number of basic frames in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numContourInProtArea
Maximum number of polygon elements per protection zone
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numGeoAxes
Number of geometry axes and orientation axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
numMachAxes
No. of highest channel axis.
This also corresponds to the number of axes in the
channel provided there are no gaps in the axis sequence.
- 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numOriAxes
Number of orientation axes in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numProtArea MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN S7

Maximum number of protection zones
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numRParams MD 28050: MM_NUM_R_PARAM S7

Number of channel-specific R parameters
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numSpindles
Number of spindles
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numSpindlesLog
Number of logical spindles.
Specifies the number of lines in module SSP2.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numToolEdges MD 18100: MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA S7

Number of tool edges in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numUserFrames MD 28080: MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES S7

Number of user frames in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progProtText
Programmable text to be entered next in the logging buffer
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
punchNibActivation MD 26012: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION N4

Activation of punching and nibbling functions
0 = option not available
1 = option available
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
toNo MD 28085: MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT W1

Number of T area that is assigned to the channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ProtectedArea/...
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described

by a polygon function consisting of up to 10 elements. The module PA contains
the individual coordinates of the polygon elements. The protection zones are
addressed via the variable indices. The physical unit of the parameters can be
read from the variable "basicLengthUnit" in the module Y in area N.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zones does not affect

the protection zone monitoring function, but indicates the area in which the
protection zone is registered.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, userdef Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 4th contour element





Lists 12/98
3 Variables


MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 4th contour element






12/98 Lists
3 Variables

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 4th contour element







Lists 12/98
3 Variables
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 4th contour element






MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SN_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SN_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the plus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been
started up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SN_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInPr UWord r
otArea
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 4th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SN_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r
MDU_PA_ORI $SN_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
MDU_PA_TW $SN_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProtectedArea/...
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described

by a polygon function consisting of up to 10 elements. The maximum
permissible number of protection zones is specified in "numProtArea" in the
module Y in area C. The maximum permissible number of polygon definition
elements is specified in "numContourInProtArea" in module Y in area C.
Module PA contains the individual coordinates of the polygon elements. The
protection zones are addressed via the variable indices.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zone does not affect

the protection zone monitoring function but simply indicates the area in which
the protection zone is registered.
The physical unit actually used for length quantities is defined in "extUnit" in
module SGA in area C.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element





12/98 Lists
3 Variables



MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element






Lists 12/98
3 Variables


MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element







12/98 Lists
3 Variables

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element








Lists 12/98
3 Variables
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SC_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SC_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation of the protection zone in the plus direction of the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SC_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been
started up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SC_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInPr UWord r
otArea
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SC_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
MDU_PA_ORI $SC_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r
MDU_PA_TW $SC_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/FunctionGrouping/...
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for
reading by the NCK. They are configured via machine data. Since the G
functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a time,
this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G
functions in a group (Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of rows in
each subsequent column. This second column contains all the G functions
belonging to a group (Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroups" in area N

/ module Y. The resultant the maximum column offset of the variables is thus
2 * numGCodeGroups.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.
Function
Instruction group
Attention: This variable is called "Gruppe" in the non-Windows-MMC und the PLC !
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number GroupID
GroupID
Number of G-functions in each G-group
Attention: This variable is called "Gruppe_NUM" in the non-Windows-MMC und the PLC !
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
Gruppe
Instruction group
Attention: This variable is called "Function" in the MMC102 !

- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number Gruppe_NUM
Gruppe_NUM
Number of G-functions in each G-group
Attention: This variable is called "GroupID" in the non-Windows-MMC und the PLC !
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.3 State data of system
3.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/State/...
During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data

may change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they
are classified as state data.
A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)
accIndex
Global upload starting point for ACC entries. If a value is set here, upload access to _N_xx_yyy_ACC modules starts
from this entry.
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
aDbb $A_DBB[x] x = ByteNo

Byte data from/to the PLC
- Character r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area
aDbd $A_DBD[x] x = Offset

Double word data (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- Long Integer r
aDbr $A_DBR[x] x = Offset

Real data (32 bits IEEE) from/to the PLC
- Float r
aDbw $A_DBW[x] x = Offset

Word data (16 bits) from/to the PLC
- UWord r
aDlb $A_DLB[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in link area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link data area
aDld $A_DLD[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in link data area
- UDoubleword wr

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
aDlr $A_DLR[index]
Read data (32 bits) in link data area
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link area
aDlw $A_DLW[index]
Data word (16 bits) in link data area
- UWord wr
aInco $A_INCO[x] x = InputNo

Comperator input NC
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 2
analogInpVal $A_INA[x] x = AnaloginputNo

Value of HW analog input
A oder V Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of analog input numAnalogInp
analogOutpVal $A_OUTA[x] x = AnalogoutputNo

Number of HW analog output
A oder V Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of analog output numAnalogOutp
anAxCtAS $AN_AXCTAS[n]
Current container rotation, i.e. by how many slots the axis
container has been currently advanced. The original container
assignment is valid after Power On and outputs value 0.
maxCount = max. number of occupied slots in axis container - 1
- 0 0 maxnumContain UWord r
erSlots - 1
Multi-line: yes Container no. numContainer
anAxCtSwA $AN_AXCTSWA[CTn]
A rotation is currently being executed on the
axis container.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
anAxEsrTrigger $AN_ESR_TRIGGER
(Global) control signal "Start Stop/Retract". With a signal edge change
from 0 to 1, the reactions parameterized beforehand in axial MD $MA_ESR_REACTION
and enabled via system variable $AA_ESR_ENABLE are started.
Independent drive reactions subsequently require a Power-Off / Power-On,
independent NC reactions require at least an opposite edge change in the
relevant system variable as well as a Reset.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aPbbIn $A_PBB_IN[index]
Data byte (8bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within PLC
input/output area

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
aPbbOut $A_PBB_OUT[index]
Data byte (8bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- UWord r
input/output area
aPbdIn $A_PBD_IN[index]
Data double word (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- UDoubleword r
input/output area
aPbdOut $A_PBD_OUT[index]
Data double word (32bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- UDoubleword r
input/output area
aPbrIn $A_PBR_IN[index]
Real data (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- Double r
input/output area
aPbrOut $A_PBR_OUT[index]
Real data (32bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- Double r
input/output area
aPbwIn $A_PBW_IN[index]
Data word (16bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- UWord r
input/output area
aPbwOut $A_PBW_OUT[index]
Data word (16bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- UWord r
input/output area
axisActivInNcu
Display indicating whether the axis is active, i.e. whether it can be traversed via a channel
of its own NCU or via another NCU (link axis).
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to suppress the display of any non-active axes.
Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.
Bit n = 1: Axis can be traversed.
Bit n = 0: Axis cannot be traversed.
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
badMemFfs
Number of bytes which are defective in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
basisFrameMask $P_NCBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-independent basic frames are active.
Each bit in the mask specifies whether the relevant basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
diagnoseDataFfs
Diagnostic data for Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: realspace (bytes) 8
2: formspace (bytes)
3: freespace (%)
4: delspace (%)
5: badspace (%)
6: actlowwater (%)
7: lowwater (%)
8: reorgmode (%)
digitInpVal $A_IN[x] x = DigitalinputNo

Value of HW digital input
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of digital input numDigitInp
digitOutpVal $A_OUT[x] x = DigitaloutputNo

Value of HW digital output
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Number of digital output numDigitOutp
freeDirectorys
Number of directories that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeFiles
Number of files that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMem
Free SRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDram
Free memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
freeMemFfs
Number of bytes that are still available in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeProtokolFiles
Number of protocol files that can still be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
mmcCmdPrepCounter
Counter that is incremented with each call of EXTCALL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nckAliveAndWell DB10, DBX104.7 A4

NCK sign-of-life
This value is incremented every time the variable is read which means that an
MMC can determine whether the NCK is still operating correctly by reading the variable
cyclically.
The value itself has no meaning.
Cyclic result acknowledgements in relation to this variable are generated even if the NCK
is otherwise no longer operating cyclic services owing to problems with block cycle times.
However, this response can be guaranteed only if the variable is not mixed with others in
one request, i.e. nckAliveAndWell must be the only variable linked to the cluster.
As long as a cyclic read service is set for this variable, one of the MMC-CPU-Ready signals
is set in the PLC interface.
Which of the signals is set is determined on the one hand by the line number and, on the other,
by the client's "gloports":
line index = 1 and gloports 0x20-0x2f --> DB10.DBX108 bit2 MMC1-CPU-Ready to MPI
line index = 1 and gloports 0x10-0x1f --> DB10.DBX108 bit3 MMC1-CPU-Ready to OPI
line index = 2 --> DB10.DBX108 bit1 MMC2-CPU-Ready
Note: The related NCK-CPU-Ready signal is stored in DB10,DBX104.7.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes MMC No. 2 (ab SW 5.2)
ncuLinkActive
Display indicating whether NCU link is activated (via machine data setting)
Based on display, MMC decides whether link-specific calculations and
displays are required.
0: NCU link not activated
1: NCU link activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nettoMemFfs
Net number of bytes which are available for the
Flash File System (FFS).
This memory stores the files contents and
management data (e.g. file names).
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAlarms
Number of pending general alarms
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
numFilesPerDir
Maximum number of files per directory
(see: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numSubDirsPerDir
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory see: $MN_MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
safeExtInpValNckBit $A_INSE
External NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeExtInpValNckWord $A_INSED
Image of the external NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_INSE[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_INSE[33]...[64]
safeExtInpValPlcBit $A_INSEP
External PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeExtInpValPlcWord $A_INSEPD
Image of the external PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_INSEP[1]...[32]
$A_INSEP[33]...[64]
safeExtOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSE
External NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeExtOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSED
Image of the external NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_OUTSE[1]...[32]
$A_OUTSE[33]...[64]
safeExtOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSEP
External PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
safeExtOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSEPD
Image of the external PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variable 2
$A_OUTSEP[1]...[32]
2. mage of the system variable
$A_OUTSEP[33]...[64]
safeIntInpValNckBit $A_INSI
Internal NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeIntInpValNckWord $A_INSID
Image of the internal NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_INSI[1]...[32]
$A_INSI[33]...[64]
safeIntInpValPlcBit $A_INSIP
Internal PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeIntInpValPlcWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_INSIP[1]...[32]
$A_INSIP[33]...[64]
safeIntOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSI
Internal NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeIntOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_OUTSI[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variable
$A_OUTSI[33]...[64]
safeIntOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSIP
Internal PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeIntOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSIPD
Image of the internal PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_OUTSIP[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variable
$A_OUTSIP[33]...[64]

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
safeMarkerNck $A_MARKERSI
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeMarkerPlc $A_MARKERSIP
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeTimerNck $A_TIMERSI
NCK timer-variable for the SI programmable logic
s, userdef 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: no 8
scalingSystemCounter
Modification counter for dimension system
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
semaDataAvailable
Display indicating whether complete SEMA data are available for individual axes.
This is the case if a channel can be assigned to the relevant NCU axis, thus allowing
the data in the channel context to be accessed. This does not apply to link axes as these
are traversed by a channel of another NCU.
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to conceal specific, inaccessible data
in link axis data displays.
Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Data can be accessed easily
Bit n = 0: Not all SEMA data are accessible
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
sysTimeBCD
Time represented in PLC format:
<month>.<day>.<year> <hours>:<minutes>:<seconds>.<milliseconds> <weekday> <status>
<weekday> can take following values: "SUN", "MON", "TUE", "WED", "THU", "FRI", "SAT"
- String[8] r
Multi-line: no
totalDirectorys
Maximum number of directories which may be created
see: $MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalFiles
Maximum number of files which may be created
(see: $MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMem S7
Total SRAM in bytes (user memory)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
totalMemDram
total DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemFfs
Number of bytes reserved on the PCMCIA card for the
Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalProtokolFiles
Maximum number of protocol files which may be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
traceProtocolActive
State of trace protocolling
1 = active
2 = not active
- UWord wr
Multi-line: no
usedDirectorys
Number of directories that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedFiles
Number of files that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMem S7
Used memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
usedMemDram
Used DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemFfs
Number of used bytes in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedProtokolFiles
Number of protocol files that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables

oldest alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/SequencedAlarms/...
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the oldest alarm
appears at the top of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII
strings, the first character contains the type information for that parameter. The
following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic
acknowledgements are sent for these variables even if the cyclic services are
no longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with
non-privileged variables in a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with
other variables in a cluster!
In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the
alarm variables and are not combined with other variables (not even with
privileged variables) in the same request.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
contains neither PLC nor MMC alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-
MMC user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALA
module directly.
alarmNo DA
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can
be read via variable numAlarms in
module S.
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
fillText1 DA
Parameter 1 of the alarm
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
textIndex
Alarm number (actual alarm)
- Long Integer r
module S.
timeBCD
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- BCD r
Multi-line: no 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/TopPrioAlarm/...
The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character
contains the type information for the parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block name
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameter is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
The module SALAP only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
MMC user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALAP
module directly.
alarmNo DA
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
module S.
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria of an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
fillText1 DA
- String[32] r
module S.

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
textIndex
- Long Integer r
module S.
timeBCD
- BCD r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables

most recent alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/LastAlarm/...
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the most recent
alarm appears at the bottom of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred
as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information for that
parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
MMC user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALA
module directly.
alarmNo DA
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
module S.
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
fillText1 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
textIndex
- Long Integer r
module S.
timeBCD
- BCD r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/MachineAxis/...
All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined
specifically for machine axes (geometry and special axes) are combined in
module SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module SEMA. The
individual variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of
the machine axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in
module SMA with the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.
actIncrVal DB31-48, DBB5 H1

Active INC weighting of the axis
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes
actToolBasePos $AA_IM[x] x = Ax is
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, Grad, userdef Double r
cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position setpoint. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
status
Axis state
0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
toolBaseREPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/MachineAxis/...
aaCoupAct $AA_COUP_ACT[x] x = Spindle following

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes
aaCoupOffs $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Spindle

Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
aaCurr $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)
A Double r
aaDtbb $AA_DTBB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDteb $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepb $AA_DTEPB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaEsrEnable $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse]
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
aaEsrStat $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).
The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or
evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
aaLeadP $AA_LEAD_P[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value position
- Double r
aaLeadSp $AA_LEAD_SP[x] x = Axis

Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
aaLeadSv $AA_LEAD_SV[x] x = Axis

Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
aaLeadTyp $AA_LEAD_TYP[x] x = Axis

Source of the lead value
1: actual value
2: desired value
3: simulated value
- UWord r
aaLeadV $AA_LEAD_V[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r
aaLoad $AA_LOAD[x] x = Axis

Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
aaMm $AA_MM[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
aaMm1 $AA_MM1[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr

12/98 Lists
3 Variables

- Double wr

- Double wr

- Double wr
aaOff $AA_OFF[x] x = Axis

Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
aaOffLimit $AA_OFF_LIMIT[x] x = Axis

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
0: limit not reached
1: limit in positive axial direction reached
11: limit in negative axial direction reached
- UWord r
aaOffVal $AA_OFF_VAL
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]
- 0 Double r
aaOscillReversePos1 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS.
For synchronous actions the value of the setting data $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note:
SYNACT only)
- Double r

Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS;
SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaOvr $AA_OVR[x] x = Axis

Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaPower $AA_POWER[x] x = Axis

Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
aaSoftendn $AA_SOFTENDN[x] x = Axis

Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
aaSoftendp $AA_SOFTENDP[x] x = Axis

Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
aaStat $AA_STAT[]
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
aaSync $AA_SYNC[x] x = Axis

Coupling state of the following axis with lead value coupling
0: not synchronized
1: synchronized coarse
2: synchronized fine
3: synchronized coarse and fine
- UWord r
aaTorque $AA_TORQUE[x] x = Axis

Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
aaTyp $AA_TYP[x] x = Axis

Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
aaVactB $AA_VACTB[X]
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, userdef 0.0 Double r
aaVactM $AA_VACTM[X]
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
aaVc $AA_VC[x] x = Axis

Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r
ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
actCouppPosOffset $VA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis to a leading axis /
leading spindle (actual value)
mm, inch, Grad, userdef 0 360 Double r
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate for positioning axes. Actual value of single axis feed for additional axes.
- Double r
actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- UWord r
actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual
value of the velocity.
% Double r
actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is
defined in measUnit (in this module)
amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service
Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
axisActiveInChan
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
chanAxisNoGap
Display indicating whether axis exists, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
cmdCouppPosOffset $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
cmdFeedRate
Setpoint of axis-specific feedrate, if axis
is a positioning axis. Single axis feedrate setpoint if the axis is an additional axis.
- Double r
cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value
of velocity.
% Double r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r
contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
- UWord r
displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit16-31

Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
0= Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection
- 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF UWord r
distPerDriveRevol
Distance per revolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r
driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
driveIndex
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r
driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D;
values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r
driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Boot firmware ---> 0 XX
Enter configuration ---> 1XX
Hardware init, communication init
Load, convert data ---> 2XX
Change bus addressing ---> 3XX
Prepare synchronization ---> 4XX
Activate interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- UWord r
driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash
compensation, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation.
The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash
compensation, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation.
encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r
fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
focStat $AA_FOC
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r
fxsStat $AA_FXS[x] x = Axis

State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to an axis
0 = no handwheel assigned
1 to 3 = handwheel number
- 0 3 UWord r
impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referred to machine data
- UWord r
kVFactor
position control gain factor
16,667 1/s Double r
lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is
defined in measUnit (in this module).
logDriveNo
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
measPos1
Actual value of position for encoder 1. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
measPos2
measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r
paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r
preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r
PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
PRESETVal $AC_PRESET[x] x = Axis

The function PRESETON (...) programs a zero offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
mm, inch, userdef Double wr

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
- UWord r
qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaptation of correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of decay time of correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time and decay time of correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r
refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis requires referencing and is referenced.
Note regarding exchange axes:

An exchange axis need only ever be referenced in the channel to which it is currently assigned. A referenced
exchange axis is thus logged onto the channel in which it is traversing with value "3" (requires referencing and
referenced) and in other channels with value "1" (does not require referencing, but referenced).
A set bit means:
SW release 3.1 and earlier:

Bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
Bit1: current measuring system requires referencing
SW release 3.2 and later:

Bit0: current measuring system has been referenced
Bit1: current measuring system requires referencing
(The busy signal effects the status)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no maxnumGlobMachAxes
safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
mm, inch, Grad, userdef 0.0 Double r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
mm, inch, Grad, userdef -1 Double r
safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = not activated
1 = activated
- UWord r
safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
safeMeasPos $VA_IS[x] x = Axis

Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
1 = positioning axis
- UWord r
subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r
traceState1
State of trace channel 1
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
traceState2
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState3
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState4
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
vaVactm $VA_VACTM[x] x = Axis

Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Spindle/...
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the row index is the number of
the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be identified by
reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective
row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the
area C. Values of 0 or ’ ’ are supplied for axes which are not spindles. The
value SSP:index = 0 indicates that the axis is not a spindle.
actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles
actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
U/min, userdef Double r
channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Grad, userdef Double r
cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from
SSP:cmdSpeed only if G96 is active
cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed $AA_S[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle speed desired value
U/min , m/min Double r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
gwpsActive
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is
made via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of associated physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
opMode $AC_SMODE[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
status
Spindle state
Bit0 = following spindle
Bit1 = leading spindle
Bit2 = master spindle (extension from SW 4.1)
Bit3 = constant cutting speed (G96) active (extension from SW4.1)
- UWord r
turnState $AC_SDIR[x] x = SpindleNo

State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/LogicalSpindle/...
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is
active
channelNo
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindlesLog
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle.
- String[32] r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Global NCU active frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ActualFrame/...
Active zero offsets (ZO) are also available in a global NCU configuration.
In contrast to area C (channel-specific zero offsets), only the following frame

indices are available for global NCU offsets:
2: IFRAME current settable zero offset (only if

$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0)
6: ACTBFRAME current total of base frames (only if
$MN_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES = 0)
The line index is calculated from:

Line index = frame index * maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis number
The maximum line index is determined by the maximum number of available

machine axes:
maxZeilenindex: 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
The value linShiftFine is available.
linShift $P_PFRAME[x,TR] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Translation of an active zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
number
mirrorImgActive $P_PFRAME[x,MI] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Mirroring enabled in an active zero offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord r
number
rotation $P_PFRAME[x,RT] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Rotation of an active zero offset
Grad Double r
number
scaleFact $P_PFRAME[x,SC] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Scaling factor of an active zero offset
- Double r
number

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: Global NCU base frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/BaseFrame/...
Global NCU base frames can be configured via

$MC_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES.
Channel-independent base frames are available only if
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
Individual zero offsets are set via the parameter variables in module FB.
Each parameter is defined as an array. The axes of a specific zero offset group
(frame) are addressed via the row index.

machine axes:
maxZeilenindex: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes

In contrast to area C, there are no rotations in area N,

i.e. the definition for "rotation" is omitted here in the OPI.
linShift $P_BUFR[x,TR] x=FrameNo PA

Translation of settable zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
linShiftFine $P_BUFR[x,SI] x=FrameNo

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
number
mirrorImgActive $P_BUFR[ x ,MI] x = FrameNo PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable zero offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
number
scaleFact $P_BUFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo PA

Scaling factor of a settable zero offset
- Double wr
number

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: Global NCU settable frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/UserFrame/...
Global NCU settable frames are available only if

$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0. MD
$MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES is not evaluated in this case.
Global NCU frames are configured only once per NCU and can be accesssed
by all channels.
Individual zero offsets are set via the parameter variables in module FU.

machine axes:
maxZeilenindex: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes

The meaning of the frame indices is as follows:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
nn = G5nn
:
99 = G599
The number of machine axes "numMachAxes" can be read from module Y in

area C.
In contrast to area C, there are no rotations in area N, i.e. the definition for
"rotation" is omitted here in the OPI.
To activate the zero offset, PI service SETUFR must be called after the
parameters have been entered!
linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
number
linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

number

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in settable zero offset
- UWord wr
number
scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of settable zero offset
- Double wr
number

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.3.12 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Bag/State/...


opMode DB11, DBX6.0-6.2

Active mode
0 = JOG
1 = MDA
2 = AUTO
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
readyActive DB11, DBX6.3

Code whether mode group is ready
0 = not ready
1 = ready
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
resetActive DB11, DBX6.7

Code whether all channels in mode group are in Reset
0 = not all channels in reset
1 = all channels in reset
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.4 State data of channel
3.4.1 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/State/...


aaEgActive $AA_EG_ACTIVE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Link to the specified master axis is operative, i.e. activated.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1
aaEgAx $AA_EG_AX[n,a]
Electronic gear:
Axis number of nth master axis (1-n).
(Axis index = axis number - 1)
1-numMachAxes
- 0 1 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis) * 5 + numMachAxes * 5
(index of master axis) + 1
aaEgDenom $AA_EG_DENOM[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Denominator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 1 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave axis) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
master axis) + 1
aaEgNumera $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Numerator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 0 Double r
master axis) + 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
aaEgNumLa $AA_EG_NUM_LA[a]
Electronic gear:
Number of master axes specified with EGDEF.
If the axis has not been specified with EGDEF as slave axis,
the value is 0.
0-5
- 0 0 5 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes
aaEgSyn $AA_EG_SYN[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the specified master axis.
mm, inch, Grad, userdef 0 Double r
master axis) + 1
aaEgSynFa $AA_EG_SYNFA[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the slave axis.
aaEgType $AA_EG_TYPE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Type of link for the specified master axis
0: Actual-value linkage
1: Setpoint linkage
- 0 0 1 UWord r
master axis) + 1
acAlarmStat $AC_ALARM_STAT
!=0: Alarms are pending, the appropriate coded alarm reactions can be used as source for
"Extended stop and retract".
evaluated separately if necessary (bits excluded below produce a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancellation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (ramp stop of all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal alarm setting)
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acAxCtSwA $AC_AXCTSWA[CTn]
Channel status of axis container rotation
TRUE: The channel has enabled rotation for the axis container
and rotation is still in progress.
FALSE: Axis container rotation is already finished
- 0 0 1 UWord r
acDelt $AC_DELT
Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS after delete-distance-to-go of the path DELDTG for synchronous action
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
acDtbb $AC_DTBB
Distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtbw $AC_DTBW
Distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDteb $AC_DTEB
Distance to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtepb $AC_DTEPB
Distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only )
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtepw $AC_DTEPW
Distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtew $AC_DTEW
Distance to the end of the block in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acFct0 $AC_FCT0[x] x = PolynomNo

a0-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

- Double r

- Double r

- Double r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
acFctll $AC_FCTLL[x] x = PolynomNo

Lower limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acFctul $AC_FCTUL[x] x = PolynomNo

Upper limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acIwStat $AC_IWSTAT
Current position of machine
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Tool inv. position
Bit 1: Axis 2/3 position
Bit 2: Axis 5 position
Bit 3-31: Not yet assigned
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acIwTu $AC_IWTU
Current position of channel axes
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Channel axis 1 position
...
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMea $AC_MEA
Touch probe has switched
No. of touch probe
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of touch probe 2
acOvr $AC_OVR
Path override for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPathn $AC_PATHN
Normalized path parameter (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPltbb $AC_PLTBB
Path length from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPlteb $AC_PLTEB
Path length to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
acProg $AC_PROG
Program status
(identical to progStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_PROG)
0: aborted (reset)
1: halted (stop)
2: running (active)
3: waiting
4: interrupted
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPRTimeA
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - downtime
s, userdef Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPRTimeM
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - machining time
s, userdef Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPtpSup
Cartesian point-to-point travel (PTP) is supported by transformation
0: Cart. PTP travel is not supported
1: Cart. PTP travel is supported
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acStat $AC_STAT
Channel status
(identical to chanStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_STAT)
0: reset
1: interrupted
2: active
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSynaMem $AA_SYNA_MEM
Free memory for synchronous actions: Shows how many elements of the memory set with
$MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS are still free.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDLNumber ??
Number of active total offset DL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
actDNumber $P_TOOL
Number of active tool edge
- 0 9 UWord r
Multi-line: no
actDNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number radius.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
actDNumberS
Corresponds to actNumber for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDuploNumber
Duplo number of active tool
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
actFeedRateIpo
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate. The actual value is the feed actually moved with. (depends on the
acceleration profiles, LookAhead, velocity limits etc. ) The variable 'feedRateIpoUnit' defines the physical unit.
mm/min, inch/min, userdef Double r
Multi-line: no
actFrameIndex $P_UIFRNUM
Index of the active set frame (index in G
group 8 "Settable zero offset")
Frames 0 - 4 (corresponds to G500 ... G57)
can be set in the standard version. The number
of frames can be changed via machine data
MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES.
0 = no frame selected
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
to
99 = G599
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
actHNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number length.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTime $AC_TIME
Time from the beginning of the block in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTimec $AC_TIMEC
Time from the beginning of the block in interpolation cycles (Note: for SYNACT only)
IPO-Takt Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTimer $AC_TIMER[x] x = TimerNo

Time variable in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the time variable $MN_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
actIpoType
Active interpolation mode used for the path motion. This date corresponds to a large degree to the SNCF:ncFktBin
for the first G-group. The value differs for automatically generated intermediate blocks only. This is e.g. the case if
two lines are connected with an arc by the command RND. The value is the index of the active G-code (analog with
SNCF:ncFktBin)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actIpoTypeS
Active mode of interpolation applied during block searches.
This data is very similar to SNCF:ncFktBinS for the 1st G group.
Its value is different only in the case of automatically generated intermediate blocks,
such as when, for example, two straight lines are connected to an arc
by means of command RND.
The value is the index of the active G function (analogous to SNCF:ncFktBinS).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength1
X component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength2
Y component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength3
Z component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTrafo $AC_TRAFO
Code number of the active transformation (encoded as for $AC_TRAFO)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actTNumber $P_TOOLNO W1
Number of active tool
- 0 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: no
actTNumberLong
Number of the active tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actTNumberS
Corresponds to actTNumber for block search with calculation. Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the
block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
actToolAdapterNum
Adapter number of current tool
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actToolIdent W1
Identifier of active tool
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
actToolLength1 $P_TOOLL[1] W1
Active tool length 1
Multi-line: no
actToolLength2 $P_TOOLL[2] W!
Multi-line: no
actToolLength3 $P_TOOLL[3] W1
Multi-line: no
actToolRadius $P_TOOLR W1
Active tool radius
Multi-line: no
actTransform
Active transformation
- \0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactB $AC_VACTB
Path velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, userdef 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactw $AC_VACTW
Path velocity in the work piece coordinate system
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVc $AC_VC
Additive path feedrate correction value for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aLinkTransRate $A_LINK_TRANS_RATE
Link transfer rate
Number of bytes that can still be transferred in the
current IPO cycle via the NCU link communication.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle no. or toolholder no. max. Spindelnr oder WZ-Halter-Nr.

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
allAxesRefActive DB21-28, DBX36.2

Code specifying whether all axes are referenced
1 = all axes referenced
0 = at least 1 axis not referenced
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
allAxesStopped
Code specifying whether axes are in exact stop
0 = at least one axis is not in exact stop
1 = All axes in exact stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
aTcFct $A_TC_FCT
Command number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLfn $A_TC_LFN
Source location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLfo $A_TC_LFO
Source location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLtn $A_TC_LTN
Target location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLto $A_TC_LTO
Target location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMfn $A_TC_MFN
Source magazine of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMfo $A_TC_MFO
Source magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMtn $A_TC_MTN
Target magazine number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
aTcMto $A_TC_MTO
Target magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcStatus $A_TC_STATUS
Command status
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcThno $A_TC_THNO
Number of toolholder for new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcTno $A_TC_TNO
T number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
basisFrameMask $P_CHBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-specific basic frames are active
Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
chanAlarm DB21-28, DBX36.6 und DBX36.7 A2

Code whether NCK alarm pending.
0 = no alarm in this channel
1 = alarm without stop
2 = alarm with stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axes, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Bits 0-31 represent the axes of the channel.
Bitn = 0: Axis does not exist.
Bitn = 1: Axis does exist.
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
changeAxConfCounter
A counter which is incremented if the axes configuration has changed. This is the case, if e.g. geometry axes are
switched or axes have been changed between channels. The counter is set to 0 at PowerOn and it might overflow.
You cannot be sure, that the axes configuration actually has changed when the counter is incremented.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
chanStatus DB21-28, DBX35.5-DBX35.7 K1

Channel status
0 = RESET
1 = active
2 = interrupted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
cmdFeedRateIpo
Desired feedrate of the interpolation feedrate. The physical unit is defined in the variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'
Multi-line: no
corrBlActive
Incorrect block has occurred (correction block)
0 = no incorrect block
1 = incorrect block
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
cycServRestricted
Code whether restricted cyclic variable service is available.
This is a privileged variable: Cyclic result acknowledgements for this variable are produced even if the cyclic services
are no longer served by the NCK because of block cycle time problems. Caution: Privileged variables lose this
characteristic if they are mixed with non-privileged variables in one request. -> Do not combine the variable
cycServRestricted in a cluster with other variables!
0 = normal cycl. service
1 = no cyclic service (but acknowledgement)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
direction
Traversing direction
0 = normal travel
1 = forward travel
2 = reverse travel
3 = reference point cycle
4 = stop state
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
extProgActive DB21-28, DBB32.0

Flag indicating whether program execution from external is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoOvr
Interpolation feedrate, override
% Double r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoUnit
Interpolation feedrate, units
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
findBlActive DB21-28, DBX33.4 K1

Code whether block search is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ludAccCounter
Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is available. If subprograms are called during an automatic program
execution, a new set of LUDs becomes valid. In order to indicate to the MMC that it has to modify the display of the
LUDs, respectively that the validity of the LUDs has changed, the variable 'ludAccCounter' is incremented. It is only
necessary for the MMC to inquire a change of the variable's value, the value itself is of no importance.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
machFunc DB11, DBX7.0-DBX7.2

Active channel machine function
0 = none
1 = REPOS
2 = TEACH IN
3 = REF
4 = TEACH-REPOS
5 = TEACH-REF
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ncStartCounter
Counter for the NC-start key. Pressing this key increments the variable 'ncStartCounter'. The value of the variable
can be ignored, the MMC must just inquire the change of the variable to see whether the start-key has been pressed.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
pEgBc $P_EG_BC[a]
Electronic gear:
Block change criterion. Important for EGON, EGONSYN
0: NOC Block change is performed immediately
1: IPOSTOP Block change is performed with setpoint synchronism
2: COARSE Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
3: FINE Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"
- 3 0 3 UWord r
pOffn $P_OFFN
Last programmed offset normal
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no
progDLNumber ??
Number of programmed total offset DL (need not yet be active)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
progDLNumberS ??
Corresponds to actDLNumber for block search with calculation
Caution: This variable is not available for the Variable Service,
but only for logging in the case of block search events!.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
progDNumber
Number of programmed tool edge
(does not yet have to be active)
- 0 9 UWord r
Multi-line: no
progDuploNumber
Duplo number of programmed tool
(does not yet have to be active)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
progStatus DB21-28, DBX35.0 - DBX35.4 K1

Program status
1 = interrupted
2 = stopped
3 = in progress
4 = waiting
5 = aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTNumber
Number of programmed tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTNumberLong
Number of the programmed tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
progToolIdent
Identifier of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
protAreaCounter
Counter is incremented by 1 every time a
protection zone (block PA) is modified
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcAng $P_TCANG[n]
The current angles of the two axes of an orientation-capable toolholder
Grad 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2
pTcDiff $P_TCDIFF[n]
The difference between the exact and the actually used
angles of the two axes of
an orientation-capable toolholder
Grad 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
rapFeedRateOvr
Rapid traverse override
% Double r
Multi-line: no
stopCond
NC in stop state
0 = no stop state
1 = stop: NC not ready
2 = stop: mode group not ready
3 = stop: EMERGENCY STOP active
4 = stop: alarm with stop active
5 = stop: M0 / M1 active
6 = stop: block ended in SBL mode
7 = stop: NC stop active
8 = wait: read-in enable missing
9 = wait: feed enable missing
10 = wait: dwell time active
11 = wait: aux. funct. acknowledgement missing
12 = wait: axis enable missing
13 = wait: exact stop not reached
14 = wait for positioning axis
15 = wait for spindle
16 = wait for another channel
17 = wait for feed override
18 = stop: NC block faulty
19 = wait for NC blocks from external source
20 = wait due to SYNACT instruction
21 = wait: block search active
22 = wait: spindle enable missing
23 = wait: axis feed override 0
24 = wait for tool change acknowledgement
25 = wait for gear ratio change
26 = wait for position control
27 = wait for thread first cut
28 = reserved
29 = wait for punching
30 = wait for safe operation
31 = wait for channel ready from SW 4.1
32 = wait: oscillating active from SW 4.1
33 = wait: axis exchange active (block change disabled because axis exchange in progress) from SW 4.1
34 = wait for axis container rotation; from SW 4.4
35 = wait: AXCT axis active as slave axis; from SW 5.2
36 = wait: AXCT axis active as master axis; from SW 5.2
37 = wait: AXCT axis changing to follow-up; from SW 5.2
38 = wait: AXCT axis, internal status change; from SW 5.2
39 = wait: AXCT axis, drive disable; from SW 5.2
40 = wait: AXCT axis, overlaid motion in progress; from SW 5.2
41 = wait: AXCT axis, axis exchange active; from SW 5.2
42 = wait: AXCT axis, interpolator active; from SW 5.2
43 = WARTEN_AUF_CC_FREIGABE: Wait for compile cycle; from SW 5.2
44 - 50 = reserved
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
stopCondPar
Supplementary parameters for variable stopCond.
stopCondPar has the default value 0. If stopCond takes one of the following values, variable stopCondPar contains
supplementary information:
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
suppProgFunc
Disabling of language commands
Bit0 = 0: SBLOF command is active
Bit0 = 1: SBLOF command is disabled
- Bit0 = 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounter
Counter of the changes of the tool data assigned to a channel. The counter is incremented each time a tool data is
changed.
All changes of tool data made by BTSS, part programs, INI files and by the Tool Management software are
considered.
Tool data are tool compensations, grinding-specific tool parameters, OEM tool parameters and Tool Managment data
including magazine data.
There is one exception: the present tool-in-use-time, since it is changed in each IPO cycle.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterC
Counter for modifications to tool offset data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterM
Counter for modifications to magazine data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
transfActive DB21-28, DBX33.6 K1,

M1
Transformation active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
vaEgSyncDiff $AA_EG_SYNCDIFF[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronism deviation (actual values). The comparison between this value
and $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_... determines whether the appropriate
"Synchronism" VDI signal is set.

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.2 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramModification/...
During automatic execution of a part program different parameters can

influence the type of machining. The current status data for the selected part
program are combined in module SINF. The status data must only be changed
via the PLC. interface.
DRFActive
DRF active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedStopActive
Feed disable
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ipoBlocksOnly
Display traversing blocks
0 = normal block transfer
1 = exclusively traversing blocks
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
optStopActive
M01 selected
0 = not selected
1 = selected
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTestActive DB21-28, DBX1.7 K1

Program test
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
rapFeedRateOvrActive
ROV rapid traverse override
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
singleBlockActive
Single block, SBL
0 = no single block
1 = SBL 1
2 = SBL 2
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
singleBlockType
Single block mode
1 = interpolation single block
2 = decoder single block
- UWord wr
Multi-line: no
skipLevel0Active
Skip block /0
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel1Active
Skip block /1
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel2Active
Skip block /2
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel3Active
Skip block /3
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel4Active
Skip block /4
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel5Active
Skip block /5
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
skipLevel6Active
Skip block /6
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel7Active
Skip block /7
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
trialRunActive DB21-28, DBX0.6 V1

Dry run feedrate
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.4.3 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramInfo/...
This module contains information on the currently active part programm in the
respective channel.
actLineNumber
Line number of the current NC instruction (starting at 1)
0: before program start
-1: not available due to an error
-2: not available because of DISPLOF
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
block
To display the currently active part programm, NCK supplies 3 ascii-blocks of the part programm in one single
variable job (last, current and next block). That means the variable 'block' consists of a maximum of 3 lines:
Line index 1: string of the last block
Line index 2: string of the current block
Line index 3: string of the next block
To gain consistent information, all 3 array elements must be processed in one variable request. This is why the
maximum string length of each array element is limited to 66 characters.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3 3
= next block
blockNoStr
Block number
- String[12] r
Multi-line: no
circleCenter
Center of the circle (WCS)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Line index 1 - 3 for geometry axis 3
and only effective for G02 or G03
circleCenterS
Corresponds to circleCenter for search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of the geometry axis 3
circleRadius
Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03)
- Double r
Multi-line: no
circleRadiusS
Corresponds to circleRadius for block search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for logging in connection with block search
events!
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
circleTurn
Progr. number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in curr. program
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
circleTurnS
Programmed number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in the current program for search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the Variable Service, but only for
logging of block search events
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleC
enterEns
Arc center in relation to WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but
without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo-axis 3
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleC
enterEnsS
Corresponds to circleCenterWos for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo-axis 3
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleR
adiusEns
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool
length but without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleR
adiusEnsS
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos for block search with calculation
in relation to WOS frame as center-point path. i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
msg PG
Messages from a part program can be programmed with the instruction 'MSG (...)'. The variable 'msg' contains the
text of the current 'MSG(...)'-instruction until a new instrucion is processed or until the message is deleted with the
instruction 'MSG ()'.
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no 1
progName
Progam name of the currently active program
(or subroutine)
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
singleBlock
In most cases the variable 'block' is used to read the currently active blocks of the part program. Because this
variable is limited to 66 characters per string, it might be necessary (for long blocks) to read longer strings. The
variable 'singleBlock' can read complete blocks (up to strings with 198 charecters) . 3 lines can be addressed:
Line index 1: last block

Line index 2: current block
Line index 3: next block
It is not guaranteed for rapid block changes, that the information of 3 successive blocks is always consistent,
because each block is read with a single variable request. This method is only safe, if the part program has stopped.
- String[198] r
Multi-line: yes Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3 3
= next block
workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Name of the active workpiece
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
workPNameLong
Workpiece name of active workpiece
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramPointer/...
In automatic mode it is possible to branch to several subroutine levels from the

main program level. The state of the program can be determined for every
program level. Each variable of the module consists of 12 rows. This makes it
possible to address the main program level and 11 subroutine levels (incl.
ASUP levels).
The array indices (row indices) mean:
1 = Main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
5 = 4th subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level
actInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, actual value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set 1 for the
main program and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12
blockLabel
Block label
- String[32] r
blockNoStr
Block number
[:][N]<No>
- String[12] r
cmdInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, desired value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set to 1
for the main program and for asynchronous
subroutines.
- UWord r
displayState
Display state for block display.
(Blocks should not be displayed automatically for program levels for which DISPLAY OFF has been programmed in
the PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
0 = DISPLAY OFF for the program level
1 = DISPLAY ON for the program level
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of the program level 12

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
extProgBufferName
Name of FIFO buffer for execution from external source
- String[160] wr
extProgFlag
Indicates whether programs are being executed externally
0: Program is being processed from NCK program memory
1: Program is being executed externally
- UWord r
progName
Program name
- String[32] r
seekOffset
Search pointer (block offset, each block consists of a string that ends with a line feed)
- Long Integer r
workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Program level index 12
workPNameLong
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes Program level index 12

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/InterruptionSearch/...
In order to be able to continue at the point of interruption in a program, the

current states of the main program and any subroutines must be stored. On a
program interrupt the information is immediately updated in the NCK and
reamins valid even after RESET.
This makes it possible to read the states of the main program level and the 11
subroutine levels (incl. ASUP levels).
1 = main program
12 = 4th asynchronus subroutine level
forward
Search direction
2 = forwards
- UWord r
invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program
- UWord r
progName
Program name
- String[32] r
searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to the search pointer)
- String[64] r
searchType
Search type
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feed characters)
- UWord r
seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for linefeed-characters)
- Long Integer r

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- String[32] r
workPNameLong
- String[128] r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointer for block search
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Search/...
To look for a particular block within a part program the user can enter search
criteria and start a block search. The variables to be entered are combined in
the module SPARPF and must be written by the MMC (or another component
on the MPI bus).
The main program level and 11 subroutine levels can be processed. These
levels are the row indices of the individual variables. The search target (seek
pointer and search string) can only be used mutually exclusively in one level. If
a collision occurs a negative acknowledgement results when the block search
is started.
Depending on the search type, the search string is either a block label, block
number or any string.
If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for subroutine calls is
used. The main program entered in the first program level must be selected for
the block search; otherwise the search request is acknowleded negatively.
1 = main program
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level
forward
Search direction
Search direction "backwards" is only possible in the mode without calculation
1 = backwards (without calculation)
2 = forwards
- UWord wr
invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- UWord wr
progName
Program name. The main program that is used in the first main program level must be selected for the block search,
otherwise the search request will be acknowledged negatively.
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the program level 12

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to search pointer)
Contents of the search string depend on the search type and are either:
block label
block number
any string
- String[64] wr
searchType
Search type
1 = block number
2 = label
3 = string
4 = program level
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feeds)
- UWord wr
seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for line feeds). If the search pointer is used, a program name (progName)
always must have been defined. The search pointer refers to this program.
- Long Integer wr
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
- String[32] wr
workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
- String[128] wr

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.7 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SelectedFunctions/...
Several synchronous actions (M, H, S, E, F, T, D) can be active simultaneously

in one channel. The module SSYNAC contains a list of all the synchronous
actions programmed in the current block. This module consists of arrays of
varying length because some types of synchronous actions might be
programmed several times in a block. A synchronous action that is not
assigned produces a negative number for the respecitive index.
For each synchronous action there is an address variable and a variable in
which the value of the address is entered.
5 M functions
3 S functions
3 H functions
1 T function
1 D function
6 F functions
1 E function
can be programmed in each part program block, but no more than 10
synchronous actions must be programmed in a single block.
blockNoStrAct
Block number of the current block if synchronous actions are active
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes No of the synchronous action numSynAct
blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes No. of the synchronous action numSynAct
Dadr
D-number. There is only one active D-number per channel.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
Dval
Value of the current D-number
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
Eadr S5
Number of active E-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
Eval S5
Value of the E-function
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
Hadr S5
Number of active auxiliary functions (H-functions).
Up to three H-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3
Hval S5
Value of the H-function
- -99999,9999 99999,9999 Double r
id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means no ID defined
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of the synchronous action numSynAct
Madr S5
Number of the active M-function. Up to 5 M-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Mval S5
Value of the M-function
- 0 99999999 Long Integer r
numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
Sadr S5
Number of active S-functions. Up to three S-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 6 UWord r
Sval S5
Value of the S-function. Specifies the spindle speed.
U/min , m/min 0 999999,999 Double r
Tadr
Active T-number. Only one T-number can be active at any a time.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
TPreSelAdr
Number of the preselected T-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
TPreSelVal
Value of the preselected T-function
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
Tval
T-function value
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active
Bit1: lock
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the synchronous action numSynAct

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
3.4.8 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions
This module contains information on the synchronous actions. The 1000 digit
of the cell contains the user protection level (0-7) needed for displaying the
corresponding synchronous action.
blockNoStrAct
If a technology cycle is active: block number of the current action
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes (Protection level) * 1000 + no. of 7 * 1000 + numSynAct
the synchronous action
blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means that there is no ID defined (blockwise)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + no. of 7 * 1000 + numSynAct
numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + 1 7 * 1000 + 1
typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active, i.e. condition fullfilled, action is being executed
Bit1: lock, i.e. action is locked by PLC or Synact
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise (to be recognized by id=0)
- UWord r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.9 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions
All G functions are organized in G groups. Only one function of each G group
can be active at a time. The module SNCF consists of a single variable that is
organized as an array. The row index corresponds to the G group number.
ncFkt
Active G-function of relevant group G <No>.
If there is no function active within the corresponding G-group, the variable returns an empty string "\0".
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups
ncFktAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFkt or ncFktFanuc.
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBin
Active G-function of the correponding group
- UWord r
ncFktBinAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFktBin or ncFktBinFanuc.
(The value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBinFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
(the value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBinS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
(The value is the index of the active G-function within the group)
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.
- UWord r
ncFktFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
ncFktS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.
- String[16] r

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.10 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Nibbling/...
The module NIB contains technology-specific data for nibbling.
actPunchRate N4
Strokes per minute
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
automCutSegment N4
Identifier that indicates which type of automatic block division is active. The division is specified by the commands
'SPP' and 'SPN' in the part program.
0 = no block division
1 = number of segments per block ('SNP')
2 = segments of fixed length ('SPP')
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numStrokes N4
Number of strokes when the instruction 'SPN' divides the block into segments (variable 'automCutSegment' = 1).
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
partDistance N4
If the block has been divided in segments with the instruction 'SPP' (variable 'automCutSegment' = 2)
the variable specifies the length of the path between the punches.
Multi-line: no 1
punchActive N4
Identification of punching or nibbling active. The part program turns off/on punching and nibbling with 'SPOF', 'SON'
and 'PON'. Rapid punching and nibbling are turned on/off with 'SONS' and 'PONS'.
The variable 'punchActive' specified the present state.
0 = inactive
1 = punching active
2 = nibbling active
3 = rapid punching active (PONS from SW 4.1)
4 = rapid nibbling active (SONS from SW 4.1)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
punchDelayActive N4
Identifier that indicates whether punching with delay is active. The part program can turn on/off the delay with the
instructions 'PDELAYON' and 'PDELAYOF'. The variable 'PunchDelayActive' indicates the present state.
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
punchDelayTime SD 42400: PUNCH_DWELL_TIME N4

Punching delay time
ms Double r
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 12/98
3 Variables
strokeNr
Current stroke number
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

12/98 Lists
3 Variables
3.4.11 Area C, Mod. FB: Base frame
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/BaseFrame/...
Up to $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES channel-specific base frames

can be defined for each channel. Channel-specific base frames are available
only if $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The individual offset values can be set with the parameter variables in the
module FB.
Each parameter is defined as an array and the axes of a specific zero offset
group (frame) are addressed via the row index.
The maximum row index is calculated from the maximum number of axes
available in the channel:
Max. row index: $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES * (numGeoAxes +
numAuxAxes)
The row index is calculated as follows:

Row index = Frame index * (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes) + axis number
linShift $P_BUFR[x,TR] x=FrameNo PA

Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
+ numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_BUFR[x,SI] x=FrameNo

mirrorImgActive $P_BUFR[ x ,MI] x = FrameNo PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable zero offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
rotation $P_BUFR[x,RT] x= FrameNo PA

Rotation of a settable zero offset
Grad Double wr
scaleFact $P_BUFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo PA

Scaling factor of a settable zero offset
- Double wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5 Axis status data

3.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/MachineAxis/...
actIncrVal DB31-48, DBB5 H1

0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
actToolBasePos $AA_IM[x] x = Ax is
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
status
Axis state
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
toolBaseREPOS
varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/MachineAxis/...
aaCoupAct $AA_COUP_ACT[x] x = Spindle following

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
aaCoupOffs $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Spindle

Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
aaCurr $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)
A Double r
aaDtbb $AA_DTBB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDteb $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepb $AA_DTEPB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaEsrEnable $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse]
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
aaEsrStat $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).
evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
aaLeadP $AA_LEAD_P[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value position
- Double r
aaLeadSp $AA_LEAD_SP[x] x = Axis

Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
aaLeadSv $AA_LEAD_SV[x] x = Axis

Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
aaLeadTyp $AA_LEAD_TYP[x] x = Axis

Source of the lead value
1: actual value
2: desired value
3: simulated value
- UWord r
aaLeadV $AA_LEAD_V[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r
aaLoad $AA_LOAD[x] x = Axis

Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
aaMm $AA_MM[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr

Latched probe position for the trigger event 1 in the MCS
- Double wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables

- Double wr

- Double wr

- Double wr
aaOff $AA_OFF[x] x = Axis

Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
aaOffLimit $AA_OFF_LIMIT[x] x = Axis

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
0: limit not reached
1: limit in positive axial direction reached
11: limit in negative axial direction reached
- UWord r
aaOffVal $AA_OFF_VAL
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]
- 0 Double r

Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS.
SYNACT only)
- Double r

Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS;
SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaOvr $AA_OVR[x] x = Axis

Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaPower $AA_POWER[x] x = Axis

Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
aaSoftendn $AA_SOFTENDN[x] x = Axis

Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
aaSoftendp $AA_SOFTENDP[x] x = Axis

Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
aaStat $AA_STAT[]
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
aaSync $AA_SYNC[x] x = Axis

Coupling state of the following axis with lead value coupling
0: not synchronized
1: synchronized coarse
2: synchronized fine
3: synchronized coarse and fine
- UWord r
aaTorque $AA_TORQUE[x] x = Axis

Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
aaTyp $AA_TYP[x] x = Axis

Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
aaVactB $AA_VACTB[X]
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
aaVactM $AA_VACTM[X]
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
aaVc $AA_VC[x] x = Axis

Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r
ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
actCouppPosOffset $VA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis to a leading axis /
leading spindle (actual value)
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate for positioning axes. Actual value of single axis feed for additional axes.
- Double r
actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
- UWord r
actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual
value of the velocity.
% Double r
actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is
defined in measUnit (in this module)
amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service
Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
axisActiveInChan
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
cmdCouppPosOffset $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate, if axis
is a positioning axis. Single axis feedrate if the axis is an additional axis.
- Double r
cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value
of velocity.
% Double r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r
contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
- UWord r

Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
distPerDriveRevol
Distance per revolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r
driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
driveIndex
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r
driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D;
values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r
driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- UWord r
driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1.
The value results from:
temperature compensation,
backlash compensation,
quadrant error compensation,
beam sag compensation,
leadscrew error compensation.
effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2.
The value results from:
temperature compensation,
backlash compensation,
quadrant error compensation,
beam sag compensation,
leadscrew error compensation.
encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r
focStat $AA_FOC
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r
fxsStat $AA_FXS[x] x = Axis

State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to an axis
- 0 3 UWord r
impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referring to machine data axis number
- UWord r
kVFactor
position control gain factor
16,667 1/s Double r
lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is
defined in measUnit (in this module).

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
logDriveNo
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r
measPos1
measPos2
measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r
paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r
preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
PRESETVal $AC_PRESET[x] x = Axis

The function PRESETON (...) programs a zero offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
- UWord r
qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaption of the correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the decay time of the correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the measuring time and the decay time of the correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis is liable for reference and actually is referenced.
Note for changing axes into another channel:
In general a changable axis is only liable for reference in the channel it is presently assigned to. Thus a referenced
changable axis is announced to the channel it is presently being moved in with the value 3 (liable for reference and
referenced) and to all other channels with the value 1 (not liable for reference but referenced).
A set bit means:
Until SW release 3.1:

bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference
From SW release 3.2:

bit0: active measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference
(The busy signal effects the state)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes
safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = not activated
1 = activated
- UWord r
safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
safeMeasPos $VA_IS[x] x = Axis

Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r
traceState1
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState2
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState3
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState4
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
vaVactm $VA_VACTM[x] x = Axis

Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset
memory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GeometricAxis/...
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the
workpiece coordinate system are included in module SGA. Supplementary
information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables are defined
as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the
current channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in
question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the
geo-axis no. instead of via the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be
found in "numMachAxes" in module Y in area C.
actIncrVal
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no increment mode has been set
- UWord r
actProgPos
Programmed position, actual value. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
actToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
actToolEdgeCenterPos
Center point of a cutting edge. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
cmdProgPos
Programmed position, desired value. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
cmdToolBasePos $AA_IW[x] x = Axis

Tool base position, desired value . Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in
this module).
cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
Position of the cutting edge center point. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
extUnit
Current physical unit of the related geometry axis or auxiliary axis
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
progDistToGo
Programmed position, distance-to-go. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
progREPOS
Programmed position, REPOS. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
status
Axis state
2 = exact stop coarse reached
3 = exact stop fine reached
- UWord r
subType
Axis type geometry or auxiliary axis
0 = auxiliary axis
1 = geometry axis
2 = orientation axis
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
toolBaseREPOS
toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go. Physical unit results from the variable extUnit (in this module)
toolEdgeCenterREPOS
Center point of the cutting edge REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
varIncrVal
Setable value for INC_VAR. The physical unit depends on whether the axis is rotary or linear.
Linear axes: 1mm
rotary axes: 1/1000 degrees
mm, inch, Grad, userdef Double wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset
memory (extension of SGA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GeometricAxis/...
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the
workpiece coordinate system are combined in module SGA. Supplementary
information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables are defined
as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the
current channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in
question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the
geo-axis no. instead of via the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be
found in "numMachAxes" in module Y in area C.
aaDelt $AA_DELT[x] x = Axis

Stored axial distance-to-go in the WCS after axial delete-distance-to-go DELDTG(axis) for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaDtbw $AA_DTBW[x] x = Aaxis

Axial distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous
motion (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepw $AA_DTEPW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance-to-go for infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtew $AA_DTEW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance to the end of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaMw $AA_MW[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position retransformed in the WCS
- Double wr

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
aaMw1 $AA_
MW1
[Achs
e]
Latched probe position for trigger event 1 in the WCS
- Double wr
aaMw2 $AA_
MW2
[Achs
e]
- Double wr
aaMw3 $AA_
MW3
[Achs
e]
- Double wr
aaMw4 $AA_
MW4
[Achs
e]
- Double wr
aaVactW $AA_VACTW[X]
Axis velocity in workpiece coordinate system
acRetpoint $AC_RETPOINT[x] x = Axis

Return point on the contour for repositioning
- Double r
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate, if the axis is a positioning axis.
actProgPosBKS $AA_IBORI
Actual value of geometry and orientation axes in basic coordinate system
- 0.0 Double r
actToolBasePosBasic
Base position of the active tool in the base system (inch/metrical)

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
actToolBasPosBN $AA_IBN[x] x=Axis

Actual tool base position in relation to basic zero point
(SGA:actToolBasePos without progr. frame and without settable frames)
actToolBasPosEN $AA_IEN[x] x = Axis

Base position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero point
(SGA:actToolBasePos without programmed frame)
- Double r
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
Actual position value
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
- Double r
axisActiveInChan
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of axial feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
- UWord r
cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate for a positioning axis.
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEn
sS
Programmed position for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service,
but only for logging in connection with block search events!

Identifier indicating whether the axis is displayed by the MMC as a geometry or auxiliary axis.

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
drfVal $AC_DRF[x] x = Axis

DRF value. The physical unit is defined in extUnit (in module SGA).
dummy
Added for alignment only, row index may be used later
- UWord
Multi-line: no
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override if axis is a positioning axis. Multiplying override component which is active in addition to the
override factors programmed, set via handwheel or via PLC.
% Double r
geoAxisNr
Number of the geometry axis
1 - 3 for geometry axes
0 for non-geometry axes
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to axis
- 0 3 UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referring to machine data axis number
- UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
- UWord r
subSpec MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB T1

Subspecification, identifies whether an axis is an indexing axis
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Spindle/...
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the row index is the number of
the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be identified by
reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective
row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the
area C.
actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
U/min, userdef Double r
channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Grad, userdef Double r
cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from
SSP:cmdSpeed only if G96 is active
cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed $AA_S[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle speed desired value

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
gwpsActive
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is
made via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
opMode $AC_SMODE[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
status
Spindle state
Bit0 = following spindle
Bit1 = leading spindle
Bit2 = master spindle (extension from SW 4.1)
Bit3 = constant cutting speed (G96) active (extension from SW4.1)
- UWord r
turnState $AC_SDIR[x] x = SpindleNo

State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.5.6 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/LogicalSpindle/...
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is
active
channelNo
- UWord r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5.7 Area C, Mod. FU: User frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/UserFrame/...
Up to $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES zero offsets can be defined for each

channel.
These channel-specific settable frames are only available if
$MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES > 0 and
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES = 0, otherwise all settable frames
have an NCU-global configuration.
Individual offset values can be set with the parameter variables in the module
FU.
Each parameter is defined as an array and the axes of a specific zero offset
group (frame) are addressed via the row index.
The maximum row index is calculated from the maximum number of axes
available in the channel:
Max. row index: $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES * (numGeoAxes +

numAuxAxes)

The frame indices have the following meaning:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
nn = G5nn
:
99 = G599
Attention: The parameters for the zero offset apply to the geometry axes only
and are assigned values. The geometry axes are the first 3 axes only.
However, all axes are included in the row calculation!
Sum of the axes = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
The number of geometry axes "numGeoAxes" and auxiliary axes

"numAuxAxes" is given in module Y in area C.
In order to activate the zero offset, PI-Service SETUFR must be called after the
parameters have been entered!
linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in settable zero offset
- UWord wr
rotation $P_UIFR[x,y,RT] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Rotation of settable zero offset
Grad Double wr
scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of settable zero offset
- Double wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active user frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ActualFrame/...
For each channel up to 6 zero offsets can be active and can be read from the
module FA.
The maximum row index is the maximum number of available axes in the
channel:
Max. row index = 6 * (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)
Caution: The parameters for zero offset apply to the geometry axes only and
are assigned values. The geometry axes are the first 3 axes only. However, all
axes must be used to calculate the row index!
Sum of the axes = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
The number of geometry axes "numGeoAxes" and auxiliary axes

"numAuxAxes" can be read from the module Y in area C.
The following frame indices (important for calculating the row indices of a
variable) are available:
0: ACTFRAME = currently resulting zero offset = sum of ACTBFRAME,

IFRAME and PFRAME
1: IFRAME = current settable zero offset
2: PFRAME = current programmable zero offset
3: EXTFRAME = current external zero offset
4: TOTFRAME = current total zero offset = sum of ACTFRAME and
EXTFRAME
5: ACTBFRAME => current total base frame
The value linShiftFine is available.
linShift $P_PFRAME[x,TR] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Translation of an active zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + 5 * numMachAxes
axis number
mirrorImgActive $P_PFRAME[x,MI] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Mirroring enabled in an active zero offset
- UWord r
axis number

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
rotation $P_PFRAME[x,RT] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Rotation of an active zero offset
Grad Double r
axis number
scaleFact $P_PFRAME[x,SC] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Scaling factor of an active zero offset
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Frameindex * numMachAxes + axis 5 * numMachAxes
number

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: External frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ExternFrame/...
1 external zero offset (usually via the PLC) can be defined for each channel.
The parameters of the external zero offset can be read from module FE. Each
parameter is defined as an array and the individual axes are addressed using
the row index.
The maximum row index results from the maximum number of axes available in
the channel:
Max row index = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes = numMachAxes +

numSpindles
The number of geometry axes "numGeoAxes", auxiliary axes "numAuxAxes",

machine axes "numMachAxes" and spindles "numSpindles" can be read from
the module Y in area C.
linShift $AA_ETRANS[x] x = FrameNo PA

Translation of external zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes Geo axis number numGeoAxes

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.6 Drive status data
3.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /DriveHsa/State/...


Attention: The HS module cannot be addressed with MMC100/EBF/OP030
actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
% -100000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
actualSpeed MD 1701: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of rotary speed (motor)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
U/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1PO register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no
cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1RES register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100!
Multi-line: no
crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC-parameter for diagnosis
Number is displayed in hexadecimal format.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
Multi-line: no
desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Desired value of rotary speed. With linear motors: desired velocity
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
U/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Direct mounted encoder used for reading in the actual values
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MPTOR IAD

Motor mounted ( indirect ) encoder used for reading in the actual values.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

Link voltage
0 to 800
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Load. Display is in hexadecimal format
Attention: Variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Attention: Variable cannot be configured By the MMC100!
Bit0 = VSA
Bit4 = HSA
Bit8 = AM control
Bit9 = AM closed loop control
Bit12 = U/f-operation mode
bits exclude one another (except bit 12)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (displayed in hexadecimal format)
Multi-line: no

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /DriveVsa/State/...


No cyclic service may be set up on variables in this module. Only single

variable access is permitted.
actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
% -10000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
actualSpeed MD 1707: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of the rotary speed, actual velocity for linear drive (motor)
U/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

ZK1PO register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

ZK1RES register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC diagnostic parameter. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Speed setpoint
U/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Measuring circuit type of direct measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MOTOR IAD

Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

DC-link voltage
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Utilization: Represented in hexadecimal format
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Bit0 = FDD
Bit4 = MSD
Bit8 = Open-loop AM control
Bit9 = Closed-loop AM control
Bit12 = V/Hz mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (in hexadecimal format)
Multi-line: yes 1

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7 Tool and magazine data

3.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Compensation/...
The data module TO is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

The module contains the tool edge offset data for all tools. Each element can
be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the offset data for all
cutting edges of a tool are located in one column. The assignment of a tool to a
T-number is given in the module "Tool directory" (TV) in the related area T. If a
non-existent tool number is entered for the column index the request is
negatively acknowledged.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge
and the number of edges on a tool:
maxZeilenindex = numCuttEdgeParams * numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams" is given in

module Y in area N. The number of cutting edges "numCuttEdges" is always
tool-specific and is given in the module TV in associated area T.
If necessary, several rows can be addressed, so that in one request, for

example, all tool edge offset data of a single tool can be read. The offset
values of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the same
physical unit.

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPCEx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. At present 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams'
rather than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation Tool Offset (W1), Section "Tool edge".
The following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
parameter 2: Geometry -- tool point direction ($TC_DP2)
parameter 3: Geometry -- length 1 ($TC_DP3)
parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP7)
parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP8)
parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
parameter 12: Wear -- length 1 ($TC_DP12)
parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
parameter 16: Wear -- slot width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
parameter 21: Adapter -- length 1 ($TC_DP21)
parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
parameter 25: Manual Turn: Cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
Shopmill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.
2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), associated optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, associated D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.:1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function is not
activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from NCK variable
$TC_DPCE.... $TC_DPCE... contains a unique number > 32000 when a D number is not assigned.)
Important: This variable is called "edgeData" on the MMC102.

The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters: (numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
(edgeNo - 1) * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
For D numbers:
((numCuttEdgeParams *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) +
EdgeNo)

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
edgeData $TC_DPx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. At present 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams'
rather than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation Tool Offset (W1), Section "Tool edge".
The following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
parameter 2: Geometry -- tool point direction ($TC_DP2)
parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP7)
parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP8)
parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
parameter 16: Wear -- slot width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
parameter 25: Manual Turn: Cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
Shopmill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.
2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), associated optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, associated D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.:1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function is not
activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from NCK variable
$TC_DPCE.... $TC_DPCE... contains a unique number > 32000 when a D number is not assigned.)
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC.
The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
mm, inch, userdef 0 Double wr
numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
For D numbers:
EdgeNo)

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Data/...
In addition to the tool offset data other tool characteristics are stored for
managing the tools. The module TD contains the general data of the tools. The
tool characteristics can be addressed via individual multiple-line variables. The
variable line index corresponds to the T-number. If non-existent T-numbers are
accessed, the request is acknowledged negatively. The module Tool directory
(TV) in the associated T area shows which T-numbers are valid.
A new entry is provided for the tool monitoring mode:

Monitoring modes in toolMon:
0: No tool monitoring
1: Tool life monitoring
2: Workpiece number monitoring
4: Monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: Monitoring of total offset parameters (fine, $TC_SCP..., not setup offsets
$TC_ECP...) using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
adaptNo
Number of adapter defined by system parameter $TC_ADPx which is
supporting the tool
>0: adapter number
0: no adapter assigned
- 0 0 numMagPlaces UWord r
Max
Multi-line: yes T number max. T-Nummer
duploNo $TC_TP1 FBW

Duplo number (number of replacement tool)
In the tool management each tool is explicitly defined both by its identifier and its duplo number. This means that a T-
area can only contain tool identifiers with different duplo numbers.
- T-Nummer UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000
numCuttEdges $P_TOOLND[x] x = ToolNo

Number of cutting edges of a tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
toolIdent $TC_TP2 FBW

Tool identifier
- "<T-Nummer>" String[32] r
toolInfo $TC_TP11 FBW

Tool information for MMC
Not currently assigned
- 0 UWord wr
toolInMag $A_TOOLMN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current magazine in which the tool is located
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
toolInPlace $A_TOOLMLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current location in which the tool is located
- UWord r
toolMon $TC_TP9 FBW

Type of tool monitoring
0: no tool monitoring
1: tool life monitoring
2: no. of workpieces monitoring
4: monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: monitoring of total offset parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes TNo 32000
toolplace_spec $TC_TP7 FBW

Magazine location type of tool
- 9999 UWord wr
toolSearch $TC_TP10 FBW

Type of tool search for replacement tools
0: no strategy
1: next duplo no.
2: shortest path
- 0 UWord wr
toolsize_down $TC_TP6 FBW

Size downwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
toolsize_left $TC_TP3 FBW

Size to the left in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
toolsize_right $TC_TP4 FBW

Size to the right in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number t 32000
toolsize_upper $TC_TP5 FBW

Size upwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
toolState $TC_TP8 FBW

Tool state
0: not enabled
1: active tool (A)
2: enabled (F)
4: disabled (G)
8: measured (M)
16: prewarning limit reached (V)
32: tool being changed (W)
64: fixed location coded (P)
128: tool was in use (E)
- 0 UWord wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Supervision/...
The module TS is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module

contains the tool edge monitoring data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. one column contains the
monitoring data for all tool edges of a tool. The assignment of a tool to a T-
number is given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated area T. If a
non-existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is
acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge
and from the number of tool edges of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_ts * numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_ts" is given in

the module Y in area N. The number of tool edges "numCuttEdges" is always
tool specific and can be found in the module TV in associated area T.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for

example, all tool edge monitoring data of a single tool can be read. The
monitoring data of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the
same physical unit.
New tool monitoring modes "Monitoring of wear values" and "Monitoring of total
offsets":
3 new parameters are provided for these modes:
P7 = Wear prewarning limit (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6)
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
P9 = Wear setpoint (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
data $TC_MOP1[x,y] ...$TC_MOP15[x,y] x=ToolNo y=EdgeNo

Monitoring data per tool edge
Important: This is a two-dimensional variable.
9 parameters are available for each tool edge.
The parameters have the following meaning:
P1 = prewarning limit service life in minutes ($TC_MOP1)
P2 = remaining service life in minutes ($TC_MOP2)
P3 = prewarning limit workpiece number ($TC_MOP3)
P4 = remaining workpiece number ($TC_MOP4)
P5 = desired service life ($TC_MOP11)
P6 = desired workpiece number ($TC_MOP13)
P7 = prewarning limit wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
P8 = remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6) cannot be written
P9 = desired wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
Important: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
The values for P3 to P9 are stored internally as integers.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes (ToolEdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams_ts * numCuttEdges
numCuttEdgeParams_ts +
ParameterNo

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/User/...
The data module TU is defined as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains user-defined data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The
number of tool parameters (columns) is to be found in the variable
"numToolParams_tu" in the module Y in area N.
The row index is the tool number. If non-existent tools are accessed, the
request is acknowledged negatively.
The user-defined tool data are all of the same type.
data $TC_TPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = ToolNo FBW

User-defined tool parameters
Important: This is a two-dimensional variable. The column index is the parameter number.
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC !
- Double wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/User/...
The data module TUE is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains user-defined tool edge data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the user-defined data for
all tool edges are to be found in one column.The assignment of a tool to a T-
number is to given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated area T. If
a non-existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge
and the number of tool edges of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_tu * numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_tu" is given in

the module Y in area N. The number of tool-specific tool edges
"numCuttEdges" are contained in the module TV in the associated area T.
If neccessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for
example, all user-defined tool edge data of a single tool can be read. The data
are all of the same data type.
edgeData $TC_DPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=ToolNo z=EdgeNo FBW

User-defined cutting edge parameter.
Important: this is a two-dimensional variable, the column index is the T number
Caution: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC und the PLC!
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes (TooledgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tu * numCuttEdges(T-
numCuttEdgeParams_tu + Nummer)
ParamterNo

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/GrindingData/...
Special tool data are required for grinding tools. These data are contained in
the module TG. They can be addressed via several multiple-row variables. The
row index corresponds to the T number. If a non-existent T-number is
addressed negative acknowledgement is returned. The module tool directory
(TV) in the associated area T shows which T-numbers are valid.
actToolWide $TC_TPG5 W4
Current width of the grinding wheel
conntectPar $TC_TPG2 W4
Chaining rule. This parameter ( which is bitwise defined ) specifies which tool parameters of cutting edge 2 and
cutting edge 1 are chained. If the value of any chained parameter is altered, the value of the other chained parameter
is automatically adapted.
If the following bits are set, the corresponding parameters of D1 and D2 are chained:
Bit0: tool type
Bit2: geometry length1
Bit11: wear length1
Bit12: wear length2
Bit13: wear length3
Bit20: base dimension/adapter dimension length1
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- Double wr
inclAngle $TC_TPG8 W4
Angle of inclination of the inclined grinding wheel in the current plane
Grad -90 90 Double wr
maxRotSpeed $TC_TPG6 W4
Maximum rotary speed of the grinding wheel
U/min , m/min Double wr
maxTipSpeed $TC_TPG7 W4
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel
mm/min, inch/min, userdef Double wr
minToolDia $TC_TPG3 W4
Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
minToolWide $TC_TPG4 W4
Minimum width of the grinding wheel
paramNrCCV $TC_TPG9 W4
Compensation parameters for the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel"). These parameters
define which compensation value is to be used for SUG, tool monitoring and centerless grinding. The value always
refers to cutting edge D1.
3: length 1
4: length 2
5: length 3
6: radius
- Double wr
spinNoDress $TC_TPG1 W4
Spindle number to which the monitoring data and the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
refer.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool-number T 32000

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineConfiguration/...
Each tool magazine is configured with several parameters during start-up.

These configuration data together with the state information are combined in
the module TMC.
magBLMag $TC_MAMP2 W4
Number of the internal load magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBCmd W4
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBCmdState W4
Command state of the magazine (for magCBCmd)
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBIdent $TC_MAMP1 W4
Identifier of the magazine
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no
magCMCmdPar1 W4
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return variable is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCMCmdPar2 W4
Return value for command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magRPlaces W4
Total number of real magazine locations (incl. buffer and loading locations)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
magSearch W4
Type of tool search. This variable is bitwise defined.
A set bit has the following meaning:
Bit0: search active tool
Bit1: search tool by shortest path
Bit8: begin search at first location (forwards)
Bit9: begin search at current location forwards
Bit10: begin search at last location (backwards)
Bit11: begin search at current location backwards
Bit12: begin search at current location symmetrically
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magVPlaces W4
Number of defined locations for the control block
Number of virtual locations (without buffer and loading locations) for all real magazines in this area unit
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magZWMag W4
Number of internal buffer magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
modeWearGroup $TC_MAMP3
Definition of strategies relating to wear group.
The value is bit-coded. Default setting = 0.
Effects on tool status
Bit Value Meaning
0 0 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. One tool
from each tool group is set to the "active" state.
1 0 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. The "active"
status is cancelled for all tools.
"Internally" in this instance means disabling or activation due to a tool change necessitating a change in the wear
group. Activating/disabling the appropriate tools
after writing system parameters or via OPI is described in Section ???.
2... Reserved
... Reserved
7... Reserved
Search strategy for next wear group:
Bit Value Meaning
8 0 Find the next possible wear group
1 Find the wear group with the next-higher group number which can be activated
9... Reserved
... Reserved
11... Reserved
Search strategy within the wear group for the tool to be activated
Bit Value Meaning
12 0 Lowest possible duplo number
1 Lowest possible magazine location number
13... Reserved
... Reserved
15... Reserved
The active wear group can be disabled completely by negating the contents of $TC_MAP9. It is also possible to
disable any selected wear group by negating $TC_MPP8 for a
magazine location assigned to the relevant wear group.
See also system parameter actWearGrInMag / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and wear group number of
magazine location / $TC_MPP8.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineCatalogue/...
The data module TMV can be used for the following purposes:
1. To display all magazines. The most important magazine information is
combined in the module TMV. The existing magazines are sorted in ascending
order according to the magazine number without gaps. This means that
variables that are defined in this module as one-dimensional arrays contain all
magazine information without any gaps. The row index with which a specific
array can be addressed does not refer to the magazine number, it is merely a
serial number. Inserting/deleting a magazine dynamically changes the contents
of a row.
2. To access magazine data in the modules TM, TP and TPM. Before

accessing an element in the above modules, the module TV should be
consulted to determine which tools have actually been defined.
magVIdent
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax
magVNo
Number of the magazine
- UWord r
numActMags
Number of magazines in the modules TMV and TM
- numMagsMax UWord r
Multi-line: no

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineDescription/...
This module contains the information for the available tool magazines.
actWearGrInMag $TC_MAP9
Each magazine has its own active wear group (wear group number).
The number of this group is stored in OPI variables actWearGrInMag:
Meaning: Number of active wear group.
=0: No wear group active.
>0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
(this is the number of the active wear group.)
<0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
However, this wear group is disabled which means that the next tool
search is started in the next possible wear group.
This system parameter can thus also be used to disable a wear
group. See also wear group number of magazine location
/ $TC_MPP7 and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3.
-32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
- 0 Long Integer wr
magActPlace $TC_MAP8
Current magazine position
Location number of tool change position
- UWord wr
magCmd
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
magCmdPar1
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
magCmdPar2
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
magCmdState
Command state of the magazine
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
magDim $TC_MAP6 FBW

Dimension of the magazine, number of magazine lines in the box magazine
Applies to box magazines (magKind = 5) number of lines. For all other magazine types the value is 1.
- UWord r
magIdent $TC_MAP2 FBW

- String[32] r
magKind $TC_MAP1 FBW

Type of the magazine
1 = chain
3 = revolver
5 = box magazine
7 = internal magazine tool buffer
9 = internal magazine loading stations
- 0 UWord r
magLink1 $TC_MAP4 FBW

Chaining 1 of the magazine to the following magazine. Number to (next) background magazine. Can be used with
chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1,3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
magLink2 $TC_MAP5 FBW

Chaining 2 of the magazine to the previous magazine. Backward chaining of background magazines. Can be used for
chaining to chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1, 3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
magNo
Number of the magazine
- 1 numMagsMax UWord r
magNrPlaces $TC_MAP7
Number of real locations (in chain magazine) or number of slots (in box magazine)
- UWord r
magState $TC_MAP3 FBW

State of the magazine
1 = current magazine
2 = disabled
4 = magazine in loading position
8 = motion is active
16 = enabled for loading
- 2 UWord wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Magazine/...
The data module TP is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains the state and assignment of all magazine locations of a T
area. Each element can be addressed via a column or a line index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. the configuration data for all
locations of a magazine are contained in a column. The assignment of a
magazine to a magazine number is given in the associated module Magazine
directory (TMV) in the associated area T. If a non-existent magazine number is
specified for the column index, the request is negatively acknowledged.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per magazine
location and from the number of magazine locations:
maxZeilenindex = numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
The number of parameters per magazine location "numMagPlaceParams" is

given in module Y in area N and is currently 7 (8 with SW 5.1 and later).
The line indices follow the scheme below:
1: Location type ($TC_MPP1) (read only)
1: Magazine location
2: Spindle
3: Gripper
4: Loader
5: Transfer location
6: Loading station
7: Loading point
2: Location type ($TC_MPP2) (read only)
>0: Location type for virtual location
=0: "match all" (buffer location)
9999: Undefined (not a virtual location)
3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
4: Consideration of adjacent location on / off ($TC_MPP3)
0: off
1: on
5: Location status ($TC_MPP4)
1: Disabled
2: Free (<> occupied)
4: Reserved for tool in buffer location
8: Reserved for tool to be loaded
16: Occupied in left half-location
32: Occupied in right half-location
64: Occupied in top half-location
128: Occupied in bottom half-location
6: Physical magazine reference ($TC_MPP7) (read only)
Magazine number of magazine to which location belongs
7: Type index ($TC_MPP5) (read only) and new: Wear group number
from SW 5.1
Type index/wear group number is read only in SW earlier than 5.1 and
read/write from SW 5.1 if it is assigned "Wear group" meaning.
Type index: The locations of a location type in a magazine are
numbered in ascending sequence, e.g. type=2, type index=5; ==> Spindle5)
(previous meaning when location type = 1 before P5: Equals location
number when location type=1)
Wear group number from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP5?)
When location type = 1: Number of wear group to which this
magazine location is assigned.
Value range: -32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
=0: Not assigned to a wear group

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
>0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is enabled

<0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is disabled
By negating this system parameter, it is possible to disable or enable
the whole assigned wear group.
See also actWearGrInMag / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number)
and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3 (general settings for wear grouping).
8: Adapter number from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP8?)
Reference to adapter data set number.
Associated system data:

The number of parameters of this module changes accordingly:
N / Y, global system data, numMagPlaceParams = 8 from SW 5.1
The number of magazine locations "magNrPlaces" is magazine specific and

can be found in module TM in associated area T.
The locations of the buffer magazine and the loading magazine are numbered
in ascending order independently of the location type index.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that, for example, all location
data of a magazine can be read in a single request. The location data are all of
the same type.
placeData $TC_MPP1[n,m]...$TC_MPP8[n,m] n=MagNo m=SlotNo

P1: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP1)
P2: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP2)
P3: Consider adjacent location on/off ($TC_MPP3)
P4: Location status (bit arry) ($TC_MPP4)
P5: Location type index (location type numbering) ($TC_MPP5)
P6: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
P7: Reference for physical magazine (read access only) ($TC_MPP7)
P8: Number of adapter in magazine location ($TC_MPP8)
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes (LocationNo - 1) * numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
numMagPlaceParams +
ParameterNo

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment of

location data
The data module TPM is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

(ParameterNo = 1: Specifies the magazine number with which a relationship
exists.
ParameterNo = 2: Distance (in locations) between the internal location and the
magazine change position (cf. magazine number for 1st parameter) with which
a relationship will be established. It contains information about possible
multiple assignments. The column index is the magazine number.
For location P with location number p in magazine MP (= column index)

numPlaceMulti times the multiple assignments to other magazines which are
possible are stored with the associated distances to the change positions in
each of the magazines. The offset for row index zi for a location number p is
calculated according to the following rule: zi = (p-1) * numPlaceMulti *
numPlaceMultiParams + ParameterNo.
Determining the distance between the load position and the change position:
The value 9999 (magazine no. load position) must be specified for the variable
multiPlace in the column. The LocationNo (p) for the line is the number of the
load position. The line for the first assignment is calculated with Parameter = 1.
When reading the variable, the system can thus read the magazine number
linked to the intended change position. If this magazine number is correct, it is
possible to read the number of locations between the load position and the
change position with the variable multiPlace with the next higher line number. If
the magazine number read was incorrect, the following magazine assignment
must be read with the line number increased by numPlaceMulti.
multiPlace $TC_MDP1[n,m]...$TC_MDP2[n,m] n=MagNo m=SlotNo

P1: Distance between change position of magazine n and location m of 1st internal magazine (load magazine, 9999)
($TC_MDP1)
P2: Distance between change position of magazine n and location m of 2nd internal magazine (buffer magazine,
9998) ($TC_MDP2)
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and PLC !

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (LocationNo - 1) * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMultiParams *
numPlaceMultiParams+Parameter magNrPlaces
No
In this case, numPlaceMulti and

numPlaceMultiParams are other
OPI variables from module Y.

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types
The module TT is organized as a two-dimensional array where the variable

with index (1/1) contains the maximum number of columns (corresponds to the
location hierarchies) in this module. Each element can be addressed via a
column and row index:
The column index is the number of the location hierarchy + 1. The row index is
the number of the location type + 1. Row 1 contains the current T-number of
rows for a specific location hierarchy as special information.
If all location types are to be read out for a location hierarchy, this must be
defined in two steps:
1. The 1st line of each location hierarchy contains the number of assigned
location types for this hierarchy
2. Lines 2 ... n can be read out in a single request.
placeType $TC_MPTH[n,m] n=0...7 Hierarchy m=0...7 SlotType

Magazine location hierarchy
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of location type + 1 Wert aus Zeile 1

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Catalogue/...
Data module TV can be used for the following purposes:
1. For displaying all tools of a magazine. The most important tool information is
contained in module TV. Available tools are sorted consecutively in ascending
order of T-number. This means that variables that are defined as one-
dimensional arrays in this module contain all the tool information without any
gaps. The line index with which a specific array is addressed has no
connection with the tool number but is only a serial number. Inserting/deleting
tools changes the contents of a line dynamically.
2. Access to tool data in modules TD, TG, TO, TS, TU and TUE. Before an
element in one of the above modules is accessed, module TV should be
consulted to ascertain which tools are actually defined.
SW 5.1 and later: Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global

system data) defines for circular magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general
data, MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data,
location data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and
"T / AEV, working offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular
magazine location during operation or changes to the buffer magazine (earlier
behaviour).
Associated system data:

modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N / Y, global system data) with SW 5.1 and
later.
nrDuplo
Duplo number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools
numCuttEdges
Number of cutting edges of a tool
- 9 UWord r
numTools
Number of tools in the area TO
- 0 MD UWord r
MM_NUM_TOO
L
Multi-line: no
TnumWZV
Last assigned T-number for tool management
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
toolIdent
Tool identifier
- String[32] r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
toolInMag
Current magazine in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
toolInPlace
Current location in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
toolNo
T-number
- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of

_N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Find/...
This module is used for parametrizing the PI-Services _N_TMGETT and

_N_TSEARC and it contains the corresponding return parameters. It is up to
the clients to guarantee the exclusive access by using the semaphore
mechanism _N_MMCSEM with the function number for _N_TMSEARCH.
parDataTD
Parametrizing: For parameters with data type UWORD of the module TD a value can be stored as a comparison
value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in
the module TD according to parMasksTD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TD.
See module TD
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column
index) in the TD module > 1.
The maximum line index thus
equals the number of columns in
the TD module.
parDataTO
Parametrizing: For each parameter of the module TO a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TO
according to parMasksTO.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TO.
See module TO
- Double wr
index) in the TO module.
equals the number of parameters
of one edge in the TO module.
parDataToolIdentTD
Parametrizing: For the parameter with data type string[32] (tool identifier) of the module TD a value can be stored as
a comparison value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponing
parameter in the module TD according to parMasksTD.
See module TD
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes Tool identifier 1
parDataTS
Parametrizing: For each parameter of the module TS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TS
according to parMasksTS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TS.
See module TS
- Double wr
index) in the TS module.
of one edge in the TS module.

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
parDataTU
Parametrizing: For each parameter of the module TU a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TU
according to parMasksTU.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TU.
See module TU
- Double wr
index) in the TU module.
of one edge in the TU module.
parDataTUE
Parametrizing: For each parameter of the module TUE a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUE
according to parMasksTUE.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUE.
See module TUE
- Double wr
index) in the TUE module.
of one edge in the TUE module.
parDataTUS
Parametrizing: For each parameter of the module TUS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TUSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUS
according to parMasksTUS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUS.
See module TUS
- Double wr
index) in the TUS module.
of one edge in the TUS module.
parMasksTD
Parametrizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values
are stored in parDataTD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.
Value 0 : corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitweise AND, value allowed for operands of the type WORD and DOUBLEWORD only)
For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TD module > 1.
the TD module.

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
parMasksTO
Parametrizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TO that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
are stored in parDataTO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TO module.
of one edge in the TO module.
parMasksTS
Parametrizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
are stored in parDataTS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TS module.
of one edge in the TS module.
parMasksTU
Parametrizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TU that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
are stored in parDataTU. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TU module.
the TU module.

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
parMasksTUE
Parametrizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUE that indicates whether it is to serve as a
search criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison
values are stored in parDataTUE. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
logically combined with AND.

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TUE module.
of one edge in the TUE module.
parMasksTUS
Parametrizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUS that indicates whether it is to serve as a
search criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TUSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison
values are stored in parDataTUS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
logically combined with AND.

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TUS module.
of one edge in the TUS module.
resultNrOfTools
Result: Number of tools found
In the case of _N_TMGETT, it is possible to find no tools (value=0) or exactly 1 tool (value 1); in the case of
_N_TSEARC, the number of found tools can be any number > 0, limited by the number of tools in the NC or no tools
at all (value=0).
- 0 0 numTools UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
resultToolNr
Result: T-numbers of the tools found
The array elements contain the internal T- numbers of the tools found. The storing order is the order in which the
tools have been found by the PI-Service.
- 0 0 31999 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of the tools found tfNrOfResults

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineDescription/...
userData $TC_MAPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = MagazineNo

Magazine user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numMagParams_u
parameter

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data
userPlaceData $TC_MPPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=MagazineNo z=MagPlaceNo

Magazine location user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numMagLocParams_u * magNrPlaces
parameter + numMagLocParams_u
* (number of the magazine location
- 1)

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Supervision/...
userData $TC_MOPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=T-Number,z=Edge

User data for monitoring a cutting edge These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numCuttEdgeParams *
parameter + (number of the cutting numCuttEdgeParams_tus
edge -1) *
numCuttEdgeParams_tus

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Adapter/...
adaptData $TC_ADPTx; x=1,...3, $TC_ADPTT

Adapter data
mm, inch, userdef 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNo numParams_Adapt

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/ActiveCatalogue/...
The active tool edges are sorted in consecutive ascending D number sequence
in the AEV module. This module also contains the essential tool data for each
D number entered. "Active" in this case refers to the replacement tools.
(If the "unique D numbers" option is not activated in the NC, the edges are
sorted according to ascending ToolIdent and DuploNumber. The D number
variable is then set to 0 on all lines in this module.)
The D number assignment is not necessarily unique for active tools. For this
reason, the same D number may be entered in several lines (successively).
The line number is a serial number which is not related to the D number.
The number of active tool edges is stored in numActDEdges (module AEV),
e.g. example 10,
i.e. module AEV contains entries for 10 tool edges. These are sorted in
ascending D number sequence. The tool edge with the lowest D number has
index (serial number) 1, the next-higher D number index 2, etc. and the edge
with the highest D number index 10.
When tools are activated/deactivated and D numbers re-assigned, the entries

for a D number change line dynamically.
Module T / AEV is organized as a 1-dimensional variable array and can be
used for the following purposes:
- Display all tool edges, including D numbers, of active tools.
- Display associated tool data
The module contains the following information which can be addressed via a
column index:
- Single column, in 1st line only. Number of D numbers (lines, tool edges) in
the current list
- The other columns apply to all lines, each line contains tool edge data with
the following information:
- D number
- Internal T number of associated tool
- Tool edge number relative to tool
- Tool identifier
- Duplo number
- Magazine number and
- Location number of tool
Individual values cannot be altered via this module.
Re-assignment of D numbers and changes in allocation to tools (deactivate,

activate replacement tools) and other modifications to data cause changes to
toolCounter in "C / S Channel-specific status data".
Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines

for circular magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general data, MagKind=3)
whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data, location data", "T /
TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV, working
offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location
during operation or changes to the buffer magazine (earlier behaviour)).

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
cuttEdgeNo
Number of edge for this tool
Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- 1 maxnumCuttEdg UWord r
es_Tool
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges
DNo
D number

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Current number of active tool numActDEdges
edges
duploNo
Duplo number

- UWord r
numActDEdges
Number of D numbers in this list

When tool management function is active:
Specifies the number of edges belonging to tools with "active"
status (contained in the TO unit)
When tool management function is not active:
Specifies the number of all edges contained in the TO unit.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolIdent
Tool identifier

- String[32] r
toolInMag
Magazine in which tool is located

- UWord r
toolInPlace
Magazine location of tool

- UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
toolNo
Internal T number

- UWord r

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool//...
tcCarr1 $TC_CARR1
x component of offset vector l1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER /
numToBaust
tcCarr10 $TC_CARR10
x component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr11 $TC_CARR11
y component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr12 $TC_CARR12
z component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr13 $TC_CARR13
Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees)
Grad 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr14 $TC_CARR14
Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees)
Grad 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr15 $TC_CARR15
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr16 $TC_CARR16
y component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
tcCarr17 $TC_CARR17
z component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr18 $TC_CARR18
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr19 $TC_CARR19
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr2 $TC_CARR2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr20 $TC_CARR20
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr21 $TC_CARR21
Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr22 $TC_CARR22
Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr23 $TC_CARR23
Kinematic type
Kinematic type: P: Rotatable workpiece (part)
M: Rotatable tool and rotatable workpiece (mixed)
T or any character except P and M: Rotatable tool
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr3 $TC_CARR3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
tcCarr4 $TC_CARR4
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr5 $TC_CARR5
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr6 $TC_CARR6
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr7 $TC_CARR7
x component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr8 $TC_CARR8
y component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr9 $TC_CARR9
z component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup

offsets
One set of edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets, exists for each tool
edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS, edge-related location-
dependent fine total offsets.
edgeECData $TC_ECP...
Location-dependent offsets, setup value
Multi-line: yes ((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC * numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)* maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo

08/99 Lists
3 Variables

transformed setup offsets
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/CompTransfor/...
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and
operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOE.
edgeECData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, setup value

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets
One set of edge-related total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating
location.
The maximum number of operating locations is identical for all tool edges and
defined by the new variable maxnumEdgeSC
($MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) in "N / Y global system data".
numParams_SC (currently 9) offsets are provided (depending on location-
independent wear values) for each total offset set: Length 1, length 2, length 3,
radius and 5 others.
Each replacement tool has its own separate (different) data.
The NCK resets the data when the associated tool is activated if machine data
($MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 1 = 1) is used for activation.
The total offsets of a tool edge are accessible via the internal T number of the
associated tool, edge number, total offset number ("operating location").
PI Services may exist for selective creation and deletion of tool edge total
offsets.
The existence of total offsets can be controlled selectively via the new machine
data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR (OPI: maxNumSumcorr in N / Y) (P5??).
The following applies:

When the MMC2 tool management function is in use,
$MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to ensure that the total offsets
exist for all offset locations (number = maxnumEdgeSC) from creation of the
tool edge until its deletion.
(The new PI Services for creation / deletion will not currently be used by the
MMC2 tool management for turning applications). For the present, the new NC
machine data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to automatic
creation / deletion.
The method of addressing in this module is analogous to accessing "Edge data

/ offsets" by column addressing with T number (using an array access
operation to gain quick access to the total offsets of all tool edge operating
locations or all edges of a tool).
The module contains the location-dependent total offsets for all tools. Each
element is addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. all location-dependent
total offsets of this tool (for all edges / locations) can be found in one column.
If a non-existent T number is specified as the column index, the request is
The number of lines is determined by the number of total offset values, the
number of operating locations and the maximum possible edge number of a
tool:
maxZeilenindex = numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
These variables are stored in "N / Y global system data" and have the following
meanings:
numParams_SC: No. of wear offsets per location (according to L1,
L2, L3, radius and 5 others), currently 9

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
maxnumEdgeSC: Maximum number of locations (SC) per edge

maxnumCuttEdges_Tool: Max. permissible number of edges per tool
Several lines can be addressed simultaneously if necessary, allowing, for

example, all location-dependent total offsets of all edges of one tool to be read
in one request. The location-dependent total offsets of the tools are all of the
same data type and have the same physical unit.
Module T / TOS has a 2-dimensional organization.

For OPI, see Section OPI variables.
The following lines are provided for each T number (column index):
Edge 1, Location 1, L1
Edge 1, Location 1, Radius
Edge 1, Location 1, Par5
.......... ..... .....
Edge 1, Location 1, Par numParams_SC
Edge 1, ..... ......
Edge 1, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge 2, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par
numParams_SC
Interrelationship between edge parameters, total offsets and variables:

Edge parameter DL1 DL2 ... DL4
...
$TC_DP3 $TC_SCP13 $TC_SCP23 ...
$TC_SCP43 ...
$TC_SCP44 ...
$TC_SCP45 ...
....
$TC_SCP49 ...
$TC_SCP50 ...
$TC_SCP51 ...
with DLx, TC_DPy, TC_SCPz

x from 1 to 6 (maxnumEdgeSC =
$MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) and maximum = 6
y from 3 to 11
z = (10 * x) + y

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
edgeSCData $TC_SCPx; x=13,...21,....71

Location-dependent offsets, wear

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets, transformed
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and
operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS.
edgeSCData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, wear

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data
The MMC must be capable of displaying and modifying the offset data of the
tool edges as both transformed and untransformed data. The transformation
refers to the adapter data (if programmed) of magazine locations. The MMC
can display and modify both transformed and untransformed data (of the same
tool if necessary) "simultaneously" (in different applications or different MMCs).
To provide access to transformed data, a new module, T / TOT (edge data:

transformed offset data), is provided which is identical to the existing module T
/ TO (edge data: Offset data), except that it supplies transformed data instead
of untransformed data.
The information edge DNo (D numbers assigned to edges) is included under
the offset (numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) in both the T /
TOT and T / TO modules.
Both modules have a 2-dimensional organization.
The T number is the column index.

Line numbers are calculated by the following method:
(EdgeNo -1) * numCuttEdgeParams +parameter No.
numCuttEdgeParams = parameter per edge (currently 25) (from Y in N area)

EdgeNo = edge number for tool
Example: with numCuttEdgeParams = 25 and maxnumCuttEdges_Tool = 9
Column: T number
Lines:
1 edge 1, parameter 1
...
25 edge 1, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
50 edge 2, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
225 edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
226 edge 1, D No assigned to edge 1
Untransformed data:
/Tool/Compensation/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]
Transformed data:
/Tool/CompTransfor/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]
Values which can be displayed as transformed data are the 9 geo-data

(corresponding to L1, L2, L3, radius, and generally 5 other values), wear and
total offsets.
If tools which are not located in a magazine location with adapter data are
accessed via the module for transformed data, then the data are treated as if
they were untransformed.
For OPI, see Section OPI variables.

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
cuttEdgeParam
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "edgeData" in the MMC102.
numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
For D numbers:
EdgeNo)
edgedata
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in NonWindows-MMC and PLC.
numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
For D numbers:
EdgeNo)

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.8 Machine and setting data
3.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Drive/...
Global machine data
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_ MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[x] x = Axis

TAB
Machine axis name
- String[16] wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index from 0 7
DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE MD 13020: DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Power section code of drive module
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number of drive module 14
DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE MD 13000: DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Activation of 611D drive / enable high-speed inputs/outputs
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14
DRIVE_LOGIC_NR MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Logical drive number
- 0 30 Character wr
DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE MD 13030: DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Module identifier of relevant drive bus slot
1 = single-axis module
2 = two-axis module
9 = terminal block for dig. I/Os
10 = bit bus interface
- Character wr
DRIVE_TYPE MD 13040: DRIVE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Drive type identifier for each drive bus slot
1 = FDD
2 = MSD
- Character wr
INT_INCR_PER_DEG MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Calculation resolution for angular position
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
INT_INCR_PER_MM MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM

Calculation resolution for linear positions
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1
POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIM MD 10060: POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO

E_RATIO
Position control cycle factor
- 1 100 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1
SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME MD 10050: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME

Basic system clock cycle. For possible assignment of values, see description of machine data
SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME.
s 0,000125 s 0,032 s Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Axis/Drive/...
Axis-specific machine data
CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR

Setpoint assignment: Drive number / module number
- 1 15 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1
CTRLOUT_TYPE MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE

Type of setpoint output
- 0 1 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1
ENC_MODULE_NR MD 30220: ENC_MODULE_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Actual value assignment: Drive number / measuring circuit number
- 1 15 Byte wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2
ENC_TYPE MD 30240: ENC_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Type of actual value sensing (actual position value)
0 = Simulation
1 = Raw signal generator, high-resolution
2 = Square-wave generator, standard generator with pulse quadruplication
3 = Encoder for stepper motor
4 = Absolute encoder with EnDat interface
5 = Absolute encoder with SSI interface (FM-NC)
- 0 5 Character wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Settings/...
This module contains all global setting data. The physical units depend on the
variable "userScale" in module Y of area N.
MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_L
EVELTRIGGRD
Jog mode
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE
JOG at revolutional feedrate
0 = G94
1 = G95
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VEL
O
JOG velocity for G95
Grad, userdef Double wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_SET_VELO
JOG velocity for G94
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VE
LO
JOG velocity for master spindle
U/min, userdef Double wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZ
E
Variable incremental value for JOG mode
- Double wr
Multi-line: no

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Settings/...
Channel-specific setting data
DRY_RUN_FEED
Dry run feedrate
mm/min, inch/min, userdef Double wr
Multi-line: no
THREAD_START_ANGLE
Starting angle for thread
Grad Double wr
Multi-line: no

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Axis/Settings/...
Axis-specific setting data
AA_OFF_LIMIT
Upper limit of compensation value which can be preset by means of synchronized actions via the system variable
$AA_OFF.
This limit value acts on the absolutely effective compensation value via $AA_OFF.
It is possible to interrogate the compensation value for limit-range violation via the system variable $AA_OFF_LIMIT.
- Double r
Multi-line: no
SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26
Maximum spindle speed at G26 (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS
Spindle speed limitation (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25
Minimum spindle speed at G25 (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS
Working area limitation in the negative direction
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1
WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS
Working area limitation in the positive direction
WORKAREA_MINUS_ENAB
LE
Working area limitation active in the negative direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABL
E
Working area limitation active in the positive direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.9 Parameters
3.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Parameter/...
Arithmetic parameters are special predefined variables which are addressed

with the letter R followed by a number. The contents and meaning of an
arithmetic parameter are defined by the programmer of the NC program. 100 R
parameters are defined by default. The number of R parameters can be set via
the channel-specific machine data 28050 (MM_NUM_R_PARAM). Up to 1000
R-Parameters can be set.
R $R[x] x = ParameterNo PA
R parameter (up to SW 3.2)
Attention: This variable should be used for SW releases < 3.3. For later releases use the variable rpa !
Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number MM_NUM_R_PARAM
rpa R[x] x = ParameterNo PA

R parameter (from SW 3.3)
Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number + 1 MM_NUM_R_PARAM + 1

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.9.2 Area N, Mod. VSYN: NCK-specific user variables for synchronous

actions
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/SelectedFunctionData/...
This module contains NCK-specific user variables for synchronous actions.
anMarker $AN_MARKER[x] x = MarkerNo

Flag variable for synchronous motion (Note: SYNACT only)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the flag MD $MN_MM_NUM_AN_MARKER

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.9.3 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables for

synchronous actions
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SelectedFunctionData/...
This module contains channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions
acFifoN $AC_FIFOx[y] , x = FIFONo (1-10) y = ParameterNo

FIFO variable for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
The number of columns depends on the number of FIFOs
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1=2: access to the first element MD $MC_MM_LEN_AC_FIFO+6
read in
3: access to the last element read
in
4: sum of all FIFO elements
5: number of elements available in
FIFO
6: current write index in relation to
start of FIFO
7 etc: FIFO contents
acMarker $AC_MARKER[x] x = MarkerNo

Flag variable, counter for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the flag MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
acParam $AC_PARAM[x] x = ParameterNo

Dynamic parameters for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.10 Diagnostic data
3.10.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ChannelDiagnose/...
This module contains information about global NC diagnostic data.

The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only.
The net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the
gross time includes the interrupts.
The highest priority time level is the SERVO, followed by the IPO and finally
the interpreter/ preparation. To obtain useful minimum and maximum time
intervals, the corresponding variables must be initialized before the
measurement.
actCycleTimeBrut
Sum of current gross runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
actCycleTimeNet
Sum of current net runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
maxCycleTimeBrut
Sum of maximum gross runtime of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
maxCycleTimeNet
Sum of maximum net runtime of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
minCycleTimeBrut
Sum of minimum gross runtimes of all channel
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
minCycleTimeNet
Sum of minimum net runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
pcmciaDataShotAct
Current access to PCMCIA card: Transferred bytes
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement
a status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaDataShotSum
Current access to PCMCIAcard: Total length in bytes.
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaFfsLength
Length of FFS on PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaShotStatus
Current access to PCMCIA-Karte: Status
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
0: Not active
1: Write active
2: Read active
3-: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartFfsOffset
Start offset of FFS at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartShotOffset
Current access to PCMCIA card: Start offset at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

08/99 Lists
3 Variables

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.10.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ChannelDiagnose/...
This module contains information about the channel-specific NC diagnostic

data.
The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only.
The net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the
gross time includes the interrupts. The highest priority time level is the SERVO,
followed by the IPO and finally the interpreter/ preparation. To obtain useful
minimum and maximum time intervals, the corresponding variables must be
initialized before the measurement.
actCycleTimeBrut
Current gross cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation-task
ms Double r
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3
actCycleTimeNet
Current net cycle time
ms Double r
ipoBufLevel
Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in %)
% 0 100 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxCycleTimeBrut
Maximum gross cycle time
line index 3: interpreter/preparation task
ms Double wr
maxCycleTimeNet
Maximum net cycle time
ms Double wr
minCycleTimeBrut
Minimum gross cycle time
line index 3: interpreter/preparation task
ms Double wr

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
minCycleTimeNet
Minimum net cycle time
ms Double wr

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.10.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ProtocolData/...
Data lists for protocolling.This module allows to access several lines or rows at
a time.
numData
Number of data to be protocolled for an event
<= maxnumTraceProtData
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes row index 1: numData 1 bis 1 + 5 * maxnumTraceProtData
for the nth variable specification
applies ( i = 1,
...,maxnumTraceProtData)
row index 5 * (i - 1) + 1: area (area
of the variable)
row index 5 * (i - 1) + 2: unit (unit
of the variable)
row index 5 * (i - 1) + 3: col (row
index of the variable)
row index 5 * (i - 1) + 4: row (line
index of the variable)
row index 5 * (i - 1) + 5: type
(module type of the variable)

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
3.10.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProtocolEvent/...
Description of the event types. This module allows to access several rows or
columns at a time.
Description of the row index:

cyclic events:
1 = IPO cycle
non-cyclic events, referring to axis movements
2 = GEO_AXIS_START, geometry axis starts or changes its direction
3 = GEO_AXIS_STOP, geometry axis stops
4 = MA_AXIS_START, a channel’s machine axis stops or changes its direction
5 = MA_AXIS_STOP, machine axis stops
18 = GEO_AXIS_STARTa, interface NCK->PLC byte 40 bit 6/7
19 = GEO_AXIS_STOPa, interface NCK->PLC byte 40 bit 6/7
non-cyclic events, referring to channel influence
6 = NC_START, NC-start as soon as it has been identified by the NCK
7 = NC_STOP, NC-stop as soon as it has been identified by the NCK; axes
might still be moving
non-cyclic events, referring to the execution of part programs

8 = BLOCK_BEG_1, beginning of a block (the block’s first IPO cycle) without
inserted blocks, all program levels
9 = BLOCK_BEG_2, beginning of a block (the block’s first IPO cycle) with
10 = BLOCK_BEG_3, beginning of a block (the block’s first IPO cycle) without
inserted blocks, main program level and MDA level only
11 = BLOCK_END_1, end of a block (the block’s last IPO cycle) without
12 = BLOCK_END_2, end of a block (the block’s last IPO cycle) with inserted
blocks, all program levels
13 = BLOCK_END_3, end of a block (the block’s last IPO cycle) without
inserted blocks, main program level and MDA level only
16 = BLOCK_BEG_S1, with inserted blocks, all program levels
this event may not be activated simultaneously with other HL events
17 = BLOCK_END_S1, with inserted blocks, all program levels
this event may not be activated simultaneously with other HL events
20 = BLOCK_BEG_2a, with inserted blocks, all program levels
21 = BLOCK_END_2a, with inserted blocks, all program levels
22 = BLOCK_BEG_S1a, with inserted blocks, all program levels
non-cyclic events, referring to the protocol process itself

14 = start of protocolling referring to a protocol file
cyclic events
15 = IPO cycle (IPO2)
asciiMode
Data recording method for logging
0: Binary recording with fixed alignment
1: ASCII recording
2: Binary recording with variable alignment
3: Binary recording with variable alignment and discarding of redundant data sets (from SW 4.2)
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes See module header

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
dataListIndex
Data list index (see module ETPD)
0 - (maxnumTraceProtData - 1)
- UWord wr
eventActive
State of the event type
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord wr
eventActiveStatus
Diagnosis data: state of the event type
0 activated
1 not activated
2 cannot be activated, because the sum of the variable lengths is too large
3 cannot be activated, because the internal resources are not sufficient
4 cannot be activated because the prorocol file cannot be created
100-...- cannot be activated, because the variable specification with the index (value - 100) is wrong
- UWord r
maxElementsFastFifoUsed
Diagnosis data: maximum number of elements in the FIFO buffer
- UWord r
maxFileLength
Maximum length of the protocol file
- Byte wr
maxGrossFileLengthUsed
Diagnosis data: Maximum gross length of the NCK protocol file
- Byte r
maxNetFileLengthTooSmall
Diagnosis data: Number of net bytes the protocol file is too small for
- Byte r
numElementsFastFifoTooS
mall
Diagnosis data: Number of entries the FIFO buffer is too small for
- UWord r
protocolFilename
Name of the protocol file including the path
- String[64] wr

08/99 Lists
3 Variables
skip
Number of events to be skipped
- UWord wr
timePeriod
Time base (for cyclic event types only)
ms UWord r

Lists 08/99
3 Variables
3.11 MMC-state
3.11.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC
OEM-MMC: Linkitem //State/...
Some internal status data of the MMC can be accessed via this module.
/Nck/Nck/ActApplication
Current application for display in MMC
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/ActBag
Current operating mode for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/Channel
Current channel for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem
Coordinate system for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

Interface Signals 4
4.1 Data modules ..............................................................................................................4-478
4.2 Interface signals ..........................................................................................................4-480

4.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version ...................................................4-480
4.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version ....................................................4-482
4.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ........................................................4-483
4.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU) .......................................................................4-484
4.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU) .................................................4-486
4.2.6 PLC messages (DB2) ..............................................................................................4-487
4.2.7 Signals from/to NC (DB 10) .....................................................................................4-490
4.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC .......................................................................................4-495
4.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB11) ........................................................................4-500
4.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) ................................................4-502
4.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) .................................................................4-505
4.2.12 PLC machine data .................................................................................................4-509
4.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21 - 30) ............................................................4-510
4.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC →NCK)..............................................................4-527
4.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine ..............................................................4-534
4.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position ................................................................4-535
4.2.17 Interface for circular magazine ...............................................................................4-537
4.2.18 Interface for buffer (tool management) ..................................................................4-538
4.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn ...................................................................................4-539
4.2.20 Signals to/from ShopMill ........................................................................................4-544
4.2.21 NC signals influenced by the ManualTurn application ...........................................4-546
4.2.22 NC signals influenced by the ShopMill application ................................................4-549

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.1 Data modules
Module assignment DB 1 Reserved for Siemens

DB 2 to 4 PLC messages
DB 5 to 8 Basic program
DB 9 Interface for NC compile cycles
DB 10 NCK interface
DB 11 Mode group interface
DB 12 Interface for computer link and transport system
DB 13 to 14 Reserved for basic program
DB 15 Basic program
DB 16 PI service definitions
DB 17 Version code
DB 18 SPL interface (Safety Integrated
DB 19 MMC interface
DB 20 PLC machine data
DB 21 to 30 NC channel interface
DB 31 to 61 Interface for axes/spindles
DB 62 to 70 Unassigned
DB 71 to 74 Tool management
DB 75 to 76 M group decoding
DB 77 Tool management buffer
DB 78 to 80 Reserved for Siemens
DB 81 to 89 See remarks concerning ShopMill, ManualTurn
DB 81 to 127 Unassigned
Note:
Data modules of inactivated channels, axes/spindles, C programming, tool

management can be assigned by the user.
ManualTurn ManualTurn uses FCs 30 to 35 and DBs 81 to 87.

ManualTurn is a control unit for conventional cycle-controlled turning
machines. The FCs and DBs can be used without any problem if the machine
to be configured is not a turning machine with a maximum of 2 axes and one
spindle. If the machine to be configured is such a machine and, in addition to
CNC control, conventional operation is not excluded, the FCs and DBs should
not be used.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
ShopMill ShopMill uses FCs 30 to 35 and DBs 81 to 88. ShopMill is a control unit for 2
1/2D milling machines in workshop operation. The FCs and DBs can be used
without any problem if the machine to be configured is not a milling machine for
2 1/2D machining. If the machine to be configured is intended for such
applications, the FCs and DBs should not be used.
Legend • A ”*” before the interface signals means that the function is active with
signal ZERO.
• In Step7, DBB means data module byte
• In Step7, DBW means data module word (16 bits)
• In Step7, DBD means data module double word (32 bits)

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2 Interface signals
General In the following list of interface signals, a reference to relevant documentation

is provided for every signal.
This reference specifies the section number or the short designation of the
description of functions, please refer to
References: /FB/, xx, ”yyy”
xx Short designation of individual description of functions (e.g.: /A2/)
yyy Name of description of functions (e.g.: ”Various interface signals”
or title of the guide)
Inverse signals Signals marked with a ”*” are so-called inverse signals. These signals initiate
the appropriate function when a 0 signal appears rather than a 1 signal (e.g.
MCP, byte n+2.0: *NC STOP).
4.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version
Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode
D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle *Spindle Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop

switch switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2
IB n + 3 Key- Feedrate override

switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
+ - Rapid x 4th axis 7th axis R10
R15 R13 traverse R1 R4 R7
R14
IB n + 5 Axis selection
Y Z 5th axis Traverse R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis

R2 R3 R5 command R8 R6
MCS/WCS
R12
IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)
QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
Direction X 4th axis 7th axis R10
key R1 R4 R7
-
R13
QB n + 3 Axis selection
Z 5th axis Travel R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis Direction

R3 R5 command R8 R6 key
MCS/WCS +
R12 R15
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the machine control panel is assigned to the
input/output area by GP parameters; as a standard, initial address 0 is
specified for the input and output areas.
With FM-NC, the initial address is set via the SDB 210. For the supplied SDB
210, initial address 120 is specified. If another initial address is desired, this
must be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication Configuration.
Note that the GD parameters given automatically through Communication
Configuration must be set on the machine control panel.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version
Signals from machine control panel (keys)
D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle *Spindle Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop
IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
IB n + 4 Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
R15 R13 R14 +Y -Z -C R10
R1 R4 R7
IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid Travel -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 traverse command R11 R9 R8 R6
override MCS/WCS
R5 R12
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)
QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction

key
+X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel
Signals from slimline machine control panel

(keys and switches)
*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function

NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in
IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions

START *STOP var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14
IB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Signals to slimline machine control panel

(LEDs)
QB n + 0 Spindel speed override Operating mode
NC Stop SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
QB n + 1 Spindle Machine function

NC Start SP right SP Stop SP left Unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in
QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions

START STOP var. INC Unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
QB n + 3 Unassigned
Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned
QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14
QB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
4.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)
Signals from handheld unit (keys)

(input display)
IB n + 0 Reserved
IB n + 1 Reserved
IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21
IB n + 5 Acknowl- Keyswitch Rapid traverse/feed override switch

edgement
Digital E D C B A
display

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)

(Output display, LEDs)
QB n + 0 always 1
New data Line
for selection
QB n + 1 selected
line
QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
HHU digital display
QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line
QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line
QB ...
QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line
QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line
Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the handheld unit is connected to the OPI or
MCP interface of the PLC.
The initial addresses of the input/output areas and the activation must be set
via basic program parameter FB1. With the SINUMERIK 810D and FM-NC,
the handheld unit is connected to the MPI interface of the PLC.
The initial addresses of the input/output areas as well as the number of bytes
to be transferred must be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication
Configuration.
Note that the GD parameters given automatically through Communication

Configuration must be set on the handheld unit.
The parameterization is described in the Installation and Start-Up Guide and

in the Description of Functions P3 ”Basic PLC program”.
References: /BH/, ”Operator Components Manual”

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)

Signals from machine control panel simulation
Interface HPU→PLC
IB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
IB n + 1 Function key block
FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS
IB n + 2 JOG keys positive direction
If 1: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1

Ax1-Ax6=
Ax7-Ax12
IB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
IB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.
IB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert
IB n + 6 Start key block
VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
IB n + 7
Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC→HPU
QB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
QB n + 1 Function key block
FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS
QB n + 2 JOG keys positive direction
QB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction
QB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.
QB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert
QB n + 6 Start key block
VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
QB n + 7

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.6 PLC messages (DB2)
DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC→MMC), /P3/
Channel 1
0 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000-510015)
1 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
2 Feed and read-in disable byte1 (alarm no.: 510100-510131)
3 Feed and read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510108-510115)
6 Read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510200-510207)
10 NC Start disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510300-510307)
11 NC Start disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510308-510315)
12 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1(alarm no.: 511100-511107)
13 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511108-511115)
Channel 2
18 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 520000-520015)
19 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008
20-23 Feed and read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520100-520131)
24-27 Read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520200-520231)
28-29 NC Start disable byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 520300-520315)
30-31 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521100-521115)
36-143 As from channel 3, please refer to the following table

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Area Address Signal number

Channel 1, s. above DBX 0.0 - DBX 11.7 510.000 - 510.231
Channel 1, geo axes DBX 12.0 - DBX 17.7 511.100 - 511.315
Channel 2, s. above DBX 18.0 - DBX 29.7 520.000 - 520.231
Channel 3 DBX 36.0 - DBX 47.7 530.000 - 530.231
Channel 4 DBX 54.0 - DBX 65.7 540.000 - 540.231
Channel 5 DBX 72.0 - DBX 83.7 550.000 - 550.231
Channel 6 DBX 90.0 - DBX 101.7 560.000 - 560.231
Channel 7 DBX 108.0 - DBX 119.7 570.000 - 570.231
Channel 8 DBX 126.0 - DBX 137.7 580.000 - 580.231
Channel 9, channel 10 in
SW 5 not implemented
Axis/spindle
144 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600100-600015) for axis/spindle 1
145 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
146-147 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600200-600215) for axis/spindle 2
Axes 19 -31 not implemented in SW 5

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
User area 0 Bytes 1 - 8
180 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
... User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700063)
187 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056
188-195 User area 1 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: 700100-700163)
...
372-379 User area 24 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: 702400-702463)
Note
In DB2, the assignment is made between message/alarm number, text and

area identifier. All alarm or message bits are automatically transferred to the
user interface (channel, axis/spindle) through appropriate parameter settings.
If these parameter settings are not made, the bit transfer must be
programmed in the user program. The user interface can be further
influenced after the block for the error/operational messages has been
called. Only signals of the channels and axes declared in the NC machine
data can be transferred and texts displayed.
The user must acknowledge all error messages generated. Operational
messages are displayed only for as long as the relevant condition prevails.
The number of user areas can be parameterized via FB 1.
DB2/DB3 must be deleted after changing the configuration (FB1: MSGUser).
Definition of error and operational messages /P3/

Byte no. of DB2 / Error message EM or operational message OM
7 / EM 6 / EM 5 / OM 4 / OM 3 / EM 2 / EM 1 / OM 0 / EM
15 / OM 14 / EM 13 / OM 12 / EM 11 / OM 10 / EM 9 / OM 8 / OM
23 / OM 22 / OM 21 / EM 20 / EM 19 / OM 18 / EM 17 / OM 16 / EM
31 / OM 30 / EM 29 / OM 28 / EM 27 / OM 26 / OM 25 / EM 24 / EM
35 / OM 34 / EM 33 / OM 32 / EM
151 / OM 150 / EM 149 / OM 148 / EM 147 / OM 146 / EM 145 / OM 144 / EM
159 / OM 158 / EM 157 / OM 156 / EM 155 / OM 154 / EM 153 / OM 152 / EM
187 / OM 186 / OM 185 / OM 184 / OM 183 / EM 182 / EM 181 / EM 180 / EM
195 / OM 194 / OM 193 / OM 192 / OM 191 / EM 190 / EM 189 / EM 188 / EM
Example The alarms numbered from 510200 to 510207 can be generated via DB2,
DBB6 (read-in disable channel 1). These alarms are defined as error
messages as standard.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.7 Signals from/to NC (DB 10)

On-board input and output signals from NCK
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)
DBB 0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)
Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB 1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC (SW 2 and higher)
Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

DBB 2, 3
unas-
signed
DBB 4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)
Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
DBB 5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK /A2/ outputs (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 8-55 RESERVED
Note
#) Bits 4-7 of the digital input and NCK outputs can be processed by the PLC
even though there are no hardware I/Os available for this. Therefore, these
bits can be used in addition to the information exchange between NCK and
PLC.
§) On the 840D, the digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK are
physically on-board. On the FM-NC, there are no hardware I/Os for bit 0 to
bit 3. These can be processed by the PLC according to #).
The external I/O signals from the NCK have been shifted to the range starting
with DBB122.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
General signals to NCK
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)
DBB 56 Keyswitch /A2/ Acknowl. EMER-

EMER- GENCY
GENCY STOP /N2/
STOP /N2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0
DBB 57 PC INC inputs

shutdown in mode
group area
active
DBB
58 - 59
External digital inputs of the NCK
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

DBB 122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
External digital outputs of the NCK

DBB 130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Analog inputs of the NCK (external)

DBB 146 Disable the analog NCK inputs
DBB 147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC
DBW 148 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 1 of NCK
DBB Unassigned
164,165

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Analog outputs of the NCK (external)
DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC -> NCK)

DBB 166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs
DBB 167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs
DBB 168 Disable the analog NCK outputs
DBB 169 RESERVED
DBW 170 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 1 of NCK

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC

On-board NCK inputs and outputs
DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)

DBB 60 Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the
NCK (SW 2 and higher)
On-board inputs §)
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB 61-63
DBB 64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK
hardware
DBB 65-67 Unassigned
DBB 68 Handwheel 1 moved
DBB 71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units
DBB 72-96 Unassigned
Note
#) Although no associated hardware I/Os exist, the PLC can process bits 4-7
of the digital inputs and NCK outputs. Consequently, these bits can also be
used to transfer information between the NCK and the PLC.
§) The digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK exist as on-board

hardware for the 840D. No hardware I/Os are available for bits 0-3 of the FM-
NC. In accordance with #), these can be processed by the PLC.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Selection/status signals from MMC
DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)
DBB 97 Channel number for handwheel 1 /H1/

(SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

(SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

(SW 4.1 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A
DBB 100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /H1/ (SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A
axis selected handwheel
DBB 101 Axis number for handwheel 2 /H1/ (SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
DBB 102 Axis number for handwheel 2/H1/ (SW 4.1 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
DBB 103 MMC- MMC AT box

101/102 tempera- ready
MMC--> PLC
battery
alarm ture limit
General signals from NCK
DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)
DBB 104 NCK CPU HHU MCP 2 MCP 1

ready /A2/ ready ready ready
DBB 105 Unassigned
DBB 106 EMERGEN

-CY STOP
active /N2/
DBB 107 Inch NCU-link Probe actuated /M4/

system active
Probe 2 Probe 1
DBB 108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in MMC-CPU MMC CPU MMC2
/A2/ /FBA/ cyclic Ready Ready CPU ready
(MMC to (MMC to
operation OPI) MPI) E_MMC2
/A2/ /A2/
Ready

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
DBB 109 NCK Air temp. Heat sink NCK

battery alarm temp. alarm
alarm /A2/ alarm present
/A2/ NCU 573 /A2/
DBB 110 Software cams minus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 111 Software cams minus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBB 112 Software cams minus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DBB 113 Software cams minus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB 114 Software cams plus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 115 Software cams plus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBB 116 Software cams plus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DBB 117 Software cams plus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Note
Concerning NCK-CPU Ready (DBX 104.7):
This signal is the sign-of-life monitoring function for the NC. It must be
included in the safety circuit of the machine.
Concerning MMC-CPU1 READY (DBX 108.3 and DBX 108.2):
If the MMC is connected to the operator panel interface (X 101), bit 3 is set
(default). When connecting to the PG MPI interface (X 122), bit 2 is set.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
External digital input and output signals of the NCK
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/ (SW2 and higher)
DBB 186 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs
DBB 190 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Analog input and output signals of the NCK
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/ (SW2 and higher)
DBW 194 Actual value for analog input 1 of the NCK
DBW 210 Setpoint for analog output 1 of the NCK

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB11)
Mode group-specific signals
DB 11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC→NCK) /K1/
DBB 0 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 1 Single block Machine function
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 2 Machine function

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 3
Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal
"INC inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.
DB 11 Signals from mode group 1 (NCK→PLC) /K1/
DBB 4 Strobe mode

MMC--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB 5 Strobe machine function

MMC--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 6 All Mode Active operating mode

channels in group
reset state ready JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB 7 Digitizing Active machine function
REF REPOS TEACH IN

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
DB 11 Signals to mode group 2 (PLC→NCK) /K1/
DBB 20 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 21 Single block Machine function
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 22 Machine function
DBB 23 Unassigned
Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal
"INC inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.
DB 11 Signals from mode group 2 (NCK→PLC) /K1/
DBB 24 Strobe mode

MMC--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 25 Strobe machine function

MMC--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 26 All Mode Active operating mode

channels in group
reset state ready JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 27 Digitizing Active machine function

/FBD/
(SW 2 and REF REPOS TEACH IN
higher)

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Note
The other mode groups (mode group 3 to mode group 10) are also located in
DB 11 with the following initial bytes:
Mode group 3: DBB 40 Mode group 7: DBB 120
4.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic)
Parameterization section
References: /FBSI/, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC → PLC)

DBB 0 INSEP valid (valid bit)
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte
DBB 1
DBB 2 OUTSEP valid (valid bit)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte
DBB 3
DBW 4 INSEP_ADDR (address 1st input byte)
DBW 6 INSEP_ADDR (address 2nd input byte)
DBW 8 INSEP_ADDR (address 3rd input byte)
DBW 10 INSEP_ADDR (address 4th input byte)

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
DBW 20 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 1st output byte)
DBW 22 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 2nd output byte)
DBW 24 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 3rd output byte)
DBW 26 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 4th output byte)
DBB 36 SPL
READY
DBB 37
Data area / error
DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs
SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 38
SPL_DATA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD 42
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 46
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD 50
Data area for user SPL

SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 54
SPL_DATA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD 58

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 62
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD 66
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 70
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD 74
Difference in level between NCK - PLC for diagnostics

SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 78
SPL_DELTA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD 82
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 86
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD 90
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 94
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD 98
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 102
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD 106
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 110
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD 114
DBD 118 CMDSI
DBD 119
DBD 120 Error number
0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
DBD 124 Level indicator of cross-checking
(diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19)
DB 19 Signals to operator panel (PLC→MMC)
DBB 0 Actual Back up Clear Clear Key Screen Screen

value in travel recall cancel disable darkening bright
WCS recorder alarms alarms /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
0=MCS
(MMC 103 (MMC 103
/A2/
only) only)
DBB 1 Reserved
DBW 2 Higraph first error display
DBW 4 Higraph first error display
DBB 6 Analog spindle 1, capacity in percent
DBB 7 Analog spindle 2, capacity in percent
DBB 8 Channel number of machine control panel to MMC
DBB 9
DBB 10 ShopMill Reserved for selection Selection Selection Selection

control of tool of alarm of program
signal offset area area
DBB 11 Reserved for selection
DBB 12 V24 On V24 Off V24 V24 Stop COM1 COM2

External
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
/A2/
DBB 13 Load part
Select program Unload

/A2/ /A2/ /A2/
DBB 14 0=act. FS V24 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS V24 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB 15 V24 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
V24 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB 16
Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB 17
Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB 18 Reserved (test automation)
DBB 19 Reserved (signal counter)

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DB 19 Signals from operator panel (MMC → PLC)

DBB 20 MCS/WCS Simulation Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
Change- active alarm alarm actuated dark
over /A2/ cleared cleared /A2/
/A2/ /A2/
MMC 103 MMC 103
/A2/ /A2/
DBB 21
DBB 22 Displayed channel number from the MMC /A2/
DBB 23
DBB 24 V24 status from PLC
V24 On V24 Off V24 V24 Stop Com1 Com2 OK Error

External active /A2/ active /A2/
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
/A2/
DBB 25 Error V24 /A2/
DBB Reserved
26-27
DBB 28 Part program handling status /A2/
Select Load Unload Active OK Error
DBB 29 Error program handling /A2/
DBB Reserved
30-39
DBB 40 Mode group number /A2/
DBB 41 Channel number (FC9: ChanNo) /A2/
DBB 42 FC9: Start

(Measure
in Jog) /A2/
DBB 43
PLC →MMC
DBB 44 Mode
change
disable
/A2/
DBB 45 FC9 out
StarErr Error Done Activ
DBW 46 FC9: Ref
DBW 48 Reserved

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Interface 2nd MMC
DBB Assignment as for DBB 0 to DBB 49
50-99
Switchover interface to MMC
DBW 100 ONL_REQUEST /B3/

Online request from MMC
MMC writes its client identification as online request (bus type, MMC bus address)
DBW 102 ONL_CONFIRM /B3/

Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes MMC client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, MMC bus address).
DBW 104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/
MMC writes its client identification (bus type, MMC bus address).
DBB 106 PAR_MMC_TYP /B3/

Example: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...
DBB 107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /B3/

MMC writes address of MCP to be activated
DBB 108 PAR_STATUS /B3/

PLC writes online enable for MMC.
DBB 109 PAR_Z_INFO /B3/

PLC writes additional info about status
DBW 120 MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when MMC goes online.
DBB 122 MMC1_TYP /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when MMC goes online.
DBB 123 MMC1_MSTT_ADR /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when MMC goes online.
DBB 124 MMC1_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB 125 MMC1_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DBB 126 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1

CHANGE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE MSTT SHIFT
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/
DBB Reserved
127-129
Online Interface MMC 2
DBW 130 MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when MMC goes online.
DBB 132 MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when MMC goes online.
DBB 133 MMC2_MSTT_ADR /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when MMC goes online.
DBB 134 MMC2_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB 135 MMC2_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
DBB 136 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2

CHANGE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE MSTT SHIFT
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/
DBB Reserved
137-139

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.12 PLC machine data
DB 20 PLC machine data (PLC→operator)
DBW 0 INT values
DBW
DBW INT values
DBB Bit arrays
DBB
DBB Bit arrays
DBD REAL values
DBD
DBD REAL values
Note
The initial and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas depend on the
respective length indications of the partial areas. In general, the integer
values start with the data byte 0. The upper limit is determined by the
corresponding length indication. In general, the following bit arrays (2-decade
hexadecimal numbers on input) start with the following even address. The
real values follow directly the bit arrays and also start with an even address.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21 - 30)
DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
DBB 0 Activate Activate Activate Activate Execution

dry run M01 single DRF /H1/ from
feedrate /K1/ block /K1/ external
/V1/ source
DBB 1 Activate PLC action CLC CLC stop Time Synchron- Enable Activate
program complete override /TE1/ monitoring ized action protection referencing
test /K1/ /TE1/ act. (tool OFF zones /R1/
/K1/ manage- /A3/
ment)
DBB 2 Skip block /K1/
/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0
DBB 3 Nibbling and punching /N4/
Stroke Stroke not Stroke Manual No stroke

delayed operating suppres- stroke enable /N4/
/N4/ /N4/ sion /N4/ enable /N4/
DBB 4 Feedrate override /V1/
H G F E D C B A
DBB 5 Rapid traverse override /V1/
H G F E D C B A
DBB 6 Feedrate Rapid Program Delete Delete Read-in Feed

override traverse level abort subroutine distance- disable disable
active /V1/ override /K1/ no. of to-go /K1/ /V1/
active /V1/ passes /A2/
DBB 7 Reset NC Stop NC Stop NC Stop to NC Start NC Start

/K1/ axes plus /K1/ block limit /K1/ disable
spindle /K1/ /K1/
/K1/
DBB 8 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB 9 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 10 Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 11 Area 10 Area 9

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Note
on Feedrate override active (DBX6.7)
even if feedrate override is not active (= 100 %), the setting 0% is effective.
on Feedrate override (DBB 4)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-200%

corresponding to the dual value in byte (201-255 ⇒ max. 200 %).
on Rapid traverse override (DBB 5)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-100%
corresponding to the dual value in byte (101-255 ⇒ max. 100 %).
on Activate single block (DBX0.4)
select variant via ”Write variable”.
on Delete distance-to-go (DBX6.2)
effects only path axes and not positioning axes
Control signals to geometry axes
DBB 12 Geometry axis 1
Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1
DBB 13 Geometry axis 1 machine function /H1/
Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 14 OEM signals geometry axis 1
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1
Note
about machine function: machine function only defined when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is not set.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Operating signals from MMC/status signals from NC channel
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC,

21-30 MMC→PLC, PLC→NCK)
DBB 24 Dry run M01 Single DRF Execution

feedrate selected block selected from exter-
MMC--> PLC
selected /K1/ selected /H1/ nal source
/V1/ selected
DBB 25 Program Feedrate

test override for
MMC--> PLC
selected rapid
/K1/ traverse
selected /V1/
DBB 26 Skip block

selected /K1/
MMC--> PLC
(SW 2 and
higher)
DBB 27 Reserved
MMC--> PLC
DBB 28 OEM channel signals

PLC→NCK
DBB 29
PLC→NCK Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed
disable wear workpiece PTP
4 3 2 1
tool monitoring counter motion /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
/V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/
(SW 4 and (SW 4 and (SW 4 and (SW 4 and
higher) higher) higher) higher)
DBB 30 Activate contour handwheel

PLC→NCK
Neg. Simulation Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
direction contour 3 2 1
simulation handwheel
contour on
handwheel
DBB 31 Reserved
PLC→NCK
DBB 32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution

block active block block from external
NCK--> PLC
active /K1/ /K1/ active /K1/ active /K1/ source
active
DBB 33 Program Transforma M02/M30 Block Handwheel Revolutio- Referencing

test active tion active active search override nal active
NCK--> PLC
/K1/ /K1/M1 /K1/ active active (SW 2 feedrate /R1/
/K1/ and higher) active /V1/
/H1/
DBB 34 OEM channel signals feedback

NCK--> PLC

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DBB 35 Channel status /K1/ Program status /K1/

NCK--> PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
DBB 36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes All axes
with specific ready processing stationary requiring
NCK--> PLC
processing NCK alarm for active /B1/ reference
stop present operation /K1/ points are
present /A2/ in SW referenced
/A2/ version 4 /R1/
and higher
DBB 37 Stop Read-in CLC CLC CLC Contour handwheel active

NCK--> PLC
at block enable is stopped stopped active Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
end with ignored upper limit lower limit /TE1/ 3 2 1
SBL is /TE1/ /TE1/ /H1/ /H1/ /H1/
sup-
pressed
DBB 38 Nibbling and punching /N4/

NCK--> PLC
Acknowled Stroke
gement enable
manual active /N4/
stroke
enable /N4/
DBB 39 Protection
zones not
NCK--> PLC
guaranteed
Note
on Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected (DBX25.3)
Depending on this signal, the basic PLC program copies the feedrate
override onto the rapid traverse override on the channel-specific interface.
On Program test selected (DBX25.7)
”Program test selected” means axis disable for all channel axes and spindles.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Status signals of geometry axes

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Traverse command /H1/ Handwheel active /H1/

plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 41 Geometry axis 1 active machine function /H1/
DBB 44
MMC--> PLC

plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 50
MMC--> PLC

plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 56
MMC-->
PLC
DBB 57

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

21 - 30
DBB 58 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1

change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/

not not not not not
decoded decoded decoded decoded decoded
DBB 60 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1

quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 61 T fct 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1

quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and /H2/
higher) higher)
DBB 62 D fct. 1 D fct. 1 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1

quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and /H2/
higher) higher)
DBB 63 DL fct. 1 DL fct.

quick change
DBB 64 H fct. 1 H fct. 1 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1

quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 65 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1

change change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/

quick quick quick quick quick
DBB 67 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1

quick quick quick quick quick quick
Note
For 10-decade T numbers, only the T fct. 1 change signal is available. For
5-decade D numbers, only the D fct. 1 change signal is available.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Transferred M/S functions

21 - 30
DBW 68 Extended address M function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 70
M function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 76 M function 2 (binary) /H2/
DBW 98 Extended address S function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 100 S function 1 (REAL format) /H2/
Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format
(8 decades plus sign).
”REAL format” means: 24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Transferred T/D/DL functions

21 - 30
DBW 116 Extended address T function 1 (16 bit Int)
DBW 118 T function 1 (binary) /H2/

For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBD 118
DBW 122 T function 2 (Int)
DBW 126 T function 3 (Int)
DBB 128
DBB 129 D function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBW 130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
DBB 130 Extended address D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 131 D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 132 Extended address D function 3 (8 bit Int)
DBB 133 D function 3 (8 bit Int)
DBW 134 Extended address DL function (16 bit Int)
DBD 136 DL function (REAL)
Note
With active tool management, programmed T functions are not output to the
PLC.
8-decade T nos. are only available as T function 1
Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTEDGE_1) cannot be
output in ASCII format to the PLC.
5-decade D nos. are only available as D function 1
The REAL format corresponds to floating point representation in STEP 7
(24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a
maximum of 7 valid places.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Transfered H/F functions

21 - 30
DBW 140 Extended address H function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 142 H function 1 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 158 Extended address F function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 160 F function 1 (REAL format) /H2/
Note
F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL format.

The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the
following meaning:
0 = path feed,
1-31 = machine axis number for feed with positioning axes.
The H function data type is dependent on MD 22110: AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT.

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Decoded M signals (M0 - M99)

21 - 30
DBB 194 Dynamic M functions
M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00
DBB 195 Dynamic M functions /H2/
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32
M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40
M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48
M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56
M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64
M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72
M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80
M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88
M99 M98 M97 M96
DBB 207
Note
M functions marked with * are not decoded in this bit array if a spindle is
configured in the channel. In this case, these M functions are offered as
extended M functions in DB21-30.DBB68 ff. and in the relevant axis DB
DB31-61.DBB86 ff.
Dynamic M functions (M00 to M99) are decoded by the basic PLC program.
The PLC user must use dynamic M functions in order to generate static M
functions.

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Active G functions
21 - 30
DBB 208 Number of active G function of G function group 1 (binary) /K1/
...
DBB 270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /K1/
DBB 271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /K1/
Note
The active G functions of the groups are updated each time a G function or a
mnemonic identifier (e.g. SPLINE) is programmed.
G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1.
A G function with the value 0 means that no G function is active for this G
group.
Signals for protection areas from NC channel
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 2 and higher)

21 - 30
DBB 272 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
DBB 273 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 274 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
DBB 275 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 276 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DBB 277 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 278 Channel-specific protection area violated /A3/
DBB 279 Channel-specific protection area violated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel

DB Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 4 and higher)
21 - 30
DBB 280 Synch. D number

action request to
request to NCK
NCK
DBB 281 Synch.

action
request
from NCK
DBW 282 Assignment D1
DBB 300 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/
No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Note
The request signals are set by the user and reset by the basic program after
transmission of the corresponding data.
Instruction-controlled signals from NC channel
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 4 and higher)

21 - 30

Cyclic Signals interface NCK Å PLC
DBB 316 Active G functions
G00 *
DBB 317 Cartesian point-to-point motion
Tool PTP External

missing motion language
active mode
active
DBB 318
Dryrun ASUP
feedrate stopped
DBB 319
* applies to Geo axes only

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Signals to orientation axes
DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
DBB 320 Traversing keys Orientation axis 1
+ − Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

− − traverse key disable
(bit value coding)
override
DBB 321 Orientation axis 1
DBB 322 OEM signals orientation axis 1
+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

traverse key
stop (bit value coding)
override
disable
+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

key
traverse stop (bit value coding)
disable
override

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Signals from orientation axes

21 - 30
DBB 332 Travel command Orientation axis 1
plus minus Handwheel active

(bit value coding)

Active machine function

(bit value coding)


(bit value coding)


Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Tool management functions from NC channel

21 - 30
Modification signals tool management functions
DBB 344 Last Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-

replace- new value warning
ment tool replace- reached limit
of tool ment tool reached
group
DBB
345-347
Transferred tool management functions
DBD 348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DInt)
DBD 352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)
DBD 356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)
DBD 360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK)
DB Signals to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK)

31 -61
DBB 0 Feedrate override /V1/

Axis and
spindle H G F E D C B A
DBB 1 Override Position Position Follow-up Axis/spindle Sensor fixed Acknowl. Drive test
active measuring measuring mode /A2/ disable stop fixed stop movement
Axis and
/V1/ system 2 system 1 /A2/ /F1/ reached enable
spindle /A2/ /A2/ (SW 2 and /F1/ (SW 2
higher) and higher))
DBB 2 Reference point value /R1/ Clamping Delete Controller Cam

in progress distance-to- enable activation
Axis and
/A3/ go/ spindle /A2/ /N3/
spindle reset (SW 2 and
/A2, S1/ higher)
4 3 2 1
DBB 3 Velocity/ Activate Activate Activate Activate Enable Accept

spindle fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed travel to external ZO
Axis and
speed fixed stop /K2/ (SW 2
spindle limitation 4 3 2 1 /F1/ SW 2 and higher)
/A3/ /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, and higher)
/V1/ (SW 4 /V1/ (SW 4 /V1/ (SW 4 /V1/ (SW 4
and higher) and higher) and higher) and higher)
DBB 4 Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel /H1/
Axis and traverse key disable stop/spindle
spindle override /H1/ stop /A2/
/H1/
plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 5 Machine function /H1/

Axis and
spindle Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 6 OEM axis signals

Axis and
spindle
DBB 7
DBB 8 Request Activation Allocate NC axis to channel

PLC signal with /K5/
axis/spindle change of
this byte
/K5/ /K5/ D C B A
Note
DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment (SW 3.7, 4.2 and higher). For
previous SW versions, the activation signal must be applied until the
assignment is made (DBB68).

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
DBB 9 Parameter Parameter block servo (SW4 and
set higher) /K2/
Definition
from NC
disabled
C B A
DBB
10-11
DBB 12 Delay 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
reference /A3/ /A3/
Axis
point
approach
/R1/
plus minus plus minus
DBB
13-15
DBB 16 Delete No n- Resyn- Resyn- Gear has Actual gear stage /S1/
S value monitoring chronize chronize changed
Spindle
/S1/ when spindle 1 spindle 2 over /S1/
changing /S1/ /S1/
gear /S1/
C B A
DBB 17 Invert Resyn- Resyn- Feedrate

M3/M4 chronize chronize override f.
Spindle
/S1/ spindle at spindle at spindle
pos. 2 /S1/ pos. 1 /S1/ valid /S1/
DBB 18 Setpoint rot. direct. /S1/ Oscillating Oscillation

speed via PLC
Spindle
/S1/ /S1/
CCW CW
DBB 19 Spindle override /V1/

Spindle
H G F E D C B A
DBB 20 Speed Torque Ramp- Runup

setpoint limit 2 function change-
611D
smoothing /A2/ generator over U/f
/A2/ interface mode
/A2/ /DE1/
DBB 21 Pulse n controller Selecting Motor selection /A2/ Drive parameter set selection /A2/
enable integrator motor
611D
/A2/ disable /A2/
/A2/
B A C B A
DBB 22 Speed limit Speed limit Deselect Deselect

bit value 1 bit value 0 safe safe
Safety
standstill velocity and
Integr. standstill

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
DBB 23 Activate Activate Trans- Trans- Trans-
test stop end mission of mission of mission of
Safety
position bit value 2 bit value 1 bit value 0
Integr. pair 2
DBB 24 Master/ Bit value for (Stepper motor)

slave on
CTRLOUT_changed:
1 0
Change setpoint output Step mode Rotation
assignment (for compile fine/coarse monitoring
cycles)
DBB 25
DBB 26 Enable Enable

Grinding emergency slave axis
retraction overlay
DBB 27
Grinding
DBB 28 PLC Stop /P5/ Stop at Change Set

checks (SW 2 and next reversal reversal
Oscillation
axis /P5/ higher) reversal point /P5/ point /P5/
(SW 2 and point (SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) /P5/ (SW 2 higher) higher)
and higher)
DBB 29 No auto Start

sync gantry
Grinding
synchroni-
zation run
/G1/ (SW 2
and higher)
DBB 30-
31
Grinding
DBB 32 Deselect Deselect Deselect

Safety external external external
Integr. stop D stop C stop A
DBB 33 Select override
Safety Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0

Integr.
DBB 34
DBB ...
DBB 59

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Note
The IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DBX2.2) is effective only for position axes on

an axis-specific basis; the IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DB21-30, DB6.2) acts
on a channel-specific basis. The IS ”Spindle reset” (DXB2.2) acts on a
spindle-specific basis.
Signals from axis/spindle
DB Signals from axis/spindle (NCK→PLC)

31 -61
DBB 60 Position reached /B1/ References/ References/ Encoder Encoder NCU_Link Spindle
Axis and with exact with exact synchro- synchro- limit limit Axis active /no axis
spindle stop fine stop nizes nizes frequency frequency /S1/
coarse 2 /R1/ 1 /R1/ exceeded exceeded /B3/
2 /A3/ 1 /A3/
DBB 61 Current Speed Position Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axis Travel
controller controller controller stationary mode container request
Axis and /B3/
active /A2/ active /A2/ active /A2/ (n < nmin) active /A2/ /F1/
spindle /A2/ rotation
active /B3/
DBB 62 Force fixed Fixed stop Activate Measure- Revolutio- Handwheel Software
stop limited reached travel to ment nal overlay cams
/F1/ (SW /F1/ fixed stop active feedrate active /H1/ active /N3/
5.2) (SW 2 and /F1/ (SW 2 active (SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) and higher) higher) higher)
DBB 63
DBB 64 Traverse command /H1/ Handwheel active /H1/

Axis and
spindle plus minus 3 2 1
65 Active machine function /H1/

Axis and
spindle Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 66 OEM axis signals (reserved)

Axis and
spindle
DBB 67
DBB 68 NC axis/spindle in channel /K5/
PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis New type D C B A

spindle spindle replacement requested by
/K5/ /K5/ possible PLC
/K5/ /K5/
DBB 69 NCU number in NCU link network Parameter block servo
C B A
DBB 70-71
DBB 72
DBB 73-75

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
DB Continuation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
DBB 76 Rotary axis Indexing Positioning Scratch
in position axis in axis pulse
Axis
position /P2/ /A2/
/T1/
DBB 77
DBB 78
Axis
F function (REAL format)
for positioning axis /V1/
DBB 82 Gear Setpoint gear stage /S1/

change-
Spindle over /S1/
C B A
DBB 83 Actual Speed Spindle in Support Geometry Set speed Set speed Speed limit
rotat. monitoring setpoint area limits monitoring increased limited exceeded
Spindle
direction /W1/ range /S1/ violated /W1/ /S1/ /S1/ /S1/
CW (SW 2 and /S8/ (SW 2 and
/S1/ higher) (SW 2 and higher)
higher)
DBB 84 Active spindle operating mode /S1/ Synchro- Tapping CLGON SUG active Const.
nous mode without active (grinding cutting
Spindle
/S3/ compen- /S8/ wheel speed
(SW 2 and sating (SW 2 and surface active
higher) chuck /S1/ higher) speed)
Control Oscillation Positioning
mode mode mode
DBB 85
Spindle
DBB 86 M function (binary) for spindle /S1/

Spindle
DBD 88
Spindle
S function (floating-point) for spindle /S1/
DBB 92 Speed Torque HLGSS Set-up

setpoint limit 2 active mode
611D
smoothing active /A2/ /A2/ active /A2/
active /A2/

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals

31-61
DBB 93 Enable n controller Drive Active motor /A2/ Active drive parameter set /A2/
pulses integrator ready
611D
/A2/ disabled /A2/
/A2/
B A C B A
DBB 94 Variable nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < Md < Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning
signaling nmin /A2/ /A2/ complete /A2/
611D /A2/ /A2/
fct. /A2/ /A2/
Heat sink Motor
DBB 95 UDC-link <

611D alarm
threshold
/A2/
DBB 96 Master/ Bit value for (Stepper

slave active CTRLOUT_changed: motor)
/TE3/ error
rotation
monitoring
/S6/
1 0
Change setpoint output

assignment (for compile
cycles)
DBB 97
DBB 98 Emergency Accelera- Speed Overlaid Actual value Synchronism (SW 2 and
Synchro- retraction tion warning motion coupling higher) /S3/
nous spindle active warning threshold /S3/ (SW2 /S3/ (SW2
threshold reached and higher) and higher)
reached
coarse fine
DBB 99 Emergency Max. acce- Max. Synchro- Axis acce- Slave Master
Synchro- retraction leration speed nization lerating spindle spindle
nous spindle enabled reached reached running active active
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) higher)
/S3/ /S3/
DBB 100 Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in Oscillation

Grinding active /P5/ motion active /P5/ oscillation cannot
(SW 2 and active /P5/ /P5/ start /P5/
higher)
DBB 101 Gantry axis Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry cut-
/G1/ leading grouping is synchroni- warning off limit
Gantry
axis synchro- zation run limit exceeded
(SW 2 and /G1/ nous ready to start exceeded /G1/
higher) /G1/ /G1/ /G1/
DBB 102,
103
DBB 104 Active infeed axis /P5/
Grinding
(SW2 and
higher) Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals

31-61
Axis 16 Axis 9
Axis 24 Axis 17
Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 25
DBB 108 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /
Axis safely Delete Safe speed

referenced pulses via or zero
external speed active
circuit
DBB 109 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Actual position > cam position
SC 4- SC 4+ SC 3- SC 3+ SC 2- SC 2+ SC 1- SC 1+
DBB 110 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
n < nx Safe velocity Safe velocity Safe zero

active bit active bit speed
value 1 value 0 active
DBB 111 Reserved for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /
Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B

active active active active

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

DB 71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)
DBB 0 Interface (I) active
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. res. res. NC Position at Reload Unload Load
program loading point
positions
magazine
DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
DBD
n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBD
DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)
DBW
n + 16 Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW
n + 18 No. of loading station (Int)
DBW
n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading (Int)
DBW
n + 22 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading (Int)
DBW
n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 28 Spare
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Loading/unloading station 1: n= 4 Loading/unloading station 3: n= 64
Loading/unloading station 2: n= 34 Loading/unloading station 4: n= 94
Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any
location (e.g. buffer). References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management"

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position
DB 72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. Replace Replace OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
manual manual buffer no. change change sory
tool tool. (n-42) (initiate: change
M06)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
DBD
DBD
DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)
DBW Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)

(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
n + 16
DBW Relative location (target) in the buffer (Int)
n + 18
DBW Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 20

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DBW Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)

n + 22
DBW Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 24
DBW Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28
DBW Tool new: size left (Int)
n + 30
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)
n + 32
DBW Tool new: size top (Int)
n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)
n + 36
DBB Tool status for tool new
n + 38
Tool was in Tool fixed Prewarning Tool Tool Active tool
use location limit measured enabled
coded reached
DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
n + 42
DBW Spare
n + 44
DBW Spare
n + 46
Initial addresses of the buffers:
Spindle 1:n= 4
Spindle 2:n = 52
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.17 Interface for circular magazine
DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK→PLC)
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. res. res. res. T0 res. Perform Obligatory
change change
(initiation:
T no.)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
n+2
DBB Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
n+3
DBD Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
n+4
n+8
n + 12
DBW Reserved
n + 16
DBW Reserved
n + 18
DBW Circular magazine no. (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Reserved
n + 24
DBW Location no. for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28
DBW Tool new: size left (Int)
n + 30

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)

n + 32
DBW Tool new: size top (Int)
n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)
n + 36
DBB Tool status for tool new
n + 38 Tool was in Tool fixed Prewarning Tool Tool Active tool

use location limit measured enabled
coded reached
DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW Spare
n + 42
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4
2: n = 48
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”
4.2.18 Interface for buffer (tool management)

(available soon)
Note
On a tool change the PLC can detect whether a tool is about to be disabled
because the tool life or workpiece counter has been exceeded. The signal
"Prewarning limit reached" is scanned for this. The prewarning threshold
must be set correspondingly.
DB77 is set up. However, its signals and data cannot yet be addressed in
SW 5.1.
DB77 Buffer (tool management)

DBB n+0 Data not Buffer
complete occupied
(ZWS)
DBB n+1 Request

ZWS data
DBW n+2 Magazine no. of old location (Int)
DBW n+4 Location no. of old location (Int)
DBW n+6 Tool: Location type (Int)
DBW n+8 Tool: Size left (Int)
DBW n+10 Tool: Size right (Int)

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
DBW n+12 Tool: Size above (Int)

DBW n+14 Tool: Size below (Int)
DBB n+16 Tool status for tool
Tool was in Tool fixed Pre- Measure Tool Active
use location warning
tool enabled tool
coded limit
reached
DBB n+17 Tool status for tool
DBW n+18 Tool: T No. (Int)
Note
Initial addresses of the buffers:
Buffer 1: n = 0
2: n = 20
3: n = 40
...
m: n = (m-1)*20
4.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn

Note
Details for the listed signals are contained in

References: /FBMA/, Description of Functions ManualTurn
DB82 Signals to ManualTurn (input signals)

Address Name Initial value Comment
0.0 CTM_IN.mode B#16#0 Special operating modes for ManualTurn
1.0 CTM_IN.feed_ovrd B#16#0 Feed override switch

2.0 CTM_IN.spindle_ovrd B#16#0 Spindle override switch
4.0 CTM_IN.nc_start.open TRUE NC Start, break contact element
4.1 CTM_IN.nc_start.close FALSE NC Start, make contact element
6.0 CTM_IN.nc_stop.open TRUE NC Stop, break contact element
6.1 CTM_IN.nc_stop.close FALSE NC Stop, make contact element
8.0 CTM_IN.spindle_start.open TRUE Spindle start, break contact element
8.1 CTM_IN.spindle_start.close FALSE Spindle start, make contact element
10.0 CTM_IN.spindle_stop.open TRUE Spindle stop, break contact element
10.1 CTM_IN.spindle_stop.close FALSE Spindle stop, make contact element
12.0 CTM_IN.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rotational direction, counterclockwise

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
12.1 CTM_IN.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rotational direction, clockwise

12.2 CTM_IN.direction_xz_off FALSE Axis direction xz off
12.3 CTM_IN.x_plus FALSE 1st geometry axis (X axis) in plus direction
12.4 CTM_IN.x_minus FALSE 1st geometry axis (X axis) in minus direction
12.5 Reserved - -
12.6 Reserved - -
12.7 CTM_IN.z_plus FALSE 3rd machine axis (Z axis) in plus direction
13.0 CTM_IN.z_minus FALSE 3rd machine axis (Z axis) in minus direction
13.1 CTM_IN.direction_c_off FALSE Machine axis direction (C) off
13.2 Reserved - -
13.3 Reserved - -
13.4 CTM_IN.c_plus FALSE 3rd machine axis (C axis) in plus direction
13.5 CTM_IN.c_minus FALSE 3rd machine axis (C axis) in minus direction
13.6 CTM_IN.increment FALSE Increment on/off
13.7 CTM_IN.fix_feed1 FALSE Fixed feedrate F1 on
14.3 CTM_IN.hand_wheel_1 FALSE Handwheel factor 1 on/off
14.6 CTM_IN.contour_feed_plus FALSE Contour feedrate plus
14.7 CTM_IN.contour feed_minus FALSE Contour feedrate minus
15.0 CTM_IN.contour_wheel FALSE Contour handwheel on/off
15.1 CTM_IN.x_wheel FALSE Handwheel for 1st geometry axis (X axis) on/off
15.2 Reserved - -
15.3 CTM_IN.z_wheel FALSE Handwheel for 3rd geometry axis (Z axis)
on/off
15.4 CTM_IN.single_block FALSE Single block on/off
15.5 CTM_IN.teach_feed FALSE Teach In, feedrate (G01)
15.6 CTM_IN.teach_rapid FALSE Teach In, rapid traverse (G00)
15.7 Reserved - -
16.0 CTM_IN.jog_feed FALSE Setup feedrate (override is active)
16.1 CTM_IN.disable_popup FALSE Suppression of the pop-up alarm window
16.2 CTM_IN.disable_cnc_standard FALSE Switchover to standard CNC suppressed
16.3 CTM_IN.reset FALSE RESET
16.4 CTM_IN.disable_spindle_control FALSE Suppression of the ManualTurn spindle
control
16.5 CTM_IN.reset_nc_start_dir_off FALSE Reset NC Start on selection of direction in
operating mode MANUAL, SK STRAIGHT
17.0 CTM_IN.assign_contour_wheel B#16#0 Assignment of contour handwheel to
handwheel 1, 2 ,3
18.0 CTM_IN.vconst_max_input_locked FALSE Enter disable speed limitation

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
18.1 CTM_IN.spdle_speed_input_locked FALSE Enter disable speed limitation

18.2 Reserved
18.3 CTM_IN.spindle_speed_unit FALSE Unit of speed
18.4 CTM_IN.set_spindle_speed FALSE Accept speed value/unit
18.5 CTM_IN.start_spindle_asup FALSE Start asynchronous subroutine for external
spindle control
22.0 CTM_IN.spindle_speed_value B#116#0 Spindle speed or cutting speed
26.0 Reserved - -
30.0 Reserved - -
34.0 CTM_IN.teach.m_func B#16#0 Teach buffer for M functions
36.0 Reserved - -
38.0 CTM_IN.teach.strobe FALSE Strobe for acceptance of the Teach buffer
DB82 Signals from ManualTurn (output signals)

40.0 CTM_OUT.ctm_activ FALSE ManualTurn active
40.1 CTM_OUT.x_plus FALSE 1st geometry axis (X axis) in plus direction
40.2 CTM_OUT.x_minus FALSE 1st geometry axis (X axis) in minus direction
40.3 Reserved - -
40.4 Reserved - -
40.5 z_plus FALSE 3rd geometry axis (Z axis) in plus direction
40.6 z_minus FALSE 3rd geometry axis (Z axis) in minus direction
40.7 Reserved - -
41.0 Reserved - -
41.1 CTM_OUT.c_plus FALSE 3rd machine axis (C axis) in plus direction
41.2 CTM_OUT.c_minus FALSE 3rd machine axis (C axis) in minus direction
41.3 CTM_OUT.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rot. direct. clockwise preselected
41.4 CTM_OUT.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rot. direct. counterclockw. presel.
41.5 CTM_OUT.nc_activ FALSE NC part program active
41.6 CTM_OUT.nc_stopped FALSE NC part program interrupt requested
41.7 CTM_OUT.spindle_activ FALSE Spindle running
42.0 CTM_OUT.spindle_stopped FALSE Spindle stop requested
42.1 CTM_OUT.hand_wheel_1 FALSE Handwheel factor 1
42.4 CTM_OUT.contour_wheel FALSE Contour handwheel
42.5 CTM_OUT.x_wheel FALSE Handwheel for 1st geometry axis (X axis)
42.6 Reserved - -
42.7 CTM_OUT.z_wheel FALSE Handwheel for 3rd geometry axis (Z axis)
43.0 CTM_OUT.spindle_speed_set FALSE Speed value/unit accepted
43.1 CTM_OUT.single_block FALSE Single block selected
43.2 CTM_OUT.spindle_control_disabled FALSE Spindle control ManualTurn suppressed
43.3 CTM_OUT.teach_in_activ FALSE Teach In selected

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
43.4 CTM_OUT.reset FALSE Reset pressed

43.5 CTM_OUT.reference_mode_selected FALSE Reference point approach selected
43.6 CTM_OUT.manual_mode_straight FALSE SK "STRAIGHT" selected in manual mode
43.7 CTM_OUT.manual_mode_conical FALSE SK "CONICAL" selected in manual mode
44.0 CTM_OUT.spindle_pos_mode_sel FALSE SK "ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP" is activated
45.0 CTM_OUT.active_mmc_mode B#16#0 Active operating mode
46.0 Reserved - -
47.0 Reserved - -
48.0 Reserved - -
52.0 Reserved - -
56.0 Reserved - -
60.0 Reserved - -
64.0 CTM_OUT.errors.nc_start_error FALSE Error messages, NC Start key defective
64.1 CTM_OUT.errors.nc_stop_error FALSE Error messages, NC Stop key defective
64.2 CTM_OUT.errors.spindle_start_error FALSE Error messages, spindle start key defective
64.3 CTM_OUT.errors.spindle_stop_error FALSE Error messages, spindle stop key defective
64.5 Reserved - -
64.6 Reserved - -
64.7 Reserved - -
65.0 Reserved - -
65.1 Reserved - -
65.2 Reserved - -
66.0 Reserved - -
67.0 Reserved - -
68.0 Reserved - -
72.0 Reserved - -
76.0 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on FALSE NCK signal monitor function active
(input signal)
76.1 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize FALSE Initialize data
(input signal)
78.0 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1]. W#16#0 Current number of error message 1
current_number (output signal)
80.0 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1]. B#16#0 DB number of error message 1
db_number (output signal)
81.0 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1]. B#16#0 Byte number of error message 1
byte_number (output signal)
82.0 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1]. B#16#0 Bit number of error message 1
bit_number (output signal)
: :

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals


Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
4.2.20 Signals to/from ShopMill
Note
Details for the listed signals are contained in

References: /FBSP/, Description of Functions ShopMill
DB82 Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

0.0 CMM_IN.transfer_base_sig B#16#0 Transmission mode for MCP signals
2.0 CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manu FALSE Manual ShopMill mode
al
2.1 CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.auto FALSE Automatic ShopMill mode
matic
4.0 CMM_IN.base_sig.reset FALSE RESET for ShopMill
4.1 CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_start FALSE Cycle start
4.2 CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_stop FALSE Cycle stop
6.0 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.tool FALSE Tool operational area
6.1 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.directory FALSE Directory operational area
6.2 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.messages FALSE Alarms/messages operational area
6.3 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.program FALSE Program operational area
8.0 CMM_IN.spindle_interface_number B#16#5 Assignment: spindle axis data block 4 or 5
9.1 CMM_IN.spindle_start FALSE Spindle start
9.2 CMM_IN.spindle_stop FALSE Spindle stop
9.3 CMM_IN.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rotational direction counterclockwise
9.4 CMM_IN.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rotational direction clockwise
9.5 CMM_IN.program_extern_selected FALSE Program selected in PLC
9.6 CMM_IN.disable_cnc_standard FALSE Disable switchover to standard CNC
9.7 CMM_IN.cmm_activ_in_cnc_mode TRUE ShopMill PLC active during the CNC standard
operation
10.0 CMM_IN.program_test_request FALSE Select function Program test
10.1 CMM_IN.dry_run_request FALSE Select function Dry run
10.2 CMM_IN.m01_request FALSE Select function M01
10.3 CMM_IN.skip_block_request FALSE Select skip block function
10.4 CMM_IN.boot_standard FALSE System power-up in standard CNC user
interface
DB82 Signals from ShopMill (output signals)

30.0 CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill. FALSE Manual ShopMill mode
manual
30.1 CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill. FALSE Automatic ShopMill mode
automatic
32.0 CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset FALSE Reset performed
32.1 CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_activ FALSE Cycle active
32.2 CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped FALSE Cycle interrupted

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
34.0 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.tool FALSE Tool operational area selected

34.1 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.directory FALSE Directory operational area selected
34.2 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.messages FALSE Alarms/messages operational area selected
34.3 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.program FALSE Program operational area selected
36.0 CMM_OUT.cmm_plc_activ FALSE ShopMill PLC active
36.1 CMM_OUT.cmm_mmc_activ FALSE ShopMill user interface active
36.2 CMM_OUT.spindle_start_req FALSE Spindle start requested
(M3/M4 output to spindle)
36.3 CMM_OUT.spindle_stop_req FALSE Spindle stop requested
(M5 output to spindle)
36.4 CMM_OUT.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rot. direction clockwise preselected
36.5 CMM_OUT.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rot. direct. counterclockwise
preselected
36.6 CMM_OUT.set_spindle_halt FALSE Spindle stop (request for PLC user program)
37.0 CMM_OUT.program_selection_done FALSE Acknowledgment from MMC that a program
has been selected
37.1 CMM_OUT.program_test_active FALSE Function Program test is active
37.2 CMM_OUT.dry_run_active FALSE Function Dry Run is active
37.3 CMM_OUT.m01_active FALSE Function M01 is active
37.4 CMM_OUT.skip_block_activ FALSE Skip block function is active
37.5 CMM_OUT.e_asup_activ FALSE E_ASUP is active
37.6 CMM_OUT.e_s_asup_activ FALSE E_S_ASUP is active
40.0 CMM_OUT.cycle_state.tool_change FALSE Tool change active
40.1 CMM_OUT.cycle_state.approach_range FALSE Infeed range
40.2 CMM_OUT.cycle_state.retreat FALSE Retraction
40.3 CMM_OUT.cycle_state.machining_process FALSE Machining
40.7 CMM_OUT.cycle_state.initialization FALSE Program initialization
42.0 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on FALSE Switch on tool-specific M function 1
42.4 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function. FALSE Tool-specific M function 1 applies
function_1_activ
function_2_activ
function_3_activ
function_4_activ
44 CMM_OUT.mask_number W#16#0 Actual mask number of ShopMill
54.0 CMM_OUT.errors.asup_select_error FALSE The E_asup cycle could not be selected after
control startup
60.0 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on FALSE NCK signal monitor function active
(input signal)
60.1 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize FALSE Initialize data
(input signal)

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals

.
4.2.21 NC signals influenced by the ManualTurn application
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC ---> NC)

Byte Designation
DBB56 Bit7 Keyswitch setting 3 /A2/
DBB122, 123 External digital NCK inputs
Bits 0 to 7 Inputs 9 to 16
DBB130, 131, 132, 133 External digital NCK outputs
Bits 0 to 7 Outputs 17 to 24
DB11 Signals to mode groups (PLC--->NCK) /K1/
DBB0 Bit0 AUTOMATIC mode
Bit1 MDA mode
Bit2 JOG mode
DBB1 Bit0 TEACH IN machine function
Bit1 REPOS machine function
Bit2 REF machine function
DB21 Signals to NCK channel (PLC--->NCK)

Byte Designation
DBB0 Bit3 Activate DRF /H1/
Bit4 Activate single block /K1/
Bit5 Activate M01 /K1/

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
Bit6 Activate dry run feedrate /V21/

DBB1 Bit6 PLC action terminated /K1/
Bit7 Activate program test /K1/
DBB4 / DBB5 Feedrate override / rapid traverse override /V1/
Bit0 A
Bit1 B
Bit2 C
Bit3 D
Bit4 E
Bit5 F
Bit6 G
Bit7 H
DBB6 Bit0 *) Feed lock /V1/
Bit2 Delete distance-to-go /A2/
Bit4 Abort program level /K1/
Bit6 *) Rapid traverse override active /V1/
Bit7 Feedrate override active /V1/
DBB7 Bit1 NC Start /K1/
Bit3 NC Stop /K1/
Bit7 Reset /K1/
DBB12, 16, 20 Geometry axis 1, 2, 3
Bit0 Activate handwheel 1 /H1/
Bit3 *) Feed stop /V1/
Bit4 *) Traversing key disable /H1/
Bit5 Rapid traverse override /H1/
Bit6 Traversing keys minus /H1/
Bit7 Traversing keys plus /H1/
DBB13, 17, 21 Geometry axis 1, 2, 3 machine functions /H1/
Bit0 1 INC
Bit1 10 INC
Bit2 100 INC
Bit3 1000 INC
Bit5 Var INC
Bit6 Continuous
DBB29 Bit0 Fixed feedrate F1 /V1/
Bit1 Fixed feedrate F2 /V1/
DBB30
Bit0 Activate contour handwheel 1
Bit3 Contour handwheel simulation on
Bit4 Contour handwheel simulation negative direction
DB31-33 Signals to axis/spindle

DBB0, 19 Feedrate override spindle speed override /V1/
Bit0 A
Bit1 B
Bit2 C
Bit3 D
Bit4 E
Bit5 F
Bit6 G

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Bit7 H
DBB1 Bit7 Correction active /V1/
DBB2 Bit2 Delete distance-to-go / reset spindle /A2,S1/
DBB4 Bit0 Activate handwheel 1 /H1/
Bit3 *) Feed stop / spindle stop /V1/
Bit4 *) Traversing key disable /H1/
Bit5 Rapid traverse override /H1/
Bit6 Traversing keys minus /H1/
Bit7 Traversing keys plus /H1/
DBB5 Machine functions /H1/
Bit0 1 INC
Bit1 10 INC
Bit2 100 INC
Bit3 1000 INC
Bit5 Var. INC
Bit6 Continuous
DB33 Signals to axis/spindle

DBB3 Bit2 Fixed feedrate F1 /V1/
DBB8 Bit0 Assign NC axis - channel A
Bit1 Assign NC axis - channel B
Bit2 Assign NC axis - channel C
Bit3 Assign NC axis - channel D
Bit4 Activate assignment using positive edge
Bit7 Request PLC axis / spindle
DBB16 Bit7 Clear S value /S1/

12/98 Lists
4 Interface Signals
4.2.22 NC signals influenced by the ShopMill application
DB10 Signals to NC (PLC--->NC)

Byte Designation
DBB130, 131 External digital NCK outputs
DBB132, 133 External digital NCK outputs
DB11 Signals to mode groups (PLC--->NCK) /K1/

DBB0 Bit0 AUTOMATIC mode
Bit1 MDA mode
Bit2 JOG mode
DBB1 Bit0 TEACH IN machine function
DB21 Signals to NCK channel (PLC--->NCK)

DBB0 Bit6 Activate dry run feedrate /V1/
DBB1 Bit7 Activate program test /K1/
DBB6 Bit2 Delete distance-to-go /A2/
DBB7 Bit1 NC Start /K1/
Bit3 NC Stop /K1/
Bit7 Reset /K1/

Lists 12/98
4 Interface Signals
Platz für Notizen

PLC Blocks 5
5.1 Overview of organization blocks .................................................................................5-552
5.2 Overview of function blocks ........................................................................................5-553

5.2.1 ManualTurn ..............................................................................................................5-554
5.2.2 ShopMill ...................................................................................................................5-554
5.3 Assignment of data blocks ..........................................................................................5-555

5.3.1 ManualTurn ..............................................................................................................5-556
5.3.2 ShopMill ...................................................................................................................5-556
5.4 Assigned timers ..........................................................................................................5-556
Note for Section 5.2.1 ManualTurn

ManualTurn is an operator control for conventional cycle-controlled turning
machines. The FCs and DBs can be used without any problem if the machine
to be configured is not a turning machine with a maximum of 2 axes and one
spindle. If the machine to be configured is such a machine and, in addition to
CNC control, conventional operation is not excluded, the FCs and DBs
should not be used.
References: /FBMA/ Description of Functions ManualTurn
Note for Section 5.2.2 ShopMill

ShopMill is an operator control for 2 1/2D milling machines in workshop
operation. The FCs and DBs can be used without any problem if the machine
to be configured is not a milling machine for 2 1/2D machining. However, the
FCs and DBs should not be used if the machine is planned to be used in
such an application.
References: /FBSP/ Description of Functions ShopMill

Lists 08/99
5 PLC Blocks
5.1 Overview of organization blocks
Table 5-1 Overview of organization blocks (OBs)
OB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 ZYKLUS Cyclic processing GP
40 ALARM Process alarms GP
100 NEUSTART Beginning of restart GP

08/99 Lists
5 PLC Blocks
5.2 Overview of function blocks
Table 5-2 Overview of function blocks (FCs)
FC no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - Reserved for Siemens
2 GP_HP Basic program, cyclic part GP
3 GP_PRAL Basic program, alarm-controlled part GP
5 GP_DIAG Basic program Diagnostic alarm (FM-NC) GP
7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with circular GP
magazine
8 TM_TRANS Transfer block for tool management GP
9 ASUP Asynchronous subprograms GP
10 AL_MSG Alarms/messages GP
12 AUXFU Call interface for user auxiliary functions GP
13 BHG_DISP Display control for handheld unit GP
15 POS_AX Positioning axis GP
16 PART_AX Indexing axis GP
17 Y-D switchover GP
18 SpinCtrl Spindle control from PLC GP
19 MCP_IFM Distribution of machine control panel and MMC GP
signals to interface (milling machine)
21 Transfer data exchange PLC-NCK GP
22 TM_DIR Selection of direction GP
24 MCP_IFM2 Transfer of MCP signals to interface GP
25 MCP_IFT Distribution of machine control panel and MMC GP
signals to interface
30 - 35 Assigned if ManualTurn or ShopMill are
installed; see below
36 - 127 Free for users with FM-NC, 810DE
36 - 255 Free for users with 810D, 840DE, 840D

Lists 08/99
5 PLC Blocks
Table 5-3 Overview of function blocks (FBs)
FB no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 Reserved for Siemens
1 RUN_UP Basic program, booting GP
2 GET Read NC variables GP
3 PUT Write NC variables GP
4 PI_SERV PI services GP
5 GETGUD Read GUD variable GP
7 PI_SERV2 General PI services GP
29 Diagnosis signal recording and data trigger GP
36 - 127 Free for FM-NC, 810DE users
36 - 255 Free for 810D, 840DE, 840D users
5.2.1 ManualTurn
30 ManualTurn PLC, status management; this is
invoked in OB 1
31-33 ManualTurn PLC, status management; these
are only loaded and must not be changed
34 Diagnostic block for monitoring the
ManualTurn-specific VDI signals
35 ManualTurn-local function block; this is only
loaded
5.2.2 ShopMill
30 ShopMill PLC, status management; this is
invoked in OB 1
31-33 ShopMill PLC, status management; these are
only loaded
34 Diagnostic block for monitoring the ShopMill-
specific VDI signals
35 ShopMill-local function block; this is only
loaded

08/99 Lists
5 PLC Blocks
5.3 Assignment of data blocks
Note Only so many DBs are created as are necessary according to NC-MD.
Table 5-4 Overview of data blocks
DB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 Reserved for Siemens GP
2-4 PLC MSG PLC messages GP
5-8 Basic program
9 NC COMPILE Interface for NC compile cycles GP
10 NC Central NC interface GP
INTERFACE
11 BAG 1 Mode group interface GP
12 Computer link and transport system
13-14 Reserved (Hymnos, basic program)
15 Basic program
16 PI service definitions
17 Version code
18 SPL interface (Safety Integrated)
19 MMC interface
20 PLC machine data
21 - 30 CHANNEL 1 NC channel interface GP
31 - 61 AXIS 1,... Reserved for interface axis/spindle no. 1 to 31 GP
62 - 70 User assignable
71 - 74 User tool management GP
75 - 76 M group decoding GP
77 Tool management buffer
78 - 80 Reserved for Siemens
81 - 89 Assigned if ShopMill or ManualTurn are installed;
see below
(81)90 - Free for FM-NC, 810DE users see below
127
(81)90 - Free for 810D, 840DE, 840D users see below
399
Note
Data blocks of inactivated channels, axes/spindles, C programming, tool
management can be assigned by the user.

Lists 08/99
5 PLC Blocks
5.3.1 ManualTurn
81 Data block for MMC; will be loaded.
82 Data block for spec. machine control panel
signals.
Configured by machine manufacturer.
83-87 Local data blocks; will be loaded and called by
FC30.
5.3.2 ShopMill
81 Data block for MMC
82 Data block for ShopMill interface
83-87 Internal FC 30 data blocks
88 Entity data block for FB4
5.4 Assigned timers
Timer no. Meaning

1-9 Reserved
10 - 127 User assignable

Appendix A
References
General Documentation
/BU/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
Ordering Information
Catalog NC 60.1
Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A6-7600
/ST7/ SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86 060-K4670-A111-A3
/VS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Technical Information
Catalog NC 60.2
Order No.: E86060-D4460-A201-A4-7600
/W/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Brochure
/Z/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A6-7600

Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition A-557
Lists 08/99
A Appendix
Electronic Documentation
/CD4/ The SINUMERIK system (10.99 Edition)
DOC ON CD
(with all SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC and SIMODRIVE 611D publications)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5CA00-0BG1

A-558 Lists (LIS) - 08.99 Edition
08/99 Lists
A Appendix
User Documentation
/AUE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (07.99 Edition)
Part 2: Setup
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA50-0BP2
/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Short Guide AutoTurn Operation (07.99 Edition)
/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (07.99 Edition)
Part 1: Programming
/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Operator’s Guide (08.99 Edition)
• Operator’s Guide
• Operator’s Guide Interactive Programming (MMC 102/103)
/BAE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Operator’s Guide Unit Operator Panel (04.96 Edition)
/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Short Operating Guide (12.98 Edition)
/BAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operator’s Guide ManualTurn (09.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD00-0BP2
/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Short Guide ManualTurn (11.98 Edition)
/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operator’s Guide ShopMill (08.99 Edition)
/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Short Guide ShopMill (01.98 Edition)
/BAP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operator’s Guide Handheld Programming Unit (08.99 Edition)
/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

User’s Guide Measuring Cycles (08.99 Edition)
/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Diagnostics Guide (08.99 Edition)

Lists 08/99
A Appendix
/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Programming Guide Fundamentals (08.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AB00-0BP1
/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Programming Guide Advanced (08.99 Edition)
/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Short Guide Programming (12.98 Edition)
/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Programming Guide Cycles (08.99 Edition)
/PI/ PCIN 4.4

Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order No.: 6FX2 060-4AA00-4XB0 (German, English, French)
Order from: WK Fürth
/LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists (08.99 Edition)
/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Operator Components Manual (08.99 Edition)
/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor

Absolute Encoder with Profibus-DP
User Guide (HW) (02.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB10-0BP1
/EMV/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

EMC Installation Guide (06.99 Edition)
Planning Guide (HW)
/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D

Manual Configuring (08.99 Edition)
/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D

NCU 571.2-573.2 Manual (08.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC10-0BP1
/PHF/ SINUMERIK FM-NC

NCU 570 Manual (04.96 Edition)
/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (05.99 Edition)

Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
Configuring Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (HW)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0

08/99 Lists
A Appendix
/FB/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (08.99 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
A2 Various Interface Signals

A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Tools
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Clo sed-Loop
Control
H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Mode
K2 Coordinate Systems, Frames
Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feeds
W1 Tool Compensation
/FB/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC (08.99 Edition)

Description of Functions, Extended Functions (Part 2)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepping Motor
A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os

B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PC/PG
F3 Remote Diagnostics
H1 Jog with/without Handwheel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurements
N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals
N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes
P5 Oscillation
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindles
S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Change
W4 Grinding

Lists 08/99
A Appendix
/FB/ SINUMERIK 840D/FM-NC

Description of Functions, Special Functions (Part 3) (08.99 Edition)
F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation

G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
V2 Preprocessing
W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Master-Slave for drives
TE4 Transformation Package Handling
TE5 Setpoint Exchange
TE6 MCS Coupling
/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions, Drive Functions (08.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP5
DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions

DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enables Commands
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and
Controller Data
DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations
/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D

Description of Functions Digitizing (07.99 Edition)
DI1 Start-up
DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)
DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)
DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)
/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (08.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE10-0BP0
/FBHLA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/ SINUMERIK 840D

Hydraulics Module (08.99 Edition)
/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 810D

Description of Functions ManualTurn (09.99 Edition)

08/99 Lists
A Appendix
/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Configuring of Operator Interface OP 030 (03.96 Edition)
BA Operator’s Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PS Online only: Configuring Syntax (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration
/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D

Description of Functions C-PLC Programming (03.96 Edition)
/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

SINCOM Computer Link (06.98 Edition)
NFL Host Computer Interface

NPL PLC/NCK Interface
/FBSI/ SINUMERIK / SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (03.99 Edition)
/FBSP/ SINUMERIK 810D

Description of Functions ShopMill (08.99 Edition)
/FBST/ SIMATIC FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP

Description of Functions (01.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP3
/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Description of Functions Synchronized Actions (12.98 Edition)
for Wood, Glass, Ceramics and Presses
/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Tool Information SINTDI with Online Help (04.99 Edition)
/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal

Description of Functions (01.99 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning
/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Tool Management (08.99 Edition)
/IK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

Screen Kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel (06.96 Edition)
Description of Functions: Software Update and Configuration
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3EA10-0BP1

Lists 08/99
A Appendix
/KBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal

Short Description (04.99 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control
/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Linear Motors (in preparation)
(on request)
ALL General Information about Linear Motors

1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
1FN2 1FN2 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D

Planning Guide Inverters (08.98 Edition)
Transistor PWM Inverters for
AC Feed Drives and
AC Main Spindle Drives
/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A

User Manual
Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP (02.99 Edition)
/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A

Installation Instructions (enclosed with POSMO A) (12.98 Edition)
Order No.: 462 008 0815 00
/S7H/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual: Assembly; CPU Data (10.98 Edition)
Reference Manual: Module Data
Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8BA0
/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual: STEP 7, Basic Information, V. 3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8BA0
/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8BR0
/S7S/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 353 Step Drive Positioning Module (04.97 Edition)
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package
/S7L/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 354 Servo Drive Positioning Module (04.97 Edition)
/S7M/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 357 Multi-Axis Module for Servo and (04.98 Edition)
Stepper Drives
/SHM/ SIMODRIVE 611

Manual (01.98 Edition)
Single-Axis Positioning for MCU 172A
Order No.: 6SN 1197-4MA00-0BP0

08/99 Lists
A Appendix
/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D

SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AA❏
Order from: WK Fürth
/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A

Installation and Start-Up Guide (10.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP5
/IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D

(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
/IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D

(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
/IAF/ SINUMERIK FM-NC

/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

MMC Installation and Start-up Guide (08.99 Edition)
IM1 Start-up functions for MMC 100.2
IM3 Start-up functions for MMC 103
HE1 Editor help
BE1 Supplement operator interface

Lists 08/99
A Appendix
Platz für Notizen

Index I

I-567 Lists (LIS) - Edition 08/99
Lists 08/99
I Index
aaLeadV ......................................... 3-314; 3-377

aaLoad............................................ 3-314; 3-377
/ aaMm.............................................. 3-314; 3-377
aaMm1............................................ 3-314; 3-377
/Nck/Nck/ActApplication ............................. 3-476 aaMm2............................................ 3-315; 3-378
/Nck/Nck/ActBag ........................................ 3-476 aaMm3............................................ 3-315; 3-378
/Nck/Nck/Channel ...................................... 3-476 aaMm4............................................ 3-315; 3-378
/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem .............................. 3-476 aaMw ......................................................... 3-396
aaMw1 ....................................................... 3-397
aaMw2 ....................................................... 3-397
2 aaMw3 ....................................................... 3-397
aaMw4 ....................................................... 3-397
aaOff ............................................... 3-315; 3-378
2nd torque limit................................3-319; 3-382
aaOffLimit ....................................... 3-315; 3-378
aaOffVal.......................................... 3-315; 3-378
aaOscillReversePos1 ..................... 3-315; 3-378
6 aaOscillReversePos2 ..................... 3-315; 3-378
aaOvr .............................................. 3-315; 3-378
611D / enable high-speed inputs/outputs ... 3-458 aaPower.......................................... 3-315; 3-378
aaSoftendn ..................................... 3-316; 3-379
aaSoftendp ..................................... 3-316; 3-379
A aaStat ............................................. 3-316; 3-379
aaSync............................................ 3-316; 3-379
a0-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous aaTorque ........................................ 3-316; 3-379
action ...................................................... 3-340 aaTyp.............................................. 3-316; 3-379
a1-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous aaVactB .......................................... 3-316; 3-379
action ...................................................... 3-340 aaVactM.......................................... 3-316; 3-379
a2-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous aaVactW .................................................... 3-397
action ...................................................... 3-340 aaVc ............................................... 3-317; 3-380
a3-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous ABS_ACTUAL_CURRENT
action ...................................................... 3-340 MD 1719 2-95
AA_OFF_LIMIT .......................................... 3-463 ABS_INC_RATIO
AA_OFF_LIMIT MD 30260 2-211
MD 43350 2-247 Abscissa arc centre of 10th contour
AA_OFF_MODE element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
MD 36750 2-228 Abscissa arc centre of 1st contour
aaCoupAct ......................................3-313; 3-376 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaCoupOffs .....................................3-313; 3-376 Abscissa arc centre of 2nd contour
aaCurr .............................................3-313; 3-376 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaDelt......................................................... 3-396 Abscissa arc centre of 3rd contour
aaDtbb.............................................3-313; 3-376 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaDtbw ....................................................... 3-396 Abscissa arc centre of 4th contour
aaDteb.............................................3-313; 3-376 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaDtepb...........................................3-313; 3-376 Abscissa arc centre of 5th contour
aaDtepw ..................................................... 3-396 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaDtew ....................................................... 3-396 Abscissa arc centre of 6th contour
aaEgActive ................................................. 3-338 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaEgAx....................................................... 3-338 Abscissa arc centre of 7th contour
aaEgDenom ............................................... 3-338 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-288
aaEgNumera .............................................. 3-338 Abscissa arc centre of 8th contour
aaEgNumLa ............................................... 3-339 element ....................................... 3-281; 3-289
aaEgSyn..................................................... 3-339 Abscissa arc centre of 9th contour
aaEgSynFa ................................................ 3-339 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
aaEgType................................................... 3-339 Abscissa end point of 10th contour
aaEsrEnable....................................3-313; 3-376 element ....................................... 3-283; 3-291
aaEsrStat ........................................3-314; 3-377 Abscissa end point of 1st contour
aaLeadP..........................................3-314; 3-377 element ....................................... 3-283; 3-290
aaLeadSp........................................3-314; 3-377 Abscissa end point of 2nd contour
aaLeadSv ........................................3-314; 3-377 element ....................................... 3-283; 3-290
aaLeadTyp ......................................3-314; 3-377

08/99 Lists
I Index
Abscissa end point of 3rd contour Acknowledgement criteria for an

element........................................3-283; 3-290 alarm ........................................... 3-305; 3-309
Abscissa end point of 4th contour Acknowledgement criteria of an alarm ...... 3-307
element........................................3-283; 3-290 ackSafeMeasPos............................ 3-317; 3-380
Abscissa end point of 5th contour acMarker.................................................... 3-466
element........................................3-283; 3-290 acMea ........................................................ 3-341
Abscissa end point of 6th contour acOvr ......................................................... 3-341
element........................................3-283; 3-290 acParam .................................................... 3-466
Abscissa end point of 7th contour acPathn ..................................................... 3-341
element........................................3-283; 3-290 acPltbb....................................................... 3-341
Abscissa end point of 8th contour acPlteb....................................................... 3-341
element........................................3-283; 3-290 acProg ....................................................... 3-342
Abscissa end point of 9th contour acPRTimeA................................................ 3-342
element................................................... 3-290 acPRTimeM ............................................... 3-342
Absicssa end point of 9th contour acPtpSup ................................................... 3-342
element................................................... 3-283 acRetpoint ................................................. 3-397
Absolute axis acStat ........................................................ 3-342
index .......... 3-323; 3-330; 3-386; 3-399; 3-401 acSynaMem............................................... 3-342
AC_FILTER_TIME ACT_POS_ABS
MD 32920 2-220 MD 30250 2-211
acAlarmStat................................................ 3-339 ACT_SPEED_FILTER_TIME
acAxCtSwA ................................................ 3-339 MD 1522 2-89
ACCEL_DIAGNOSIS MD 5522 2-113
MD 1721 2-96 actCouppPosOffset ........................ 3-317; 3-380
ACCEL_ORI actCycleTimeBrut ........................... 3-467; 3-470
MD 21170 2-185 actCycleTimeNet ............................ 3-467; 3-470
ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR actDLNumber ............................................ 3-342
MD 35230 2-224 actDNumber .............................................. 3-342
ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT actDNumberFanuc .................................... 3-342
MD 35220 2-224 actDNumberS ............................................ 3-343
ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE actDuploNumber........................................ 3-343
MD 35242 2-225 actFeedRate ........................ 3-317; 3-380; 3-397
ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE actFeedRateIpo ......................................... 3-343
MD 35240 2-224 actFrameIndex........................................... 3-343
Access stage for selection of directory BD . 2-121 actGearStage ................................. 3-329; 3-400
Access stage for selection of directory DEF 2-121 actHNumberFanuc .................................... 3-343
Access stage for selection of directory SYF 2-121 acTime ....................................................... 3-343
Access to data double word ....................... 3-296 acTimec ..................................................... 3-343
Access to meas. result in MCS .......3-314; 3-315 acTimer...................................................... 3-343
accessLevel ............................................... 3-268 actIncrVal............................. 3-311; 3-374; 3-393
accIndex..................................................... 3-296 actIndexAxPosNo ........................... 3-317; 3-380
acDelt ......................................................... 3-339 actInvocCount............................................ 3-359
acDtbb........................................................ 3-340 actIpoType ................................................. 3-344
acDtbw ....................................................... 3-340 actIpoTypeS............................................... 3-344
acDteb........................................................ 3-340 ACTIVATE _SEL_USER_DATA
acDtepb...................................................... 3-340 MD 9440 2-128
acDtepw ..................................................... 3-340 Activation of punching and nibbling functions 3-279
acDtew ....................................................... 3-340 Active channel machine function ............... 3-349
acFct0 ........................................................ 3-340 Active channel-independent basic frames . 3-299
acFct1 ........................................................ 3-340 Active channel-specific basic frames ......... 3-347
acFct2 ........................................................ 3-340 Active encoder ................................ 3-322; 3-385
acFct3 ........................................................ 3-340 Active G function ....................................... 3-369
acFctll......................................................... 3-341 Active G function (current language) ......... 3-369
acFctul........................................................ 3-341 Active G function (ISO Dialect) .................. 3-369
acFifoN....................................................... 3-466 Active G-function for block search
acIwStat ..................................................... 3-341 with calc. ..................................... 3-369; 3-370
acIwTu........................................................ 3-341 Active G-function of the correponding group 3-369
Ackn. by MMC for NCK-preparation Active immediately after referencing 3-285; 3-292
command ................................................ 3-278 Active INC weighting of the
Acknowl. from MMC for command from NCK to axis................................... 3-311; 3-374; 3-393
MMC ....................................................... 3-278 Active interpolation mode .......................... 3-344
Active mode ............................................... 3-337
© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved I-569

Lists (LIS) - Edition 08/99
Lists 08/99
I Index
Active T-number ......................................... 3-366 ACTUAL_CURRENT

Active tool length 1 ..................................... 3-345 MD 1708 2-94
Active tool length 2 ..................................... 3-345 ACTUAL_CURRENT_FILTER_FREQ
Active tool length 3 ..................................... 3-345 MD 1250 2-79
Active tool radius ........................................ 3-345 ACTUAL_CYL_FORCE
Active total offset ........................................ 3-342 MD 5708 2-115
Active total offset for block search ............. 3-349 ACTUAL_PISTON_POSITION
Active transformation ................................. 3-345 MD 5741 2-116
actLineNumber ........................................... 3-356 ACTUAL_POSITION
actOriToolLength1...................................... 3-344 MD 5740 2-116
actOriToolLength2...................................... 3-344 ACTUAL_PRESSURE_A
actOriToolLength3...................................... 3-344 MD 5704 2-115
actProgPos................................................. 3-393 ACTUAL_PRESSURE_B
actProgPosBKS ......................................... 3-397 MD 5705 2-115
actPunchRate............................................. 3-371 ACTUAL_RAMP_TIME
acTrafo ....................................................... 3-344 MD 1723 2-96
actSpeed .........................................3-329; 3-400 ACTUAL_SPEED
actSpeedRel....................................3-317; 3-380 MD 1707 2-94
actTNumber ............................................... 3-344 MD 5707 2-115
actTNumberLong ....................................... 3-344 ACTUAL_STALL_POWER_SPEED
actTNumberS ............................................. 3-344 MD 1148 2-74
actToolAdapterNum ................................... 3-345 ACTUAL_STALL_POWER_SPEED_M2
actToolBasePos ...................3-311; 3-374; 3-393 MD 2148 2-100
actToolBasePosBasic ................................ 3-397 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG
actToolBasPosBN ...................................... 3-398 MD 1011 2-68
actToolBasPosEN ...................................... 3-398 MD 5011 2-104
actToolEdgeCenterPos .............................. 3-393 ACTUAL_VALUE_CONFIG_DIRECT
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns ........................ 3-398 MD 1030 2-69
actToolIdent ............................................... 3-345 ACTUAL_VALVE_SPOOL_POS
actToolLength1 .......................................... 3-345 MD 5716 2-116
actToolLength2 .......................................... 3-345 actualCurrent .................................. 3-409; 3-412
actToolLength3 .......................................... 3-345 actualSpeed.................................... 3-409; 3-412
actToolRadius ............................................ 3-345 actValResol .................................... 3-317; 3-380
actToolWide ............................................... 3-423 actWearGrInMag ....................................... 3-428
actTransform .............................................. 3-345 acVactB ..................................................... 3-345
Actual gear stage of spindle ............3-329; 3-400 acVactw ..................................................... 3-345
Actual lead value position ...............3-314; 3-377 acVc........................................................... 3-345
Actual lead value velocity ................3-314; 3-377 adaptData .................................................. 3-443
Actual motor wiring..........................3-319; 3-382 Adapter data .............................................. 3-443
Actual position difference between Adapter number ......................................... 3-417
2 encoders ...................................3-324; 3-387 adaptNo ..................................................... 3-417
Actual position value in relation to aDbb .......................................................... 3-296
WOS frame ............................................. 3-398 aDbd .......................................................... 3-296
Actual tool base position ............................ 3-398 aDbr........................................................... 3-296
Actual value assignment ............................ 3-460 aDbw.......................................................... 3-296
Actual value in basic coordinate system .... 3-397 Add. correction value for path feed or
Actual value of axis specific feedrate ......... 3-380 axial feed..................................... 3-317; 3-380
Actual value of axis-specific Add. path feed correction for synchronous
feedrate .......................................3-317; 3-397 actions.................................................... 3-345
Actual value of position, encoder 1. 3-324; 3-387 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE
Actual value of position, encoder 2 .3-324; 3-387 MD 20610 2-181
Actual value of rotary Added for alignment only ........................... 3-399
speed.................... 3-317; 3-380; 3-409; 3-412 aDlb ........................................................... 3-296
Actual value of smoothened current ........... 3-412 aDld ........................................................... 3-296
Actual value of subroutine call aDlr ............................................................ 3-297
counter.........................................3-359; 3-361 aDlw........................................................... 3-297
Actual value of subroutine call counter. ..... 3-363 aInco .......................................................... 3-297
Actual value of the axis/spindle Alarm number (actual alarm) 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
current in A ..................................3-313; 3-376 ALARM_MASK_POWER_ON
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate ... 3-343 MD 1600 2-90
Actual value of the resolution ..........3-317; 3-380 MD 5600 2-113
Actual value of the smoothened current ..... 3-409 ALARM_MASK_RESET

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 1601 2-90 MD 11610 2-158

MD 5601 2-113 ASUP_START_MASK
ALARM_PAR_DISPLAY_TEXT MD 11602 2-158
MD 11413 2-157 ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL
ALARM_REACTION_CHAN_NOREADY MD 11604 2-158
MD 11412 2-157 aTcFct........................................................ 3-346
ALARM_REACTION_POWER_ON aTcLfn........................................................ 3-346
MD 1612 2-91 aTcLfo........................................................ 3-346
MD 5612 2-114 aTcLtn........................................................ 3-346
ALARM_REACTION_RESET aTcLto........................................................ 3-346
MD 1613 2-91 aTcMfn....................................................... 3-346
MD 5613 2-114 aTcMfo....................................................... 3-346
alarmNo................................3-305; 3-307; 3-309 aTcMtn....................................................... 3-346
aLinkTransRate .......................................... 3-345 aTcMto....................................................... 3-347
All axes referenced .................................... 3-346 aTcStatus .................................................. 3-347
All channels of mode group in Reset ......... 3-337 aTcThno..................................................... 3-347
allAxesRefActive ........................................ 3-346 aTcTno....................................................... 3-347
allAxesStopped .......................................... 3-346 AUTO_GET_TYPE
ALLOW_G0_IN_G96 MD 30552 2-212
MD 20750 2-182 Automatic block division ............................ 3-371
Allowed axis directions for tool probe (ZYX)2-140 automCutSegment..................................... 3-371
amSetupState .................................3-317; 3-380 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION
analogInpVal .............................................. 3-297 MD 22020 2-190
analogOutpVal ........................................... 3-297 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP
anAxCtAS................................................... 3-297 MD 22000 2-190
anAxCtSwA ................................................ 3-297 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE
anAxEsrTrigger .......................................... 3-297 MD 22010 2-190
Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees) ......... 3-447 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE
Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees) ......... 3-447 MD 22030 2-190
Angle reference axis .................................. 2-133 AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE
Angles of axes for toolholders .................... 3-350 MD 22250 2-191
Angular difference between toolholder axes 3-350 AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE
anMarker .................................................... 3-465 MD 22252 2-191
aPbbIn........................................................ 3-297 AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE
aPbbOut ..................................................... 3-298 MD 22240 2-191
aPbdIn........................................................ 3-298 AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC
aPbdOut ..................................................... 3-298 MD 11110 2-154
aPbrIn......................................................... 3-298 AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE
aPbrOut...................................................... 3-298 MD 22230 2-191
aPbwIn ....................................................... 3-298 AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT
aPbwOut .................................................... 3-298 MD 22110 2-190
Arc center in relation to WOS frame .......... 3-357 AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame .......... 3-357 MD 22200 2-191
AREA_FACTOR_NEG_OUTPUT AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN
MD 5463 2-111 MD 11100 2-154
AREA_FACTOR_POS_OUTPUT AUXFU_QUICK_BLOCKCHANGE
MD 5462 2-111 MD 22100 2-190
ARMATURE_INDUCTANCE AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE
MD 1116 2-71 MD 22210 2-191
ARMATURE_RESISTANCE AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE
MD 1115 2-71 MD 22220 2-191
asciiMode ................................................... 3-473 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME
ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP MD 36610 2-228
MD 10010 2-142 AX_INERTIA
ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE MD 32650 2-219
MD 43300 2-247 AX_JERK_ENABLE
Assigned timers.......................................... 5-556 MD 32400 2-216
Assignment of DBs..................................... 5-555 AX_JERK_MODE
Assignment of each channel to mode group 3-268 MD 32402 2-216
ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL AX_JERK_TIME
MD 11612 2-158 MD 32410 2-216
ASUP_EDITABLE AX_MASS

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 32652 2-219 Axial distance from beginning of block in the

AX_MOTION_DIR WCS....................................................... 3-396
MD 32100 2-216 Axial distance to the end of block
AX_VELO_LIMIT in the WCS ............................................. 3-396
MD 36200 2-227 Axial override for synchronous
axComp...........................................3-318; 3-381 actions......................................... 3-315; 3-378
AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN Axis active....................................... 3-318; 3-381
MD 30550 2-212 Axis active flag........................................... 3-398
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB Axis container rotation ............................... 3-297
MD 20080 2-174 Axis distance from beginning of the block in
AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB BCS............................................. 3-313; 3-376
MD 20050 2-174 Axis distance to the end of the block in
AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB the BCS...................................... 3-313; 3-376
MD 20060 2-174 Axis dist-to-go of infeed during oscill.
AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB in BCS ........................................ 3-313; 3-376
MD 10002 2-142 Axis exists....................................... 3-318; 3-381
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB.............. 3-458 Axis has been referenced ............... 3-325; 3-389
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis .................. 3-448
MD 10000 2-142 Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis ................. 3-448
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED Axis is being referenced ................. 3-325; 3-388
MD 20070 2-174 Axis name ............................ 3-311; 3-374; 3-394
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB1 Axis specification ................. 3-327; 3-390; 3-399
MD 12701 2-160 Axis state ........................................ 3-375; 3-394
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB10 Axis status ........................... 3-311; 3-316; 3-379
MD 12710 2-161 Axis type ........3-316; 3-328; 3-379; 3-392; 3-399
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB11 Axis types for all machine axes ................. 3-268
MD 12711 2-161 Axis veloc. in basic coordinates ...... 3-316; 3-379
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB12 Axis veloc. in machine coordinates 3-316; 3-379
MD 12712 2-161 Axis veloc. in workpiece coordinates ......... 3-397
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB13 Axis velocity actual value load side
MD 12713 2-161 in the MCS ................................. 3-328; 3-392
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB14 AXIS_DIAGNOSIS
MD 12714 2-161 MD 36690 2-228
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB15 AXIS_NUMBER_FOR_MONITORING
MD 12715 2-161 MD 31500 2-214
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB16 AXIS_VAR_SERVER_SENSITIVE
MD 12716 2-161 MD 11398 2-156
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB2 axisActiveInChan ................. 3-318; 3-381; 3-398
MD 12702 2-160 axisActivInNcu ........................................... 3-298
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB3 axisFeedRateUnit ................ 3-318; 3-381; 3-398
MD 12703 2-160 axisType .................................................... 3-268
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB4
MD 12704 2-160
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB5 B
MD 12705 2-160
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB6 BACKLASH
MD 12706 2-160 MD 32450 2-217
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB7 BACKLASH_FACTOR
MD 12707 2-160 MD 32452 2-217
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB8 badMemFfs................................................ 3-299
MD 12708 2-161 BAG_MASK
AXCT_AXCONF_ASSIGN_TAB9 MD 11600 2-157
MD 12709 2-161 Base position of the active tool .................. 3-397
AXCT_NAME_TAB Base position of the active tool rel. to
MD 12750 2-161 workpiece ............................................... 3-398
AXCT_SWWIDTH Basic configuration for simulation .............. 2-119
MD 41700 2-243 Basic system clock cycle ........................... 3-459
Axes in exact stop ...................................... 3-346 basicLengthUnit ......................................... 3-268
AXES_SCALE_ENABLE basisFrameMask ............................ 3-299; 3-347
MD 22914 2-193 Beginning of the first RPA range ............... 2-122
Axial dist.-to-go for infeed during oscill. Beginning of the second RPA range ......... 2-122
in WCS .................................................. 3-396 Beginning of the third RPA range .............. 2-122

08/99 Lists
I Index
BERO_CYCLE Center point of a cutting edge ................... 3-393

MD 31100 2-214 Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go 3-395
BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS Center point of the cutting edge REPOS ... 3-395
MD 31123 2-214 Chaining 1 of the magazine to following
BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS magazine ............................................... 3-429
MD 31122 2-214 Chaining 2 of the magazine to previous
BERO_EDGE magazine ............................................... 3-429
MD 31120 2-214 Chaining rule ............................................. 3-423
BERO_EDGE_TOL CHAMFER_NAME
MD 31110 2-214 MD 10656 2-152
block........................................................... 3-356 CHAN_NAME
Block label.................................................. 3-359 MD 20000 2-174
Block no. of curr. block, if syn. act. is active 3-365 chanAlarm ................................................. 3-347
Block no. where the syn. act. Is chanAssignment ........................................ 3-268
programmed ...............................3-365; 3-368 chanAxisNoGap................... 3-318; 3-347; 3-381
Block number ..................................3-356; 3-359 Change counter of the tool data in
Block overview a channel ............................................... 3-352
function blocks 5-553 Change D No. assigned to tool edge ......... 2-120
organization blocks 5-552 Change wear group magazine
Block search active .................................... 3-349 location/mag........................................... 2-120
blockLabel .................................................. 3-359 changeAxConfCounter .............................. 3-347
blockNoStr.......................................3-356; 3-359 Channel name ........................................... 3-276
blockNoStrAct .................................3-365; 3-368 Channel number of axis .................. 3-318; 3-381
blockNoStrProg ...............................3-365; 3-368 Channel number of
BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE spindle................... 3-329; 3-332; 3-400; 3-403
MD 36600 2-227 Channel status................................ 3-342; 3-347
Byte data from/to the PLC .......................... 3-296 channelName ............................................ 3-276
Bytes transferred to PCMCIA card ............. 3-468 channelNo ................ 3-329; 3-332; 3-400; 3-403
Channel-specific setting for tool
management .......................................... 3-277
C chanNoAxisIsActive ........................ 3-318; 3-381
chanStatus................................................. 3-347
Calculation of thread depth if pitch has been Characteristics of total offsets in NCK ....... 3-269
entered ................................................... 2-134 CHBFRAME_POWERON_MASK
Calculation resolution for angular position . 3-458 MD 24004 2-194
Calculation resolution for linear positions .. 3-459 CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK
Cart. PTP travel is supported ..................... 3-342 MD 24002 2-194
CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK CHFRND_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS
MD 10420 2-149 MD 20200 2-178
CC_HW_DEBUG_MASK CHFRND_MODE_MASK
MD 10430 2-149 MD 20201 2-178
CC_TDA_PARAM_UNIT CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST
MD 10290 2-146 MD 21000 2-182
CC_TOA_PARAM_UNIT CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR
MD 10292 2-146 MD 21010 2-182
CC_VDI_IN_DATA circleCenter ............................................... 3-356
MD 10400 2-149 circleCenterS ............................................. 3-356
CC_VDI_OUT_DATA circleRadius ............................................... 3-356
MD 10410 2-149 circleRadius for block search. .................... 3-356
CEC_ENABLE circleRadiusS............................................. 3-356
MD 32710 2-219 circleTurn ................................................... 3-357
CEC_MAX_SUM circleTurnS ................................................ 3-357
MD 32720 2-219 CL1_PO_IMAGE
CEC_MAX_VELO MD 1731 2-97
MD 32730 2-219 MD 5731 2-116
CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC CL1_RES_IMAGE
MD 32711 2-219 MD 1732 2-97
CEC_TABLE_ENABLE MD 5732 2-116
MD 41300 2-239 cl1PoImage..................................... 3-409; 3-412
CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT cl1ResImage................................... 3-409; 3-412
MD 41310 2-239 CLAMP_POS_TOL
Center of the circle ..................................... 3-356 MD 36050 2-226

Lists 08/99
I Index
clearInfo ...............................3-305; 3-307; 3-309 CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II

CLOSED_LOOP_SYSTEM_DAMPING MD 9681 2-138
MD 5180 2-107 CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP
cmdAngPos .....................................3-329; 3-400 MD 9759 2-139
cmdConstCutSpeed ........................3-329; 3-400 CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN
cmdContrPos ..................................3-318; 3-381 MD 9664 2-137
cmdCouppPosOffset .......................3-318; 3-381 CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT
cmdFeedRate.......................3-318; 3-381; 3-398 MD 9665 2-137
cmdFeedRateIpo........................................ 3-348 CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH
cmdGearStage ................................3-329; 3-400 MD 9666 2-137
cmdGwps ........................................3-329; 3-400 CMM_MAX_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP
cmdInvocCount .......................................... 3-359 MD 9760 2-139
cmdProgPos............................................... 3-393 CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN
cmdSpeed .......................................3-329; 3-400 MD 9753 2-139
cmdSpeedRel..................................3-318; 3-381 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH
cmdToolBasePos .................3-311; 3-374; 3-394 MD 9754 2-139
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns ........ 3-357 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEnsS ...... 3-357 MD 9755 2-139
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns ........ 3-357 CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEnsS ..... 3-357 MD 9750 2-139
cmdToolEdgeCenterPos ............................ 3-394 CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS ................... 3-398 MD 9751 2-139
CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP
MD 9662 2-137 MD 9762 2-140
CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE
MD 9659 2-137 MD 9752 2-139
CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST CMM_MEASURING_FEED
MD 9656 2-136 MD 9756 2-139
CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP
MD 9658 2-136 MD 9761 2-140
CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
MD 9657 2-136 MD 9650 2-136
CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST MD 9650 2-129
MD 9655 2-136 CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 MD 9758 2-139
MD 9676 2-129; 2-137 CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES
MD 9677 2-130; 2-138 CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKET
MD 9678 2-130; 2-138 CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR
MD 9679 2-130; 2-138 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEAS
CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS MD 9765 2-140
MD 9653 2-136 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS
CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS MD 9766 2-140
MD 9720 2-138 CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS
CMM_ENABLE_MAN_TOOL MD 9767 2-140
MD 9722 2-138 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOW_AXIS
CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE MD 9764 2-140
MD 9660 2-137 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE
CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD MD 9763 2-140
MD 9723 2-138 CNC system language ............................... 3-269
CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL Code number of the active transformation 3-344
MD 9721 2-138 COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE
CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM MD 20128 2-176
MD 9669 2-137 COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO
CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL MD 10072 2-143
MD 9757 2-139 Command for magazine execution . 3-425; 3-428
CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I Command from NCK to MMC .................... 3-277
MD 9680 2-138 Command from NCK-preparation
CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II to the MMC............................................. 3-278
MD 9668 2-137 Command number ..................................... 3-346

08/99 Lists
I Index
Command parameter of the magazine ....... 3-428 contrConfirmActive ......................... 3-319; 3-382
Command state of the magazine ............... 3-425 contrMode....................................... 3-319; 3-382
Command status ........................................ 3-347 Control mode of drive ..................... 3-320; 3-383
Command status of the magazine ............. 3-428 CONTROLLED_SYSTEM_GAIN
COMMUTATION_ANGLE_OFFSET MD 5435 2-111
MD 1016 2-68 Controller enable ............................ 3-319; 3-382
COMP_ADD_VELO_FACTOR Controller mode servo .................... 3-319; 3-382
MD 32760 2-219 CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM
COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1 MD 10260 2-146
MD 10530 2-150 Coordinate system..................................... 3-476
COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2 corr. to actTNumber for block search without
MD 10531 2-150 calc......................................................... 3-344
COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1 Corr. to circleCenter for block search
MD 41600 2-243 with calc. ................................................ 3-356
COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2 CORR_VELO
MD 41601 2-243 MD 32070 2-215
COMPAR_TYPE_1 corrBlActive ............................................... 3-348
MD 10540 2-150 Corresp. to actNumber for block search with
COMPAR_TYPE_2 calc......................................................... 3-343
MD 10541 2-150 Corresponds to circleCenterWos .............. 3-357
Compensation parameters for SUG ........... 3-424 Corresponds to circleRadiusWos .............. 3-357
Compensation value upper limit $AA_OFF with Counter for NC-start key ............................ 3-349
clear........................................................ 3-463 Counter incremented with each call
Comperator input NC ................................. 3-297 of EXTCALL ........................................... 3-300
COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT Counter indicating changes of axes
MD 20170 2-177 configuration .......................................... 3-347
COMPRESS_POS_TOL Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is
MD 33100 2-221 available ................................................. 3-349
COMPRESS_VELO_TOL COUPLE_AXIS_1
MD 20172 2-177 MD 21300 2-186
Configurable messages ..................3-321; 3-384 COUPLE_BLOCK_CHANGE_CTRL_1
Confirmation of SI actual position ...3-317; 3-380 MD 21320 2-186
conntectPar ................................................ 3-423 COUPLE_IS_WRITE_PROT_1
CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME MD 21340 2-186
MD 20500 2-180 COUPLE_POS_TOL_COARSE
Constant cutting speed of the MD 37200 2-236
master spindle .............................3-329; 3-400 COUPLE_POS_TOL_FINE
Container actual address ........................... 3-297 MD 37210 2-236
Contour deviation ............................3-328; 3-392 COUPLE_RATIO_1
Contour type of 10th contour element 3-286; 3-293 MD 42300 2-243
Contour type of 1st contour element 3-285; 3-292 COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1
Contour type of 2nd contour element 3-285; 3-292 MD 21330 2-186
Contour type of 3rd contour element3-285; 3-292 COUPLE_VELO_TOL_COARSE
Contour type of 5th contour element 3-285; 3-293 COUPLE_VELO_TOL_FINE
Contour type of 7th contour element 3-286; 3-293 COUPLING_MODE_1
Contour type of 9th contour element 3-286; 3-293 CPREC_WITH_FFW
CONTOUR_ASSIGN_FASTOUT MD 20470 2-180
MD 21070 2-183 CRC diagnostic parameter ........................ 3-412
CONTOUR_DEF_ANGLE_NAME CRC errors on the drive bus ........... 3-321; 3-384
MD 10652 2-151 CRC_DIAGNOSIS
CONTOUR_TOL MD 1720 2-96
MD 36400 2-227 MD 5720 2-116
CONTOUR_TUNNEL_REACTION crcErrorCount ................................. 3-409; 3-412
MD 21060 2-183 CRC-parameter for diagnosis .................... 3-409
CONTOUR_TUNNEL_TOL CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE
MD 21050 2-183 MD 42470 2-244
CONTPREC CTM_ ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS
MD 42450 2-244 MD 9632 2-133
Contrast...................................................... 2-118 CTM_ CIRC_TAP_DWELL_TIME_2

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 9645 2-135 MD 9610 2-132

CTM_ DISPL_RES_MORE_INCH MD 9610 2-129
MD 9635 2-134 CTM_ROUGH_I_RELEASE_DIST
CTM_ ENABLE_DRIVEN_TOOL MD 9649 2-135
MD 9643 2-134 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA
CTM_ ENABLE_G_CODE_INPUT MD 9602 2-131
MD 9641 2-134 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA (für MMC
CTM_ ENABLE_S_TOOL_TABLE 100)
MD 9636 2-134 MD 9602 2-129; 2-136
CTM_ INC_DEC_FEED_PER_MIN CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD 9633 2-133 MD 9600 2-131; 2-136
CTM_ INC_DEC_FEED_PER_ROT CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X (für MMC 100)
MD 9634 2-134 MD 9600 2-128
CTM_ MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y (für MMC 100)
MD 9637 2-134 MD 9601 2-129
CTM_ MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Z
MD 9638 2-134 MD 9601 2-131
CTM_ ROUGH_O_RELEASE_DIST CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Z (für MMC 100)
MD 9648 2-135 MD 9601 2-136
CTM_ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS (für MMC CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA
100) MD 9605 2-131
MD 9632 2-129 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA (für MMC
CTM_CIRC_TAP_DWELL_TIME_1 102/103)
MD 9644 2-135 MD 9605 2-129; 2-136
CTM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD 9627 2-133 MD 9603 2-131
CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X (für MMC 102/103)
MD 9611 2-132 MD 9603 2-129; 2-136
CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON (für MMC CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y (für MMC 102/103)
100) MD 9604 2-129
MD 9611 2-129 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Z
CTM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE MD 9604 2-131
MD 9625 2-133 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Z (für MMC 102/103)
CTM_CYCLE_DWELL_TIME MD 9604 2-136
MD 9621 2-132 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS
CTM_CYCLE_DWELL_TIME_SEC MD 9606 2-131
MD 9631 2-133 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS (für
CTM_CYCLE_SAFETY_CLEARANCE MMC 100)
MD 9620 2-132 MD 9606 2-129
CTM_ENABLE_C_AXSIS CTM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES
MD 9618 2-132 MD 9609 2-132
CTM_ENABLE_CALC_THREAD_PITCH CTM_START_WITHOUT_REFPOINT
MD 9640 2-134 MD 9623 2-133
CTM_ENABLE_CIRCLE_HOLE_CYCLE CTM_TEACH_HANDW_FEED
MD 9642 2-134 MD 9615 2-132
CTM_ENABLE_FEED_P_MIN CTM_TEACH_HANDW_FEED_P_MIN
MD 9608 2-131 MD 9616 2-132
CTM_ENABLE_RAPID_FEED CTM_TEACH_HANDW_FEED_P_REV
MD 9607 2-131 MD 9617 2-132
CTM_ENABLE_REFPOINT CTM_TEACH_STORE_MANUAL_ABS
MD 9622 2-133 MD 9612 2-132
CTM_FIN_SPEED_PERCENT CTM_TEACH_STORE_MANUAL_AUTO
MD 9630 2-133 MD 9614 2-132
CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON CTM_TEACH_STORE_START_ABS
MD 9619 2-132 MD 9613 2-132
CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON (für MMC 100) CTM_TOOL_INPUT_DIAM_ON
MD 9619 2-129 MD 9628 2-133
CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR CTM_TRACE
MD 9639 2-134 MD 9626 2-133
CTM_MODE_SELECT_BY_SOFTKEY CTM_WEAR_INPUT_DIAM_ON
MD 9624 2-133 MD 9629 2-133
CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM CTRL_CONFIG

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 1004 2-67 Current reverse position 1 for oscill.

MD 5004 2-104 in the BCS .................................. 3-315; 3-378
CTRLOUT_DELAY Current reverse position 2 for oscill.
MD 1101 2-70 in the BCS ................................... 3-315; 3-378
CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME Current speed limitation for spindle 3-330; 3-401
MD 10082 2-144 Current state reached during the
CTRLOUT_LEAD_TIME_MAX boot process ............................... 3-322; 3-385
MD 10083 2-144 Current stroke number ............................... 3-372
CTRLOUT_LIMIT Current width of the grinding wheel ........... 3-423
MD 36210 2-227 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH
CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME MD 1211 2-76
MD 36220 2-227 CURRENT_FILTER_1_BS_FREQ
CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR.......................... 3-460 MD 1222 2-77
CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR CURRENT_FILTER_1_BW_NUM
MD 30110 2-210 MD 1212 2-76
CTRLOUT_NR CURRENT_FILTER_1_DAMPING
MD 30120 2-210 MD 1203 2-75
CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR CURRENT_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY
MD 30100 2-210 MD 1202 2-75
CTRLOUT_TYPE ....................................... 3-460 CURRENT_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ
CTRLOUT_TYPE MD 1210 2-76
CUBIC_SPLINE_BLOCKS MD 1214 2-76
Curr. safety actual value difference MD 1223 2-77
NCK - drive ..................................3-325; 3-389 CURRENT_FILTER_2_BW_NUM
Curr. safety speed difference MD 1215 2-76; 2-77
NCK - drive ..................................3-326; 3-389 CURRENT_FILTER_2_DAMPING
CURRCTRL_ADAPT_CURRENT_1 MD 1205 2-75
MD 1180 2-74 CURRENT_FILTER_2_FREQUENCY
CURRCTRL_ADAPT_CURRENT_2 MD 1204 2-75
MD 1181 2-74 CURRENT_FILTER_2_SUPPR_FREQ
CURRCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE MD 1213 2-76
CURRCTRL_CYCLE_TIME MD 1217 2-77
CURRCTRL_GAIN MD 1224 2-78
MD 1120 2-72 CURRENT_FILTER_3_BW_NUM
CURRCTRL_GAIN_M2 MD 1218 2-77
MD 2120 2-98 CURRENT_FILTER_3_DAMPING
CURRCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME MD 1207 2-76
MD 1121 2-72 CURRENT_FILTER_3_FREQUENCY
CURRCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_M2 MD 1206 2-75
MD 2121 2-98 CURRENT_FILTER_3_SUPPR_FREQ
CURRCTRL_REF_MODEL_DELAY MD 1216 2-77
Current application ..................................... 3-476 MD 1220 2-77
Current channel.......................................... 3-476 CURRENT_FILTER_4_BS_FREQ
Current coupling state of the slave MD 1225 2-78
spindle .........................................3-313; 3-376 CURRENT_FILTER_4_BW_NUM
Current gross cycle time ............................ 3-470 MD 1221 2-77
Current indexing position number ...3-317; 3-380 CURRENT_FILTER_4_DAMPING
Current location ...............................3-418; 3-435 MD 1209 2-76
Current magazine............................3-417; 3-435 CURRENT_FILTER_4_FREQUENCY
Current magazine position ......................... 3-428 MD 1208 2-76
Current net cycle time ................................ 3-470 CURRENT_FILTER_4_SUPPR_FREQ
Current operating mode MMC .................... 3-476 MD 1219 2-77
Current physical unit .................................. 3-311 CURRENT_FILTER_CONFIG
Current physical unit of axis ....................... 3-394 MD 1201 2-75
Current physical unit of the axis position .... 3-374 CURRENT_LIMIT
Current position of channel axes ................ 3-341 MD 1238 2-79
Current position of machine ....................... 3-341 CURRENT_LIMIT_M2

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 2238 2-101 MD 5152 2-106

CURRENT_LSB CYLINDER_PISTON_DIAMETER
MD 1710 2-95 MD 5131 2-106
CURRENT_MONITOR_FILTER_TIME CYLINDER_SAFETY_CONFIG
MD 1254 2-80 MD 5530 2-113
CURRENT_ROTORPOS_IDENT
MD 1019 2-68
CURRENT_SMOOTH_HYSTERESIS D
MD 1246 2-79
CURRENT_SMOOTH_HYSTERESIS_M2 Dadr........................................................... 3-365
MD 2246 2-101 DARKTIME_TO_PLC (für OP 30)
CURRENT_SMOOTH_SPEED MD 9015 2-119
MD 1245 2-79 data................................................. 3-420; 3-421
CURRENT_SMOOTH_SPEED_M2 Data byte in link area ................................. 3-296
MD 2245 2-101 Data list index (see module ETPD)............ 3-474
CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL Data recording method .............................. 3-473
MD 20602 2-181 Data version ................................... 3-411; 3-413
CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK Data word in link area ................................ 3-297
MD 20603 2-181 dataListIndex ............................................. 3-474
Customer start picture ................................ 2-133 DC-link voltage .......................................... 3-413
Customer start-up screen. 0: Siemens, 1: Default power-up menu selectable ............ 2-119
Customer screen .................................... 2-137 DEFAULT_FEED
CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE MD 42110 2-243
MD 9675 2-137 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS
CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL MD 43120 2-246
MD 42494 2-244 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P
CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT MD 42140 2-243
MD 20210 2-178 DES_CURRENT_OPEN_LOOP_AM
CUTCOM_CURVE_INSERT_LIMIT MD 1458 2-87
MD 20230 2-178 DES_CURRENT_OPEN_LOOP_AM_M2
CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE MD 2458 2-102
MD 42490 2-244 DES_VELO_LIMIT
CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE MD 36520 2-227
MD 20256 2-179 Desired parameter set of the drive . 3-320; 3-383
CUTCOM_MAX_DISC Desired torque value in Nm ............ 3-316; 3-379
MD 20220 2-178 Desired value of axis-specific feedrate ...... 3-398
CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS Desired value of axis-specific feedrate, ..... 3-381
MD 20240 2-178 Desired value of position after fine
CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS interpolation ............................... 3-318; 3-381
MD 20250 2-179 Desired value of rotary speed .................... 3-409
CUTCOM_MAXNUM_SUPPR_BLOCKS Desired value of rotary speed. ................... 3-381
MD 20252 2-179 Desired value of the interpolation feedrate 3-348
CUTCOM_PARALLEL_ORI_LIMIT DESIRED_CYL_FORCE
MD 21080 2-183 MD 5717 2-116
CUTCOM_PLANE_ORI_LIMIT DESIRED_SPEED
MD 21082 2-183 MD 1706 2-94
CUTCOM_PLANE_PATH_LIMIT MD 5706 2-115
MD 21084 2-183 DESIRED_VALVE_SPOOL_POS
cuttEdgeNo ................................................ 3-445 MD 5715 2-116
cuttEdgeParam ...............................3-415; 3-457 DESIRED_VOLTAGE
CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT MD 1705 2-94
MD 20270 2-179 desiredSpeed ................................. 3-409; 3-412
CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE diagnoseDataFfs ....................................... 3-299
MD 20130 2-176 DIAGNOSIS_ACTIVATION_FLAGS
cycServRestricted ...................................... 3-348 MD 1610 2-91
CYLINDER_A_ORIENTATION MD 5610 2-114
MD 5151 2-106 DIAGNOSIS_CONTROL_FLAGS
CYLINDER_DEAD_VOLUME_A MD 1650 2-92
MD 5135 2-106 MD 5650 2-114
CYLINDER_DEAD_VOLUME_B Diameter display for active transverse axes2-132
MD 5136 2-106 DIAMETER_AX_DEF
CYLINDER_FASTENING MD 20100 2-175

08/99 Lists
I Index
DIFF_ROTORPOS_IDENT DISPLAY_AXIS
MD 1737 2-97 MD 20098 2-175
DIG_A_MAX DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME (für MMC100)
MD 21460 2-188 MD 9006 2-118
DIG_A_MAX_MOVE DISPLAY_IS_MODULO
MD 21462 2-188 MD 30320 2-211
DIG_A_MAX_SCAN DISPLAY_MODE (für MMC 100)
MD 21464 2-188 MD 9002 2-118
DIG_ASSIGN_DIGITIZE_TO_CHAN DISPLAY_RESOLUTION
MD 11430 2-157 MD 9004 2-118
DIG_ASSIGN_NUM_OF_AXES DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH
MD 11432 2-157 MD 9011 2-119
DIG_DELTAPOS displayAxis........................... 3-319; 3-382; 3-398
MD 21440 2-187 displayState ............................................... 3-359
DIG_L_INKR Dist.-to-go of infeed during oscill.
MD 21424 2-187 in the WCS ............................................ 3-340
DIG_L_MIN Distance from beginning of the block
MD 21430 2-187 in the BCS .............................................. 3-340
DIG_L_NORMAL Distance from the beginning of block in the
MD 21432 2-187 WCS....................................................... 3-340
DIG_L_NOTAUS Distance per revolution ................... 3-319; 3-382
MD 21434 2-187 Distance to change position ...................... 3-432
DIG_L_NOTAUS_EXT Distance to the end of the block
MD 21436 2-187 in the BCS .............................................. 3-340
DIG_L_OFF_Z Distance to the end of the block
MD 21422 2-187 in the WCS ............................................. 3-340
DIG_L_ORDER Distance-to-go of infeed during oscill. in the
MD 21420 2-187 BCS........................................................ 3-340
DIG_P_HAND distPerDriveRevol ........................... 3-319; 3-382
MD 21470 2-188 DIVISION_LIN_SCALE
DIG_P_MAX MD 1024 2-69
MD 37310 2-237 MD 5024 2-104
DIG_P_MIN DIVISION_LIN_SCALE_DM
MD 37300 2-237 MD 1034 2-69
DIG_P_SCAN DNDT_THRESHOLD
MD 21472 2-188 MD 1611 2-91
DIG_PROT_VERSION DNo ........................................................... 3-445
MD 21400 2-187 D-number........................................ 3-365; 3-445
DIG_SENSOR_OFFSET Double word data (32 bits) from/to the PLC3-296
MD 21476 2-188 DRF active ................................................. 3-353
DIG_T_SCAN DRF value.................................................. 3-399
MD 21474 2-188 DRFActive.................................................. 3-353
DIG_V_EILGANG drfVal ......................................................... 3-399
MD 21450 2-188 DRIFT_ENABLE
DIG_V_MAX MD 36700 2-228
MD 37320 2-237 DRIFT_LIMIT
digitInpVal .................................................. 3-299 MD 36710 2-228
digitOutpVal................................................ 3-299 DRIFT_VALUE
Dimension of the magazine........................ 3-429 MD 36720 2-228
DIR_VECTOR_NAME_TAB Drive assignment ...... 3-320; 3-323; 3-383; 3-387
MD 10640 2-151 Drive error code for alarm 300911 .. 3-411; 3-413
Direct encoder used ................................... 3-410 Drive load in % (611D only) ............ 3-314; 3-377
direction...................................................... 3-348 Drive power in W (611D only) ......... 3-315; 3-378
Display of active axis.................................. 3-298 Drive ready ..................................... 3-321; 3-384
Display of existing axes.............................. 3-347 Drive switched on ........................... 3-321; 3-384
Display resolution ....................................... 2-118 Drive type................................................... 3-458
Display resolution for INCH system of units 2-119 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM
Display resolution for spindle values .......... 2-118 MD 31050 2-213
Display state for block display .................... 3-359 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA
Display the X tool data as diameter ........... 2-133 MD 31060 2-213
Display the X tool wear data as diameter ... 2-133 DRIVE_DAMPING
Display traversing blocks ........................... 3-353 MD 5161 2-106

Lists 08/99
I Index
DRIVE_DIAGNOSIS MD 42100 2-243

MD 13100 2-162 DRYRUN_MASK
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM MD 10704 2-152
MD 31070 2-213 DUAL_GAIN_COMP_SMOOTH_RANGE
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA MD 5466 2-111
MD 31080 2-213 DUAL_GAIN_COMP_SMOOTH_Z_R
DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE ........................ 3-458 MD 5482 2-112
DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE dummy ....................................................... 3-399
MD 13020 2-162 Duplo number ...................... 3-417; 3-434; 3-445
DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE .................................... 3-458 Duplo number of active tool ....................... 3-343
DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE Duplo number of programmed tool) ........... 3-350
MD 13000 2-161 duploNo .......................................... 3-417; 3-445
DRIVE_LOGIC_NR .................................... 3-458 Dval ........................................................... 3-365
DRIVE_LOGIC_NR Dwell time for cycles in seconds ................ 2-133
MD 13010 2-162 Dwell time, above, tapping on circle of holes 2-135
DRIVE_MASS Dwell time, below, tapping on circle of holes 2-135
MD 5150 2-106 DYN_MATCH_ENABLE
DRIVE_MAX_SPEED MD 32900 2-220
MD 5401 2-109 DYN_MATCH_TIME
DRIVE_MAX_SPEED_SETUP MD 32910 2-220
MD 5420 2-110 Dynamic parameters for synchronous
DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE............................ 3-458 actions.................................................... 3-466
DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE
MD 13030 2-162
DRIVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY E
MD 5163 2-107
DRIVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY_A Eadr ........................................................... 3-365
MD 5162 2-107 Edge number ............................................. 3-445
DRIVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY_B Edge offset value ....................................... 3-416
MD 5164 2-107 Edge offset value parameter ..................... 3-415
DRIVE_SIGNAL_TRACKING edgeData ............................. 3-416; 3-422; 3-457
MD 36730 2-228 edgeECData ................................... 3-450; 3-451
DRIVE_TYPE ............................................. 3-458 edgeSCData ................................... 3-454; 3-455
DRIVE_TYPE effComp1 ........................................ 3-322; 3-385
MD 13040 2-162 effComp2 ........................................ 3-322; 3-385
drive2ndTorqueLimit .......................3-319; 3-382 Effective milling diameter for face milling .. 2-137
driveActMotorSwitch........................3-319; 3-382 EG axis number master axis...................... 3-338
driveActParamSet ...........................3-319; 3-382 EG block change criterion ......................... 3-349
driveClass1Alarm ............................3-319; 3-382 EG denominator link factor ........................ 3-338
driveContrMode...............................3-320; 3-383 EG link active............................................. 3-338
driveCoolerTempWarn ....................3-320; 3-383 EG link type ............................................... 3-339
driveDesMotorSwitch ......................3-320; 3-383 EG number of master axes ........................ 3-339
driveDesParamSet ..........................3-320; 3-383 EG numerator link factor ............................ 3-338
driveFastStop ..................................3-320; 3-383 EG synchronism deviation ......................... 3-352
driveFreqMode ................................3-320; 3-383 EG synchronous position of master axis ... 3-339
driveImpulseEnabled.......................3-320; 3-383 EG synchronous position of slave axis ...... 3-339
driveIndex........................................3-320; 3-383 EG_ACC_TOL
driveIntegDisable ............................3-320; 3-383 MD 37560 2-237
driveLinkVoltageOk .........................3-321; 3-384 EG_VEL_WARNING
driveLoad ........................................3-330; 3-401 MD 37550 2-237
driveMotorTempWarn .....................3-321; 3-384 EMF_VOLTAGE
driveNumCrcErrors .........................3-321; 3-384 MD 1114 2-71
driveParked .....................................3-321; 3-384 Enable 4th axis for the user interface ........ 2-136
drivePowerOn..................................3-321; 3-384 Enable B_Axis ........................................... 2-138
driveProgMessages ........................3-321; 3-384 Enable C axis for surface........................... 2-132
driveReady ......................................3-321; 3-384 Enable constant cutting speed from
driveRunLevel .................................3-322; 3-385 tool table ................................................ 2-134
driveSetupMode ..............................3-322; 3-385 Enable cylinder surface transformation ..... 2-138
driveSpeedSmoothing .....................3-322; 3-385 Enable drilling of circle of holes ................. 2-134
Dry run feedrate ..............................3-355; 3-462 Enable G code input .................................. 2-134
DRY_RUN_FEED ...................................... 3-462 Enable inverter impulse .................. 3-320; 3-383
DRY_RUN_FEED Enable Manual tools .................................. 2-138

08/99 Lists
I Index
Enable NC start without referenced axes ... 2-133 ENC_MARKER_INC

Enable reference point approach for MD 34310 2-223
ManualTurn............................................. 2-133 ENC_MODULE_NR................................... 3-460
Enable support of rotating tools ................. 2-134 ENC_MODULE_NR
Enable Swivel heads .................................. 2-138 MD 30220 2-211
Enable the feedrate selection in mm/min ... 2-131 ENC_PHASE_ERROR_CORRECTION
Enable the rapid traverse selection as MD 1008 2-67
feedrate .................................................. 2-131 MD 5008 2-104
ENABLE_ALARM_MASK ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST
MD 11411 2-157 MD 34300 2-223
ENABLE_CHAN_AX_GAP ENC_REFP_MODE
MD 11640 2-158 MD 34200 2-222
ENABLE_STAR_DELTA ENC_REFP_STATE
MD 1013 2-68 MD 34210 2-222
ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_DIRECT ENC_RESOL
MD 1033 2-69 MD 31020 2-213
ENC_ABS_DIAGNOSIS_MOTOR ENC_RESOL_DIRECT
MD 1023 2-69 MD 1007 2-67
MD 5023 2-104 ENC_RESOL_MOTOR
ENC_ABS_RESOL_DIRECT MD 1005 2-67
MD 1032 2-69 MD 5005 2-104
ENC_ABS_RESOL_MOTOR ENC_RESOL_MOTOR_M2
MD 1022 2-69 MD 2005 2-98
MD 5022 2-104 ENC_SEGMENT_NR
ENC_ABS_TURN_MOTOR MD 30210 2-210
MD 5021 2-104 ENC_SPEED_LIMIT
ENC_ABS_TURNS_DIRECT MD 5609 2-114
MD 1031 2-69 ENC_TYPE................................................ 3-460
ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO ENC_TYPE
MD 34220 2-222 MD 30240 2-211
ENC_ABS_TURNS_MOTOR MD 5790 2-117
MD 1021 2-68 ENC_TYPE_DIRECT
ENC_CHANGE_TOL MD 1791 2-97
MD 36500 2-227 ENC_TYPE_MOTOR
ENC_COMP_ENABLE MD 1790 2-97
MD 32700 2-219 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING
ENC_DIFF_TOL MD 36310 2-227
MD 36510 2-227 encChoice....................................... 3-322; 3-385
ENC_FEEDBACK_POL encTypeDirect................................. 3-410; 3-412
MD 32110 2-216 encTypeMotor................................. 3-410; 3-413
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT End of the first RPA range ......................... 2-122
MD 36300 2-227 End of the second RPA range ................... 2-122
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW End of the third RPA range ........................ 2-122
MD 36302 2-227 EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP
ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST MD 37400 2-237
MD 31010 2-213 EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME
ENC_HANDWHEEL_INPUT_NR MD 32800 2-219
MD 11344 2-156 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME
ENC_HANDWHEEL_MODULE_NR MD 32810 2-220
MD 11342 2-156 ESR alarm status....................................... 3-339
ENC_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT_NR ESR axis enable ............................. 3-313; 3-376
MD 11340 2-155 ESR axis status .............................. 3-314; 3-377
ENC_INPUT_NR ESR start signal ......................................... 3-297
MD 30230 2-211 ESR_REACTION
ENC_INVERS MD 37500 2-237
MD 34320 2-223 Estimation of program runtime .................. 3-342
ENC_IS_DIRECT EULER_ANGLE_NAME_TAB
MD 31040 2-213 MD 10620 2-151
ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT Eval............................................................ 3-365
MD 30242 2-211 eventActive ................................................ 3-474
ENC_IS_LINEAR eventActiveStatus ...................................... 3-474
MD 31000 2-213 Existing TO edge parameters .................... 3-269

Lists 08/99
I Index
EXPONENT_LIMIT (nur MMC 100) Feedrate in mm/tooth ................................ 2-137

MD 9030 2-119 Feedrate override ................ 3-322; 3-386; 3-399
EXPONENT_SCIENCE (nur MMC 100) feedRateIpoOvr ......................................... 3-348
MD 9031 2-119 feedRateIpoUnit......................................... 3-348
EXT_PROG_PATH feedRateOvr ........................ 3-322; 3-386; 3-399
MD 42700 2-245 feedStopActive .......................................... 3-353
EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO FFS diagnostic data................................... 3-299
MD 10888 2-154 FFS free memory....................................... 3-300
EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG FFS memory defect ................................... 3-299
MD 10884 2-153 FFS net size .............................................. 3-300
EXTERN_G00_MODE FFS total size............................................. 3-304
MD 10892 2-154 FFS used memory ..................................... 3-304
EXTERN_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE
MD 22512 2-192 MD 32630 2-218
EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_BW
MD 20154 2-177 MD 5269 2-109
EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_BW_NUM
MD 10886 2-153 MD 5270 2-109
EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_DAMP
MD 10890 2-154 MD 5265 2-109
External execution...................................... 3-360 FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_FREQ
External monitor ......................................... 2-118 MD 5264 2-109
External NCK input of SI prog. log. from NCK FFW_FCTRL_FIL_1_SUP_FREQ
peri.......................................................... 3-301 MD 5268 2-109
External NCK output of SI prog. log. FFW_FCTRL_FILTER_TYPE
to NCK per. ............................................. 3-301 MD 5261 2-109
External PLC output of the SI progr. logic .. 3-301 FFW_MODE
externCncSystem ....................................... 3-269 MD 32620 2-218
extProgActive ............................................. 3-348 FGROUP_DEFAULT_AXES
extProgBufferName.................................... 3-360 MD 22420 2-191
extProgFlag ................................................ 3-360 FIELD_WEAKENING_SPEED
extraCuttEdgeParams ................................ 3-269 MD 1142 2-73
extUnit ..................................3-311; 3-374; 3-394 FIELD_WEAKENING_SPEED_M2
MD 2142 2-99
FIELDCTRL_GAIN
F MD 1150 2-74
FIELDCTRL_GAIN_M2
F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET MD 2150 2-100
MD 22410 2-191 FIELDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME
FASTIO_ANA_INPUT_WEIGHT MD 1151 2-74
MD 10320 2-147 FIELDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_M2
FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS MD 2151 2-100
MD 10300 2-146 FIFO buffer for execution from external
FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS source .................................................... 3-360
MD 10310 2-146 FIFO variable for synchronous actions ...... 3-466
FASTIO_ANA_OUTPUT_WEIGHT Fill level of the IPO buffer
MD 10330 2-147 (integer value in %) ................................ 3-470
FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS fillText1 ................................ 3-306; 3-307; 3-310
MD 10350 2-147 fillText2 ................................ 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS fillText3 ................................ 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
MD 10360 2-147 fillText4 ................................ 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
FASTIO_DIG_SHORT_CIRCUIT findBlActive ................................................ 3-349
MD 10361 2-147 Fine offset with
fctGenState .....................................3-322; 3-386 frames ................... 3-334; 3-335; 3-373; 3-405
Feed disable............................................... 3-353 Finishing feedrate as percentage .............. 2-133
Feed forward control factor torque ..3-324; 3-387 FIPO_TYPE
Feed forward control factor velocity 3-324; 3-387 MD 33000 2-220
Feed forward control mode .............3-324; 3-387 Firmware date................................. 3-410; 3-413
FEEDBK_SPEED_THRESHOLD Firmware version ............................ 3-410; 3-413
MD 5422 2-110 FIRMWARE_DATE
Feedrate in mm/min ................................... 2-137 MD 1798 2-98
Feedrate in mm/revolution ......................... 2-137 MD 5798 2-117

08/99 Lists
I Index
FIRMWARE_VERSION MD 1239 2-79

MD 1799 2-98 FORCE_LIMIT_SWITCH_HYST
MD 5799 2-117 MD 1234 2-78
firmwareDate ...................................3-410; 3-413 FORCE_LIMIT_SWITCH_SPEED
firmwareVersion ..............................3-410; 3-413 MD 1232 2-78
FIRST_LANGUAGE (für MMC 100) FORCE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD
MD 9003 2-118 MD 5230 2-108
FIX_POINT_POS FORCE_LIMIT_WEIGHT
MD 30600 2-212 MD 5231 2-108
FIXED_LINK_VOLTAGE FORCE_LSB
MD 1161 2-74 MD 1713 2-95
FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK MD 5713 2-116
MD 37060 2-236 FORCE_THRESHOLD_X
FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK MD 1428 2-86
MD 37050 2-236 FORCECONTROLLED_SYSTEM_GAIN
FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE MD 5240 2-108
MD 37070 2-236 FORCECTRL_CONFIG
FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR MD 5241 2-108
MD 37040 2-235 FORCECTRL_DIFF_TIME
FIXED_STOP_CONTROL MD 5246 2-108
MD 37002 2-235 FORCECTRL_GAIN
FIXED_STOP_MODE MD 5242 2-108
MD 37000 2-235 FORCECTRL_GAIN_RED
FIXED_STOP_SWITCH MD 5243 2-108
MD 43500 2-247 FORCECTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME
FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD MD 5244 2-108
MD 37030 2-235 FORCECTRL_PT1_TIME
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE MD 5245 2-108
MD 43510 2-247 Foreground language ................................ 2-118
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF forward............................................ 3-361; 3-363
MD 37010 2-235 FPU_CTRLWORD_INIT
FIXED_STOP_WINDOW MD 18910 2-172
MD 43520 2-247 FPU_ERROR_MODE
FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF MD 18900 2-172
MD 37020 2-235 FPU_EXEPTION_MASK
Flag variable for synchronous actions ........ 3-466 MD 18920 2-172
Flag variable for synchronous motion ........ 3-465 FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS
FLUID_ELASTIC_MODULUS MD 24000 2-194
MD 5100 2-105 FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE
FLUX_ACQUISITION_SPEED MD 10600 2-151
MD 1160 2-74 FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE
FLUX_ACQUISITION_SPEED_M2 MD 10602 2-151
MD 2160 2-100 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG
FLUX_AQUISITION_SPEED MD 42440 2-244
MD 1160 2-74 FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED
focStat .............................................3-323; 3-386 MD 32074 2-215
FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIV Free memory for synchronous actions ...... 3-342
MD 9667 2-137 Free memory in bytes ................................ 3-299
Following error ................................3-323; 3-386 Free SRAM in bytes................................... 3-299
For active tech.cycle freeDirectorys ............................................ 3-299
block no. of current action 3-368 freeFiles ..................................................... 3-299
FORCE_CURRENT_RATIO freeMem..................................................... 3-299
MD 1113 2-71 freeMemDram............................................ 3-299
FORCE_FFW_WEIGHT freeMemFfs................................................ 3-300
MD 5247 2-108 freeProtokolFiles........................................ 3-300
FORCE_FILTER_FREQUENCY FREQ_STEP_LIMIT
MD 1252 2-80 MD 31350 2-214
FORCE_LIMIT_1 FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1
MD 1230 2-78 MD 32550 2-218
FORCE_LIMIT_2 FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2
MD 1231 2-78 MD 32560 2-218
FORCE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 32570 2-218 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT

FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE MD 35140 2-224
MD 32510 2-218 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX MD 35210 2-224
MD 32520 2-218 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN MD 35200 2-224
MD 32530 2-218 GEN_AXIS_MIN_SPEED
FRICT_COMP_ENABLE MD 1635 2-92
MD 32500 2-218 GEN_STOP_DELAY
FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR MD 1637 2-92
MD 32580 2-218 GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE
FRICT_COMP_MODE MD 22532 2-192
MD 32490 2-217 GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
FRICT_COMP_TIME MD 20118 2-176
MD 32540 2-218 geoAxisNr .................................................. 3-399
FRICTION_COMP_GRADIENT Geometry or auxiliary axis ......................... 3-394
MD 5460 2-111 Global basic unit ........................................ 3-268
FRICTION_COMP_OUTPUT_RANGE Global uplaoad starting point for ACC
MD 5461 2-111 entries .................................................... 3-296
FUNC_SWITCH GroupID ..................................................... 3-295
MD 1012 2-68 Gruppe....................................................... 3-295
MD 5012 2-104 Gruppe_NUM............................................. 3-295
Function ..................................................... 3-295 gwpsActive...................................... 3-330; 3-401
fxsStat .............................................3-323; 3-386
H
G
Hadr........................................................... 3-366
G00_ACCEL_FACTOR HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND
MD 32434 2-217 MD 20624 2-182
G00_JERK_FACTOR HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_SIZE
MD 32435 2-217 MD 20620 2-181
G53_TOOLCORR HANDWH_GEOAX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE
MD 10760 2-153 MD 20622 2-181
GAIN_FOR_MONITORING HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH
MD 31520 2-214 MD 11320 2-155
GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE HANDWH_MAX_INCR_SIZE
MD 37100 2-236 MD 32080 2-215
GANTRY_BREAK_UP HANDWH_MAX_INCR_VELO_SIZE
MD 37140 2-236 MD 32082 2-215
GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR HANDWH_ORIAX_MAX_INCR_SIZE
MD 37120 2-236 MD 20621 2-181
GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF HANDWH_ORIAX_MAX_INCR_VSIZE
MD 37130 2-236 MD 20623 2-181
GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING HANDWH_REVERSE
MD 37110 2-236 MD 11310 2-155
GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC HANDWH_STOP_COND
MD 22510 2-192 MD 32084 2-215
GCODE_RESET_MODE HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE
MD 20152 2-177 MD 11346 2-156
GCODE_RESET_VALUES HANDWH_VELO_OVERLAY_FACTOR
MD 20150 2-177 MD 32090 2-216
GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE Handwheel feedrate type ........................... 2-132
MD 35010 2-223 handwheelAss ..................... 3-323; 3-386; 3-399
GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION Heatsink temperature monitoring ... 3-320; 3-383
MD 35012 2-223 HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO MD 30505 2-212
MD 35110 2-224 Hval ........................................................... 3-366
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN
MD 35130 2-224 MD 10362 2-147
GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT
MD 35120 2-224 MD 10364 2-147

08/99 Lists
I Index
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN Index of the active set frame...................... 3-343

MD 10366 2-147 INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT MD 30500 2-212
MD 10368 2-147 INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR
HW_CLOCKED_MODULE_MASK MD 30502 2-212
MD 10384 2-148 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1
HW_LEAD_TIME_FASTIO MD 10900 2-154
MD 10382 2-148 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2
HW_UPDATE_RATE_FASTIO MD 10920 2-154
MD 10380 2-148 INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR
MD 30501 2-212
INDEX_AX_OFFSET
I MD 30503 2-212
INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1
I/F mode ..........................................3-320; 3-383 MD 10910 2-154
id 3-366; 3-368 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2
ID of the synchronous action ...........3-366; 3-368 MD 10930 2-154
Identifier for geometry/auxiliary axis ........... 3-398 Indexing number ............................. 3-325; 3-388
Identifier of active tool ................................ 3-345 Indirect encoder used ................................ 3-410
Identifier of the magazine .....3-425; 3-427; 3-429 Infeed distance of tool probe upper edge for
Identifier programmed tool ......................... 3-350 radius measurement .............................. 2-140
IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP Infeed rate with collision monitoring .......... 2-139
MD 20116 2-175 INFO_CROSSCHECK_CYCLE_TIME
IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP MD 10092 2-144
MD 20117 2-176 INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR
IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK MD 18070 2-164
MD 10702 2-152 INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC
Image of external NCK inputs of SI MD 18050 2-164
progr. logic .............................................. 3-301 INFO_FREE_MEM_STATIC
Image of int. NCK inputs of SI progr. logic . 3-302 MD 18060 2-164
Image of int. NCK outputs of the SI INFO_NUM_SAFE_FILE_ACCESS
progr. logic .............................................. 3-302 MD 10093 2-144
Image of int. PLC inputs of the SI INFO_SAFETY_CYCLE_TIME
progr. logic .............................................. 3-302 MD 10091 2-144
Image of int. PLC outputs of the SI INI_FILE_MODE
progr. logic .............................................. 3-302 MD 11220 2-155
Image of the external NCK outputs of SI prog. INIT_MD
log........................................................... 3-301 MD 11200 2-155
Image of the external PLC inputs of SI progr. Instruction group ........................................ 3-295
log........................................................... 3-301 INT_INCR_PER_DEG ............................... 3-458
Image of the external PLC outputs of SI prog. INT_INCR_PER_DEG
log........................................................... 3-302 MD 10210 2-146
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI INT_INCR_PER_MM ................................. 3-459
prog. logic ............................................... 3-303 INT_INCR_PER_MM
Image of the ZK1PO register. .................... 3-409 MD 10200 2-146
Image of the ZK1RES register ................... 3-409 INTCY_DELAY_TIME
Impulse enable for drive ..................3-323; 3-386 MD 14020 2-162
impulseEnable.................................3-323; 3-386 Integrator disable ............................ 3-320; 3-383
IN data byte ................................................ 3-297 Interface for spindle as change position .... 4-535
IN data double word ................................... 3-298 INTERMEDIATE_POINT_NAME_TAB
IN data word ............................................... 3-298 MD 10660 2-152
IN Real data ............................................... 3-298 Internal NCK input of SI progr. logic .......... 3-302
inclAngle..................................................... 3-423 internal NCK output of the SI progr. logic .. 3-302
Inclination angle of inclined grinding wheel 3-423 Internal PLC input of SI progr. logic ........... 3-302
Incorrect block occurred ............................. 3-348 Internal PLC output of SI progr. logic ........ 3-302
Incremental infeed...................................... 2-132 Internal T number ...................................... 3-446
Increments for feedrate in mm/min Interpolation feedrate, override .................. 3-348
(increment/decrement) ........................... 2-133 Interpolation feedrate, units ....................... 3-348
Increments for feedrate in mm/rev INVERTER_CODE
(increment/decrement) ........................... 2-134 MD 1106 2-70
index.............. 3-323; 3-330; 3-386; 3-399; 3-401 INVERTER_MAX_CURRENT
Index of active G function (ISO Dialect) ..... 3-369 MD 1107 2-70

Lists 08/99
I Index
INVERTER_MAX_S6_CURRENT JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID
MD 1109 2-70 MD 32040 2-215
INVERTER_MAX_THERMAL_CURR JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO
MD 1108 2-70 MD 41130 2-239
INVERTER_RATED_CURRENT JOG_SET_VELO
MD 1111 2-70 MD 41110 2-239
invocCount ......................................3-361; 3-363 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO
IPO_CYCLE_TIME MD 41200 2-239
MD 10071 2-143 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE
IPO_PARAM_NAME_TAB MD 41010 2-239
MD 10650 2-151 JOG_VELO
IPO_SPEEDCTRL_DELAY_FACTOR MD 32020 2-215
MD 1665 2-93 JOG_VELO_GEO
IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO MD 21165 2-185
MD 10070 2-143 JOG_VELO_ORI
ipoBlocksOnly ............................................ 3-353 MD 21155 2-184
ipoBufLevel ................................................ 3-470 JOG_VELO_RAPID
IPUCR_DELAY_TIME MD 32010 2-215
MD 14010 2-162 JOG_VELO_RAPID_GEO
IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX MD 21160 2-185
MD 30450 2-212 JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI
IS_LOCAL_LINK_AXIS MD 21150 2-184
MD 30560 2-212
IS_ROT_AX
MD 30300 2-211 K
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL
MD 42502 2-245 KEYBOARD_STATE (für MMC 100)
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK MD 9009 2-118
MD 42512 2-245 KEYBOARD_TYPE (für MMC 100)
IS_VIRTUAL_AX MD 9008 2-118
MD 30132 2-210 kindOfSumcorr........................................... 3-269
Kinematic type ........................................... 3-448
kVFactor ......................................... 3-323; 3-386
J
JOG at revolutional feedrate ...................... 3-461 L

Jog mode ................................................... 3-461
JOG velocity for G94 .................................. 3-461 lag................................................... 3-323; 3-386
JOG velocity for G95 .................................. 3-461 Last assigned T-number for tool
JOG velocity for master spindle ................. 3-461 management .......................................... 3-434
JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE Latched probe position for trigger event 1 in
MD 32420 2-216 MCS ....................................................... 3-377
JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK Latched probe position for trigger event 1 in
MD 32430 2-217 WCS....................................................... 3-397
JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD Latched probe position for trigger event 2 in
MD 41050 2-239 MCS ....................................................... 3-378
JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE Latched probe position for trigger event 2 in
MD 42600 2-245 WCS....................................................... 3-397
JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD Latched probe position for trigger event 3 in
MD 11300 2-155 MCS ....................................................... 3-378
JOG_INCR_SIZE_TAB Latched probe position for trigger event 3 in
MD 11330 2-155 WCS....................................................... 3-397
JOG_INCR_WEIGHT Latched probe position for trigger event 4 in
MD 31090 2-213 MCS ....................................................... 3-378
JOG_MODE_KEYS_EDGETRIGGRD Latched probe position for trigger event 4 in
MD 10731 2-153 WCS....................................................... 3-397
JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE Latched probe position in the MCS. 3-314; 3-377
MD 41100 2-239 Latched probe position retransformed in the
JOG_REV_SET_VELO WCS....................................................... 3-396
MD 41120 2-239 LCD_CONTRAST
JOG_REV_VELO MD 9000 2-118
MD 32050 2-215 LEAD_OFFSET_IN_POS

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 43102 2-246 MD 1634 2-92

LEAD_OFFSET_OUT_POS LINK_VOLTAGE_WARN_LIMIT
MD 43106 2-246 MD 1604 2-90
LEAD_SCALE_IN_POS linkVoltage ...................................... 3-410; 3-413
MD 43104 2-246 linShift
LEAD_SCALE_OUT_POS 3-333; 3-334; 3-335; 3-373; 3-404; 3-406; 3-408
MD 43108 2-246 linShiftFine ................ 3-334; 3-335; 3-373; 3-405
LEAD_TIME_DIRECT_ENC Load.......................... 3-330; 3-401; 3-410; 3-413
MD 1704 2-94 LOAD
LEAD_TIME_MOTOR_ENC MD 1722 2-96
MD 1703 2-94 LOAD_SMOOTH_TIME
LEAD_TYPE MD 1251 2-79
MD 43100 2-246 Location ..................................................... 3-445
LEADSCREW_PITCH Location-dependent setup offset ............... 3-450
MD 31030 2-213 Location-dependent wear offset ................ 3-454
LEN_AC_FIFO logDriveNo ...................................... 3-323; 3-387
MD 28264 2-207 Logical drive number ................................. 3-458
LEN_PROTOCOL_FILE LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS
MD 11420 2-157 MD 20430 2-180
Length of FFS ............................................ 3-468 LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS
Length of tabulator ..................................... 2-118 MD 20440 2-180
Length of the path between punches ......... 3-371 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE
Level of access rights................................. 3-268 MD 20450 2-180
LH_CURVE_GAIN LOOKAH_USE_VELO_NEXT_BLOCK
MD 1144 2-73 MD 20400 2-180
LH_CURVE_GAIN_M2 Lower limit nth polynominal for synchronous
MD 2144 2-99 action ..................................................... 3-341
LH_CURVE_UPPER_SPEED Lower limit of protection zone,
MD 1143 2-73 applicate...................................... 3-284; 3-292
LH_CURVE_UPPER_SPEED_M2 LPFC_DIAGNOSIS
MD 2143 2-99 MD 1733 2-97
LIFTFAST_DIST LUBRICATION_DIST
MD 21200 2-185 MD 33050 2-221
LIFTFAST_WITH_MIRROR LUD_EXTENDED_SCOPE
MD 21202 2-185 MD 11120 2-155
Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF ludAccCounter ........................................... 3-349
reached........................................3-315; 3-378
LIMIT_GENERATOR
MD 1233 2-78 M
Limitation of protection zone
applicate ......................................3-286; 3-293 M code coolant I and II (-1 = no M code) ... 2-137
Line number of current NC instruction (start M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
1) 3-356 MD 10715 2-153
Link transfer rate ........................................ 3-345 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Link voltage ................................................ 3-410 MD 10716 2-153
LINK_BAUDRATE_SWITCH M01 selected ............................................. 3-353
MD 12540 2-160 M19_SPOS
LINK_RETRY_CTR MD 42890 2-245
MD 12550 2-160 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST
LINK_TERMINATION MD 9421 2-127
MD 12520 2-160 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
LINK_VOLTAGE MD 9424 2-128
MD 1701 2-93; 2-94 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL (für MMC 102/103)
LINK_VOLTAGE_GEN_HYST MD 9423 2-127
MD 1632 2-92 MA_ONLY_MKS_DIST_TO_GO (für MMC 100)
LINK_VOLTAGE_GEN_OFF MD 9420 2-127
MD 1633 2-92 MA_PRESET_MODE
LINK_VOLTAGE_GEN_ON MD 9422 2-127
MD 1631 2-92 machFunc .................................................. 3-349
LINK_VOLTAGE_MON_THRESHOLD Machine axis identifier .................... 3-319; 3-382
MD 1630 2-92 Machine axis name.................................... 3-458
LINK_VOLTAGE_RETRACT MACHINE_ZERO_HIGH

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 5041 2-105 MAX_AX_JERK

MACHINE_ZERO_LOW MD 32431 2-217
MD 5042 2-105 MAX_AX_VELO
Madr ........................................................... 3-366 MD 32000 2-215
magActPlace .............................................. 3-428 MAX_FORCE_FROM_NC
Magazine.................................................... 3-445 MD 1725 2-96
Magazine location data .............................. 3-431 MD 5725 2-116
Magazine location hierarchy ...................... 3-433 MAX_LEAD_ANGLE
Magazine location type .............................. 3-418 MD 21090 2-183
Magazine location user data for a tool MAX_MOVE_ROTORPOS_IDENT
magazine ................................................ 3-441 MD 1020 2-68
Magazine user data for a tool magazine .... 3-440 MAX_PATH_JERK
magBLMag ................................................. 3-425 MD 20600 2-181
magCBCmd................................................ 3-425 MAX_TILT_ANGLE
magCBCmdState ....................................... 3-425 MD 21092 2-183
magCBIdent ............................................... 3-425 MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC
magCMCmdPar1........................................ 3-425 MD 1725 2-96
magCMCmdPar2........................................ 3-425 MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC_M2
magCmd..................................................... 3-428 MD 2725 2-103
magCmdPar1 ............................................. 3-428 MAX_TURN_ROTORPOS_IDENT
magCmdPar2 ............................................. 3-428 MD 1020 2-68
magCmdState ............................................ 3-428 maxCuttingEdgeNo.................................... 3-270
magDim...................................................... 3-429 maxCycleTimeBrut ......................... 3-467; 3-470
magIdent .................................................... 3-429 maxCycleTimeNet .......................... 3-467; 3-470
magKind ..................................................... 3-429 maxElementsFastFifoUsed........................ 3-474
magLink1.................................................... 3-429 maxFileLength ........................................... 3-474
magLink2.................................................... 3-429 maxGrossFileLengthUsed ......................... 3-474
MAGNETIZING_REACTANCE Maximum number of magazine locations . 3-274
MD 1141 2-73 Maximum circumferential speed during tool
MAGNETIZING_REACTANCE_M2 measuring .............................................. 2-139
MD 2141 2-99 Maximum gross cycle time ........................ 3-470
magNo........................................................ 3-429 Maximum gross length of the
magNrPlaces.............................................. 3-429 NCK protocol file .................................... 3-474
magRPlaces ............................................... 3-425 Maximum length of the protocol file ........... 3-474
magSearch ................................................. 3-426 Maximum measuring distance ................... 2-139
magState.................................................... 3-429 Maximum measuring distance for manual
magVIdent.................................................. 3-427 measuring .............................................. 2-139
magVNo ..................................................... 3-427 Maximum measuring distance
magVPlaces ............................................... 3-426 for tool length ......................................... 2-139
magZWMag ............................................... 3-426 Maximum measuring distance
ManualTurn cycles safety distance ............ 2-132 for tool radius ......................................... 2-139
maskToolManagement....................3-270; 3-277 Maximum net cycle time ............................ 3-470
Max. no of data per data list for trace Maximum number of available channels ... 3-270
protocol................................................... 3-271 Maximum number of available drives ........ 3-271
Max. No. avail. tool adapt. data sets .......... 3-270 Maximum number of available
Max. no. of data per data list for trace machine axes ......................................... 3-271
protocol................................................... 3-271 Maximum number of elements in the FIFO
Max. no. of event types for trace buffer ...................................................... 3-474
protocolling ............................................. 3-271 Maximum number of files per directory ...... 3-301
Max. no. of protocol files which may be Maximum number of handwheels .............. 3-274
created.................................................... 3-304 Maximum number of magazines................ 3-274
Max. number edges per tool....................... 3-271 Maximum number of protection zones....... 3-279
Max. number of directories which may be Maximum number of subdirectories
created.................................................... 3-303 per directory ........................................... 3-301
Max. number of files which may be created3-303 Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding
Max. number total offsets per edge ............ 3-271 wheel...................................................... 3-423
Max. safety speed difference Maximum rotary speed of the grinding
NCK - drive ..................................3-326; 3-390 wheel...................................................... 3-423
MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR Maximum speed during tool measuring ..... 2-139
MD 32310 2-216 Maximum spindle speed at G26 ................ 3-463
MAX_AX_ACCEL Maximum value D number ......................... 3-270
MD 32300 2-216 maxNetFileLengthTooSmall ...................... 3-474

08/99 Lists
I Index
MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_7................ 3-283; 3-290

MD 17500 2-163 MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_8................ 3-283; 3-290
MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_9................ 3-283; 3-291
MD 14508 2-163 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0............... 3-284; 3-291
MAXNUM_USER_DATA_HEX MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_1............... 3-284; 3-291
MD 14506 2-163 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_2............... 3-284; 3-291
MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_3............... 3-284; 3-291
MD 14504 2-162 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_4............... 3-284; 3-291
maxNumAdapter ........................................ 3-270 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_5............... 3-284; 3-291
maxnumAlarms .......................................... 3-270 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_6............... 3-284; 3-291
maxnumChannels ...................................... 3-270 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_7............... 3-284; 3-291
maxnumContainer ...................................... 3-270 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_8............... 3-284; 3-291
maxnumContainerSlots .............................. 3-271 MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_9............... 3-284; 3-291
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool............................ 3-271 MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM ................... 3-284; 3-292
maxnumDrives ........................................... 3-271 MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM...................... 3-285; 3-292
maxnumEdgeSC ........................................ 3-271 MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED............... 3-285; 3-292
maxnumEventTypes................................... 3-271 MDU_PA_CONT_NUM................... 3-285; 3-292
maxnumGlobMachAxes ............................. 3-271 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0................ 3-285; 3-292
maxNumSumcorr ....................................... 3-271 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_1................ 3-285; 3-292
maxnumTraceProtData .............................. 3-271 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_2................ 3-285; 3-292
maxnumTraceProtDataList......................... 3-271 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_3................ 3-285; 3-292
maxRotSpeed ............................................ 3-423 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_4................ 3-285; 3-293
maxTipSpeed ............................................. 3-423 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_5................ 3-286; 3-293
M-Code coolant I ........................................ 2-138 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_6................ 3-286; 3-293
M-Code coolant II ....................................... 2-138 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_7................ 3-286; 3-293
MD_FILE_STYLE MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_8................ 3-286; 3-293
MD 11230 2-155 MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_9................ 3-286; 3-293
MD_TEXT_SWITCH (for MMC 102) MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM ...................... 3-286; 3-293
MD 9900 2-130 MDU_PA_ORI ................................ 3-286; 3-294
MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD3-461 MDU_PA_TW ................................. 3-287; 3-294
MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE .................... 3-461 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE
MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO .................... 3-461 MD 13200 2-162
MDD_JOG_SET_VELO ............................. 3-461 measFctState ................................. 3-323; 3-387
MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO ................ 3-461 measPos1....................................... 3-324; 3-387
MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE.................... 3-461 measPos2....................................... 3-324; 3-387
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0.................3-281; 3-288 measPosDev .................................. 3-324; 3-387
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_1.................3-281; 3-288 measUnit ........................................ 3-324; 3-387
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_2.................3-281; 3-288 Measurement accuracy during tool
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_3.................3-281; 3-288 measurement ......................................... 2-140
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_4.................3-281; 3-288 Measuring circuit type of direct measuring
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_5.................3-281; 3-288 system.................................................... 3-412
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_6.................3-281; 3-288 Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_7.................3-281; 3-289 syste....................................................... 3-413
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_8.................3-282; 3-289 Measuring feedrate.................................... 2-139
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_9.................3-282; 3-289 Measuring input for tool probe ................... 2-139
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0................3-282; 3-289 Measuring input for workpiece probe......... 2-139
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_1................3-282; 3-289 Message from the part program ................ 3-357
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_2................3-282; 3-289 Message ZK1 drive alarm ............... 3-319; 3-382
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_3................3-282; 3-289 minCycleTimeBrut .......................... 3-468; 3-470
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_4................3-282; 3-289 minCycleTimeNet ........................... 3-468; 3-471
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_5................3-282; 3-289 MINFEED
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_6................3-282; 3-289 MD 42460 2-244
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_7................3-282; 3-289 Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel ... 3-423
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_8................3-282; 3-290 Minimum feedrate during tool measuring .. 2-140
MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_9................3-283; 3-290 minimum gross cycle time ......................... 3-470
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 ................3-283; 3-290 Minimum net cycle time ............................. 3-471
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_1 ................3-283; 3-290 Minimum spindle speed at G25 ................. 3-463
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_2 ................3-283; 3-290 Minimum width of the grinding wheel......... 3-424
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_3 ................3-283; 3-290 MINMAX_ADDRESS
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_4 ................3-283; 3-290 MD 1652 2-93
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_5 ................3-283; 3-290 MD 5652 2-115
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_6 ................3-283; 3-290 MINMAX_MAX_VALUE

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 1654 2-93 MD 18112 2-166

MD 5654 2-115 MM_LINK_NUM_OF_MODULES
MINMAX_MIN_VALUE MD 18782 2-171
MD 1653 2-93 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
MD 5653 2-115 MD 28085 2-205
MINMAX_SIGNAL_NR MM_LUD_HASH_TABLE_SIZE
MD 1651 2-92 MD 18240 2-169
MD 5651 2-114 MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM
minToolDia ................................................. 3-423 MD 28040 2-204
minToolWide .............................................. 3-424 MM_MAX_AXISPOLY_PER_BLOCK
MIRROR_REF_AX MD 28520 2-207
MD 10610 2-151 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
MIRROR_TOGGLE MD 18105 2-166
MD 10612 2-151 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PERTOOL
MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH MD 18106 2-166
MD 42900 2-245 MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE
MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR MD 18242 2-169
MD 42910 2-245 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
mirrorImgActive MD 18110 2-166
........ 3-333; 3-334; 3-336; 3-373; 3-405; 3-406 MM_MAX_TRACE_DATAPOINTS
Mirroring enabled in a settable frame .................. MD 28180 2-206
3-334; 3-336; 3-373; 3-405 MM_MAX_TRACE_LINK_POINTS
Mirroring enabled in an active frame3-333; 3-406 MD 18790 2-171
MM_ CONTOUR_END_TEXT (für MMC 100) MM_NCK_HASH_TABLE_SIZE
MD 9461 2-128 MD 18260 2-169
MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS MM_NCU_LINK_MASK
MD 28540 2-208 MD 18780 2-171
MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
MD 18342 2-170 MD 28256 2-206
MM_CHAN_HASH_TABLE_SIZE MM_NUM_AC_PARAM
MD 18250 2-169 MD 28254 2-206
MM_COM_TASK_STACK_SIZE MM_NUM_AC_TIMER
MD 18502 2-171 MD 28258 2-207
MM_DIR_HASH_TABLE_SIZE MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES
MD 18300 2-170 MD 28081 2-205
MM_DRIVE_TASK_STACK_SIZE MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP
MD 18520 2-171 MD 28070 2-205
MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS
MD 38000 2-237 MD 28090 2-205
MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM
MD 18360 2-170 MD 28100 2-205
MM_EXT_PROG_NUM MM_NUM_CC_HEAP_MEM
MD 18362 2-170 MD 28105 2-205
MM_EXTCOM_TASK_STACK_SIZE MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18500 2-171 MD 18090 2-165
MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 10880 2-153 MD 18092 2-165
MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
MD 18800 2-172 MD 18098 2-165
MM_FILE_HASH_TABLE_SIZE MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD 18290 2-169 MD 18094 2-165
MM_FLASHFILESYS_MEM MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD 18331 2-170 MD 18096 2-165
MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18600 2-171 MD 18200 2-167
MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 18150 2-167 MD 18202 2-167
MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM
MD 28060 2-204 MD 18208 2-168
MM_IPO_TASK_STACK_SIZE MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM
MD 28510 2-207 MD 18204 2-168
MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR MM_NUM_CCS_TOA_PARAM

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 18206 2-168 MD 18104 2-166

MM_NUM_CURVE_POLYNOMS MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
MD 18404 2-170 MD 18088 2-165
MM_NUM_CURVE_SEGMENTS MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES
MD 18402 2-170 MD 28080 2-205
MM_NUM_CURVE_TABS MM_NUM_USER_MACROS
MD 18400 2-170 MD 18160 2-167
MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS
MD 18100 2-166; 2-255 MD 28150 2-205
MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS
MD 18310 2-170 MD 28530 2-208
MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS MM_PREP_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 28252 2-206 MD 28500 2-207
MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS
MD 18320 2-170 MD 38010 2-237
MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM
MD 18280 2-169 MD 28000 2-204
MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES MM_SERVO_TASK_STACK_SIZE
MD 18602 2-171 MD 18510 2-171
MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES MM_SIZEOF_LINKVAR_DATA
MD 18601 2-171 MD 18700 2-171
MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD 18118 2-166 MD 18080 2-164; 2-255
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_AXIS MM_TRACE_DATA_FUNCTION
MD 18140 2-167 MD 22714 2-193
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN MM_TRACE_LINK_DATA_FUNCTION
MD 18130 2-167 MD 18792 2-172
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18120 2-166 MD 18091 2-165
MM_NUM_LINKVAR_ELEMENTS MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 28160 2-206 MD 18093 2-165
MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM
MD 28020 2-204 MD 18099 2-166
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD 18084 2-164; 2-255 MD 18095 2-165
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD 18086 2-164; 2-255 MD 18097 2-165
MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18170 2-167 MD 18201 2-167
MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 18180 2-167 MD 18203 2-168
MM_NUM_MMC_UNITS MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM
MD 10134 2-145 MD 18209 2-168
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE MM_TYPE_CCS_TDA_PARAM
MD 28210 2-206 MD 18205 2-168
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN MM_TYPE_CCS_TOA_PARAM
MD 28200 2-206 MD 18207 2-168
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
MD 18190 2-167 MD 18102 2-166
MM_NUM_R_PARAM MM_USER_FILE_MEM_MINIMUM
MD 28050 2-204 MD 18350 2-170
MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED
MD 28010 2-204 MD 18230 2-169
MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR MM_USER_MEM_DPR
MD 18270 2-169 MD 18220 2-169
MM_NUM_SUMCORR MM_USER_MEM_DYNAMIC
MD 18108 2-166 MD 18210 2-168
MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT
MD 28250 2-206 MD 9450 2-128
MM_NUM_TOOL MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT
MD 18082 2-164; 2-255 MD 9451 2-128
MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 10132 2-145 MD 2117 2-98

mmcCmd.................................................... 3-277 MOTOR_MASS
mmcCmdPrep ............................................ 3-278 MD 1117 2-71
mmcCmdPrepCounter ............................... 3-300 MOTOR_MAX_ALLOWED_SPEED
mmcCmdQuit ............................................. 3-278 MD 1146 2-73
mmcCmdQuitPrep...................................... 3-278 MOTOR_MAX_ALLOWED_SPEED_M2
Mode group ready ...................................... 3-337 MD 2146 2-100
MODE_AC_FIFO MOTOR_MAX_CURRENT
MD 28266 2-207 MD 1104 2-70
modeSpindleToolRevolver ......................... 3-272 MOTOR_MAX_CURRENT_REDUCTION
MODESWITCH_MASK MD 1105 2-70
MD 20114 2-175 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED
modeWearGroup ....................................... 3-426 MD 1401 2-83
Modification counter for dimension system 3-303 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_M2
Modification counter for magazine data ..... 3-352 MD 2401 2-101
Modification counter for tool offsets ........... 3-352 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED_SETUP
Module identifier ......................................... 3-458 MD 1420 2-86
MODULO_RANGE MOTOR_NOLOAD_CURRENT
MD 30330 2-211 MD 1136 2-73
MONITOR_ADDRESS MOTOR_NOLOAD_CURRENT_M2
MD 11380 2-156 MD 2136 2-99
MD 1656 2-93 MOTOR_NOLOAD_VOLTAGE
MD 5656 2-115 MD 1135 2-72
MONITOR_CYCLE_TIME MOTOR_NOLOAD_VOLTAGE_M2
MD 1002 2-67 MD 2135 2-99
MD 5002 2-104 MOTOR_NOMINAL_CURRENT
MONITOR_DISPLAY MD 1103 2-70
MD 1657 2-93 MOTOR_NOMINAL_CURRENT_M2
MD 5657 2-115 MD 2103 2-98
MONITOR_DISPLAY_INT MOTOR_NOMINAL_FREQUENCY
MD 11382 2-156 MD 1134 2-72
MONITOR_DISPLAY_REAL MOTOR_NOMINAL_FREQUENCY_M2
MD 11384 2-156 MD 2134 2-99
MONITOR_INPUT_INT MOTOR_NOMINAL_POWER
MD 11386 2-156 MD 1130 2-72
MONITOR_INPUT_REAL MOTOR_NOMINAL_POWER_M2
MD 11388 2-156 MD 2130 2-99
MONITOR_INPUT_STROBE MOTOR_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE
MD 11390 2-156 MD 1132 2-72
MD 1659 2-93 MOTOR_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE_M2
MD 5659 2-115 MD 2132 2-99
MONITOR_INPUT_VALUE MOTOR_RATED_SPEED
MD 1658 2-93 MD 1400 2-83
MD 5658 2-115 MOTOR_RATED_SPEED_M2
MONITOR_SEGMENT MD 2400 2-101
MD 1655 2-93 MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT
MD 5655 2-115 MD 1405 2-83
Monitoring data per tool edge .................... 3-420 MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT_M2
Motor temperature...........................3-410; 3-413 MD 2405 2-101
Motor temperature warning .............3-321; 3-384 MOTOR_STANDSTILL_CURRENT
Motor wiring selection (star/delta) ...3-320; 3-383 MD 1118 2-71
MOTOR_CODE MOTOR_SWITCH_SPEED
MD 1102 2-70 MD 1247 2-79
MOTOR_CODE_M2 MOTOR_TEMP_ALARM_TIME
MD 2102 2-98 MD 1603 2-90
MOTOR_FIXED_TEMPERATURE MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT
MD 1608 2-90 MD 1607 2-90
MOTOR_FIXED_TEMPERATURE_M2 MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT_M2
MD 2608 2-102 MD 2607 2-102
MOTOR_INERTIA MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT
MD 1117 2-71 MD 1602 2-90
MOTOR_INERTIA_M2 MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT_M2

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 2602 2-102 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_VOLT

MOTOR_TEMPERATURE MD 5488 2-112
MD 1702 2-94 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_VOLTAGE
motorTemperature ..........................3-410; 3-413 MD 5468 2-111
msg ............................................................ 3-357 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_FLOW
MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN MD 5483 2-112
MD 21220 2-186 NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_VOLT
MULTFEED_STORE_MASK MD 5484 2-112
MD 21230 2-186 nettoMemFfs.............................................. 3-300
multiPlace................................................... 3-432 NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME
Mval............................................................ 3-366 MD 26018 2-203
NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE
MD 26008 2-203
N NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK
MD 26006 2-202
name ............. 3-311; 3-330; 3-374; 3-394; 3-401 NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK
Name of physical spindle. ...............3-330; 3-401 MD 26004 2-202
Name of the active work piece ................... 3-358 NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK
Name of the protocol file including the path 3-474 MD 26020 2-203
namePhys ................ 3-330; 3-332; 3-401; 3-403 NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME
NC in stop state.......................................... 3-351 MD 42402 2-244
NC_PROPERTIES (für MMC 100) No of par. of the mag. user data f tool mag.
MD 9500 2-128 place ...................................................... 3-274
NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB No of par. of the mag. user data for a
MD 10712 2-152 tool mag. ................................................ 3-274
NC_USER_EXTERN_GCODES_TAB No. of active tool for flat D-no. max 8 digits 3-344
MD 10882 2-153 No. of multiple assignments of a magazine
NCBFRAME_POWERON_MASK location................................................... 3-274
MD 10615 2-151 No. of P elements of a cutting edge in module
NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK TUE ........................................................ 3-273
MD 10613 2-151 No. of param. in the user monitoring data . 3-273
ncFkt .......................................................... 3-369 No. of proto. files that have already been
ncFktAct ..................................................... 3-369 created ................................................... 3-304
ncFktBin ..................................................... 3-369 No. progr. tool for flat D-no. with
ncFktBinAct ................................................ 3-369 max. 8 digits ........................................... 3-350
ncFktBinFanuc ........................................... 3-369 No. total offset params per total offset set . 3-274
ncFktBinS................................................... 3-369 No.of directories that have already been
ncFktFanuc ................................................ 3-369 created ................................................... 3-304
ncFktS ........................................................ 3-370 NORMAL_VECTOR_NAME_TAB
NCK alarm pending .................................... 3-347 MD 10630 2-151
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic ..... 3-303 Normalized path parameter ....................... 3-341
NCK logbook .............................................. 3-272 nrDuplo ...................................................... 3-434
NCK sign-of-life .......................................... 3-300 NUM_AC_FIFO
NCK timer variable for the SI programmable MD 28260 2-207
logic ........................................................ 3-303 NUM_CURRENT_FILTERS
NCK type.................................................... 3-272 MD 1200 2-75
NCK version ............................................... 3-272 NUM_EG
nckAliveAndWell ........................................ 3-300 MD 11660 2-158
nckLogbookSeekPos ................................. 3-272 NUM_ENCS
nckType...................................................... 3-272 MD 30200 2-210
nckVersion ................................................. 3-272 NUM_FFW_FCTRL_FILTERS
ncStartCounter ........................................... 3-349 MD 5260 2-109
NCU link active........................................... 3-300 NUM_OUTPUT_FILTERS
NCU_LINKNO MD 5280 2-109
MD 12510 2-160 NUM_OUTPUT_VCTRL_FILTERS
ncuLinkActive ............................................. 3-300 MD 5200 2-107
NEG_DRIVE_SPEED_LIMIT NUM_POLE_PAIRS
MD 5441 2-111 MD 1112 2-70
NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_FLOW NUM_SPEED_FILTERS
MD 5467 2-111 MD 1500 2-87
NEG_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_FLOW MD 5500 2-112
MD 5487 2-112 numActAxes............................................... 3-278

Lists 08/99
I Index
numActDEdges .......................................... 3-445 Number of net bytes the protocol file is

numActMags .............................................. 3-427 too small................................................. 3-474
numAlarms ................................................. 3-300 Number of orientation axes in channel ...... 3-279
numAnalogInp ............................................ 3-272 Number of P elements of a cutting edge ... 3-273
numAnalogOutp ......................................... 3-272 Number of P elements of a tool ................. 3-275
numAuxAxes .............................................. 3-278 Number of P elements of a tool edge in module
numBAGs................................................... 3-272 TS........................................................... 3-273
numBasisFrames ............................3-272; 3-278 Number of parameter set ................ 3-324; 3-387
Number NC instruction groups Number of parameters of a multiple
(ISO Dialect) ........................................... 3-273 assignment............................................. 3-274
Number of active auxiliary functions( H- Number of parameters per adapter ........... 3-274
functions) ................................................ 3-366 Number of parameters per magazine
Number of active channels......................... 3-272 location................................................... 3-274
Number of active drives ............................. 3-273 Number of pending general alarms ........... 3-300
Number of active E-function ....................... 3-365 Number of places after decimal point greater
Number of active machine axes ................. 3-274 than for inch ........................................... 2-134
Number of active S-functions ..................... 3-366 Number of places displayed without
Number of active tool ................................. 3-344 exponent ................................................ 2-119
Number of active tool edge ........................ 3-342 Number of polygon elements / protection
Number of active wear group ..................... 3-428 zone ....................................................... 3-278
Number of assigned handwheel Number of programmed tool ...................... 3-350
..........................................3-323; 3-386; 3-399 Number of programmed tool edge ............. 3-350
Number of auxiliary axes............................ 3-278 Number of protocol files that can still be
Number of available mode groups ............. 3-272 created ................................................... 3-300
Number of axes in channel. ....................... 3-278 Number of real locations in the magazine . 3-429
Number of axis containers ..............3-270; 3-273 Number of slots per axis container . 3-271; 3-273
Number of basic frames in channel ............ 3-278 Number of spindles.................................... 3-279
Number of channel-independent basic Number of strokes ..................................... 3-371
frames..................................................... 3-272 Number of synchronous actions ..... 3-366; 3-368
Number of channel-independent user Number of T area....................................... 3-280
frames..................................................... 3-275 Number of T areas..................................... 3-275
Number of channel-specific R parameters . 3-279 Number of the active M-function ................ 3-366
Number of cutting edges .................3-417; 3-434 Number of the actual drive parameter
Number of D numbers in module ............... 3-445 set ............................................... 3-319; 3-382
Number of data to be protocolled for an Number of the geometry axis..................... 3-399
event....................................................... 3-472 Number of the internal load magazine ....... 3-425
Number of decimal places in the speed input Number of the magazine ................ 3-427; 3-429
field ..............................................2-132; 2-136 Number of the preselected T-function ....... 3-366
Number of defined locations for the control block Number of tool edges ................................ 3-279
................................................................ 3-426 Number of toolholder ................................. 3-347
Number of directories that can be created . 3-299 Number of tools in the area TO ................. 3-434
Number of entries the FIFO buffer is too small Number of user frames .............................. 3-279
for ........................................................... 3-474 Number of valid contour elements .. 3-285; 3-292
Number of events to be skipped ................ 3-475 numChannels ............................................ 3-272
Number of files that can be created ........... 3-299 numContainer ............................................ 3-273
Number of files that have already been numContainerSlots .................................... 3-273
created.................................................... 3-304 numContourInProtArea .............................. 3-278
Number of G functions ............................... 3-295 numCuttEdgeParams ................................ 3-273
Number of gear steps......................2-133; 2-137 numCuttEdgeParams_ts ........................... 3-273
Number of geometry axes .......................... 3-278 numCuttEdgeParams_tu ........................... 3-273
Number of G-functions ............................... 3-295 numCuttEdgeParams_tus ......................... 3-273
Number of highest channel axis. ................ 3-279 numCuttEdges ................................ 3-417; 3-434
Number of HW analog inputs ..................... 3-272 numData .................................................... 3-472
Number of HW analog output .................... 3-297 numDigitInp ............................................... 3-273
Number of HW analog outputs ................... 3-272 numDigitOutp............................................. 3-273
Number of HW digital inputs ...................... 3-273 numDrives ................................................. 3-273
Number of HW digital outputs .................... 3-273 numElementsFastFifoTooSmall ................ 3-474
Number of internal buffer magazine ........... 3-426 numFilesPerDir .......................................... 3-301
Number of log. spindles ............................. 3-279 numGCodeGroups..................................... 3-273
Number of M function for tool change ........ 3-275 numGCodeGroupsFanuc........................... 3-273
Number of magazines ................................ 3-427 numGeoAxes ............................................. 3-278
Number of NC instruction groups ............... 3-273 numGlobMachAxes ................................... 3-274

08/99 Lists
I Index
numHandWheels ....................................... 3-274 Ordinate arc centre of 4th contour

numMachAxes............................................ 3-279 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
numMagLocParams_u ............................... 3-274 Ordinate arc centre of 5th contour
numMagParams_u ..................................... 3-274 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
numMagPlaceParams ................................ 3-274 Ordinate arc centre of 6th contour
numMagPlacesMax.................................... 3-274 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
numMagsMax............................................. 3-274 Ordinate arc centre of 7th contour
numOriAxes ............................................... 3-279 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
numParams_Adapt .................................... 3-274 Ordinate arc centre of 8th contour
numParams_SC ......................................... 3-274 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-289
numPlaceMulti............................................ 3-274 Ordinate arc centre of 9th contour
numPlaceMultiParams ............................... 3-274 element ....................................... 3-282; 3-290
numProtArea .............................................. 3-279 Ordinate end point of 10th contour
numRParams ............................................. 3-279 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
numSpindles .............................................. 3-279 Ordinate end point of 1st contour
numSpindlesLog ........................................ 3-279 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
numStrokes ................................................ 3-371 Ordinate end point of 2nd contour
numSubDirsPerDir ..................................... 3-301 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
numSynAct ......................................3-366; 3-368 Ordinate end point of 4th contour
numToBaust ............................................... 3-275 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
numToolEdges ........................................... 3-279 Ordinate end point of 5th contour
numToolParams_tu .................................... 3-275 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
numTools ................................................... 3-434 Ordinate end point of 6th contour
numUserFrames .............................3-275; 3-279 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
Ordinate end point of 7th contour
element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
O Ordinate end point of 8th contour
element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
Odinate arc centre of 3rd contour element . 3-289 Ordinate end point of 9th contour
Odinate end point of 3rd contour element .. 3-291 element ....................................... 3-284; 3-291
Offset memory number length (Fanuc) ...... 3-343 Ordinate of end point of 3rd contour
Offset memory number radius element .................................................. 3-284
(ISO Dialect)) .......................................... 3-342 ORI_DEF_WITH_G_CODE
Offset normal.............................................. 3-349 MD 21102 2-184
Offset to leading axis/spindle, actual ORI_IPO_WITH_G_CODE
value ............................................3-317; 3-380 MD 21104 2-184
OFFSET_COMPENSATION ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1
MD 5470 2-111 MD 21120 2-184
OFFSETVALUE_FOR_MONITORING ORIAX_TURN_TAB_2
MD 31510 2-214 MD 21130 2-184
ONLINE_CUTCOM_ENABLE ORIENTATION_IS_EULER
MD 20254 2-179 MD 21100 2-183
Operating mode ..............................3-410; 3-413 OSCILL_CTRL_MASK
Operating mode switchover using vertical MD 43770 2-248
softkeys .................................................. 2-133 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1
OPERATING_MODE MD 43720 2-248
MD 1730 2-96 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2
MD 5730 2-116 MD 43730 2-248
OPERATING_MODE_DEFAULT OSCILL_END_POS
MD 10720 2-153 MD 43760 2-248
operatingMode ................................3-410; 3-413 OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE
opMode ................................3-330; 3-337; 3-401 MD 43780 2-248
optStopActive ............................................. 3-353 OSCILL_MODE_MASK
Ordinal number of an alarm .3-305; 3-307; 3-309 MD 11460 2-157
Ordinate arc centre of 10th contour OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES
element........................................3-283; 3-290 MD 43750 2-248
Ordinate arc centre of 1st contour OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1
element........................................3-282; 3-289 MD 43700 2-248
Ordinate arc centre of 2nd contour OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2
element........................................3-282; 3-289 MD 43710 2-248
Ordinate arc centre of 3rd contour OSCILL_VELO
element................................................... 3-282 MD 43740 2-248

Lists 08/99
I Index
OUT data byte ............................................ 3-298 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED

OUT data double word ............................... 3-298 MD 12080 2-159
OUT data word ........................................... 3-298 OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE
OUT Real data ........................................... 3-298 MD 12060 2-159
OUTPUT_ENABLE_DELAY
MD 5531 2-113
OUTPUT_FIL_1_BW P
MD 5289 2-109
OUTPUT_FIL_1_BW_NUM Parameter 1 of the alarm ..... 3-306; 3-307; 3-310
MD 5290 2-109 Parameter 2 of the alarm ..... 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
OUTPUT_FIL_1_DAMP Parameter 3 of the alarm ..... 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
MD 5285 2-109 Parameter 4 of the alarm ..... 3-306; 3-308; 3-310
OUTPUT_FIL_1_FREQ Parameterizing the module TD .................. 3-436
MD 5284 2-109 Parametrizing data for the module TO....... 3-436
OUTPUT_FIL_1_SUP_FREQ Parametrizing mask for the module TD ..... 3-437
MD 5288 2-109 Parametrizing mask for the module TO ..... 3-438
OUTPUT_FILTER_TYPE Parametrizing mask for the module TS ..... 3-438
MD 5281 2-109 Parametrizing mask for the module TU ..... 3-438
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_BW Parametrizing mask for the module TUE ... 3-439
MD 5211 2-107 Parametrizing mask for the module TUS ... 3-439
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_BW_NUM Parametrizing the module TD .................... 3-436
MD 5212 2-107 Parametrizing the module TS .................... 3-436
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_DAMP Parametrizing the module TU .................... 3-437
MD 5203 2-107 Parametrizing the module TUE.................. 3-437
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_FREQ Parametrizing the module TUS.................. 3-437
MD 5202 2-107 paramNrCCV ............................................. 3-424
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_1_SUP_FREQ PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE
MD 5210 2-107 MD 35590 2-225
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_BW paramSetNo ................................... 3-324; 3-387
MD 5214 2-107 parDataTD ................................................. 3-436
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_BW_NUM parDataTO ................................................. 3-436
MD 5215 2-108 parDataToolIdentTD .................................. 3-436
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_DAMP parDataTS ................................................. 3-436
MD 5205 2-107 parDataTU ................................................. 3-437
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_FREQ parDataTUE............................................... 3-437
MD 5204 2-107 parDataTUS............................................... 3-437
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FIL_2_SUP_FREQ Parking axis .................................... 3-321; 3-384
MD 5213 2-107 parMasksTD .............................................. 3-437
OUTPUT_VCTRL_FILTER_CONFIG parMasksTO .............................................. 3-438
MD 5201 2-107 parMasksTS............................................... 3-438
OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_INVERSION parMasksTU .............................................. 3-438
MD 5476 2-112 parMasksTUE ............................................ 3-439
OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_LIMIT parMasksTUS ............................................ 3-439
MD 5475 2-111 PART_COUNTER
OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE MD 27880 2-203
MD 12000 2-158 PART_COUNTER_MCODE
OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED MD 27882 2-204
MD 12010 2-158 partDistance .............................................. 3-371
OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE Path feed ................................................... 2-132
MD 12030 2-159 Path for drive names in directory
OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN management ............................... 2-137; 2-138
MD 12100 2-159 Path from beginning of the block
OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA in the BCS .............................................. 3-341
MD 12050 2-159 Path override for synchronous actions ...... 3-341
OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED Path to the end of the block in the BCS ..... 3-341
MD 12070 2-159 Path veloc. in basic coordinate system ..... 3-345
OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE Path velocity in the WCS ........................... 3-345
MD 12020 2-158 PATH_IPO_IS_ON_TCP
OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE MD 20260 2-179
MD 12040 2-159 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM
OVR_REFERENCE_IS_MIN_FEED MD 32432 2-217
MD 12082 2-159 PBL_VERSION

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 1797 2-97 MD 10674 2-152

MD 5797 2-117 pOffn .......................................................... 3-349
pblVersion .......................................3-411; 3-413 POLE_ORI_MODE
pcmciaDataShotAct.................................... 3-468 MD 21108 2-184
pcmciaDataShotSum ................................. 3-468 POLE_PAIR_PITCH
pcmciaFfsLength ........................................ 3-468 MD 1170 2-74
pcmciaShotStatus ...................................... 3-468 Pos. offset of the synchr. spindle
pcmciaStartFfsOffset.................................. 3-468 desired value............................... 3-313; 3-376
pcmciaStartShotOffset ............................... 3-468 POS_AX_VELO
pEgBc......................................................... 3-349 MD 32060 2-215
PEMSD_MODE_ENABLE POS_DRIVE_SPEED_LIMIT
MD 1015 2-68 MD 5440 2-111
PERMANENT_FEED POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_FLOW
MD 12202 2-159 MD 5464 2-111
PERMANENT_ROT_AX_FEED POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_FLOW
MD 12204 2-159 MD 5485 2-112
PERMANENT_SPINDLE_FEED POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_S_VOLT
MD 12205 2-160 MD 5486 2-112
PERMISSIVE_FLASH_TAB POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_VOLTAGE
MD 11700 2-158 MD 5465 2-111
Physical spindle name ....................3-332; 3-403 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_FLOW
PILOT_OPERATION_PRESSURE MD 5480 2-112
MD 5102 2-105 POS_DUAL_GAIN_COMP_Z_VOLT
PIPE_INNER_DIAMETER_A_B MD 5481 2-112
MD 5143 2-106 POS_LIMIT_MINUS
PIPE_LENGTH_A MD 36100 2-226
MD 5141 2-106 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2
PIPE_LENGTH_B MD 36120 2-226
MD 5142 2-106 POS_LIMIT_PLUS
PISTON_POS_MIN_NAT_FREQ MD 36110 2-226
MD 5160 2-106 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2
PISTON_ROD_A_DIAMETER MD 36130 2-226
MD 5132 2-106 POS_TAB_SCALING_SYSTEM
PISTON_ROD_B_DIAMETER MD 10270 2-146
MD 5133 2-106 POSCTRL_CYCLE_DELAY
PISTON_STROKE MD 10062 2-143
MD 5134 2-106 POSCTRL_CYCLE_TIME
PISTON_ZERO MD 10061 2-143
MD 5040 2-104 POSCTRL_DAMPING
placeData ................................................... 3-431 MD 32950 2-220
placeType................................................... 3-433 POSCTRL_GAIN
Plaintexts instead of MD identifier .............. 2-130 MD 32200 2-216
Plane approach direction, tool to the POSCTRL_OUT_FILTER_ENABLE
tool probe................................................ 2-140 MD 32930 2-220
Plane assignment of protection zone 3-286; 3-294 POSCTRL_OUT_FILTER_TIME
Plane feedrate with collision monitoring ..... 2-139 MD 32940 2-220
PLC messages (DB2) ................................ 4-487 POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO ..... 3-459
PLC_CYCLE_TIME_AVERAGE POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
MD 10110 2-144 MD 10060 2-143
PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT POSCTRL_ZERO_ZONE
MD 10100 2-144 MD 32960 2-220
PLC_RUNNINGUP_TIMEOUT Position control cycle factor ....................... 3-459
MD 10120 2-144 position control gain factor .............. 3-323; 3-386
PLCIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_IN Position controller difference .......... 3-328; 3-391
MD 10395 2-148 Position of the coordinate system ... 2-132; 2-136
PLCIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_OUT Position of the cutting edge center point. .. 3-394
MD 10397 2-148 Position of tool base, desired value ........... 3-394
PLCIO_NUM_BYTES_IN Position offset from synchronous
MD 10394 2-148 actions......................................... 3-315; 3-378
PLCIO_NUM_BYTES_OUT Position offset referring to leading
MD 10396 2-148 axis/spindle ................................. 3-318; 3-381
PO_WITHOUT_POLY POSITION_LSB

Lists 08/99
I Index
MD 5714 2-116 MD 5620 2-114

POSITIONING_TIME PROG_SIGNAL_HYSTERESIS
MD 36020 2-226 MD 1624 2-91
Power section code of drive module .......... 3-458 MD 5624 2-114
POWER_DISABLE_DELAY PROG_SIGNAL_NR
MD 5404 2-110 MD 1621 2-91
POWER_ENABLE_DELAY MD 5621 2-114
MD 5532 2-113 PROG_SIGNAL_OFF_DELAY
POWER_FACTOR_COS_PHI MD 1626 2-92
MD 1129 2-72 MD 5626 2-114
POWER_FACTOR_COS_PHI_M2 PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY
MD 2129 2-99 MD 1625 2-91
POWER_LIMIT_1 MD 5625 2-114
MD 1235 2-78 PROG_SIGNAL_THRESHOLD
POWER_LIMIT_1_M2 MD 1623 2-91
MD 2235 2-100 MD 5623 2-114
POWER_LIMIT_2 progDistToGo ............................................ 3-394
MD 1236 2-78 progDLNumber .......................................... 3-349
POWER_LIMIT_2_M2 progDLNumberS........................................ 3-349
MD 2236 2-100 progDNumber ............................................ 3-350
POWER_LIMIT_GENERATOR progDuploNumber ..................................... 3-350
MD 1237 2-78; 2-79 progIndexAxPosNo......................... 3-325; 3-388
preContrFactTorque ........................3-324; 3-387 progName ................. 3-357; 3-360; 3-361; 3-363
preContrFactVel ..............................3-324; 3-387 progProtText .............................................. 3-279
preContrMode .................................3-324; 3-387 Program default directory .......................... 2-118
PREP_COM_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO Program execution from external active .... 3-348
MD 10160 2-145 Program name .......... 3-357; 3-360; 3-361; 3-363
PREP_DRIVE_TASK_CYCLE_RATIO Program status ............................... 3-342; 3-350
MD 10150 2-145 Program test .............................................. 3-353
PREPROCESSING_LEVEL PROGRAM_SETTINGS (für MMC 100)
MD 10700 2-152 MD 9460 2-128
PRESET..........................................3-324; 3-388 Programmed circular passes ..................... 3-357
Preset state .....................................3-324; 3-388 Programmed circular passes search ......... 3-357
PRESETActive ................................3-324; 3-388 Programmed position for block search ...... 3-398
PRESETVal.....................................3-324; 3-388 Programmed position, actual value ........... 3-393
PRESSURE_LSB Programmed position, desired value ......... 3-393
MD 5710 2-116 Programmed position, distance-to-go ........ 3-394
PRESSURE_SENS_A_OFFS Programmed position, REPOS .................. 3-394
MD 5551 2-113 Programmed SUG desired value .... 3-329; 3-400
PRESSURE_SENS_A_REF Programmed total offset ............................ 3-349
MD 5550 2-113 progREPOS ............................................... 3-394
PRESSURE_SENS_B_OFFS progStatus ................................................. 3-350
MD 5553 2-113 progTestActive........................................... 3-353
PRESSURE_SENS_B_REF progTNumber............................................. 3-350
MD 5552 2-113 progTNumberLong..................................... 3-350
PREVENT_SYNACT_LOCK progToolIdent ............................................ 3-350
MD 11500 2-157 protAreaCounter ........................................ 3-350
PRG_DEFAULT_DIR (für MMC100) Protection level for reading in data ............ 2-121
MD 9005 2-118 Protection level for RS 232 C (V24) interface
PROCESSOR_LOAD parameterization .................................... 2-121
MD 1735 2-97 Protection level PRESET ........................... 2-121
PROCESSOR_UTILIZATION Protection level standard cycles ................ 2-121
MD 5735 2-116 Protection level TEACH IN ........................ 2-121
PROCESSTIMER_MODE Protection level user cycles ....................... 2-121
MD 27860 2-203 Protection level, change tool monitoring limit
PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB values..................................................... 2-120
MD 10710 2-152 Protection level, change tool setup offsets 2-119
PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS Protection level, change tool sum offsets .. 2-119
MD 1622 2-91 Protection level, delete R parameter ......... 2-121
MD 5622 2-114 Protection level, enter part program .......... 2-120
PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS Protection level, extended overstore ......... 2-120
MD 1620 2-91 Protection level, influence program ........... 2-120

08/99 Lists
I Index
Protection level, read part program ............ 2-120 RADIUS_NAME

Protection level, read tool offset ................. 2-119 MD 10654 2-151
Protection level, read user variables .......... 2-120 Ramp-function generator rapid stop 3-320; 3-383
Protection level, select program ................. 2-120 rapFeedRateOvr ........................................ 3-351
Protection level, write fine .......................... 2-119 rapFeedRateOvrActive .............................. 3-353
Protection level, write R parameter ............ 2-121 Rapid traverse override ............................. 3-351
Protection level, write settable zero offset .. 2-120 RATED_OUTVAL
Protection level, write setting data ............. 2-120 MD 32250 2-216
Protection level, write tool adapter data ..... 2-120 RATED_VELO
Protection level, write tool wear data.......... 2-119 MD 32260 2-216
Protection level, write user variables .......... 2-120 readyActive ................................................ 3-337
Protection zone modification counter ......... 3-350 Real data ................................................... 3-297
protocolFilename........................................ 3-474 Real data (32 bits IEEE) from/to the PLC .. 3-296
pTcAng....................................................... 3-350 REDUCE_ARMATURE_INDUCTANCE
pTcDiff........................................................ 3-350 MD 1182 2-74
PULSE_SUPPRESSION_DELAY Reference point cam ...................... 3-325; 3-388
MD 1404 Referenced spindle number ...................... 3-424
2-83
PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE
MD 1403 2-83 MD 34120 2-222
PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED_M2 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS
MD 2403 2-101 MD 34010 2-221
PUNCH_DWELLTIME REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE
MD 42400 2-244 MD 34000 2-221
PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE REFP_CAM_SHIFT
MD 26016 2-203 MD 34092 2-222
PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING REFP_CYCLE_NR
MD 26014 2-203 MD 34110 2-222
punchActive................................................ 3-371 REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST
punchDelayActive ...................................... 3-371 MD 34030 2-221
punchDelayTime ........................................ 3-371 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST
Punching delay time ................................... 3-371 MD 34060 2-221
Punching or nibbling active ........................ 3-371 REFP_MOVE_DIST
Punching with delay active ......................... 3-371 MD 34080 2-221
PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR
MD 26012 2-203 MD 34090 2-222
PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN REFP_NC_START_LOCK
MD 26000 2-202 MD 20700 2-182
PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE
MD 26002 2-202 MD 34050 2-221
PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK REFP_SET_POS
MD 26010 2-203 MD 34100 2-222
punchNibActivation .................................... 3-279 REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER
PWM_FREQUENCY MD 34330 2-223
MD 1100 REFP_SYNC_ENCS
2-70
PWM_FREQUENCY_M2 MD 34102 2-222
MD 2100 REFP_VELO_POS
2-98
MD 34070 2-221
REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM
Q MD 34020 2-221
REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER
qecLrnIsOn......................................3-325; 3-388 MD 34040 2-221
Quadrant error compensation learning active 3-325; 3-388 refPtBusy ........................................ 3-325; 3-388
refPtCamNo .................................... 3-325; 3-388
refPtStatus ...................................... 3-325; 3-389
R Relief angle during release ........................ 2-137
Relief cutting time for cycles ...................... 2-132
Relief distance during deep-hole drilling .... 2-136
R 3-464
Relief distance during release ................... 2-136
R parameter (from SW 3.3) ........................ 3-464
REORG_LOG_LIMIT
R parameter (up to SW 3.2) ....................... 3-464
MD 27900 2-204
Radius approach circle for finishing contour
Representation of active tool ..................... 3-272
pockets ................................................... 2-137
Requested gear stage .................... 3-329; 3-400
Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03) 3-356

Lists 08/99
I Index
RESET_MODE_MASK Safe operation active ...................... 3-326; 3-389

MD 20110 2-175 Safe output signals of the axis ........ 3-327; 3-390
resetActive ................................................. 3-337 Safe output signals of the drive ...... 3-327; 3-390
Restricted cyclic variable service ............... 3-348 Safe output signals of the
Result drive part 2 .................................. 3-327; 3-390
number of tools found 3-439 Safe output signals part 2 ............... 3-327; 3-390
T-numbers of the tools found 3-439 SAFE_ACKN
resultNrOfTools .......................................... 3-439 MD 36997 2-235
resultToolNr................................................ 3-439 SAFE_ACKN_READ
RETRACT_AND_GENERATOR_MODE MD 1397 2-82
MD 1636 2-92 SAFE_ACKN_WRITE
RETRACT_SPEED MD 1396 2-82
MD 1639 2-92 SAFE_ACT_CHECKSUM
RETRACT_TIME MD 1398 2-83
MD 1638 2-92 MD 36998 2-235
Retraction distance .................................... 2-135 SAFE_ACT_STOP_OUTPUT
Return point on the contour for MD 36990 2-234
repositioning ........................................... 3-397 SAFE_ALARM_SUPPRESS_LEVEL
Return value for command MagCBCmd .... 3-425 MD 10094 2-144
Return variable for the command SAFE_CAM_MINUS_OUTPUT
MagCBCmd ............................................ 3-425 MD 36989 2-234
ROT_IS_MODULO SAFE_CAM_PLUS_OUTPUT
MD 30310 2-211 MD 36988 2-234
rotation ..................... 3-333; 3-373; 3-405; 3-407 SAFE_CAM_POS_MINUS
Rotation of a settable frame ............3-373; 3-405 MD 1337 2-81
Rotation of an active frame .............3-333; 3-407 MD 36937 2-231
Rotational feed ........................................... 2-132 SAFE_CAM_POS_PLUS
ROTOR_COLD_RESISTANCE MD 1336 2-81
MD 1138 2-73 MD 36936 2-230
ROTOR_COLD_RESISTANCE_M2 SAFE_CAM_TOL
MD 2138 2-99 MD 1340 2-81
ROTOR_FLUX_LSB MD 36940 2-231
MD 1712 2-95 SAFE_CONFIG_CHANGE_DATE
ROTOR_FLUX_LSB_M2 MD 36993 2-234
MD 2712 2-102 SAFE_DES_CHECKSUM
ROTOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE MD 1399 2-83
MD 1140 2-73 MD 36999 2-235
ROTOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE_M2 SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT
MD 2140 2-99 MD 36933 2-230
ROTOR_POS_LSB SAFE_DIAG_611D_RESULTLIST1
MD 1714 2-95 MD 1392 2-82
ROTOR_POS_LSB_M2 SAFE_DIAG_611D_RESULTLIST2
MD 2714 2-103 MD 1394 2-82
ROV rapid traverse override....................... 3-353 SAFE_DIAG_NC_RESULTLIST1
rpa .............................................................. 3-464 MD 1391 2-82
RUN_OVERRIDE_0 SAFE_DIAG_NC_RESULTLIST2
MD 12200 2-159 MD 1393 2-82
SAFE_ENC_CONFIG
MD 1316 2-80
S SAFE_ENC_GEAR_DENOM
MD 1321 2-80
S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET MD 36921 2-230
MD 22400 2-191 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_NUMERA
Sadr............................................................ 3-366 MD 1322 2-80
Safe actual position of axis .............3-326; 3-390 MD 36922 2-230
Safe actual position of the drive ......3-327; 3-390 SAFE_ENC_GEAR_PITCH
Safe input signals of the axis ..........3-326; 3-389 MD 1320 2-80
Safe input signals of the drive .........3-326; 3-390 MD 36920 2-229
Safe input signals of the drive part 2 3-326; 3-390 SAFE_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST
Safe input signals part 2..................3-326; 3-389 MD 1317 2-80
Safe limit of actual speed ................3-326; 3-389 MD 36917 2-229
Safe limit of desired speed ..............3-326; 3-389 SAFE_ENC_INPUT_NR

08/99 Lists
I Index
MD 36912 2-229 MD 1356 2-82

SAFE_ENC_IS_LINEAR MD 36956 2-232
MD 36916 2-229 SAFE_PULSE_ENABLE_OUTPUT
SAFE_ENC_MODULE_NR MD 36986 2-234
MD 36911 2-229 SAFE_PULSE_STATUS_INPUT
SAFE_ENC_POLARITY MD 36976 2-233
MD 36925 2-230 SAFE_REFP_POS_TOL
SAFE_ENC_RESOL MD 1344 2-81
MD 1318 2-80 MD 36944 2-231
MD 36918 2-229 SAFE_REFP_STATUS_OUTPUT
SAFE_ENC_SEGMENT_NR MD 36987 2-234
MD 36910 2-229 SAFE_SLIP_VELO_TOL
SAFE_ENC_TYPE MD 1349 2-81
MD 36915 2-229 MD 36949 2-231
SAFE_EXT_STOP_INPUT SAFE_SS_DISABLE_INPUT
MD 36977 2-233 MD 36971 2-233
SAFE_FIRMWARE_VERSION SAFE_SS_STATUS_OUTPUT
MD 1390 2-82 MD 36981 2-234
SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE SAFE_STANDSTILL_POS
MD 1301 2-80 MD 36995 2-235
MD 36901 2-228 SAFE_STANDSTILL_TOL
SAFE_GEAR_SELECT_INPUT MD 1330 2-80
MD 36974 2-233 MD 36930 2-230
SAFE_IN_HW_ASSIGN SAFE_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL
MD 10390 2-148 MD 1360 2-82
SAFE_IPO_STOP_GROUP MD 36960 2-232
MD 36964 2-232 SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS
SAFE_IS_ROT_AX MD 1395 2-82
MD 1302 2-80 SAFE_STOP_REQUEST_INPUT
MD 36902 2-229 MD 36975 2-233
SAFE_MODE_SWITCH_TIME SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_C
MD 1350 2-81 MD 1352 2-81
MD 36950 2-231 MD 36952 2-231
SAFE_MODULO_RANGE SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_D
MD 1305 2-80 MD 1353 2-81
MD 36905 2-229 MD 36953 2-232
SAFE_OUT_HW_ASSIGN SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_E
MD 10392 2-148 MD 1354 2-82
SAFE_OVR_INPUT MD 36954 2-232
MD 36978 2-233 SAFE_STOP_VELO_TOL
SAFE_PARK_ALARM_SUPPRESS MD 1348 2-81
MD 36965 2-232 MD 36948 2-231
SAFE_POS_LIMIT_MINUS SAFE_SVSS_DISABLE_INPUT
MD 1335 2-81 MD 36970 2-233
MD 36935 2-230 SAFE_SVSS_STATUS_OUTPUT
SAFE_POS_LIMIT_PLUS MD 36980 2-233
MD 1334 2-81 SAFE_VELO_LIMIT
MD 36934 2-230 MD 1331 2-80
SAFE_POS_SELECT_INPUT MD 36931 2-230
MD 36973 2-233 SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR
SAFE_POS_STOP_MODE MD 1332 2-81
MD 1362 2-82 MD 36932 2-230
MD 36962 2-232 SAFE_VELO_SELECT_INPUT
SAFE_POS_TOL MD 36972 2-233
MD 1342 2-81 SAFE_VELO_STATUS_OUTPUT
MD 36942 2-231 MD 36982 2-234
SAFE_PREV_CONFIG SAFE_VELO_STOP_MODE
MD 36994 2-234 MD 1361 2-82
SAFE_PULSE_DIS_CHECK_TIME MD 36961 2-232
MD 1357 2-82 SAFE_VELO_STOP_REACTION
MD 36957 2-232 MD 1363 2-82
SAFE_PULSE_DISABLE_DELAY MD 36963 2-232

Lists 08/99
I Index
SAFE_VELO_SWITCH_DELAY MD 10250 2-146

MD 1351 2-81 scalingSystemCounter ............................... 3-303
MD 36951 2-231 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL
SAFE_VELO_X MD 42500 2-245
MD 1346 2-81 SD_MAX_PATH_JERK
MD 36946 2-231 MD 42510 2-245
SAFE_VELO_X_STATUS_OUTPUT Search direction.............................. 3-361; 3-363
MD 36985 2-234 Search pointer ..................... 3-360; 3-361; 3-364
safeActPosDiff.................................3-325; 3-389 Search string .................................. 3-361; 3-364
safeActVeloDiff................................3-326; 3-389 Search type .................................... 3-361; 3-364
safeActVeloLimit .............................3-326; 3-389 SEARCH_RUN_MODE
safeDesVeloLimit ............................3-326; 3-389 MD 11450 2-157
safeExtInpValNckBit................................... 3-301 searchString ................................... 3-361; 3-364
safeExtInpValNckWord .............................. 3-301 searchType ..................................... 3-361; 3-364
safeExtInpValPlcBit .................................... 3-301 seekOffset ........................... 3-360; 3-361; 3-364
safeExtInpValPlcWord ............................... 3-301 SEMA data accessible ............................... 3-303
safeExtOutpValNckBit ................................ 3-301 semaDataAvailable.................................... 3-303
safeExtOutpValNckWord ........................... 3-301 SERIAL_NO_ENCODER
safeExtOutpValPlcBit ................................. 3-301 MD 1025 2-69
safeExtOutpValPlcWord............................. 3-302 SERIAL_NO_ENCODER_DM
safeFctEnable .................................3-326; 3-389 MD 1038 2-69
safeInputSig ....................................3-326; 3-389 SERIES_INDUCTANCE
safeInputSig2 ..................................3-326; 3-389 MD 1119 2-72
safeInputSigDrive ............................3-326; 3-390 SERIES_INDUCTANCE_M2
safeInputSigDrive2 ..........................3-326; 3-390 MD 2119 2-98
safeIntInpValNckBit .................................... 3-302 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME
safeIntInpValNckWord ............................... 3-302 MD 36620 2-228
safeIntInpValPlcBit ..................................... 3-302 SERVO_FIFO_SIZE
safeIntInpValPlcWord ................................ 3-302 MD 10087 2-144
safeIntOutpValNckBit ................................. 3-302 Set of blocks from the current operation .... 3-356
safeIntOutpValNckWord ............................ 3-302 SETINT_ASSIGN_FASTIN
safeIntOutpValPlcBit .................................. 3-302 MD 21210 2-185
safeIntOutpValPlcWord .............................. 3-302 Setpoint assignment .................................. 3-460
safeMarkerNck ........................................... 3-303 Setpoint of axis-specific feedrate, .............. 3-318
safeMarkerPlc ............................................ 3-303 Settable value for INC_VAR 3-312; 3-375; 3-395
safeMaxVeloDiff ..............................3-326; 3-390 Settings for NCK tool management ........... 3-270
safeMeasPos ..................................3-326; 3-390 Set-up mode ................................... 3-322; 3-385
safeMeasPosDrive ..........................3-327; 3-390 Shift behavior............................................. 2-118
safeOutputSig .................................3-327; 3-390 Signals from and to handheld unit ............. 4-484
safeOutputSig2 ...............................3-327; 3-390 Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)........ 4-527
safeOutputSigDrive .........................3-327; 3-390 Signals to/from NCK channel (DB 21 -28) . 4-510
safeOutputSigDrive2 .......................3-327; 3-390 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT
safeStopFDiagnosis ........................3-411; 3-413 MD 30350 2-212
safeTimerNck ............................................. 3-303 Simulated lead value - position ....... 3-314; 3-377
SAFETY_CYCLE_TIME Simulated leading value velocity .... 3-314; 3-377
MD 1300 2-80 Simulation actual value updating rate ........ 2-131
SAFETY_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO Simulation default value display area ........ 2-131
MD 10090 2-144 Simulation default value display range ...... 2-136
scaleFact Simulation default value X .............. 2-131; 2-136
........ 3-333; 3-334; 3-336; 3-373; 3-405; 3-407 Simulation default value Z .............. 2-131; 2-136
Scaling factor of a settable frame ........................ Simulation maximum display area ............. 2-131
.............................. 3-334; 3-336; 3-373; 3-405 Simulation maximum display range ........... 2-136
Scaling factor of an active frame .....3-333; 3-407 Simulation maximum display X ....... 2-131; 2-136
SCALING_FACTOR_G70_G71 Simulation maximum display Z ....... 2-131; 2-136
MD 31200 2-214 Single block ............................................... 3-354
SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF Single block mode ..................................... 3-354
MD 10230 2-146 Single block read in quasi-stop state ......... 3-358
SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC singleBlock ................................................ 3-358
MD 10240 2-146 singleBlockActive....................................... 3-354
SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK singleBlockType ........................................ 3-354
MD 10220 2-146 Size downwards in half locations ............... 3-418
SCALING_VALUE_INCH Size of NCK alarm buffer ........................... 3-270

08/99 Lists
I Index
Size to the left in half locations ................... 3-418 SPEED_FILTER_1_BANDWIDTH

Size to the right in half locations ................ 3-418 MD 1515 2-88
Size upwards in half locations .................... 3-418 MD 5515 2-113
skip............................................................. 3-475 SPEED_FILTER_1_BS_FREQ
Skip block /0 ............................................... 3-354 MD 1520 2-89
Skip block /1 ............................................... 3-354 MD 5520 2-113
Skip block /2 ............................................... 3-354 SPEED_FILTER_1_BW_NUMERATOR
Skip block /3 ............................................... 3-354 MD 1516 2-89
Skip block /4 ............................................... 3-354 MD 5516 2-113
Skip block /5 ............................................... 3-354 SPEED_FILTER_1_DAMPING
Skip block /6 ............................................... 3-355 MD 1507 2-88
Skip block /7 ............................................... 3-355 MD 5507 2-112
Skip single block2 (SBL2) .......................... 2-121 SPEED_FILTER_1_FREQUENCY
skipLevel0Active ........................................ 3-354 MD 1506 2-88
skipLevel2Active ........................................ 3-354 SPEED_FILTER_1_SUPPR_FREQ
skipLevel5Active ........................................ 3-354 SPEED_FILTER_1_TIME
skipLevel6Active ........................................ 3-355 MD 1502 2-87; 2-88
SLASH_MASK SPEED_FILTER_2_BANDWIDTH
MD 10706 2-152 MD 1518 2-89
SMOOTH_RUN_DIAGNOSIS SPEED_FILTER_2_BS_FREQ
MD 1724 2-96 MD 1521 2-89
SMOOTH_RUN_TOL SPEED_FILTER_2_BW_NUMERATOR
MD 1615 2-91 MD 1519 2-89
Smoothing the desired value of the SPEED_FILTER_2_DAMPING
rotary speed.................................3-322; 3-385 MD 1509 2-88
SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR SPEED_FILTER_2_FREQUENCY
MD 32433 2-217 MD 1508 2-88
Software end position, negative SPEED_FILTER_2_SUPPR_FREQ
direction .......................................3-316; 3-379 MD 1517 2-89
Software end position, positive SPEED_FILTER_2_TIME
direction .......................................3-316; 3-379 MD 1503 2-88
Source location number ............................. 3-346 SPEED_FILTER_TYPE
Source magazine ....................................... 3-346 MD 1501 2-87
Source magazine number .......................... 3-346 MD 5501 2-112
Source of the lead value .................3-314; 3-377 SPEED_LIMIT
SPDCTRL_INTEGR_TIME_1_AM MD 1147 2-74
MD 1453 2-87 SPEED_LIMIT_M2
SPDCTRL_INTEGR_TIME_1_AM_M2 MD 2147 2-100
MD 2453 2-102 SPEED_LSB
spec......................................3-327; 3-390; 3-399 MD 1711 2-95
Specification of the deviation of the largest MD 5711 2-116
possible cutter radius.............................. 2-136 SPEED_LSB_M2
Specification of the deviation of the smallest MD 2711 2-102
possible cutter radius.............................. 2-136 SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN
Speed setpoint ........................................... 3-318 MD 1418 2-85; 2-86
Speed, setpoint .......................................... 3-412 SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN_M2
SPEED_CRTL_DISABLE_STOPTIME MD 2418 2-102
MD 5402 2-110 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X
SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY MD 1417 2-85
MD 1427 2-86 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X_M2
SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL MD 2417 2-102
MD 1426 2-86 SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE
SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL_M2 MD 1413 2-85
MD 2426 2-102 MD 5413 2-110
SPEED_FFW_DELAY SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_ENABLE_M2
MD 1425 2-86 MD 2413 2-102
SPEED_FFW_FILTER_TIME SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1
MD 1424 2-86 MD 1411 2-84

Lists 08/99
I Index
SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_1_M2 SPEEDCTRL_TYPE
MD 2411 2-101 MD 1406 2-83
SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2 speedLimit ...................................... 3-330; 3-401
MD 1412 2-84; 2-85 speedOvr ........................................ 3-330; 3-401
SPEEDCTRL_ADAPT_SPEED_2_M2 SPF_END_TO_VDI
MD 2412 2-101 MD 20800 2-182
SPEEDCTRL_CYCLE_TIME SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD 1001 2-67 MD 35040 2-223
MD 5001 2-104 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB
SPEEDCTRL_DIFF_TIME MD 42800 2-245
MD 5432 2-110 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE
SPEEDCTRL_DIFF_TIME_A MD 20092 2-174
MD 5431 2-110 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX
SPEEDCTRL_DIFF_TIME_B MD 35000 2-223
MD 5433 2-111 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN MD 20090 2-174
MD 5407 2-110 SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1 MD 35030 2-223
MD 1407 2-84 SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1_AM MD 35020 2-223
MD 1451 2-87 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1_AM_M2 MD 35150 2-224
MD 2451 2-102 SPIND_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1_M2 MD 9010 2-118
MD 2407 2-101 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2 MD 35160 2-224
MD 1408 2-84 SPIND_FUNC_RESET_MODE
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_2_M2 MD 35032 2-223
MD 2408 2-101 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26.......................... 3-463
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_A SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26
MD 5406 2-110 MD 43220 2-247
SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_B SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS ........................ 3-463
MD 5408 2-110 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_FEEDBK MD 43230 2-247
MD 1421 2-86 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 ........................... 3-463
MD 5421 2-110 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME MD 43210 2-246
MD 5409 2-110 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 MD 35500 2-225
MD 1409 2-84 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1_M2 MD 35410 2-225
MD 2409 2-101 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2 MD 35400 2-225
MD 1410 2-84 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR
SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_2_M2 MD 35430 2-225
MD 2410 2-101 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW
SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_THRESHOLD MD 35450 2-225
MD 1606 2-90 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW
MD 5606 2-114 MD 35440 2-225
SPEEDCTRL_LIMIT_TIME SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO
MD 1605 2-90 MD 35300 2-225
MD 5605 2-113 SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR
SPEEDCTRL_PT1_TIME MD 35350 2-225
MD 5430 2-110 SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR
SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DAMPING MD 20094 2-175
MD 1415 2-85 SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START
MD 5415 2-110 MD 35510 2-225
SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_DELAY SPIND_VELO_LIMIT
MD 1416 2-85 MD 35100 2-224
SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ Spindle mode.................................. 3-330; 3-401
MD 1414 2-85 Spindle name.................................. 3-330; 3-401
MD 5414 2-110 Spindle override.............................. 3-330; 3-401

08/99 Lists
I Index
Spindle position ...............................3-329; 3-400 STICTION_COMP_THRESHOLD

Spindle speed limitation ............................. 3-463 MD 5233 2-108
Spindle speed, actual value ............3-329; 3-400 STICTION_FORCE_NEG
Spindle speed, desired value ..........3-329; 3-400 MD 5235 2-108
Spindle state ...................................3-331; 3-402 STICTION_FORCE_POS
Spindle type ....................................3-330; 3-401 MD 5234 2-108
spindleType .....................................3-330; 3-401 STICTION_SPEED_THRESHOLD
spinNoDress............................................... 3-424 MD 5232 2-108
SPLINE_FEED_PRECISION STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE
MD 20262 2-179 MD 32640 2-219
STALL_TORQUE_REDUCTION STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE
MD 1145 2-73 MD 42480 2-244
STALL_TORQUE_REDUCTION_M2 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE
MD 2145 2-100 MD 36000 2-226
STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR
MD 36040 2-226 MD 36012 2-226
STANDSTILL_POS_TOL STOP_LIMIT_FINE
MD 36030 2-226 MD 36010 2-226
STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL stopCond ................................................... 3-351
MD 36060 2-226 stopCondPar.............................................. 3-351
Start offset FFS .......................................... 3-468 Store setup movements as absolute ......... 2-132
Start offset of curr. PCMCIA access........... 3-468 Store setup movements automatically ....... 2-132
START_AC_FIFO Store start position as absolute ................. 2-132
MD 28262 2-207 Stored axial dist.-to-go in WCS after
START_MODE_MASK DELDTG................................................. 3-396
MD 20112 2-175 Stored distance-to-go of the path
Starting angle for thread............................. 3-462 in the WCS ............................................. 3-339
STARTUP_ASSISTANCE Strategy wear group .................................. 3-426
MD 1017 2-68 STROKE_CHECK_INSIDE
STAT_NAME MD 22900 2-193
MD 10670 2-152 strokeNr ..................................................... 3-372
State after travelling to fixed stop ....3-323; 3-386 Strokes per minute .................................... 3-371
State of spindle rotation ..................3-331; 3-402 STS_CONFIG
State of the binary inputs ................3-411; 3-413 MD 1003 2-67
State of the DC link voltage.............3-321; 3-384 MD 5003 2-104
State of the event type ............................... 3-474 Subroutine call counter, desired value ...... 3-359
State of the function generator ........3-322; 3-386 subSpec............................... 3-327; 3-391; 3-399
State of the magazine ................................ 3-429 Subspecification ............................. 3-327; 3-391
State of the probing function ...........3-323; 3-387 Subspecification for indexing axis.............. 3-399
State of trace channel 1 ..................3-327; 3-391 subType ..................................................... 3-394
State of trace channel 2 ..................3-328; 3-391 SUG programming active ............... 3-330; 3-401
State of trace channel 3 ..................3-328; 3-391 Sum of compensation values ......... 3-318; 3-381
State of trace channel 4 ..................3-328; 3-391 Sum of current gross runtime .................... 3-467
State of trace protocolling .......................... 3-304 Sum of current net runtime ........................ 3-467
State var. PI Service auto. set-up of Sum of maximum gross runtime ................ 3-467
asyn. motor ..................................3-317; 3-380 Sum of maximum net runtime .................... 3-467
STATOR_COLD_RESISTANCE Sum of minimum gross runtime ................. 3-468
MD 1137 2-73 Sum of minimum net runtimes ................... 3-468
STATOR_COLD_RESISTANCE_M2 Sum of the compensation values for
MD 2137 2-99 encoder 1 .................................... 3-322; 3-385
STATOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE Sum of the compensation values for
MD 1139 2-73 encoder 2 .................................... 3-322; 3-385
STATOR_LEAKAGE_REACTANCE_M2 SUMCORR_DEFAULT
MD 2139 2-99 MD 20272 2-179
status............. 3-311; 3-331; 3-375; 3-394; 3-402 SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE
Status access to PCMCIA card .................. 3-468 MD 20132 2-176
Status of axis container .............................. 3-339 Supplement to stopCond ........................... 3-351
Status of ForceControl function .......3-323; 3-386 suppProgFunc ........................................... 3-352
Status slave axis with lead value SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK
coupling .......................................3-316; 3-379 MD 11410 2-157
STEP_RESOL SUPPRESS_SCREEN_REFRESH
MD 31400 2-214 MD 10131 2-145

Lists 08/99
I Index
Suppression of language commands ......... 3-352 SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME....................... 3-459

Sval ............................................................ 3-366 SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 MD 10050 2-143
MD 10470 2-149 SYSCLOCK_SAMPL_TIME_RATIO
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_2 MD 10080 2-143
MD 10471 2-149 sysTimeBCD.............................................. 3-303
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_3
MD 10472 2-149; 2-150
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_4 T
MD 10473 2-150
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB T number ................................................... 3-347
MD 10450 2-149 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME MD 10717 2-153
MD 10460 2-149 TABULATOR_SIZE (für MMC 100)
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1 MD 9007 2-118
MD 41500 2-239 Tadr ........................................................... 3-366
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_2 TANG_OFFSET
MD 41502 2-240 MD 37402 2-237
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_3 Target location number .............................. 3-346
MD 41504 2-240 Target magazine number................ 3-346; 3-347
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_4 TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG
MD 41506 2-240; 2-241 MD 42444 2-244
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1 tcCarr1 ....................................................... 3-447
MD 41520 2-241 tcCarr10 ..................................................... 3-447
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2 tcCarr11 ..................................................... 3-447
MD 41522 2-241 tcCarr12 ..................................................... 3-447
MD 41524 2-241; 2-242 tcCarr14 ..................................................... 3-447
MD 41526 2-242 tcCarr16 ..................................................... 3-447
SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME tcCarr17 ..................................................... 3-448
MD 10461 2-149 tcCarr18 ..................................................... 3-448
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1 tcCarr19 ..................................................... 3-448
MD 41501 2-239 tcCarr2 ....................................................... 3-448
MD 41503 2-240 tcCarr21 ..................................................... 3-448
MD 41505 2-240 tcCarr23 ..................................................... 3-448
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_4 tcCarr3 ....................................................... 3-448
MD 41507 2-241 tcCarr4 ....................................................... 3-449
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1 tcCarr5 ....................................................... 3-449
MD 41521 2-241 tcCarr6 ....................................................... 3-449
MD 41523 2-241 tcCarr8 ....................................................... 3-449
MD 41525 2-242 Technical exponent representation in steps of
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_4 three ....................................................... 2-119
MD 41527 2-242 TECHNOLOGY
SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK MD 9020 2-119
MD 10480 2-150 TECHNOLOGY_MODE
SWITCH_SPD_OPEN_LOOP_AM MD 27800 2-203
MD 1466 2-87 TEMP_COMP_ABS_VALUE
SWITCH_SPD_OPEN_LOOP_AM_M2 MD 43900 2-248
MD 2466 2-102 TEMP_COMP_REF_POSITION
SWITCH_SPEED_MSD_AM MD 43920 2-249
MD 1465 2-87 TEMP_COMP_SLOPE
SWITCH_SPEED_MSD_AM_M2 MD 43910 2-249
MD 2465 2-102 TEMP_COMP_TYPE
SWITCH_TO_AREA (für OP 30) MD 32750 2-219
MD 9016 2-119 TERMINAL_STATE
Switchover to machining level MD 1700 2-93
(G17, G18, G19) ..................................... 2-137 MD 5700 2-115

08/99 Lists
I Index
terminalState ...................................3-411; 3-413 Tool base position setpoint ........................ 3-311

Test flags for internal diagnostics ............... 2-130 Tool base REPOS ............... 3-312; 3-375; 3-395
Test flags for internal ManualTurn diagnosis 2-133 Tool identifier ....................... 3-417; 3-434; 3-445
TEST_ROTORPOS_IDENT Tool information for MMC .......................... 3-417
MD 1736 2-97 Tool preselection active ............................. 2-137
Text for logging buffer ................................ 3-279 Tool probe diameter for length
textIndex...............................3-306; 3-308; 3-310 measurement ......................................... 2-140
T-function value.......................................... 3-367 Tool probe diameter for radius
THREAD_RAMP_DISP measurement ......................................... 2-140
MD 42010 2-243 Tool probe type.......................................... 2-140
THREAD_START_ANGLE......................... 3-462 Tool state ................................................... 3-419
THREAD_START_ANGLE TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE
MD 42000 2-243 MD 20126 2-176
Time ........................................................... 3-303 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Time base .................................................. 3-475 MD 22562 2-192
Time from begin. of block in interpolation TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
cycles...................................................... 3-343 MD 22560 2-192; 2-256
Time from the beginning of the block in TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
seconds .................................................. 3-343 MD 22550 2-192; 2-256
Time stamp ..........................3-306; 3-308; 3-310 TOOL_CHANGE_TIME
Time variable in seconds ........................... 3-343 MD 10190 2-145
TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_COM_TASK TOOL_CORR_MODE_G43G44
MD 10130 2-145 MD 20380 2-180
TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_DRIVE_TASK TOOL_CORR_MOVE_MODE
MD 10140 2-145 MD 20382 2-180
timeBCD...............................3-306; 3-308; 3-310 TOOL_CORR_MULTIPLE_AXES
timePeriod .................................................. 3-475 MD 20384 2-180
TM_DEFAULT_DELETE_TOOL (für MMC 100) TOOL_GRIND_AUTO_TMON
MD 9419 2-127 MD 20350 2-180
TM_DEFAULT_TOOLPLACESPEC (für MMC TOOL_LENGTH_CONST
100) MD 42940 2-246
MD 9415 2-127 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE
TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSIZE (für MMC 100) MD 42950 2-246
MD 9412 2-127 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSTATE (für MMC 100) MD 20310 2-179; 2-255
MD 9417 2-127 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
TM_DEFAULT_TOOLTYPE (für MMC 100) MD 20124 2-176
MD 9416 2-127 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG
TM_KIND_OF_TOOLMANAGAMENT MD 42442 2-244
MD 9414 2-127 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK
TM_LOAD_PLACE (für MMC 100, OP 030) MD 20360 2-180
MD 9410 2-126 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
TM_NUM_MAG (für MMC 100, OP 030) MD 20121 2-176
MD 9411 2-127 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS1 (für MMC 100)
TM_TOOL_NEW (für OP 30) MD 9400 2-126
TM_UNLOAD_AND_DELETE (für OP 30) MD 9401 2-126
T-number.................................................... 3-435 MD 9402 2-126
TnumWZV .................................................. 3-434 TOOL_RESET_NAME
TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER MD 20122 2-176
MD 20184 2-178 TOOL_RESET_VALUE
TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE MD 20120 2-176
MD 22530 2-192 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR MD 20320 2-179; 2-255
MD 20180 2-177 toolBaseDistToGo................ 3-312; 3-375; 3-394
TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET toolBaseREPOS .................. 3-312; 3-375; 3-395
MD 20182 2-178 toolChangeMfunc....................................... 3-275
toNo............................................................ 3-280 toolCounter ................................................ 3-352
Tool adapter number .................................. 3-345 toolCounterC ............................................. 3-352
Tool base distance-to-go......3-312; 3-375; 3-394 toolCounterM ............................................. 3-352
Tool base position ................3-311; 3-374; 3-393 toolEdgeCenterDistToGo........................... 3-395

Lists 08/99
I Index
toolEdgeCenterREPOS.............................. 3-395 TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X_DELAY

toolIdent ...............................3-417; 3-434; 3-445 MD 1429 2-87
toolInfo ....................................................... 3-417 total DRAM in bytes ................................... 3-304
toolInMag .............................3-417; 3-435; 3-445 Total length in bytes PCMCIA card............ 3-468
toolInPlace ...........................3-418; 3-435; 3-445 Total number of real magazine locations ... 3-425
toolMon ...................................................... 3-418 Total number total offsets in NCK .............. 3-271
toolNo..............................................3-435; 3-446 Total user memory in bytes ....................... 3-303
toolplace_spec ........................................... 3-418 Total value of overlaid motion ......... 3-315; 3-378
toolSearch .................................................. 3-418 totalDirectorys............................................ 3-303
toolsize_down ............................................ 3-418 totalFiles .................................................... 3-303
toolsize_left ................................................ 3-418 totalMem .................................................... 3-303
toolsize_right .............................................. 3-418 totalMemDram ........................................... 3-304
toolsize_upper ............................................ 3-418 totalMemFfs ............................................... 3-304
toolState ..................................................... 3-419 totalProtokolFiles ....................................... 3-304
torqLimit ..........................................3-327; 3-391 Touch probe has switched ......................... 3-341
Torque limitation value ....................3-327; 3-391 TPreSelAdr ................................................ 3-366
TORQUE_CURRENT_RATIO TPreSelVal................................................. 3-366
MD 1113 2-71 TRAANG_ANGLE_1
TORQUE_FILTER_FREQUENCY MD 24700 2-200
MD 1252 2-79; 2-80 TRAANG_ANGLE_2
TORQUE_LIMIT_1 MD 24750 2-200
MD 1230 2-78 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1
TORQUE_LIMIT_1_M2 MD 24710 2-200
MD 2230 2-100 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2
TORQUE_LIMIT_2 MD 24760 2-200
MD 1231 2-78 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1
TORQUE_LIMIT_2_M2 MD 24721 2-200
MD 2231 2-100 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2
TORQUE_LIMIT_ADAPT_SERVO MD 24771 2-200
MD 1191 2-75 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1
TORQUE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP MD 24720 2-200
MD 1239 2-79 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2
TORQUE_LIMIT_FOR_SETUP_M2 MD 24770 2-200
MD 2239 2-101 TRACE (for MMC 102)
TORQUE_LIMIT_FROM_NC MD 9999 2-130
MD 1190 2-75 TRACE_COMPRESSOR_OUTPUT
TORQUE_LIMIT_FROM_NC_M2 MD 22800 2-193
MD 2190 2-100 TRACE_SCOPE_MASK
TORQUE_LIMIT_GENERATOR MD 22708 2-193
MD 1233 2-78 TRACE_SELECT
TORQUE_LIMIT_GENERATOR_M2 MD 11400 2-156
MD 2233 2-100 TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT
TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_HYST MD 22700 2-192
MD 1234 2-78 TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP
TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_HYST_M2 MD 22702 2-192
MD 2234 2-100 TRACE_STOPTRACE_EVENT
TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_SPEED MD 22704 2-193
MD 1232 2-78 TRACE_STOPTRACE_STEP
TORQUE_LIMIT_SWITCH_SPEED_M2 MD 22706 2-193
MD 2232 2-100 TRACE_VARIABLE_INDEX
TORQUE_LSB MD 22712 2-193
MD 1713 2-95 TRACE_VARIABLE_NAME
TORQUE_LSB_M2 MD 22710 2-193
MD 2713 2-103 traceProtocolActive.................................... 3-304
TORQUE_OFFSET traceState1 ..................................... 3-327; 3-391
MD 32460 2-217 traceState2 ..................................... 3-328; 3-391
TORQUE_SMOOTH_TIME_AM traceState3 ..................................... 3-328; 3-391
MD 1459 2-87 traceState4 ..................................... 3-328; 3-391
TORQUE_SMOOTH_TIME_AM_M2 trackErrContr .................................. 3-328; 3-391
MD 2459 2-102 trackErrDiff...................................... 3-328; 3-392
TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X TRACLG_CONTACT_LOWER_LIMIT
MD 1428 2-86 MD 21520 2-189

08/99 Lists
I Index
TRACLG_CONTACT_UPPER_LIMIT TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1
MD 21518 2-189 MD 24120 2-194
TRACLG_CTRLSPI_NR TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2
MD 21524 2-190 MD 24220 2-194
TRACLG_CTRLSPI_VERT_OFFSET TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3
MD 21502 2-189 MD 24320 2-195
TRACLG_G0_IS_SPECIAL TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_4
MD 21526 2-190 MD 24420 2-195
TRACLG_GRINDSPI_HOR_OFFSET TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5
MD 21501 2-188 MD 24434 2-195
TRACLG_GRINDSPI_NR TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6
MD 21522 2-190 MD 24444 2-196
TRACLG_GRINDSPI_VERT_OFFSET TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7
MD 21500 2-188 MD 24454 2-196
TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_8
MD 21510 2-189 MD 24464 2-196
TRACLG_HOR_DIR_SUPPORTAX_2 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
MD 21514 2-189 MD 20140 2-177
TRACLG_SUPPORT_HOR_OFFSET TRAFO_TYPE_1
MD 21506 2-189 MD 24100 2-194
TRACLG_SUPPORT_LEAD_ANGLE TRAFO_TYPE_2
MD 21516 2-189 MD 24200 2-194
TRACLG_SUPPORT_VERT_OFFSET TRAFO_TYPE_3
MD 21504 2-189 MD 24300 2-195
TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_1 TRAFO_TYPE_4
MD 21508 2-189 MD 24400 2-195
TRACLG_VERT_DIR_SUPPORTAX_2 TRAFO_TYPE_5
MD 21512 2-189 MD 24430 2-195
TRACON_CHAIN_1 TRAFO_TYPE_6
MD 24995 2-202 MD 24440 2-195
TRACON_CHAIN_2 TRAFO_TYPE_7
MD 24996 2-202 MD 24450 2-196
TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 TRAFO_TYPE_8
MD 24820 2-201 MD 24460 2-196
TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1
MD 24870 2-201 MD 24570 2-197
TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 TRAFO5_AXIS1_2
MD 24800 2-200 MD 24670 2-199
TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 TRAFO5_AXIS2_1
MD 24850 2-201 MD 24572 2-198
TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 TRAFO5_AXIS2_2
MD 24810 2-201 MD 24672 2-199
TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1
MD 24860 2-201 MD 24574 2-198
TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_2
MD 24110 2-194 MD 24674 2-199
TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24210 2-194 MD 24550 2-197
TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24310 2-195 MD 24650 2-199
TRAFO_AXES_IN_4 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1
MD 24410 2-195 MD 24560 2-197
TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2
MD 24432 2-195 MD 24660 2-199
TRAFO_AXES_IN_6 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1
MD 24442 2-196 MD 24530 2-197
TRAFO_AXES_IN_7 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2
MD 24452 2-196 MD 24630 2-198
TRAFO_AXES_IN_8 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1
MD 24462 2-196 MD 24564 2-197
TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2
MD 22534 2-192 MD 24664 2-199

Lists 08/99
I Index
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_1 TU_NAME
MD 24566 2-197 MD 10672 2-152
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_2 turnState ......................................... 3-331; 3-402
MD 24666 2-199 Tval............................................................ 3-367
TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 type...................................... 3-328; 3-392; 3-399
MD 24585 2-198 Type and state of the synchronous
TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 action .......................................... 3-367; 3-368
MD 24685 2-200 Type of actual value sensing ..................... 3-460
TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 Type of D-number programming................ 3-275
MD 24500 2-196 Type of setpoint output .............................. 3-460
TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 Type of the magazine ................................ 3-429
MD 24600 2-198 Type of tool monitoring .............................. 3-418
TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 Type of tool search .................................... 3-426
MD 24540 2-197 Type of tool search for replacement tools . 3-418
TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2 typeOfCuttingEdge .................................... 3-275
MD 24640 2-198 typStatus......................................... 3-367; 3-368
TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24510 2-196
TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 U
MD 24610 2-198
TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 UF_MODE_DELTA_FREQUENCY
MD 24520 2-197 MD 1662 2-93
TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 UF_MODE_ENABLE
MD 24620 2-198 MD 1014 2-68
TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 UF_MODE_FREQUENCY
MD 24562 2-197 MD 1660 2-93
TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_1
MD 24662 2-199 MD 1125 2-72
TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_1 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_1_M2
MD 24580 2-198 MD 2125 2-98
TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_2 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_2
MD 24680 2-199 MD 1126 2-72
transfActive ................................................ 3-352 UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_2_M2
Transfer signal :Screen is dark- to PLC ..... 2-119 MD 2126 2-98
Transformation active................................. 3-352 UF_MODE_RATIO
Transformed edge offset value .................. 3-457 MD 1661 2-93
Transformed location-dependent UF_VOLTAGE_AT_F0
setup offset ............................................. 3-451 MD 1127 2-72
Transformed location-dependent UF_VOLTAGE_AT_F0_M2
wear offset .............................................. 3-455 MD 2127 2-99
Translation of a settable Unit for service values of the drives 3-324; 3-387
frame .................... 3-334; 3-335; 3-373; 3-404 Unit of axial feedrate.................................. 3-398
Translation of an active frame .........3-333; 3-406 Unit of the axis-specific feedrate .... 3-318; 3-381
Translation of an external frame ................ 3-408 UNLOCK_EDIT_MODESWITCH
TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 MD 10780 2-153
MD 24920 2-201 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY
TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 MD 11210 2-155
MD 24970 2-202 Upper boundary of protection zone,
TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 applicate................................................. 3-292
MD 24911 2-201 Upper input limit for feedrate in mm/min .... 2-134
TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2 Upper input limit for feedrate in mm/rev .... 2-134
MD 24961 2-202 Upper input limit tool wear ......................... 2-134
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Upper limit nth polynominal for synchronous
MD 24900 2-201 action ..................................................... 3-341
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 Upper limit of protection zone, applicate ... 3-285
MD 24950 2-201 Used DRAM in bytes ................................. 3-304
TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Used memory in bytes ............................... 3-304
MD 24910 2-201 usedDirectorys........................................... 3-304
TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 usedFiles ................................................... 3-304
MD 24960 2-202 usedMem ................................................... 3-304
Traversing direction.................................... 3-348 usedMemDram .......................................... 3-304
trialRunActive ............................................. 3-355 usedMemFfs .............................................. 3-304

08/99 Lists
I Index
usedProtokolFiles....................................... 3-304 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR2 (für MMC

User data for monitoring a cutting edge ..... 3-442 100)
User unit table ............................................ 3-275 MD 9256 2-123
USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_1 (für USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR3 (für MMC
MMC102/103) 100)
MD 9232 2-122 MD 9257 2-123
USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_2 (für USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGNEXT (für MMC 100)
MMC102/103) MD 9263 2-123
MD 9235 2-122 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL (für MMC
USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_3 (für 100)
MMC102/103) MD 9259 2-123
MD 9238 2-122 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOLE (für
USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA MMC 100)
MD 9221 2-121 MD 9258 2-123
USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLIST (für MMC 100)
MD 9213 2-120 MD 9251 2-123
USER_CLASS_PRESET USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR1 (für MMC
MD 9220 2-121 100)
USER_CLASS_READ_BD (für MMC 100) MD 9265 2-124
MD 9230 2-121 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR2 (für MMC
USER_CLASS_READ_CST (für MMC 100) 100)
MD 9225 2-121 MD 9266 2-124
USER_CLASS_READ_CUS (für MMC 100) USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR3 (für MMC
MD 9226 2-121 100)
USER_CLASS_READ_DEF (für MMC 100) MD 9267 2-124
MD 9229 2-121 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLNEWTOOL (für MMC
USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD 100)
MD 9211 2-120 MD 9264 2-124
USER_CLASS_READ_IN (nur MMC100) USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD (für MMC
MD 9224 2-121 100)
USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM (für MMC MD 9252 2-123
100) USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLMOVE (für MMC
MD 9216 2-120 100)
USER_CLASS_READ_SYF (für MMC 100) MD 9254 2-123
MD 9228 2-121 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD (für
USER_CLASS_READ_TOA MMC 100)
MD 9200 2-119 MD 9253 2-123
USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE
MD 9218 2-120 MD 9203 2-119
USER_CLASS_SET_V24 (nur MMC100) USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD
MD 9223 2-121 MD 9212 2-120
USER_CLASS_SHOW_SBL2 (MMC100) USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP (für
MD 9227 2-121 MMC102/103)
USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN MD 9208 2-120
MD 9219 2-121 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT
USER_CLASS_TM_SKACTPLACE (für MMC MD 9214 2-120
100) USER_CLASS_WRITE_PROGRAM (für MMC
MD 9270 2-124 100)
USER_CLASS_TM_SKFINDPLACE (für MMC MD 9217 2-120
100) USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA
MD 9269 2-124 MD 9222 2-121
USER_CLASS_TM_SKLDTOOLDAT (für MMC USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_1 (für
100) MMC102/103)
MD 9271 2-124 MD 9231 2-122
USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGBUFFER (für MMC USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_2 (für
100) MMC102/103)
MD 9260 2-123 MD 9234 2-122
USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGFIND (für MMC 100) USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_3 (für
MD 9261 2-123 MMC102/103)
USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLISTPOS (für MMC MD 9237 2-122
100) USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA
MD 9262 2-123 MD 9215 2-120

Lists 08/99
I Index
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT V24_PG_PC_STOPBIT (für MMC 100)

MD 9209 2-120 MD 9328 2-126
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO (für V24_PG_PC_XOFF (für MMC 100)
MMC102/103) MD 9321 2-126
MD 9207 2-120 V24_PG_PC_XON (für MMC 100)
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC (für MD 9320 2-126
MMC102/103) V24_PRINTER_BAUD (für MMC 100)
MD 9205 2-119 MD 9315 2-125
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO V24_PRINTER_CONTROLS (für MMC 100)
MD 9201 2-119 MD 9313 2-125
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_NAME V24_PRINTER_DATABITS (für MMC 100)
MD 9240 2-122 MD 9316 2-125
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC (für V24_PRINTER_EOF (für MMC 100)
MMC102/103) MD 9312 2-125
MD 9204 2-119 V24_PRINTER_LINE (für MMC 100)
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS (für MD 9319 2-125
MMC102/103) V24_PRINTER_PARITY (für MMC 100)
MD 9206 2-120 MD 9317 2-125
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_TYPE V24_PRINTER_RTS (für MMC 100)
MD 9241 2-123 MD 9314 2-125
USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR V24_PRINTER_STOPBIT (für MMC 100)
MD 9202 2-119 MD 9318 2-125
USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA V24_PRINTER_XOFF (für MMC 100)
MD 9210 2-120 MD 9311 2-125
USER_DATA_FLOAT V24_PRINTER_XON (für MMC 100)
MD 14514 2-163 MD 9310 2-125
USER_DATA_HEX V24_USER_BAUD (für MMC 100)
MD 14512 2-163 MD 9305 2-124
USER_DATA_INT V24_USER_CONTROLS (für MMC 100)
MD 14510 2-163 MD 9303 2-124
USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM V24_USER_DATABITS (für MMC 100)
MD 14516 2-163 MD 9306 2-125
USER_END_WRITE_RPA_1 (für MMC102/103) V24_USER_EOF (für MMC 100)
MD 9233 2-122 MD 9302 2-124
USER_END_WRITE_RPA_2 (für MMC102/103) V24_USER_LINE (für MMC 100)
MD 9236 2-122 MD 9309 2-125
USER_END_WRITE_RPA_3 (für MMC102/103) V24_USER_PARITY (für MMC 100)
MD 9239 2-122 MD 9307 2-125
userData..........................................3-440; 3-442 V24_USER_RTS (für MMC 100)
User-defined cutting edge parameter ......... 3-422 MD 9304 2-124
User-defined tool parameters ..................... 3-421 V24_USER_STOPBIT (für MMC 100)
userPlaceData............................................ 3-441 MD 9308 2-125
userScale ................................................... 3-275 V24_USER_XOFF (für MMC 100)
Utilization.................................................... 3-413 MD 9301 2-124
V24_USER_XON (für MMC 100)
MD 9300 2-124
V vaEgSyncDiff ............................................. 3-352
Value of HW analog input .......................... 3-297
V24_PG_PC_BAUD (für MMC 100) Value of HW digital input ........................... 3-299
MD 9325 2-126 Value of HW digital output ......................... 3-299
V24_PG_PC_CONTROLS (für MMC 100) Value of the current D-number .................. 3-365
MD 9323 2-126 Value of the E-function .............................. 3-365
V24_PG_PC_DATABITS (für MMC 100) Value of the H-function .............................. 3-366
MD 9326 2-126 Value of the M-function .............................. 3-366
V24_PG_PC_EOF (für MMC 100) Value of the preselected T-function ........... 3-366
MD 9322 2-126 Value of the S-function. ............................. 3-366
V24_PG_PC_LINE (für MMC 100) VALVE_CODE
MD 9329 2-126 MD 5106 2-105
V24_PG_PC_PARITY (für MMC 100) VALVE_CONFIGURATION
MD 9327 2-126 MD 5113 2-105
V24_PG_PC_RTS (für MMC 100) VALVE_CYLINDER_CONNECTION
MD 9324 2-126 MD 5140 2-106

08/99 Lists
I Index
VALVE_DAMPING Working area limitation active

MD 5115 2-105 in the negative dir................................... 3-463
VALVE_DUAL_GAIN_FLOW Working area limitation active
MD 5110 2-105 in the positive dir .................................... 3-463
VALVE_DUAL_GAIN_VOLTAGE Working area limitation
MD 5111 2-105 in the negative direction ......................... 3-463
VALVE_ERROR_TIME Working area limitation
MD 5614 2-114 in the positive direction .......................... 3-463
VALVE_FLOW_FACTOR_A_B WORKING_PRESSURE
MD 5112 2-105 MD 5101 2-105
VALVE_NATURAL_FREQUENCY workPandProgName....................... 3-358; 3-360
MD 5114 2-105 Workpiece and program name ....... 3-358; 3-360
VALVE_NOMINAL_FLOW Workpiece name ...... 3-358; 3-360; 3-362; 3-364
MD 5107 2-105 Workpiece or tool-related
VALVE_NOMINAL_PRESSURE protection zone ........................... 3-287; 3-294
MD 5108 2-105 workPName .............. 3-358; 3-360; 3-362; 3-364
VALVE_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE workPNameLong ...... 3-358; 3-360; 3-362; 3-364
MD 5109 2-105 WPD_INI_MODE
Variable incremental value for JOG mode . 3-461 MD 11280 2-155
varIncrVal .............................3-312; 3-375; 3-395 Write protection for the first RPA range ..... 2-122
vaVactm ..........................................3-328; 3-392 Write protection for the second RPA range 2-122
VDI_UPDATE_IN_ONE_IPO_CYCLE Write protection for the third RPA range .... 2-122
MD 18000 2-163 WRITE_TOA_LIMIT_MASK
VELO_FFW_WEIGHT MD 9449 2-128
MD 32610 2-218
VERSION_INFO
MD 18040 2-163; 2-164 X
VOLTAGE_LSB
MD 1709 2-95 x component of offset vector l1 .................. 3-447
MD 5709 2-115 x component of offset vector l2 .................. 3-449
x component of offset vector l3 .................. 3-447
x component of offset vector l4 .................. 3-448
W x component of rotary axis v1 .................... 3-449
x component of rotary axis v2 .................... 3-447
WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE X component of tool in WCS ..................... 3-344
MD 20204 2-178 X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE
WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS MD 21110 2-184
MD 20202 2-178
WEAR_SIGN
MD 42930 2-246 Y
WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS
MD 42920 2-245 y component of offset vector l1 .................. 3-448
WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE y component of offset vector l2 .................. 3-449
MD 22910 2-193 y component of offset vector l3 .................. 3-447
Word data (16 bits) from/to the PLC .......... 3-296 y component of offset vector l4 .................. 3-448
WORKAREA_CHECK_TYPE y component of rotary axis v1 .................... 3-449
MD 30800 2-213 y component of rotary axis v2 .................... 3-447
WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS...................... 3-463 Y component of tool in WCS ..................... 3-344
WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS
MD 43430 2-247
WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS ........................ 3-463 Z
WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS
MD 43420 2-247
z component of offset vector l1 .................. 3-448
WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE................. 3-463
WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE
MD 43410 2-247
WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE ................... 3-463
z component of rotary axis v1 .................... 3-449
WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE
z component of rotary axis v2 .................... 3-447
MD 43400 2-247
Z component of tool in WCS ..................... 3-344
WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS
ZK1PO register image ............................... 3-412
MD 21020 2-182
ZK1RES register image ............................. 3-412

Suggestions
Siemens AG Corrections
For Publication/Manual:
A&D MC IS
P. O. Box 3180 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC/611D
D-91050 Erlangen
Federal Republic of Germany Manufacturer/Service Documentation
(Tel. 0180 / 538 - 8008 [

Hotline]
(Fax: +49 9131/98-1145)
email: motioncontro,.docu @.siemens.de
From Lists
Name:
Edition: 08.99
Company/Dept. Should you come across any printing errors
when reading this publication, please notify
Address: us on this sheet. Suggestions for
____________ improvements are also welcome.
Telephone: __________ /
Telefax: ________ /
Suggestions and/or corrections

840d Listmd

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

840d Listmd

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC/

User Documentation Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

Program. Guide Operator’s Guide Description of Description of Descr. of Functions Configuring

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Description of Description of Installation & Lists *) Description of Description of EMC Guide-

Electronic Documentation Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Lists of Machine and 2

Control Software version

Status codes in the "Remarks" column.

A .... New documentation.

Edition Order No. Remarks

This manual is included in the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)

© Siemens AG 1999. All Rights Reserved.

Order No. 6FC5 297-5AB70-0BP1 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft.

Notes for the reader The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

Trademarks IBM® is registered trademark of International Business Corporation.

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

1.1 CNC controls...............................................................................................................1-14

1.2 Positioning modules and controls ...............................................................................1-49

Machine and Setting Data .........................................................................................................2-57

2.1 Explanatory notes on the machine and setting data ...................................................2-59

2.2 Drive machine data .....................................................................................................2-66

2.3 Machine data for hydraulics module ...........................................................................2-104

2.4 Machine data for operator panel .................................................................................2-118

2.5 General machine data.................................................................................................2-141

2.6 Channel-specific machine data ...................................................................................2-173

2.7 Axis-specific machine data .........................................................................................2-209

2.8 Setting data .................................................................................................................2-239

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

2.8.2 Channel-specific setting data ...................................................................................2-243

2.9 Application-specific machine data ..............................................................................2-250

3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................3-260

3.2 System data ................................................................................................................3-268

3.3 State data of system ...................................................................................................3-296

3.4 State data of channel ..................................................................................................3-338

3.5 Axis status data...........................................................................................................3-374

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

3.5.7 Area C, Mod. FU: User frames.................................................................................3-404

3.6 Drive status data .........................................................................................................3-409

3.7 Tool and magazine data .............................................................................................3-414

3.8 Machine and setting data ............................................................................................3-458

3.9 Parameters .................................................................................................................3-464

3.10 Diagnostic data .........................................................................................................3-467

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

Interface Signals ........................................................................................................................4-477

4.1 Data modules ..............................................................................................................4-478

4.2 Interface signals ..........................................................................................................4-480

PLC Blocks .................................................................................................................................5-551

5.1 Overview of organization blocks .................................................................................5-552

5.2 Overview of function blocks ........................................................................................5-553

5.3 Assignment of data blocks ..........................................................................................5-555

5.4 Assigned timers ..........................................................................................................5-556

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

1.2 Positioning modules and controls ...............................................................................1-49

© Siemens AG 1999 All Rights Reserved

1.1 CNC controls

Legend: F Standard f Option * not possible